Amadeus Selling Platform Connect

Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Amadeus Selling
Platform Connect
User Guide
amadeus.com
YOUR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO THESE TERMS
Use of this documentation
You are authorised to view, copy, or print the documentation for your personal use only.
The content included in the documentation may not be sold, transferred, redistributed, retransmitted, published or commercially exploited in any
way without the express advance written permission of Amadeus.
This documentation is provided on an “AS IS” basis and Amadeus makes no representations or warranties regarding the content of the
documentation, and hereby disclaims all warranties, including without limitations, those of accuracy, non-infringement, condition, merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. Also, Amadeus does not provide any maintenance or support in using this documentation.
Data ownership
This documentation and all related Intellectual Property rights are the exclusive property of Amadeus. A limited licence is hereby granted to you to
use the documentation and the related Intellectual Property rights for the sole purpose indicated above. You acknowledge that the documentation
contains valuable information which constitutes Intellectual Property of Amadeus and that if you use, modify or distribute the documentation for
unauthorised purposes, you will be liable to Amadeus for any damages it may suffer.
The examples in this document are for illustrative purposes only. The naming of particular airlines, hotels, car rental agencies, or other companies
in these examples does not constitute an endorsement, express or implied, of Amadeus by these companies or of these companies by Amadeus.
Product offers, prices, terms and other information provided herein are subject to change without notice. You should determine the appropriateness
of any product for your intended purpose and needs.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s.
All Rights Reserved.
Edition 13.0
Job Number 4292
For Amadeus Selling Platform Connect 20.3
FE 0714
Published by:
Amadeus Learning Services
email: [email protected]
June 2017
Table of Contents
Before You Start ..................................................................................... 1
What's New in This Document.............................................................. 3
Chapter 1
Using Selling Platform Connect ............................................................ 5
Getting Started With Selling Platform Connect ..................................... 5
Video: How to Start With Amadeus Selling Platform Connect ...................... 5
Managing User Access ........................................................................ 5
How Are User Sessions Managed? .............................................................. 5
What Is Multiple Office Support? ................................................................... 5
What Is Two-Factor Authentication? ............................................................. 6
How to Sign In ............................................................................................... 6
How to Reset a Forgotten Password ............................................................. 6
How to Switch Between Offices After Signing In ........................................... 7
How to Change the Language ....................................................................... 8
How to Change the Duty Code ...................................................................... 8
How to Change Your Password .................................................................... 8
How to Sign Out ............................................................................................ 9
Chapter 2
Profiles .................................................................................................. 11
Getting Started With Profiles .............................................................. 11
What Is Amadeus Profiles? ......................................................................... 11
Managing Profiles .............................................................................. 12
How to Create a Profile ............................................................................... 12
How to Copy a Profile .................................................................................. 13
How to Edit a Profile .................................................................................... 13
How to Enter Credit Card Details ................................................................ 14
How to Retrieve a Profile ............................................................................. 14
Profile Association.............................................................................. 15
What Is an Associated Profile? ................................................................... 15
How to Associate a Traveller Profile to a Group ......................................... 15
How to Associate a Traveller Profile to a Company .................................... 15
How to Cancel a Profile Association ........................................................... 16
Managing Profile Information.............................................................. 16
Defining Preferences and Follow-up Actions .............................................. 16
Merging Profile Displays .............................................................................. 17
Storing Travel Document Information .......................................................... 17
Using SSR Explosion .................................................................................. 18
Displaying Profile History............................................................................. 18
Importing and Transferring Profiles to a Booking File ......................... 19
Which Elements are Transferred From a Profile to a Booking File? ........... 19
How to Transfer a Single Profile to a Booking File ...................................... 19
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
i
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Transfer Multiple Profiles to a Booking File .................................... 20
Why Import Profile Information Into a Booking File? ................................... 21
How to Import Profile Information Into a Booking File ................................. 21
Deactivating and Reactivating a Profile .............................................. 22
When Do You Deactivate and Reactivate a Profile? ................................... 22
How to Deactivate a Profile ......................................................................... 22
How to Reactivate a Profile ......................................................................... 23
Chapter 3
Profile Manager .................................................................................... 25
Getting Started With Profile Manager ................................................. 25
Creating the Input File ........................................................................ 26
Opening and Saving the Input File ..................................................... 29
Managing Traveller and Company Profiles ......................................... 31
Chapter 4
Air .......................................................................................................... 35
Getting Started With Air...................................................................... 35
What Is Air? ................................................................................................. 35
Video: How to Book a Flight ........................................................................ 35
Understanding Fare Families ............................................................. 35
Managing Travel Policies in Air .......................................................... 36
Finding Flights Using an Availability Search ....................................... 37
Finding Flights Using a Schedule Search ........................................... 39
Finding Flights Using a Timetable Search .......................................... 41
Finding Flights Using All Fares ........................................................... 42
What Is All Fares? ....................................................................................... 42
Searching for Fares ..................................................................................... 43
Managing Your Booking .............................................................................. 52
Displaying Available Fares for a City Pair ........................................... 53
Pricing an Itinerary Using Informative Pricing ..................................... 55
Pricing an Itinerary Using Itinerary Pricing .......................................... 55
Booking a Flight Using Direct Sell ...................................................... 58
Adding Ghost, Passive, and Information Segments to a Booking File 58
Chapter 5
Booking File ......................................................................................... 61
Getting Started With Booking File....................................................... 61
Managing Group Bookings ................................................................. 65
Working With Passenger Information ................................................. 65
Creating and Modifying Passenger Information .......................................... 65
Importing, Exporting and Sending Passenger Information.......................... 66
Managing Passenger Associations ............................................................. 70
How to Rebook an Air GDS Segment ......................................................... 71
Working With Seats and Services ...................................................... 71
Understanding the Seats and Services Catalogue ..................................... 71
Video: How to Book Seats From the Seats and Services Catalogue ......... 73
Using the Seat Map ..................................................................................... 73
Managing Services ...................................................................................... 74
Video: How to Book Services From the Seats and Services Catalogue ..... 75
Working With Remarks and Other Service Information....................... 75
Managing TSTs .................................................................................. 77
Working With TSTs...................................................................................... 77
ii
Edition 13.0
Table of Contents
Modifying TSTs ............................................................................................ 78
Managing TSMs ................................................................................. 81
Working With TSMs ..................................................................................... 81
Modifying TSMs ........................................................................................... 83
Managing Fees .................................................................................. 85
Managing E-Tickets and EMDs .......................................................... 86
Issuing, Refunding and Voiding EMDs ........................................................ 86
Issuing, Refunding and Voiding E-Tickets................................................... 88
Revalidating E-Tickets ................................................................................. 90
Associating E-Tickets and EMDs to a Booking File .................................... 91
Retrieving E-Tickets and EMDs .................................................................. 92
Changing an Itinerary and Reissuing E-Tickets Using ATC........................ 92
Video: How to Manually Reissue an E-Ticket ............................................. 94
How to Print, Email or Fax an E-Ticket or EMD Receipt ............................. 94
How to Set a Ticketing Arrangement ........................................................... 95
How to Create an Original Issued Document (FO) ..................................... 95
How to Issue a Car E-Voucher .................................................................... 96
Working With Manual Bookings.......................................................... 97
Managing Manual Bookings ........................................................................ 97
Associating Passengers With a Manual Booking ........................................ 99
Adding a Purchase Price to a Manual Booking ......................................... 100
Working With Offers ......................................................................... 101
Working With Sales Information ....................................................... 104
Understanding Sales Information .............................................................. 104
Displaying and Modifying Sales Information ............................................. 107
Displaying and Issuing Documents and Invoices ...................................... 109
Managing Travel Agency Fees .................................................................. 111
Managing Payments .................................................................................. 112
Handling Trip Packages ............................................................................ 116
Replacing Invoiced Items .......................................................................... 117
Automatic Correction of Sales Items ......................................................... 118
Changing Customer Associations ............................................................. 119
Searching for Profiles From Sales Items ................................................... 120
Managing Attachments..................................................................... 122
Managing Service Recommendations .............................................. 123
Chapter 6
Hotels .................................................................................................. 127
Getting Started With Amadeus Hotels .............................................. 127
What Is Amadeus Hotels? ......................................................................... 127
Registering With Aggregators.................................................................... 128
What Is the Booking Flow? ........................................................................ 130
Searching for Hotels and Refining Your Search ............................... 131
Searching for a Hotel ................................................................................. 131
Refining Your Search ................................................................................ 134
Selecting and Booking a Hotel Room ............................................... 137
Choosing a Hotel ....................................................................................... 137
Comparing and Saving Hotel Details ........................................................ 140
Using the Map ........................................................................................... 141
Booking a Room ........................................................................................ 142
Entering Traveller and Payment Details ........................................... 143
Confirming a Hotel Booking .............................................................. 146
Confirming a Hotel Chain Booking ............................................................ 146
Confirming an Aggregator Booking ........................................................... 146
Example: Booking Confirmation ................................................................ 147
How to Confirm an Aggregator Booking With a Pay Later Option ............ 147
How to Confirm a Hotel Booking in the Booking File Module.................... 147
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
iii
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Confirm a Hotel Booking in the Command Page .......................... 148
Retrieving, Printing, and Emailing a Hotel Booking Confirmation ...... 148
How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using a General Search ........... 148
How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using the Confirmation Number
and Provider .............................................................................................. 149
How to Print a Previous Booking Confirmation ......................................... 149
How to Print a New Booking Confirmation ................................................ 149
How to Email a New Booking Confirmation............................................... 149
Cancelling a Hotel Booking .............................................................. 150
How to Cancel a Confirmed Hotel Booking ............................................... 150
How to Cancel a Confirmed Hotel Booking in the Booking File Module ... 150
How to Cancel an Unconfirmed Hotel Booking ......................................... 150
Chapter 7
Cars ..................................................................................................... 151
Getting Started With Amadeus Cars................................................. 151
What Is Amadeus Cars?............................................................................ 151
Workflow: Booking a Car ........................................................................... 151
Video: How to Create a Car Booking ........................................................ 151
Working With Leisure Cars ............................................................... 152
Searching for a Car .......................................................................... 153
How to Search for a Car ............................................................................ 154
How to Add Discount Codes to a Search .................................................. 155
Video: How to Use Car Discount Codes ................................................... 156
Selecting and Booking a Car ............................................................ 156
How to Book a Car .................................................................................... 157
Modifying Your Search Results Display .................................................... 157
Using the Map View................................................................................... 159
Entering Traveller and Payment Details ........................................... 160
Confirming, Cancelling and Modifying Your Booking ........................ 162
How to Confirm a Booking ......................................................................... 162
How to Modify a Booking From the Booking File ...................................... 163
Video: How to Modify a Car Booking ......................................................... 163
Cancelling a Booking ................................................................................. 163
Chapter 8
Rail Display......................................................................................... 165
Getting Started With Rail Display ..................................................... 165
Transferring and Creating Profiles .................................................... 168
Searching for Availability .................................................................. 169
Selecting a Fare ............................................................................... 173
Using the Availability and Fares Display ................................................... 173
Comparing Multiple Trips........................................................................... 176
How to Select a Fare ................................................................................. 177
Adding Passenger Information and Booking Your Trip ..................... 178
Modifying Bookings Before Issuance................................................ 181
Modifying, Cancelling, and Repricing Swedish Rail and SNCF Rail
Segments................................................................................................... 181
Modifying and Cancelling Other Provider Rail Segments ......................... 182
Modifying Passenger Details Before Issuance .......................................... 184
Issuing Tickets ................................................................................. 184
Resending E-tickets................................................................................... 185
Refunding Tickets and Releasing Bookings ..................................... 186
Releasing a Booking or Seat (SNCF and Swedish Rail) ........................... 188
Voiding SNCF Tickets ...................................................................... 189
iv
Edition 13.0
Table of Contents
Exchanging Tickets .......................................................................... 189
Exchanging Swedish Rail Tickets ............................................................. 189
Exchanging SNCF Rail Tickets ................................................................. 191
Selling SNCF Railcards .................................................................... 192
What Types of Railcard Can Be Sold? ...................................................... 192
How to Sell a Railcard ............................................................................... 193
How to Cancel the Purchase of a Railcard Coupon .................................. 194
Frequently Asked Questions ............................................................ 194
Profiles ....................................................................................................... 194
Searching................................................................................................... 195
Fare Collection View.................................................................................. 195
Booking ...................................................................................................... 195
Payment..................................................................................................... 196
Ticketing and Refunding ............................................................................ 197
Provider-specific Features ......................................................................... 200
Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 203
Retrieving Session Information ................................................................. 203
Chapter 9
Cryptic Magic...................................................................................... 205
Getting Started With Cryptic Magic................................................... 205
Using Cryptic Magic Commands ...................................................... 205
Chapter 10
Command Page .................................................................................. 217
Getting Started With the Command Page......................................... 217
Splitting the Command Page Screen................................................ 218
Switching Between the Command Page and Graphic Mode............. 219
Working With Speedmode ................................................................ 220
Video: How to Use Command Page's Speedmode Feature ..................... 224
Working With 3270 Command Page ................................................ 224
Using the You Select Feature........................................................... 230
Using Command History .................................................................. 232
Managing Service Recommendations .............................................. 235
Chapter 11
Integrated Partners and Smart Content ............................................ 239
What Are Integrated Partners and Smart Content? .......................... 239
How to Access and Exit Integrated Partners and Smart Content ...... 239
Chapter 12
Queues ................................................................................................ 241
Getting Started With Queues............................................................ 241
Working With Queues and the Booking File ..................................... 243
Working With Queues in Cryptic Mode ............................................. 244
Chapter 13
Productivity Suite............................................................................... 247
Getting Started With Productivity Suite ............................................. 247
Video: What Is Productivity Suite? ............................................................ 247
Sharing Items in Productivity Suite ................................................... 249
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
v
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
File Finishing .................................................................................... 250
Getting Started With File Finishing ............................................................ 250
Managing File Finishing Rules .................................................................. 252
Video: How to Create a File Finishing Rule............................................... 258
Smart Flows ..................................................................................... 258
Getting Started With Smart Flows ............................................................. 258
Creating and Testing Smart Flows ............................................................ 260
Video: How to Create and Run a Personal Smart Flow ............................ 273
Video: How to Create an Office Smart Flow Using the Advanced Language
Editor ......................................................................................................... 273
Managing Smart Flows .............................................................................. 274
Showing and Hiding Smart Flows ............................................................. 277
Using Questions in the Smart Flow Editor................................................. 278
Running and Stopping Smart Flows .......................................................... 279
Smart Key Translation ...................................................................... 281
Getting Started With Smart Key Translation ............................................. 281
Understanding Smart Key Translation ...................................................... 281
Smart Triggers ................................................................................. 283
Getting Started With Smart Triggers ......................................................... 283
Working With Smart Triggers .................................................................... 290
Quality Monitor ................................................................................. 291
Getting Started With Quality Monitor ......................................................... 291
Using Autocomplete .................................................................................. 299
Creating and Managing Quality Monitor Rules.......................................... 301
Video: How to Create a Quality Monitor Rule............................................ 305
Managing Checks and Trigger Commands ............................................... 305
Chapter 14
Sales Report ....................................................................................... 313
Getting Started With Sales Report.................................................... 313
What Is Sales Report?............................................................................... 313
How to Access Sales Report ..................................................................... 313
How to Display a Report ............................................................................ 313
How to Modify the Report Display ............................................................. 314
Understanding the Types of Sales Report ........................................ 314
What Is the Query Report? ........................................................................ 314
What Is the Net Remit Report? ................................................................. 314
What Is the Transaction Report? ............................................................... 316
What Is the Daily Report?.......................................................................... 317
What Is the Summary Sales Period Report?............................................. 318
What Is the Item Sales Period Report? ..................................................... 320
What Is the Cross-reference Report? ........................................................ 321
Refunding in Sales Report ............................................................... 321
Which Items Are Refunded in Sales Report? ............................................ 321
How to Refund an Item .............................................................................. 322
How to Display a Refund ........................................................................... 322
How to Update a Refund ........................................................................... 322
Voiding in Sales Report .................................................................... 323
Which Items Are Voided in Sales Report? ................................................ 323
How to Void an Item .................................................................................. 323
Chapter 15
Australian Visa ................................................................................... 325
Getting Started With Australian Visa ................................................ 325
Working With Australian Visa ........................................................... 326
vi
Edition 13.0
Table of Contents
Chapter 16
Timatic ................................................................................................ 327
Getting Started With Timatic............................................................. 327
What Is Timatic? ........................................................................................ 327
How to Request IATA Credentials ............................................................. 327
How to Access Timatic .............................................................................. 328
Searching for Travel Information ...................................................... 328
What Are the Two Ways of Searching for Travel Information? ................. 328
How to Search for Travel Information Without an Active Booking File ..... 328
How to Search for Travel Information With an Active Booking File........... 329
How to Clear the Search Results .............................................................. 330
Explanation: Timatic Travel Information .................................................... 330
Which Countries Require Gender Information? ........................................ 331
Travel Information Follow-up Actions ............................................... 331
How to Print the Travel Information ........................................................... 331
How to Download the Travel Information .................................................. 331
How to Add Travel Information Remarks to the Booking File ................... 332
Chapter 17
Local Content ..................................................................................... 333
Getting Started With Local Content in Amadeus Selling Platform
Connect............................................................................................ 333
Launching Amadeus Local Content .................................................. 333
Using the Action Bar in the Local Content Mask ............................... 335
Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA Mask) ............................................... 337
Getting Started With Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA) ............................... 339
Launching TOMA mask ............................................................................. 340
Using the Action Bar in the TOMA Mask ................................................... 341
Further Information Services and Features in TOMA ............................... 343
Performing Availability and Vacancy Requests ......................................... 346
Booking inquiries ....................................................................................... 349
Booking and Printing Travel Confirmation ................................................. 350
Issuing and Cancelling Travel Documents ................................................ 353
Rebooking Procedures .............................................................................. 354
Cancellation Procedures ........................................................................... 356
Further Booking Procedures ..................................................................... 359
Amadeus Tour Market Submasks ............................................................. 363
HOT - Hotel vouchers....................................................................... 365
Displaying hotel master data ..................................................................... 366
Creating hotel voucher .............................................................................. 367
Creating IT hotel voucher .......................................................................... 369
Issuing hotel voucher with commission added .......................................... 369
Creating deposit voucher........................................................................... 369
Displaying hotel voucher ........................................................................... 370
Cancelling hotel voucher ........................................................................... 370
Displaying the file for hotel vouchers ......................................................... 370
Printing hotel address onto 1st label ......................................................... 371
Displaying currency exchange of hotel voucher ........................................ 371
Deducting deposit payment ....................................................................... 371
Creating travel registration via RAN ................................................. 373
Creating travel registration (RAN) for own travel placement ..................... 373
Creating travel registration (RAN) for an own tour .................................... 375
Document preparation (Back Screen mode)..................................... 376
Saving mask content ................................................................................. 377
Loading mask content file .......................................................................... 377
Loading and deleting mask content files ................................................... 377
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
vii
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Saving and loading mask content via toolbar ............................................ 378
Solutions for failed printing ............................................................... 379
SISO - Sign in / Sign out .................................................................. 379
Display the status of the branch ................................................................ 380
Display all travel agents logged on ............................................................ 380
Sign in the branch ...................................................................................... 380
Sign in the supervisor ................................................................................ 380
Sign in the travel agent .............................................................................. 381
Change travel agent codes........................................................................ 381
Print branch and travel agents protocols ................................................... 381
Sign out travel agents, permanent travel agent codes and branch ........... 383
BSTV - Print Branch Data on Sales Documents ............................... 383
Determine the data for sales receipts ........................................................ 384
Display data for sales receipts .................................................................. 384
Change data for sales receipts .................................................................. 385
Switch to BSTG mask................................................................................ 385
OPT - Options .................................................................................. 385
Display pre-allocation status ..................................................................... 385
Define mandatory fields ............................................................................. 386
Define numeric value ................................................................................. 386
Preset automatic pre-allocation ................................................................. 386
Print route on sales receipts ...................................................................... 387
BELG - Document Functions ............................................................ 387
Displaying printer memory ......................................................................... 388
Displaying service voucher for travel agent............................................... 388
Displaying service vouchers for branch..................................................... 388
Displaying service voucher for a processing number ................................ 388
Displaying prepared receipts ..................................................................... 389
Displaying open processing numbers for travel agent .............................. 389
Displaying open processing numbers for branch ...................................... 390
Displaying open processing number for travel agent with external services
................................................................................................................... 390
Displaying open processing number for branch with external services .... 391
ZAEH - Business Unit Counter ......................................................... 391
Displaying receipt number ranges ............................................................. 391
Displaying counter (next receipt no.) ......................................................... 392
Displaying turnover groups ........................................................................ 392
Branch turnover statistics .......................................................................... 393
Displaying overview of the organisation's total turnover ........................... 394
Cash sales turnover ................................................................................... 394
Setup document number ranges ............................................................... 395
DFRS - Restart Printer for Service Voucher ..................................... 397
DRST - Print Control Functions ........................................................ 398
Allocating document printer ....................................................................... 398
Print stop.................................................................................................... 399
Returning vouchers ................................................................................... 399
Reprinting protocol .................................................................................... 399
Rerouting printer memory .......................................................................... 400
Document administration via ZAEH .................................................. 400
Entering air-ticket block inventory ............................................................. 400
Displaying air ticket blocks ........................................................................ 401
Deleting air-ticket block ............................................................................. 401
VERK - Issuing sales receipts .......................................................... 401
Mask description ........................................................................................ 402
Create sales receipts in VERK .................................................................. 408
Print sales receipts in VERK ..................................................................... 411
Print invoice with bank transfer slip ........................................................... 411
Create a collective invoice ......................................................................... 412
Print collective invoice with additional customer data ............................... 412
viii
Edition 13.0
Table of Contents
Print sales receipts with payable commission ........................................... 413
Send sales receipts by e-mail or fax ......................................................... 413
Pay commission fees to sub-agents .......................................................... 415
Print IT sales receipt .................................................................................. 416
Print a proof of delivery.............................................................................. 416
Calculate service fees (TAF) ..................................................................... 416
VERL - Detailed Sales Document Data ............................................ 418
Printing bulk invoice with additional customer data ................................... 419
Printing sales receipt for manually created airline ticket ........................... 419
Further procedures .................................................................................... 419
Mask description ........................................................................................ 420
TEXT - Comment lines ..................................................................... 425
Recording comment lines .......................................................................... 425
Displaying comment lines .......................................................................... 425
Changing or deleting comment lines ......................................................... 425
CC - Credit cards ............................................................................. 426
Mask description ........................................................................................ 426
Noncash payments with Amadeus Cash................................................... 427
Credit card payments for non-airline services ........................................... 430
UMSZ - Turnover counter ................................................................. 433
Printing out current month turnover statistics ............................................ 433
Printing last month turnover statistics ........................................................ 433
Displaying sales code turnover ................................................................. 434
Displaying a sales code turnover compared to previous month................ 434
Displaying turnover groups turnover ......................................................... 434
Displaying turnover group compared to previous month ........................... 434
KURS - Currency converter .............................................................. 434
Recording exchange rates for the first time............................................... 435
Displaying exchange rates ........................................................................ 435
Changing/recording exchange rates ......................................................... 435
Deleting exchange rates ............................................................................ 436
Converting rates in another currency ........................................................ 436
UMSG - Turnover group ................................................................... 436
Creating turnover group............................................................................. 436
Modifying turnover group ........................................................................... 437
Deleting turnover group ............................................................................. 437
Printing out turnover group ........................................................................ 437
Recreating standard/default turnover group .............................................. 438
Searching for turnover group ..................................................................... 438
Displaying turnover groups ........................................................................ 438
KD - Customer Data ......................................................................... 438
Mask description KD .................................................................................. 439
Recording customer data .......................................................................... 441
Editing customer data ................................................................................ 443
Print functions ............................................................................................ 445
KDP - Persons Customer Data......................................................... 446
Mask description KDP ............................................................................... 447
Processing personal data .......................................................................... 449
Recording personal data ........................................................................... 451
Recording additional personal data ........................................................... 453
Print functions ............................................................................................ 454
TV - Tour file administration ............................................................. 455
Importing tour files into TV......................................................................... 455
Process TV file .......................................................................................... 460
Record TV file ............................................................................................ 461
Payment transactions ................................................................................ 463
Administer TV file ...................................................................................... 469
Travel agent control for TV files ................................................................ 472
Deadline administration ............................................................................. 472
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
ix
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Copy function ............................................................................................. 474
Corrections ................................................................................................ 476
Statistics .................................................................................................... 478
Validity of TV files ...................................................................................... 482
TVP ............................................................................................................ 483
TVV - Tour operator groups....................................................................... 484
TVZ ............................................................................................................ 487
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 488
Status codes .............................................................................................. 490
Lists and Codes ............................................................................... 491
Authorization classes ................................................................................. 491
Sales codes 8000-9389 ............................................................................. 494
Sales codes 9400-9998 ............................................................................. 505
Sales receipts types .................................................................................. 510
Exchange document code ......................................................................... 511
Commission codes .................................................................................... 513
Document numbers overview .................................................................... 515
ISO code lists ............................................................................................ 518
Index ................................................................................................... 529
x
Edition 13.0
Before You Start
Purpose of This Document
This document explains how to use Amadeus Selling Platform Connect.
It describes the web-based booking functionalities offered by Selling Platform
Connect, covering the entire booking flow from defining customer profiles through
to searching, comparing, booking and e-ticketing.
Audience
This document is intended for travel agents who use Selling Platform Connect.
Related Reference Material
The following e-learning videos are available on Amadeus Service Hub (eSupport Centre).
Recommendation:
Ensure that this user guide is open in a new window to ensure that the video
launches in a new window. To do this, click on the Open in a new window icon:
Getting Started
How to Start With Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Air
How to Book a Flight
Hotel
Amadeus Hotels
Booking File
How to Book Seats From the Seats and Services Catalogue
How to Book Services From the Seats and Services Catalogue
e-Ticketing
How to Manually Reissue an e-Ticket
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
1
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Car
How to Create a Car Booking
How to Use Car Discount Codes
How to Modify a Car Booking
Command Page
How to Use Command Page's Speedmode Feature
Productivity Suite
What Is Productivity Suite?
How to Create and Run a Personal Smart Flow
How to Create an Office Smart Flow Using the Advanced Language Editor
How to Create a Quality Monitor Rule
How to Create a File Finishing Rule
Latest Version of This Document
For the latest version of this document, and other reference material, please
contact your local Amadeus Commercial Organisation (ACO).
Where to Go for Help
Online Help is available for Selling Platform Connect. To access it, click on the
Help menu at the top of the main screen of the application.
Feedback on This Document
Your feedback is important, and it will help us to improve this document.
Please email us with your comments and suggestions:
[email protected]
2
Edition 13.0
Before You Start
What's New in This Document
Type of Change
Area
Updates
Air - All Fares
•
The recommendations display now shows airline Fare
Families and Fare Family upgrade options, allowing you to
propose and book them directly from the display.
See What Is a Fare Family? on page 43, How to Display
Details of a Fare Family Recommendation on page 45, and
How to Propose a Fare Family Upgrade on page 46.
Booking File - Sales
•
A new Invoicing view is available in the Sales section to
display only the items that need to be invoiced.
See Explanation: Sales and Documents Section on page
106.
•
A new invoice correction process enables you to replace an
invoice from the Documents section, with or without issuing
a credit note.
How to Replace an Invoiced Item From the Documents
Section on page 118.
•
The Documents section now provides an option to display
and hide all financial items belonging to a document.
See How to Display Sales Information on page 107.
Booking File - Ticketing
•
If defined for your office, baggage allowance can be typed in
a single field in the TST pop-up window, similar to cryptic
mode. For example, 1 PC or 32 KG.
•
You can now void tickets issued directly on airline stock, to
align with cryptic mode and Selling Platform.
See How to Void a Single EMD on page 87, How to Void
Multiple EMDs on page 87, How to Void a Single E-Ticket on
page 89, and How to Void Multiple E-Tickets on page 89.
Command Page
•
Some 3270 features, such as the ability to move the cursor
by mouse or keyboard and edit the output, are now also
available in 4505.
•
All commands are now stored in the Command page history.
See also What Are the Navigation Options in Command
History? on page 271.
Cross-sell Service Recommendations
•
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Transfers are now included in the cross-sell service
recommendation pop-up panel, allowing you to book a taxi
or transfer in the Transfers module.
See Managing Service Recommendations on page 235 and
How to Book a Transfer Recommendation on page 237.
[email protected]
3
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Hotels
•
Throughout the shopping and booking flow, there is a
customer mode option to hide travel agency commission or
mark-up information if you are sharing your screen with a
customer.
See What Is the Customer Mode Display? on page 128.
•
Some aggregators allow you to reserve a room at a given
rate for a certain time with an option to pay later.
See What Are the Payment Requirements for an Aggregator
Booking? on page 145 and How to Confirm an Aggregator
Booking With a Pay Later Option on page 147.
Productivity Suite - Smart Triggers
•
Additional commands (or their graphic equivalents) can now
be used in Smart Triggers.
See What Are the Trigger Commands in Cryptic and
Graphic? on page 306.
Productivity Suite - Quality Monitor
4
•
Additional commands (or their graphic equivalents) can now
be used as triggers in Quality Monitor rules.
See What Are the Trigger Commands in Cryptic and
Graphic? on page 306.
•
You can now use Smart Tools as corrective actions in
Quality Monitor rules.
See Managing Checks and Trigger Commands on page
305.
•
You can now launch corrective actions directly from the
Quality Monitor checklist.
See How to Launch a Corrective Action for a Check on page
309.
•
The Quality Monitor checklist is enhanced to more clearly
indicate check status and severity.
See What Are the Statuses of a Check? on page 307.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 1
Using Selling Platform Connect
Getting Started With Selling Platform Connect
Video: How to Start With Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Launch
Managing User Access
How Are User Sessions Managed?
User sessions are managed using monosign functionality that prevents you from
logging on to more than one session at the same time. Monosign is activated at
user level.
If you try to log on to a second session using the same login credentials, you are
notified that you are already logged in and the pre-existing session is highlighted.
You can then choose to enter different login credentials, or you can choose to
force your sign in. If you force your sign in, the pre-existing session will be
automatically closed with notification and you will be signed in to your new
session.
Note:
Any unsaved work will be lost in the pre-existing session if you force
your sign in to a new session.
What Is Multiple Office Support?
If the site parameter is enabled, multiple office support grants you access to
several different offices using the same username and password. This allows you
to work on the Booking Files of different offices at the same time.
You can choose a different office during sign in, or sign in using the default office.
With a different site parameter, you can also change to other authorised offices
after you sign in, which allows you to quickly switch between offices without going
back to the login page each time.
You can switch to an office either within the same organisation or in another
organisation provided that the office is authorised for your login areas.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
5
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Changing the office ID using multiple office support changes your Selling Platform
Connect configuration to the one associated with that office.
What Is Two-Factor Authentication?
Two-factor authentication (TFA) is an additional security factor that can be
enabled for signing in. TFA is used to demonstrate that you have access to the
same email address or mobile number that is registered in the system.
After you enter your main credentials on the Welcome page, you must then enter
a one-time password that was sent to your email address or mobile number. This
registers the browser you are using.
TFA can be configured to be:
•
Always enabled.
•
Never enabled.
Your administrator can choose one of two means of TFA message delivery:
•
Email
•
SMS
How to Sign In
1. Enter your sign in details in the Sign In section of the login page.
To change the language from the default, refer to How to Change the
Language on page 8.
To change the duty code from the default, refer to How to Change the Duty
Code on page 8.
If you forgot your password, see How to Reset a Forgotten Password below.
2. Click on Sign In.
-
If monosign is activated and you are already signed into another session,
select the Force Sign In check box to close your other session and
continue to sign into a new session.
-
If you are prompted for two-factor authentication, enter the one-time
password that was sent to your email address, re-enter your password
and click on Sign In.
How to Reset a Forgotten Password
1. Click on the Forgot your password? link on the login page.
2. If you entered your office ID on the login page, it is displayed in the Office ID
field. Otherwise, enter your office ID and click on Next.
3. Enter your user details, enter and confirm your new password, and click on
Reset Password.
This sends an email with a link to confirm your new password.
6
Edition 13.0
Chapter 1 Using Selling Platform Connect
4. Click on the link in the email and confirm your new password.
How to Switch Between Offices After Signing In
Note:
A multiple office support parameter must be enabled for this feature.
1. Click on the Office ID in the lower right-hand corner of the task bar.
An Office ID pop-up window is displayed with a list of the offices available to
you.
2. To filter the list of offices, enter part of the office ID in the text field of the popup window to display only the offices matching that part of the ID.
3. You can either:
Click on the office ID that you want to change to.
Or:
Type the full office ID in the text field and click on Connect.
Note:
Some login areas are not automatically displayed in the Office ID
pop-up window. Therefore, if the office ID that you are trying to
connect is not listed, you need to type the office ID in the text field
and click on Connect.
A new session for that office opens in another window or another tab of the
same window without the need to sign in again.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
7
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Change the Language
To change the language from the default, select the language from the
Language drop-down list on the Welcome page before you sign in.
Note:
To change the language after you have signed in, you need to sign out
and select the new language before signing back in.
How to Change the Duty Code
Select the duty code from the Duty Code drop-down list on the Welcome page
(or type the new code in the Duty Code field) before you sign in.
How to Change Your Password
Note:
A site parameter must be enabled to allow you to change your
password.
1. Click on Settings > Account & Security > Change Password.
8
Edition 13.0
Chapter 1 Using Selling Platform Connect
2. In the Change Password dialogue box, enter your first and last name, your
username and your current password.
3. Enter your new password, confirm your new password and click on Change
Password.
How to Sign Out
1. Click on File > Sign Out.
2. In the Sign Out pop-up window, click on Sign Out to confirm the action.
Note:
When a user session is locked due to inactivity for a prolonged period of
time, the user is automatically logged out of the application.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
9
Chapter 2
Profiles
Getting Started With Profiles
What Is Amadeus Profiles?
Amadeus Profiles allows you to search for, display, transfer, create and modify
your customers' profiles. You can also define follow-up actions for each profile, as
a reminder of tasks that you need to complete.
How to Access Amadeus Profiles
Click on the Retrieve Profile tab on the Main Page menu.
See also How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
Alternatively, you can access Profiles when you create a new profile.
See also How to Create a Profile on page 168.
What Is a Profile?
A profile is a record containing useful information about an individual traveller,
group of travellers, company, or agency that can help you when you make a
reservation.
Each time you make a booking, you can load information from a profile,
eliminating the need to manually enter the information each time.
Four types of profiles are available.
Table: Profile Types
Profile
Description
Company profile
This profile stores information about a company for
which the agency provides travel services. Each
company profile can have multiple traveller profiles
associated to it.
It can be linked to other company profiles within the
same organisation and it can inherit travel policies.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
11
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Profile
Description
Traveller profile
This profile includes the traveller's contact details,
payment information, meal or seat preferences and any
special service requests.
It can be associated to company profiles.
For business travellers, you can combine the travel
policy stored within a company profile with the
traveller's preferences stored in the traveller profile.
Agency profile
This profile stores information such as special phone
numbers, remarks and preferred providers. You can
set up an agency profile that contains information
related to your own office ID.
Note:
Group profile
Only one profile is allowed for each office ID.
This profile stores information about a group of
travellers such as a sports team or a family. Each
group profile can have multiple travellers associated to
it.
Managing Profiles
Example: Profile Page
How to Create a Profile
1. In the main menu bar of Selling Platform Connect, click on File > New Profile
and select the profile type.
For example, to create a Traveller profile, select Traveller. Alternatively, click
on the New Traveller Profile button.
A new profile page opens.
12
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
2. Complete the fields for the new profile.
Note:
Mandatory fields are highlighted in yellow.
Each tab in the profile page is used to store a specific category of
information. For example, use the Payment Data tab to store payment details
such as credit cards.
to add more than one entry for each element, for example, a
3. Click on
telephone number.
4. Select Preferred next to the option to mark an option as preferred.
A preferred option is displayed with a
Note:
.
If the corresponding site parameters are enabled, you can define
air, car, hotel, and rail preferences using the respective tabs. If the
site parameters are not enabled, you will not see these tabs.
5. Click on the save icon
to save the new profile.
How to Copy a Profile
1. Open a profile.
The profile opens in edit mode.
2. In the File drop-down list, select Duplicate.
The source profile page closes and a duplicate profile page is displayed. The
duplicate profile inherits all data from the source profile, except for:
-
Name
-
IDs or reference numbers
-
Remarks
3. Complete all the fields as required.
4. Save the profile.
How to Edit a Profile
1. Open the profile.
The profile opens in edit mode.
2. Add, delete, or modify data as required.
Note:
You can update all data elements except for:
-
Customer Identifier. This number is generated automatically by the
system when the profile is created. It is the profile unique identifier.
-
Owner of the profile. This item is generated by the system when the
profile is created.
-
Profile history. This item is updated when the profile is saved.
-
Trips list of the profile.
-
Any field that has been predefined as non-editable.
3. Save the profile.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
13
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Enter Credit Card Details
1. Open a profile.
2. Select the Payment data tab.
3. Enter the credit card details in the Form of payment section.
Note:
To add a credit card, enter the cryptic format without FP at the
beginning.
4. Save the profile.
The credit card is added. Some of the credit card digits are hidden for
security reasons.
Example: Profile Search Page
How to Retrieve a Profile
1. In the Retrieve Profile area on the left, select the profile options for the
search such as Traveller or Company.
2. Enter your search criteria.
Note:
To search for a deactivated profile, select Deactivated only from
the Profile Status drop-down list.
3. Click on Retrieve.
4. To display a profile's details:
14
-
In the Main Page: Select the profile from the list in the Retrieve Profile
area on the right.
-
In a profile page: Select the profile and click on Open, or double-click on
the profile. A new tab page opens.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
Profile Association
What Is an Associated Profile?
You can associate one profile to another profile to create a link between them.
A traveller profile can be associated to one or more company or group profiles.
A company profile cannot be associated to a group profile.
Note:
You cannot create an association with a profile that has been
deactivated.
How to Associate a Traveller Profile to a Group
1. Open a group profile.
See How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
2. Select the Members Data tab.
3. Click on the Search icon
.
A pop-up window is displayed.
4. Enter the traveller name or the profile record locator.
5. If you want to search for a profile in another office, and provided that you
have access rights to that office, enter the office in the Office ID field.
If you do not enter an office ID, the search is done in the office that you are
signed into.
6. Click on Search.
7. In the search results, select the traveller profile that you want to create the
association with, and click on OK.
8. Save the group profile.
How to Associate a Traveller Profile to a Company
1. Open a profile.
See How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
2. Select the Personal Data tab.
3. In the General Info area, click on
search for an associated company.
next to the Company Name field to
A pop up window is displayed.
4. Enter the company name or profile record locator, and click on Search.
5. In the search results, select the company profile that you want to create the
association with, and click on OK.
The traveller profile is updated with the selected information.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
15
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
6. Save the profile.
The name of the associated company profile is shown in the Overview tab.
Clicking on this link opens the company profile.
How to Cancel a Profile Association
1. Open a profile.
See How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
next to the Company Name field to
2. In the Personal Data tab, click on
remove the association between profiles.
3. Save the profile.
Managing Profile Information
Defining Preferences and Follow-up Actions
How to Define Preferences in a Traveller Profile
1. Open the profile.
2. Select the tab for the preferences that you want to enter.
If the corresponding site parameters are enabled, you can define air, car,
hotel, and rail preferences using the respective tabs. If the site parameters
are not enabled, you will not see these tabs.
3. Enter the preferences information.
4. Save the profile.
Note:
Preferences entered in Profiles are not all available in the cryptic
display. Preferences entered in cryptic via Travel Preference
Manager are not available in Profiles.
What Is a Follow-Up Action?
A follow-up action is any action that you need to carry out by a set date in the
future as part of your reservation tasks.
You use follow-up actions as a reminder.
Follow-up actions can be defined for each individual traveller profile.
Examples of follow-up actions that you can set up are:
•
Check the traveller card details.
•
Check the traveller document details such as the passport expiry date.
•
Arrange insurance.
•
Request a vegetarian meal.
This list is not exhaustive and you can define your own follow-up actions.
16
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
The type of profile determines the follow-up actions that you can set up.
For more information, see the profiles types table What Is a Profile? on page 11.
How to Define Profile Follow-Up Actions
1. Open a profile.
2. Go to the Remarks tab.
3. In the Follow Up section, specify the date and the type of action.
4. Click on
to add an action.
5. Click on
to remove an action.
6. Save the profile.
How to View Follow-Up Actions
1. In the Go To menu, select Profile Follow Up to retrieve a list of follow-up
actions that are due today.
2. Double-click on a profile name in the list to view details of follow-up actions.
The profile page opens. You can define or update a follow-up action in the
Remarks tab.
3. Click on the Follow-up tab to return to the list of follow-up actions.
Merging Profile Displays
What Is a Merged Display?
A merged display is a display that contains aggregated data from the traveller,
the linked company and the owning agency profile.
You can transfer data that is highlighted by indicators and identify the data source
for each profile.
How to Merge a Profile Display
1. Open a profile.
2. Click on Merged Display in the Overview tab.
Storing Travel Document Information
How to Store Travel Document Information
1. Open a profile.
2. Select the Travel data tab.
3. In the Documents section, select the type of document and provide all the
required information.
Note:
If you open the profile in cryptic mode, optional fields cannot be
displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
17
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The Documents section is equivalent to the cryptic entries PAS, PIV, PCE
and PID.
Note:
The information stored in the Documents section cannot be
transferred to a Booking File.
To transfer information to a Booking File, see How to Store Travel Document
Information via Special Needs below.
to add additional document information entries to the profile.
4. Click on
5. Save the profile.
How to Store Travel Document Information via Special Needs
1. Open a profile.
2. Select the Air Preferences tab.
Note:
When you store documents information via Special needs, you
create a SR DOCS segment that you can transfer to a Booking File.
To create the SR (Special Request) in the profile, you enter the
cryptic format.
3. In the Special needs section, select the type of information from the Type
drop-down, and complete all the fields.
4. Enter the cryptic format into the Free text field.
5. Save the profile.
Using SSR Explosion
What Is SSR Explosion?
When you end transact a Booking File, an individual SSR element is added for
each segment and transmitted to each airline in the Booking File.
How to Activate SSR Explosion
In the Air Preferences tab of a profile, select the Explosion Indicator check
box.
See also How to Create a Profile on page 168 and How to Define Preferences in
a Traveller Profile on page 16.
Displaying Profile History
What Is the Profile History?
The profile history is a record that contains information on the last 100 changes
that you made to the profile.
For each profile, the system creates a profile history record.
The profile history record contains:
18
•
The old and the new values.
•
Date and time when the update took place.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
•
Office ID and agent sign of the person who made the modification or the
external system ID that is responsible for the action.
To display the profile history, see How to Display the Profile History below.
How to Display the Profile History
1. Display the profile.
2. In the Overview tab of the profile, click on the History icon
.
The Profile History window opens.
Note:
A maximum of 100 items (modified or deleted data) can be stored in the
history record. When the maximum number is reached, as each new
item is recorded in the history, the oldest item will be erased. The
erased items are purged from the system and cannot be restored.
Importing and Transferring Profiles to a Booking
File
Which Elements are Transferred From a Profile to a Booking
File?
•
Name
•
Title
•
Telephone number
•
Mobile telephone number
•
Email address
•
DOCS (part of profile details)
•
FQTV (part of profile details)
How to Transfer a Single Profile to a Booking File
1. Open the profile that you want to transfer.
2. If several profiles are listed in the search results, select the profile and click
on the Transfer button.
If only the profile you want to transfer is retrieved, it is opened automatically.
Click on the Transfer icon
in the Overview tab of the open profile.
3. In the Transfer pop-up window, either:
Choose Transfer all data and click on Select to transfer all profile
information.
Or:
Choose Selective transfer and click on Select to define the specific
elements of the profile that you want to transfer.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
19
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
a) In the Overview tab of the profile, select the check box next to the
elements that you want to transfer.
The First Name and Last Name elements are automatically transferred.
Therefore, these elements do not have check boxes.
b) Click on Transfer.
Image: Selective Transfer Display in Profile Overview Tab
4. If you do not have a target Booking File open, a new Booking File opens with
the profile name displayed in the Passenger and Contact Details section.
If you already have one or more Booking Files open, the Transfer Profile
pop-up window opens:
a) Select one of the open Booking Files or you can choose to create a new
one.
b) Click on OK to transfer the profile to the chosen Booking File.
The profile name is displayed in the Passenger and Contact Details
section of the Booking File.
5. To save the Booking File, click on the Save icon
.
Or:
Click on File > Save and Confirm (ER) in the main menu bar of Selling
Platform Connect.
How to Transfer Multiple Profiles to a Booking File
1. Retrieve the profiles that you want to transfer. In the search results, select
each profile that you want transfer and click on Select.
The selected profiles are added to a hold list until your selections are
complete.
You can select up to nine profiles.
2. To delete a profile from the hold list, click on the Delete icon
profile name.
beside the
3. When the profile selection is complete, click on Transfer selection to
Booking File.
20
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
Image: Multiple Profile Selection for Booking File Transfer
Note:
All data is automatically transferred for each profile. You do not
have an option for the selective transfer of specific profile elements.
4. If you do not have a target Booking File open, a new Booking File opens with
the profile names displayed in the Passenger and Contact Details section.
If you already have one or more Booking Files open, the Transfer Profile
pop-up window opens:
a) Select one of the open Booking Files or you can choose to create a new
one.
b) Click on OK to transfer the profiles to the chosen Booking File.
The profile names are displayed in the Passenger and Contact Details
section of the Booking File.
5. To save the Booking File, click on the Save icon
.
Or:
Click on File > Save and Confirm (ER) in the main menu bar of Selling
Platform Connect.
Why Import Profile Information Into a Booking File?
It allows you to import Advanced Passenger Information (APIS) from a profile that
cannot be transferred from a profile (for example, the passport number).
How to Import Profile Information Into a Booking File
Note:
A passenger must already exist in the Booking File before you can
import profile information.
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File that you
want to import information into, click on Import from profile.
The Import From Profile pop-up window displays the list of passengers that
are in the Booking File.
2. Optionally, enter the office ID in which you want to search.
If you do not enter an office ID, the search is done in the office ID where you
are logged in.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
21
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3. Click on the passenger name to search for the profile.
Any matching profiles and their corresponding Record Locators are displayed
in the Matching Profiles section.
If no matching profiles are found, it could be that:
a) The profile does not exist. In this case, you need to create the profile.
b) The profile is not in the office that you are searching in. In this case, you
need to change the office using the Office ID field.
4. Click on Details for the matching profile to preview the information that will be
imported:
-
Passenger names
-
DOCS (passport information)
-
DOCA (destination/residence address information)
-
DOCO (visa information)
-
FQTV (frequent flyer) special service requests
5. Click on Import all eligible data.
When the import is complete, the profile is no longer highlighted in the
Matching Profiles section.
6. If there is more than one passenger in the Booking File that you want to
import profile information for, click on the passenger name and follow the
above steps in the Import From Profile pop-up window.
Otherwise, close the Import From Profile pop-up window to return to the
Booking File.
The passenger name in the Passenger and Contact Details section is now
an active link that you can click on to directly access their profile from the
Booking File.
Deactivating and Reactivating a Profile
When Do You Deactivate and Reactivate a Profile?
You deactivate a profile when it is no longer needed.
Deactivated profiles cannot be modified.
When a profile is deactivated, it remains inactive for a maximum of 30 days
before it is permanently deleted. During this 30-day period, you can retrieve it and
reactivate the profile if required.
How to Deactivate a Profile
1. Open the profile that you want to deactivate.
See How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
2. Display the profile overview.
22
Edition 13.0
Chapter 2 Profiles
3. Click on Deactivate
Note:
in the toolbar.
When you deactivate a profile, any associated profile is also
deactivated, unless the associated profile is also associated to a third
profile. For these profiles, the association to the deactivated profile is
deleted and noted in the profile history.
How to Reactivate a Profile
1. Retrieve the deactivated profile.
See How to Retrieve a Profile on page 14.
2. Open the profile overview.
3. Click on Reactivate
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
in the toolbar.
[email protected]
23
Chapter 3
Profile Manager
Getting Started With Profile Manager
What Is Profile Manager?
Profile Manager (previously called Profile Exporter Importer) enables the
automated management of bulk profile data in the Amadeus Customer Server
(CSX) database. You can:
•
Export all traveller and company profile data from selected offices.
•
Count all active traveller and company profiles in selected offices.
•
Import profiles using specific profile data in a customised input file.
•
Delete profiles based on their record locators.
Note:
Profile updates using Profile Manager are not reflected in Open Profile
Suite.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
25
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Profile Manager Main Page
What Are the Prerequisites to Accessing Profile Manager?
You must have Logon and Security Server (LSS) credentials to access Profile
Manager.
You also need to be granted permission from your administrator.
How to Access Profile Manager
Expand the Tools menu on the Main page of Selling Platform Connect and click
on Profile Manager.
Creating the Input File
What Are the Accepted Input File Types?
•
.csv (comma-separated value)
•
.xls (Excel)
•
.xlsx (Excel)
What Are the Technical Requirements for the Input File?
For a successful import or deletion, the input file should be ASCII-encoded and all
the characters in the file must be compliant with the UTF-8 character set.
26
Edition 13.0
Chapter 3 Profile Manager
If the input file is ASCII-encoded but some characters in the file are not ASCIIsupported, the import or delete process will result in an error (for example,
Wrongly Encoded Import File). This is because the processing of such a file could
result in some profiles containing invalid data or result in profile corruption.
File Name
The allowed file name characters are letters, numbers, full stops (.), commas (,),
underline (_), and dashes (-).
Note:
Ensure that there are no spaces in the file name. The import will fail if
the file name contains a space.
File Content
•
The file should contain either all traveller profiles or all company profiles.
There should not be a mixture of traveller and company profiles in the same
input file.
•
For input files containing company profiles, duplicated company names are
not allowed.
What Is the Required Input File Structure?
The input file contains a 3-row header, followed by a row for each profile.
A profile contains elements, and each element contains items.
Each column of the file represents a profile field.
Image: Input File Structure

Profile level: Defines which profile the information below applies to. For example,
MainProfile.

Element level: Defines which element the information below applies to. For
example, UniversalName.

Item level: Defines which item the information below applies to. For example,
FirstName.

Each row below the 3-row header represents a traveller or company profile. All
profiles within the same input file must be either all company profiles or all
traveller profiles. It is not possible to import a file that contains a mixture of
traveller and company profiles.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
27
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Are the Mandatory Input File Elements for Creating Profiles?
Traveller Profile
The input file requires the following mandatory elements to create a traveller
profile:
•
OfficeID.Value
•
UniversalName.LastName
•
UniversalName.FirstName
Image: Mandatory Elements for a Traveller Profile
Company Profile
The input file requires the following mandatory elements to create a company
profile:
•
OfficeID.Value
•
CompanyName.Value
Image: Mandatory Elements for a Company Profile
What Are the Mandatory Input File Elements for Updating or Deleting
Profiles?
The input file requires the following mandatory element to update either a
traveller or company profile:
•
28
ProfileID.Value
Edition 13.0
Chapter 3 Profile Manager
Example: Element to Update the Gender in a Traveller Profile
Note:
You can define which specific elements of a profile to update. To avoid
updating other elements, exclude the corresponding columns for these
elements from the input file.
Opening and Saving the Input File
Application
Recommendations
OpenOffice
How to Open a .csv File in OpenOffice
Select:
•
Character set = Unicode (UTF-8)
•
Separated by = Comma
•
Column type = Text
How to Save a .csv File in OpenOffice
•
When you save the file in .csv format, it is saved in UTF-8 encoding.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
29
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Application
Recommendations
Microsoft Excel
2013
How to Open a .csv File in Microsoft Excel 2013
1. Go to the Data menu tab > Get External Data > From Text > and navigate to
the file you want to import.
2. In the Text Import Wizard, select:
Original data type = Delimited
File origin = Unicode (UTF-8)
3. Click on Next.
4.
30
5.
Select:
Delimiters = Comma
Text qualifier = Double-quote
Click on Next.
6.
Select the Column data format as Text and click on Finish.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 3 Profile Manager
Application
Recommendations
7.
In the Import Data pop-up window, select Existing worksheet and click OK.
How to Save a .csv File in Microsoft Excel 2013
•
Select CSV (Command delimited *.csv) as the file type when saving.
How to Open a .csv File Using NotePad++
NotePad++
•
You can download the free text-editor software from here.
How to Save a .csv File Using NotePad++
1. On the Encoding menu, select Encode in UTF-8.
2.
Select .csv as the file type when saving.
Managing Traveller and Company Profiles
What Happens When Profiles Are Imported?
When an import is processed, the profiles in the input file are either created or
updated depending on the presence of a record locator for the profile:
•
If there is a record locator for the profile, the import action updates the profile.
•
If there is no record locator for the profile, the import action creates the
profile.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
31
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Import Profiles
1. Enter a request name.
The name must be composed of letters or numbers without any spaces
(maximum 40 characters).
2. Select Import from the Use Case drop-down menu.
3. Select either Traveller or Company from the Profile Type drop-down menu.
4. Click on Choose file and add the input file containing the profiles. See also
What Are the Technical Requirements for the Input File? on page 26 and
What Are the Mandatory Input File Elements for Creating Profiles? on page
28.
5. Click on Send Request.
This triggers a new row in the Request History panel.
6. Click on Output File in the Request History panel to access the results of
the count.
7. In case of any errors, click on Error File to see the profile data for which the
import failed.
How to Count All Active Profiles for Each Office
1. Enter a request name.
The name must be composed of letters or numbers without any spaces
(maximum 40 characters).
2. Select Count from the Use Case drop-down menu.
3. Select either Traveller or Company from the Profile Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Target Office ID and click on Add.
Repeat to add more than one office.
Alternatively, enter all office IDs separated by a comma and then click on
Add.
5. Expand the Advanced Options section to define further input criteria.
6. Click on Send Request.
This triggers a new row in the Request History panel.
7. Click on Output File in the Request History panel to access the results of
the count.
Note:
If you do not see the Output File option, the process was not
successful. Review the status message and re-try.
How to Export Profile Data
1. Enter a request name.
The name must be composed of letters or numbers without any spaces
(maximum 40 characters).
2. Select Export from the Use Case drop-down menu.
3. Select either Traveller or Company from the Profile Type drop-down menu.
4. Enter the Target Office ID and click on Add.
Repeat to add more than one office.
32
Edition 13.0
Chapter 3 Profile Manager
Alternatively, enter all office IDs separated by a comma and then click on
Add.
5. Expand the Advanced Options section to define further input criteria.
6. Click on Send Request.
This triggers a new row in the Request History panel.
7. Click on Output File in the Request History panel to access the results of
the export.
8. In case of any errors, click on Error File to see the profile data for which the
export failed.
How to Delete Profiles
1. Enter a request name.
The name must be composed of alphanumeric characters without any spaces
(maximum 40 characters).
2. Select Import from the Use Case drop-down menu.
3. Select either Traveller or Company from the Profile Type drop-down menu.
4. Click on Choose file and add the input file containing the profiles. See also
What Are the Technical Requirements for the Input File? on page 26 and
What Are the Mandatory Input File Elements for Updating or Deleting
Profiles? on page 28.
5. Click on Send Request.
This triggers a new row in the Request History panel.
6. Click on Output File in the Request History panel to access the results of
the count.
7. In case of any errors, click on Error File to see the profile data for which the
deletion failed.
How to Refresh the Request History
Click on Refresh History to check the progress of the most recent request.
The processing time depends on the number of profiles.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
33
Chapter 4
Air
Getting Started With Air
What Is Air?
Air is a web-based graphical flight reservation tool within Selling Platform
Connect that allows you to search for and book flights using the following options:
•
Availability
•
Schedule
•
Timetable
•
All fares
•
Fare display
•
Informative pricing
•
Itinerary pricing
•
Direct sell
•
Ghost, passive and information segment sell
You access the Air module from the Booking File Overview page.
Video: How to Book a Flight
Launch
Understanding Fare Families
What Is a Fare Family?
A Fare Family is a category of fares that is grouped by fare conditions and
optional services.
Access to Fare Families allows you to:
•
See the name of the airline Fare Family per bound.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
35
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
•
See what is included in a fare, such as baggage, meal, and seat selection
services.
•
Compare offers between carriers.
See also How to Display Details of a Fare Family Recommendation on page 45
and How to Propose a Fare Family Upgrade on page 46.
How Is Fare Family Information Displayed?
The Fare Family name and important attributes, such as whether the fare is
exchangeable or refundable, are displayed in the Available Fares section of
Itinerary Pricing after any pricing transaction. The applicable meal, baggage and
seat assignment details are also displayed.
The full Fare Family description is displayed by clicking on the link entitled See
Full Description.
See also Example: Upgrade Offers in Itinerary Pricing on page 57.
Managing Travel Policies in Air
What Is Travel Preference Manager?
Travel Preference Manager (TPM) is used to manage travel policies in Air, Car,
and Hotel.
These travel policies are defined through rules that are grouped as either
preferences or exclusions.
Policies can be defined at three levels:
•
Traveller
•
Company
•
Agency
If the site parameter for air policies is enabled, policy information is applied to the
flight display without any biasing of results.
Which Search Types Support TPM Policies?
TPM policies are currently supported by the following Air searches:
•
Availability (AN)
•
Schedule (SN)
How Is Policy Information Displayed?
Search Page
If an agency profile was created for the office and a traveller profile is loaded, a
Policy panel is displayed on the Search page for all search types.
This panel contains the traveller, company and agency profile data.
The panel also contains the Trip Reason and Apply Policies options if the
corresponding site parameters are activated.
36
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Search Results Page
Policies can be applied to an airline, booking class or airport.
Any recommendations that are out of policy are greyed out.
You can choose to filter the search results according to company, traveller or
agency policies.
You can also choose to show all results (both In and Out of Policy) or show only
the results that are preferred or in policy.
Example: Search Results with Policy Filters
Finding Flights Using an Availability Search
What Is an Availability Search?
An availability search displays a list of available or scheduled flights for up to 16
city pairs on given dates. You can define additional search options to help return
the most accurate results for your search.
Example: Using an Availability Search
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
37
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Find Flights Using an Availability Search
1. Select the Availability (AN) option in the Search By drop-down list.
2. Enter the search criteria.
3. Using the autocomplete functionality from the drop-down box, specify the
cabin class. You can either enter the one-letter cabin class code or the first
letter of the cabin class name. For example, to specify a cabin class for
Business, you can either enter C (the class code for Business) or B (the first
letter of the class name):
F - First
C - Business
Y - Economy including Economy Premium
W - Economy Premium
M - Economy without Economy Premium
4. To search for direct flights only, select the Non-Stop Flights check box.
5. To refine your search, such as the number of seats you are searching for,
request a 7-day search or sort the results display, click on More Search
Options and choose the additional search criteria.
6. If a traveller profile is loaded and an agency profile was created for the office,
a Profile panel is displayed on the Search page.
Choose the trip reason and select the Apply Policies check box in the
Profile panel to apply policies to the search.
Note:
To apply policies, the AIR POLICIES site parameter must be
activated.
7. Click on Search.
8. To access extra flights matching your criteria other than the ones listed in the
initial availability display, click on View the Remaining Flights.
9. To book a seat on a waitlist or with any other specific action code, click on
Book with More Option(s).
10. To view the available flights for the previous day or the next day, click on
Previous Day or Next Day.
11. To view flight information, click on the flight number in the Flight column.
12. To view policy information, mouseover the Policies Defined link.
13. To filter the results based on in-policy and out-policy, use the Show dropdown menu.
14. To apply filters based on profile type, click on the Company, Traveller or
Agency tab.
What Is Direct Access?
Direct access allows you to access the real-time seat availability display of
airlines that have a direct access agreement.
You can see the last available seat for a flight. Therefore, you can avoid an airline
rejecting a booking when you click on Save and Confirm.
Note:
38
When you request a direct access display, you only have three minutes
to complete the booking. A timer is displayed to show the remaining
time while you are making the booking.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Example: Direct Access Display
How to Book a Flight Using Direct Access
1. Click on the Direct Access link for the chosen flight in an Availability
display.
Note:
The Direct Access link is only available for airlines that have a
direct access agreement.
2. Select the booking class.
3. If needed, update the number of seats.
By default, the number of seats displayed corresponds to the number of
passengers in the Booking File. If there are no passengers in the Booking
File, the number is set to 1.
4. To add or update the booking action code, click on Book with More Options
and enter the new code.
5. Click on Book.
Finding Flights Using a Schedule Search
What Is a Schedule Search?
A schedule search returns all possible flights operated by all airlines matching the
requested search criteria. The results of a schedule search shows both available
flights and closed flights/classes.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
39
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Using a Schedule Search
How to Find Flights Using a Schedule Search
1. Select the Schedule (SN) option in the Search By drop-down list.
2. Enter the search criteria.
3. Using the autocomplete functionality from the drop-down box, specify the
cabin class. You can either enter the one-letter cabin class code or the first
letter of the cabin class name. For example, to specify a cabin class for
Business, you can either enter C (the class code for Business) or B (the first
letter of the class name):
F - First
C - Business
Y - Economy including Economy Premium
W - Economy Premium
M - Economy without Economy Premium
4. To search for direct flights only, select the Non-Stop Flights check box.
5. To refine your search, such as the number of seats you are searching for,
request a 7-day search or sort the results display, click on More Search
Options and choose the additional search criteria.
6. If a traveller profile is loaded and an agency profile was created for the office,
a Profile panel is displayed on the Search page.
Choose the trip reason and select the Apply Policies check box in the
Profile panel to apply policies to the search.
Note:
To apply policies, the AIR POLICIES site parameter must be
activated.
7. Click on Search.
8. To access flights matching your criteria other than the ones listed in the initial
schedule display, click on View the Remaining Flights.
9. To book a seat on a waitlist or with any other specific action code, click on
Book with More Option(s).
40
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
10. To view flights for the previous day or the next day, click on Previous Day or
Next Day.
11. To view flight information, click on the flight number in the Flight column.
12. To view policy information, mouseover over the Policies Defined link.
13. To filter the results based on in-policy and out-policy, use the Show dropdown menu.
14. To apply filters based on profile type, click on the Company, Traveller or
Agency tab.
Finding Flights Using a Timetable Search
What Is a Timetable Search?
A timetable search returns a list of flights and airlines for a specific origin and
destination on a given date. The results show a list of flights for seven days from
the date specified in the search. For each day, a green tick shows the availability
or a red cross shows the unavailability of the flight corresponding to that day.
Example: Using a Timetable Search
How to Find Flights for a City Pair Using a Timetable Search
1. Select the Timetable (TN) option in the Search By drop-down list.
2. Enter the search criteria and click on Search.
3. To view the available flights for the previous day or the next day, click on
Previous Day or Next Day.
4. To view flight information, click on the flight number in the Flight column.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
41
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Finding Flights Using All Fares
What Is All Fares?
All Fares allows you to search for the lowest available fare, distributed directly via
the Amadeus GDS or outside it (such as Light Ticketing, website, and Latin
American fares).
Example: All Fares
What Are the Different Fare Types?
You can search for both Amadeus Global Distribution System (GDS) fares and
non-GDS website fares. It is important to understand each fare type before you
perform a search.
Amadeus Fare Type
Amadeus fare types are fares distributed via the Amadeus GDS. They include
public fares and private (negotiated or corporate) fares. The low cost carrier fares
distributed via Amadeus GDS (Light Ticketing, SSR Epay) are also included.
Note:
42
Light Ticketing carriers cannot be booked with any other carrier in a
Booking File.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Website Fare Type
Website fare types correspond to fares only distributed from the Light Ticketing
carrier websites and that are not available from the Amadeus GDS. These
websites can either be accessed by any travel agent (Public Fares) or be
restricted to registered travel agencies where credentials would be required
(Business Fares).
What Is a Fare Family?
A Fare Family is a category of fares that is grouped by fare conditions and
optional services.
Access to Fare Families allows you to:
•
See the name of the airline Fare Family per bound.
•
See what is included in a fare, such as baggage, meal, and seat selection
services.
•
Compare offers between carriers.
See also How to Display Details of a Fare Family Recommendation on page 45
and How to Propose a Fare Family Upgrade on page 46.
Searching for Fares
How to Search for a Fare
1. Select a One-way, Round-trip or Multi-destination search mode.
2. Enter the travel itinerary.
You can define a cabin for each bound of the itinerary.
3. If the Radius option is enabled, select a radius for alternative cities or
airports for a round trip or one-way trip only.
Note:
Some alternative cities or airports within the selected radius may be
found in a neighbouring country. The alternate airport option is not
compatible with website fares.
4. In the Search Options section, select what you want to display in the search
results such as:
-
Calendar View (see How Are Recommendations Displayed in Calendar
View? on page 48).
-
One-way Fares if you are searching for one-way fares to book a return
trip.
If you choose an open-jaw itinerary, the One-way Fares option and
website fares cannot be selected.
-
Non-stop flights if you want a direct flight.
-
PSR to calculate and include agency fees in the prices.
5. Choose the types of fares to include in the search.
-
To search for Amadeus fare types only (including Light Ticketing and
SSR Epay carriers if available), select the required options in the
Amadeus Fare Types section and ensure that you clear all options in
the Website Fare Types section.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
43
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Note:
-
If you select Corporate Fares, Light Ticketing carriers are still
included in the search but only the first corporate code will be taken
into account for these carriers.
To search for website fare types only, select the required options in the
Website Fare Types section and ensure that you clear all options in the
Amadeus Fare Types section.
6. Select the passenger types and numbers.
7. To change your search options or define additional ones, such as include
alternate airports or display the fares in a specific currency, click on More
Search Options > Change Your Search Options and make your selection.
8. Define the number of results displayed by selecting an option from Display 3,
5, 10, 20 or All Flights.
Note:
This only needs to be done once. Thereafter, the search results will
always display the option you have selected.
9. Click on Search.
Explanation: Recommendations Display
Display Tabs
Depending on the options selected, the recommendations display is divided into
several tabs: All, Amadeus, Website and Other Providers, and One Way
Fares. Amadeus (including Light Ticketing carriers) and website fare conditions
can be accessed from any of these tabs.
Note:
Prices do not include any credit card fees. These fees can potentially be
added to the price when the booking is finalised and a form of payment
is present in the Booking File.
Table: Search Results Tabs
Tab
Explanation
All
The All tab shows all returned recommendations for
both GDS and non-GDS fares.
Amadeus
The Amadeus tab lists only GDS results and is
displayed by default.
Website and Other Providers
This tab lists only non-GDS results. If there are no
website fares returned, this tab is not displayed.
One-Way Fares
If you include the One Way fares option in your search,
the results are displayed on a separate One Way
Fares tab. This tab lists the one-way fares returned by
both the GDS and non-GDS websites.
Fare Families
If a Fare Family has been filed by the airline, the Fare Family name is displayed
in the recommendation header.
is displayed when there is a free baggage allowance for all
A Baggage icon
bounds of the recommendation.
is displayed if the standard seat
A Standard seat assignment icon
assignment service is included in the Fare Family for all bounds of the
recommendation.
44
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
A Premium seat assignment icon is displayed if the premium seat assignment
service is included in the Fare Family for all bounds of the recommendation.
A Meal icon is displayed if a meal is included in the Fare Family for all bounds of
the recommendation. Bar drinks and non-alcoholic drinks are not considered as
meals.
Operating Carrier and Codeshare Flights
The operating carrier name is displayed below each flight recommendation in the
search results so that any codeshare flights are immediately visible.
Explanation: Recommendations Display With Fare Families
How to Display Flight Information For a Recommendation
Click on the flight number of the recommendation.
How to Expand a Recommendation
Click on the departure time for the recommendation that you want to view the
details of.
Alternatively, click on the Down arrow icon
in the recommendation heading.
How to Collapse a Recommendation
Click on the Up arrow icon
in the recommendation heading.
How to Display Details of a Fare Family Recommendation
In an expanded recommendation, click on the panel with the Fare Family name
and price.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
45
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Propose a Fare Family Upgrade
In the expanded detailed view for a Fare Family, select the upgrade option and
click on Propose an offer.
46
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
How to Modify Your Search Options
1. In Your air search options, click on More search options.
2. Click on Change your search options and select the options that you want
to display by default in Your air search options.
3. Click on Apply these options to update the Search panel.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
47
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Modifying Your Search Options
How to Filter the Recommendations Display
1. On the search results display, click on the Filter tab if it's not already
expanded.
Note:
When you select a filter option, only the results that match the
selected filter(s) remain displayed. If you deselect a filter, the list of
results is updated automatically.
2. Enter the required labels or codes using the autocomplete drop-down boxes.
3. Use the sliders (or enter a range) to specify a range of values where
applicable.
4. For check box options, select accordingly.
5. If you have selected any filters, click on Remove all Filters if you wish to
reset the filter selection.
How Are Recommendations Displayed in Calendar View?
Calendar View displays recommendations for flights departing and returning three
days before and after the requested dates.
Note:
The +/-3 day view applies to all fare types, whether GDS or non-GDS.
Some of the non-GDS carriers do not fully support the calendar option.
In such a case, the travel agents can click on the link displayed in the
calendar to update the missing information.
The matrix displays information such as fare price, fare type (Amadeus or
website), airline, booking class and fare conditions.
If a Fare Family has been filed by the airline, the Fare Family name is shown at
the bottom of the screen. To view details, hover the mouse over the Fare Family
name (for example, Basic).
Information is also displayed on the baggage allowance, meal, and seat
assignment. To view details, hover the mouse over the More Information links.
48
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Example: Calendar View
How Are Recommendations Displayed for One-Way Fares?
The search results display is divided into the Outbound, Inbound and Itinerary
summary panels.
When you select an outbound flight, the itinerary summary panel is updated with
the flight information and the outbound price, along with any ticketing fees (if a
validated PSR has been selected in the search panel). The total price is not
displayed until an inbound price is also selected.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
49
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Recommendation Display For One-Way Fares
How to Compare Fare Upgrade Options
Depending on the airline, alternative fare upgrade options may be shown in the
One-Way Fares tab. To compare the fares for different upgrade options, select
the fare options and click on Compare. You can compare up to six different fare
options.
What Is an Offer?
An offer is a proposal of a non-guaranteed price or availability that you create for
your customer. Several offers can be proposed and stored for up to 30 days, after
which they expire.
An air offer is created differently depending on the search mode used:
50
•
One-way search: One offer is created with one bound.
•
Round-trip search: One offer is created with two bounds (outbound and
inbound).
•
Multi-destination search: One offer is created with multiple bounds.
•
One-way fares search: Two offers are created one-by-one (outbound and
inbound).
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
How to Create an Offer
1. Search for a fare.
2. Select a flight on the search results display.
3. Click on Propose.
Note:
You cannot create an offer for non-GDS website fares or Light
Ticketing carriers. Therefore, the Propose button is not available if
you select any of these options in your search.
How to Exclude a Website From the Search
1. In the Your air search options, click on Configure next to the Public Fares
option.
2. In the Configuration pop-up window, clear the appropriate check box to
exclude a website.
3. Click on Save.
Why Add Credentials for Website Business Fares?
Business websites must be registered with your agency. After registration, you
are provided with login details (credentials) specific to that site. You can configure
these credentials in All Fares to allow Amadeus to access these business
websites and retrieve your fares when performing a search for fares.
How to Add Credentials for Website Business Fares
1. In Your air search options, click on Configure next to the Business Fares
option.
2. In the Configuration pop-up window, select the appropriate website and
complete the required fields.
3. Click on Save.
Note:
Negotiated contract is for your agency internal usage only and is
not communicated to the carrier website. This enables you to
distinguish credentials that apply to the same website (carrier)
between agencies.
How to Search for Non-GDS Carriers From the Command Page
1. In the Command page, enter an availability search query and press Enter.
2. The system displays the availability results. If Light Ticketing carriers are
operating on the requested itinerary, the Search for More Fares pop-up
displays which non-GDS providers have availability for this route.
3. Click on Check to move to All Fares and enter the search criteria.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
51
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Searching for Non-GDS Carriers From the Command Page
Managing Your Booking
How to Make a Booking
Note:
If you exit All Fares to modify the Booking File during a booking, you
must restart the complete booking flow when you return to All Fares.
1. Search for a fare (See How to Search for a Fare on page 43).
2. On the search results display, use the Filters option to refine your results.
For more information, refer to How to Filter the Recommendations Display on
page 48.
3. Select the flights you want to book.
This will provide the baggage allowance and fares information (except for
TLA and non-GDS carriers). For example, it provides the cancellation or
modification fee, or whether baggage is included in the fare or not.
Note:
Depending on the carrier, the baggage allowance may be defined
by maximum weight or number of pieces allowed.
4. To view the fare information:
-
Click on the fare in the blue menu bar to view the fare information.
-
Click on Fare conditions to view the fare conditions.
-
Click on Fare details to view the ticket image.
-
Click on the Fare family name to view the full fare family description.
5. To proceed with your selection, click on Book.
52
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
6. On the Traveller and Payment page, enter the traveller and payment
information.
If there is an active Booking File, traveller information is prefilled in the
required fields.
Note:
If you are booking an Interjet flight and the form of payment is by
American Express card you will need to specify a full address and
zip code.
7. If Open Profile Suite is enabled, you can transfer a profile to the Traveller
and Payment page:
-
Click on Retrieve profile.
-
Enter the search criteria and click on Search.
-
Select the profile in the search results and click on Transfer.
8. When a website fare has been selected, click on Update Price to update the
credit card and services fees. This step is mandatory before finalising the
booking.
Note:
The website fares are booked on the Light Ticketing carrier's
website. Once booked, they cannot be cancelled or modified via the
Amadeus GDS.
9. To confirm the booking, click on Send reservation request.
A complete breakdown of the booking is provided showing any additional
fees. The TST reflects the local currency and the currency of the fare basis,
regardless of the currency used during the fare search.
10. To complete the booking, click on Go to Booking File.
Note:
If you are reserving a website fare with the Pay Later option, the
booking will be held for 24 hours depending on the airline website
and will automatically be cancelled by the carrier once this time limit
is reached. A TKTL element will be associated to the ghost
segment in the Booking File.
Displaying Available Fares for a City Pair
What Is a Fare Display?
A fare display allows you to display the available fares for a city pair. You can
access YY fares and published fares and view the fare conditions and price
breakdown for each fare.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
53
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Fare Display
How to Display Available Fares for a City Pair
1. Select the Fare Display (FQD) option in the Search By drop-down list.
2. Enter the search criteria.
3. Using the autocomplete functionality from the drop-down box, specify the
cabin class. You can either enter the one-letter cabin class code or the first
letter of the cabin class name. For example, to specify a cabin class for
Business, you can either enter C (the class code for Business) or B (the first
letter of the class name):
F - First
C - Business
Y - Economy including Economy Premium
W - Economy Premium
M - Economy without Economy Premium
4. If you want to display the fares for a specific airline only, enter the airline
code. Up to three airlines can be specified for a search.
If you do not enter an airline, the results will show the available fares for all
airlines provided you do not request YY fares.
5. To request YY fares, select the YY Fares check box under More Search
Options.
6. To refine your search, add a fare request type or specify any fare restrictions,
taxes or fees, select the additional search options under More Search
Options.
7. Click on Search.
54
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Pricing an Itinerary Using Informative Pricing
What Is Informative Pricing?
Informative pricing enables you to price an itinerary without having a segment or
passenger in the Booking File. You can view the fare conditions and price
breakdown for each fare on the search results page.
Note:
If TLA carriers are returned when performing an informative pricing, You
will only be able to view the fare conditions. Any credit card fees and
onward booking (OB) fees will not be displayed for these fares.
Example: Informative Pricing
How to Price an Itinerary Using Informative Pricing
1. Select the Informative Pricing (FQP) option in the Search By drop-down
list.
2. Enter the search criteria.
3. To refine your search, such as add a passenger type, fare type, taxes or
fees, click on More Search Options and select the additional search options.
4. Click on Search.
5. Select a fare to display its ticket image.
Pricing an Itinerary Using Itinerary Pricing
What Is Itinerary Pricing?
Itinerary pricing enables you to price an itinerary with a list of applicable fares
based upon your search criteria where one or more passengers are present,
along with at least one segment in the Booking File.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
55
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The itinerary can also be priced with no passengers present in the Booking file, if
this option is enabled.
You can view the passengers and segments in the Air Pricing Options page.
What Are the Different Pricing Modes in Itinerary Pricing?
Pricing Mode
Description
Price - No TST (FXX)
Prices the segments in the Booking File and their associated
passengers in the best available fare for the given booking class.
If the Price Without Passenger site parameter is enabled, you
can price the itinerary even if:
Lower Fares - No TST (FXA)
•
There is no passenger in the Booking File.
•
There is a passenger in the Booking File but you do not select
them.
Requests any cheaper fares that are available with a rebook
option. It also allows you to request a specific cabin in the pricing.
If the Price Without Passenger site parameter is enabled:
Lowest Possible Fare - No TST
(FXA/LO)
•
You can price the itinerary even if there is no passenger in the
Booking File.
•
However, if there is a passenger in the Booking File, they
must be selected to allow the pricing.
Requests the lowest fare possible with the Best Pricer function. It
also allows you to request a specific cabin in the pricing.
Returns one fare recommendation per passenger type that can be
selected and confirmed.
If the cheapest fare is not available, it also returns the lowest fare
possible per passenger type but that is not available.
If the Price Without Passenger site parameter is enabled:
Price - With TST (FXP)
•
You can price the itinerary even if there is no passenger in the
Booking File.
•
However, if there is a passenger in the Booking File, they
must be selected to allow the pricing.
Prices the segments in the Booking File and their associated
passengers without specifically requesting the cheapest fare.
If only one fare applies, the TST is automatically created and a
message is displayed to confirm this.
If there is no passenger in the Booking File, pricing is not possible.
Book Lowest Fare - With TST (FXB)
Requests the lowest available fare with the Best Pricer function.
Automatically rebooks the itinerary in the booking classes
corresponding to the fare and creates a TST.
If there is no passenger in the Booking File, pricing is not possible.
Book Lowest Fare - Without TST
(FXR)
Requests the lowest available fare with the Best Pricer function.
Automatically rebooks the itinerary in the booking classes
corresponding to the fare but no TST is created.
If the Price Without Passenger site parameter is enabled:
56
•
You can price the itinerary even if there is no passenger in the
Booking File.
•
However, if there is a passenger in the Booking File, they
must be selected to allow the pricing.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
How to Price an Itinerary Using Itinerary Pricing
1. Select the passengers (if available) or the segments to price.
2. Specify any advanced options such as Fare Type, Taxes, Surcharges or
Fare Restriction Type to further narrow the pricing options.
3. Select the Pricing Mode to Apply, for example: Price - No TST (FX).
Note:
If you are pricing segments in an itinerary without any passengers
present (if this option is available to you), you will not be able to
confirm or store the priced itinerary in a TST.
4. Click on Price.
5. Select a fare to display its ticket image.
6. Display and propose any available upgrades.
See also How Are Upgrade Offers Displayed in Itinerary Pricing? below.
7. If required, rebook the itinerary.
8. Click on Confirm & Create TST to book the flights in the new booking class
(if applicable) and to generate a TST in the Booking File.
How Are Upgrade Offers Displayed in Itinerary Pricing?
After you price an itinerary, any upgrade offers are displayed in the Available
Fares section beside the corresponding Fare Family.
Example: Upgrade Offers in Itinerary Pricing
What Are the Prerequisites for Upgrade Offers?
•
A Fare Family must be available in the pricing results.
•
All passengers must be priced in the same Fare Family.
For more information, see Understanding Fare Families on page 35.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
57
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Rebook an Itinerary Upgrade
Note:
The Booking File must contain at least one passenger and all
passengers must be upgraded to the same Fare Family.
1. After you price an itinerary, select the chosen upgrade.
2. Click on Confirm and Create TST.
You are redirected to the Booking File and the itinerary details reflect the
upgrade.
Booking a Flight Using Direct Sell
What Is Direct Sell?
Direct sell allows you to directly enter flight information to book flights without
having to use an availability display.
Example: Direct Sell
How to Book a Flight Using Direct Sell
1. Select the Direct Sell (SS) option in the Search By drop-down list.
2. Enter the flight information.
If you have chosen to book an open segment, you must enter the airline code
rather than the flight number.
3. Click on Book.
Adding Ghost, Passive, and Information Segments
to a Booking File
What Is Ghost, Passive and Information Segment Sell?
A ghost, passive, and information segment sell enables you to directly enter
informative segments and associate a specific segment to passengers in an
active Booking File.
58
Edition 13.0
Chapter 4 Air
Example: Adding Ghost, Passive or Information Segments to a
Booking File
How to Add a Ghost, Passive or Information Segment to a Booking
File
1. Select the Ghost, Passive and Information Segment Sell option in the
Search By drop-down list.
2. Select the segment type that you want to add to the Booking File:
-
Ghost, passive
-
Information (ARNK)
-
Information
3. Enter the itinerary details (mandatory information highlighted in yellow).
4. Click on Add.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
59
Chapter 5
Booking File
Getting Started With Booking File
What Is a Booking File?
A Booking File contains a passenger's reservation details and any other
information relating to their trip.
In addition to storing and displaying information, a Booking File also allows you to
add, modify and delete specific details about the passenger's travel information.
An item of information in a Booking File is called an element. A Booking File can
contain up to 999 mandatory or optional elements.
A Booking File remains active in the distribution system for four days after the
date of the last active or inactive segment in the itinerary. After a Booking File has
been purged, it is available for retrieval for a period of three years.
Table: Booking File Information
Display
Description
TSM History
A Transitional Stored Miscellaneous document (TSM)
is created automatically when a TASF element is
entered.
Cryptic Display
Shows a cryptic display of the current Booking File.
TST History
The TST history contains information on all the
modifications that have been made to a TST. Each
time a TST is created or data in the TST is updated or
deleted, this information is added to the TST history.
The TST history also allows you to see information on
the current TST status such as pricing information,
issuing status and segment or passenger association.
Booking File History
The Booking File History window displays every
modification made to the Booking File since it was
created in a chronological list.
Request Received From (RF)
You can directly edit the RF field of the Booking File.
Set Ticketing Arrangement or
Ticket Time Limit (TK TL)
The ticket time limit is added to a Booking File by
clicking on Set Ticketing Arrangement and selecting a
date. The date can be updated by clicking on the TK
link and selecting a new date.
Group Booking Details
This section contains the group name, group size and
any group contact details.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
61
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Display
Description
Passenger Details
This includes the names of the passengers booked for
a trip. For each passenger, additional information is
displayed such as their contact information.
Itinerary Details
The Itinerary Details section includes information such
as:
•
Product (Air, Car, Hotel, Rail, and Miscellaneous)
•
Itinerary
•
Class/Options
•
Status
•
Passenger
•
Duration
•
Aircraft
You can also print, email or fax itinerary details,
manage Extended Travel Records (ETRs), and rebook
air GDS segments.
Itinerary Basket
Services (SSR and SVC)
Remarks, OSI and SK
The Itinerary Basket panel:
•
Displays a summary of Air, Car, Hotel, Rail, and
Miscellaneous (Integrated Partners) segments.
•
Allows you to cancel an itinerary segment.
This allows you to add specific details to a Booking File
in relation to the following:
•
Meal
•
Seat Map
•
Seat Preference
•
FFP Number
•
API
•
Form of Identification
A remark element in a Booking File contains additional
comments or information concerning passengers and
their bookings.
Other Service Information (OSI) elements contain
special information regarding a passenger or
passengers in the Booking File that is sent to the airline
and that appears in the itinerary.
Form of Payment
You can add and edit a form of payment directly from
the Booking File and share this information with all
currently available booking tools in GUI mode (Air, Car,
Hotel, Rail) so that the payment field in their booking
flows is prefilled.
You can add up to three forms of payment to a Booking
File.
You can also reissue a form of payment, delete
payments, view manual payments to a supplier, view
and add travel agency payments, void supplier and
travel agency payments, and issue payment receipts.
Fare Elements
62
This section displays:
•
Passengers and segments associated with the
current fare element.
•
Fare element type.
•
Fare element details.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Display
Description
Stored Fares (TST & TSM)
Actions that are possible from this section include:
•
Tickets, EMD and TASF
Rail Fares
Create, modify and delete TSTs and TSMs.
Actions that are possible from this section include:
•
Void and refund e-tickets, EMDs and TASFs.
•
Reissue e-tickets using ATC.
•
Print, email or fax a document receipt.
This section displays details such as:
•
Passenger name.
•
Train number.
•
Trip segments.
•
Seat reservations, if any.
•
Ancillary services, if any.
•
Surcharges, if any.
You can access a detailed fare breakdown by using the
link on the fare price to open the Fare Details pop-up
window.
You can access the after-sales actions, such as issuing
tickets, on the Confirmation page of Rail using the
After Sales button.
Rail Tickets
This section displays ticket information for rail trips that
have tickets issued. It includes information such as:
•
Ticket number.
•
Passenger name.
•
Train number.
•
Trip segments.
You can access the after-sales actions on the
Confirmation page of Rail using the After Sales
button.
Sales
This section enables you to do booking and salesrelated actions within the same view.
Documents
This section displays all issued documents. It also
contains attachments to the Booking File.
What do you want to do
next?
This section provides links to perform actions such as:
•
Retrieve a profile.
•
Add an Air, Car, Hotel, or Rail booking.
•
Add a remark or service.
•
Create a TST or TSM.
•
Add a form of payment.
•
Add an attachment.
•
Apply for an Australian visa.
How to Create a Booking File
1. Click on New Booking File.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
63
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Alternatively, click on File > New Booking File and select the Booking File
type.
2. Enter the required details, click on Save and Confirm (ER) in the lower-right
corner, and select the relevant save option.
Alternatively, click on the Save button
or File > Save and Confirm.
How to Retrieve a Booking File
1. Enter a name or reference number in the search box and click on Retrieve.
Alternatively, expand the Retrieve Booking File menu on the Main page,
enter the search criteria and click on Retrieve.
One or more Booking Files appear in a list.
2. Select a Booking File from the list and click on Open Booking File.
Note:
A maximum of four Booking Files can be open at once.
How to Save and Confirm a Booking File
After the Booking File has been updated (ensuring that all mandatory fields have
been completed), click on Save and Confirm (ER) in the lower-right corner and
select the relevant save option.
Alternatively, click on the Save button
Note:
or File > Save and Confirm (ER).
If you want to ignore changes and revert to the previously saved version
of the Booking File, click on Ignore (IG) in the lower-right corner
instead.
How to Close a Booking File
1. Click on the Close button
or click on File > Close or Close All.
2. In the Close Booking File pop-up window, select how you want to close the
Booking File and click on OK.
64
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Managing Group Bookings
How to Create a Group Booking
1. Click on File > New Group Booking File.
2. Select whether you want to start a new group Booking File by group name or
by air search.
3. Enter the group name and group size.
4. Click on Create.
How to Add Contact Details to a Group Booking
1. In the Group & Contact Information section of the Booking File, click on
Add Contact.
2. Enter the contact details and click on Save.
How to Add a Passenger Name to a Group Booking
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update.
2. Enter the passenger name and click on Save.
How to Modify the Name or Size of a Group Booking
1. In the Group & Contact Information section of the Booking File, click on
Change.
2. Modify the group name or decrease the group size and click on Save.
Note:
The group size can be modified indirectly by decreasing the number
of non-assigned seats.
Working With Passenger Information
Creating and Modifying Passenger Information
How to Add a Passenger
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update.
2. Enter the passenger information.
3. To add additional passengers, click on Add Passenger and enter the
passenger information.
4. Click on Save.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
65
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Add Contact Details for a Passenger
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update.
2. Click on Add Contact for P.
3. Select the contact type, enter the contact details and click on Save.
How to Add a General Contact
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add General Contact.
2. Select the contact type, enter the contact details and click on Save.
How to Modify Passenger Information
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update.
2. Modify the passenger information and click on Save.
How to Delete a Passenger
Note:
You can only delete a passenger if there is more than one passenger
remaining in the Booking File.
In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Delete beside the passenger that you want to delete.
Importing, Exporting and Sending Passenger Information
Which Elements Are Mandatory When Importing Passenger
Information From a File?
Element
Description
Last name
Mandatory.
Optional for Infant or Child (must be added after Adult).
First name
66
Mandatory.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Element
Description
Title
Optional.
Values: MR, MRS, MS, MASTER, or MISS.
PTC
Optional.
3 characters.
Gender
Mandatory for DOCS.
M - Male
F - Female
Date of birth
Optional, but:
- Mandatory for Infant and Child.
- Mandatory for DOCS.
Date format: DDMMMYY.
Passport last name
Mandatory for DOCS.
Maximum 30 characters, including spaces.
Passport first name
Mandatory for DOCS.
Maximum 30 characters, including spaces.
Passport number
Mandatory for DOCS.
15 digits, including spaces.
Passport nationality
Optional.
Two- or three-letter AIRIMP country format.
Passport issue country
Optional.
Two- or three-letter AIRIMP country format.
Passport expiry date
Optional.
Date format: DDMMMYY.
Visa number
Mandatory for DOCO.
25 digits, including spaces.
Visa type
Mandatory for DOCO.
One-digit values:
V – Visa
R – Redress
K – Known traveller
Visa issue date
Mandatory for DOCO.
Date format: DDMMMYY.
Place of birth
Optional.
Maximum of 35 characters, including spaces.
Visa place of issue
Mandatory for DOCO.
Maximum of 35 characters, including spaces.
Visa country of application
Mandatory for DOCO.
Two- or three-letter AIRIMP code
Address type
Mandatory for DOCA.
One-digit values:
D – Destination
R – Residence
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
67
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Element
Description
Address country
Optional.
Two- or three-letter AIRIMP country format.
Address details
Optional.
Maximum of 35 characters, including spaces.
Address city
Optional.
Maximum of 35 characters, including spaces.
Address state
Optional.
Maximum of 35 characters, including spaces.
Address zip code
Optional.
Maximum of 17 digits, including spaces.
FQTV carrier 1
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Carrier code with two digits.
FQTV number 1
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Two-character code, followed by the number.
FQTV carrier 2
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Carrier code with two digits.
FQTV number 2
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Two-character code, followed by the number.
FQTV carrier 3
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Carrier code with two digits.
FQTV number 3
Mandatory for Frequent Flyer.
Two-character code, followed by the number.
How to Import Passenger Information From a File
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section or Special Service Request
section of the Booking File that you want to import information into, click on
Import from file.
If you are importing information into an empty booking file, click on Download
Template File to download an empty template.
2. Browse to the Excel file and click on Open.
Note:
The file format must adhere to a specific template.
3. In the Import pop-up window, select which information to import:
-
Passenger names
-
DOCS (passport information)
-
DOCA (destination/residence address information)
-
DOCO (visa information)
-
FQTV (frequent flyer) special service requests
4. Click on Import selected data.
68
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Export Passenger Information to a File
1. If the Booking File contains at least one passenger, click on Export File from
Booking File in the Passenger and Contact Details section.
If the Booking File does not contain any passengers, click on Download
Template File.
2. Choose either Save or Open in the File Download pop-up window.
Why Import Profile Information Into a Booking File?
It allows you to import Advanced Passenger Information (APIS) from a profile that
cannot be transferred from a profile (for example, the passport number).
How to Import Profile Information Into a Booking File
Note:
A passenger must already exist in the Booking File before you can
import profile information.
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File that you
want to import information into, click on Import from profile.
The Import From Profile pop-up window displays the list of passengers that
are in the Booking File.
2. Optionally, enter the office ID in which you want to search.
If you do not enter an office ID, the search is done in the office ID where you
are logged in.
3. Click on the passenger name to search for the profile.
Any matching profiles and their corresponding Record Locators are displayed
in the Matching Profiles section.
If no matching profiles are found, it could be that:
a) The profile does not exist. In this case, you need to create the profile.
b) The profile is not in the office that you are searching in. In this case, you
need to change the office using the Office ID field.
4. Click on Details for the matching profile to preview the information that will be
imported:
-
Passenger names
-
DOCS (passport information)
-
DOCA (destination/residence address information)
-
DOCO (visa information)
-
FQTV (frequent flyer) special service requests
5. Click on Import all eligible data.
When the import is complete, the profile is no longer highlighted in the
Matching Profiles section.
6. If there is more than one passenger in the Booking File that you want to
import profile information for, click on the passenger name and follow the
above steps in the Import From Profile pop-up window.
Otherwise, close the Import From Profile pop-up window to return to the
Booking File.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
69
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The passenger name in the Passenger and Contact Details section is now
an active link that you can click on to directly access their profile from the
Booking File.
How to Print, Email or Fax Passenger Itinerary
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, click on Print/Email/Fax
Itinerary.
2. Select the itinerary type.
3. Select the passengers.
4. Select the language for the document.
5. Select the delivery method and click on the corresponding button to:
-
Print
-
Email
-
Fax
Managing Passenger Associations
How to Display a Passenger Association
Go to the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File that you want to display
the passenger association for.
Passenger associations are displayed for each segment with an association.
However, if a segment is associated to all passengers, the individual passenger
associations are not displayed.
How to Add a Passenger Association
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, expand the Details
section.
2. Click on Associate to Passenger and enter the passenger association.
70
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Edit a Passenger Association
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File:
Click on Edit beside the passenger association you want to edit.
Or:
Expand the Details section of the segment and click on Associate to
Passenger.
2. Enter the new passenger number or name, or select the new passenger
association from the Associate To drop-down list.
How to Remove a Passenger Association
In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, click on the Delete icon
beside the passenger name.
How to Associate an Infant to a Passenger
1. In the Passenger and Contact Details section of the Booking File, click on
Add Infant and enter the infant details.
By default, the last name of the previous passenger entry is pre-populated in
the infant Last Name field and the infant is associated to this passenger.
2. To change the passenger association, select a different passenger from the
Travelling With drop-down list.
3. Click on Save.
How to Rebook an Air GDS Segment
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, click on Rebook (SB) or
double-click on the air GDS segment.
2. Update the class, flight number, or date of the segment as required and click
on Apply changes.
Working With Seats and Services
The Services (SSR and SVC) section is only displayed in the Booking File if it
contains information.
Understanding the Seats and Services Catalogue
What Is the Seats and Services Catalogue?
The Seats and Services Catalogue is a pop-up window that allows you to
request non-chargeable (standard) and chargeable services, as well as reserve a
seat.
It also displays the purchase conditions for each seat and service, such as
options for refund or change, and additional information about the product or
service that has been provided by the airline.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
71
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
You can specify which passengers are holders of a passport using the
Passenger Information tab of the catalogue.
Some seats and services display images when you place the mouse over them,
but this depends on the airline information that is provided.
When the catalogue is opened, the number of chargeable services in each
service category is displayed next to the name of the category.
If the true number of services is not available when the catalogue is opened, a
plus sign (+) is displayed next to the number of services in a category. The plus
sign is a prompt to expand the category to see the number of services that are
available for that category.
A service category that does not contain any chargeable services is greyed out.
Example: Seats and Services Catalogue
How to Open the Seats and Services Catalogue
In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on Add
Seats and Services. See also Managing Services on page 74.
How to Switch Between a Graphical and Cryptic Seats and Services
Catalogue
1. On the main accordion menu, click on Personal Settings.
2. For the Seats and Services Catalogue, either:
Click on Display the Cryptic Catalogue.
Or:
Click on Automatically Display Graphical Seats and Services Catalogue.
72
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Video: How to Book Seats From the Seats and Services
Catalogue
Launch
Using the Seat Map
How Are Prices Per Seat and Per Passenger Displayed?
Prices per seat and per passenger are displayed in a tooltip when you mouseover
over each seat that is marked as chargeable.
Prices per seat are informative and can only be displayed if a passenger name is
added to the Booking File. Depending on the airline, itinerary pricing may be
required before seat prices are displayed.
Example: Seat Map
How to Reserve a Seat Using the Seat Map
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add Seats and Services.
2. In the Seats and Services Catalogue, click on Seats.
3. In the Seat Map section, update the passenger and flight segment selection if
required.
4. To highlight certain seat features on the seat map, such as a seat suitable for
an unaccompanied minor, use the filter options in the Features section.
5. If you are reserving a seat for a passenger associated with an infant, you can
request a bassinet by selecting the Request Bassinet check box.
6. If there is more than one deck on the aircraft, select either Upper or Lower.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
73
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
7. To reserve a single seat, click on a seat or enter the seat number in the text
field provided and click on Add SSR.
8. To reserve multiple seats:
-
Click on an available seat for each passenger.
-
Alternatively, enter the seat numbers in the text field provided and click
on Add SSR. Ensure that the number of seats entered matches the
number of passengers selected.
When a seat is selected, the passenger number appears in the seat icon.
How to Modify a Seat Selection
1. In the Services (SSR and SVC) section of the Booking File, click on the
segment that you want to modify the seat selection for.
In the Seat Map section of the Seats and Services Catalogue, the selected
seat is displayed on the seat map.
2. To modify the selection, select a new seat on the seat map.
Alternatively, enter the new seat number in the text field provided.
3. Click on Close.
Managing Services
How to Add a Service
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add Seats and Services.
2. In the Seats and Services Catalogue, select the service category.
3. Select the service details for the required passengers and segments.
4. Click on Show and Request to expand the selected service.
If it is a chargeable service, you can see the cumulative price for each
passenger and the total price for all passengers. You can also see quota
information. For more details on quota information display, see How Is
Service Quota Information Displayed? on page 75.
5. If you change the passenger and segment association for a chargeable
service, click on Update Price to see the new price.
6. If the service requires more information, enter the information in the
Additional Details section.
You will not be able to submit the service request unless you complete the
mandatory fields highlighted in yellow.
7. Click on Request.
How to Delete a Service
In the Services Summary panel of the Seats and Services Catalogue:
a) Click on Delete beside the service you want to delete or click on Delete
All to delete all services.
b) Click on OK.
Or:
74
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
In the Services (SSR and SVC) section of the Booking File, click on Delete
beside the service that you want to delete or click on Delete All to delete all
services.
How Is Service Quota Information Displayed?
Service quota information displays the availability of a service in real time. The
level of service availability is indicated by an quota status or availability number in
the Availability column of the Seats and Services Catalogue.
Quota information is only displayed for the airlines that provide this information,
and it may not be provided for all services from the same airline.
Quota information is not displayed for standard services. It is only displayed for
chargeable services.
Video: How to Book Services From the Seats and Services
Catalogue
Launch
Working With Remarks and Other Service
Information
The Remarks, Other Service Information (OSI), Special Keywords (SK)
section is only displayed in the Booking File if it contains information.
How to Add a Remark
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add a Remark.
2. Select the Type, Passenger Association and Segment Association.
3. Enter the remark in the text box and click on Add Remark.
4. Click on OK.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
75
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Modify a Remark
1. In the Remarks, OSI, and SK section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update Remark.
Alternatively, click on Add a Remark in the What do you want to do next?
section.
2. Select the remark that you want to modify, update the remark in the text box
and click on Modify Remark.
3. Click on OK.
How to Delete a Remark
In the Remarks, OSI, and SK section of the Booking File, click on Delete beside
the remark that you want to delete.
How to Add an OSI
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add an Other Service Information.
2. Enter the airline code and select a passenger association.
3. Enter the OSI details in the text box and click on Add OSI.
4. Click on OK.
76
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Modify an OSI
1. In the Remarks, OSI, and SK section of the Booking File, click on
Add/Update OSI.
Alternatively, click on Add an Other Service Information in the What do
you want to do next? section.
2. Select the OSI that you want to modify, update the OSI details in the text box
and click on Modify OSI.
3. Click on OK.
How to Delete an OSI
In the Remarks, OSI, and SK section of the Booking File, click on Delete beside
the OSI that you want to delete.
Managing TSTs
Working With TSTs
How to Manually Create a TST
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Create TST.
Alternatively, click on Create TST in the What do you want to do next?
section of the Booking File.
2. Select the required passengers and segments for the TST.
3. If you want to use the same validating carrier for all segments in the TST,
select the Use this Validating Carrier check box and enter the airline code
or name in the corresponding text field.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
77
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The same airline then appears in the Validating Carrier field for each
segment of the TST.
4. Click on Confirm.
How to Display TST History
In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View TST History.
How to Delete a TST
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Delete beside the TST
that you want to delete.
If you want to delete all TSTs, click on Delete All.
2. To confirm the deletion, click on OK.
Modifying TSTs
How to Modify TST Information
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST for the
TST that you want to update.
2. Modify the information as required.
-
To automatically build fare calculation, click on the Create Automatically
link in the Additional Information section of the TST window.
-
To add or remove commission, see How to Add or Remove Commission
for a TST on page 79.
3. Click on Update and Save.
78
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Add or Remove Commission for a TST
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the Additional Information section of the TST window, enter or remove
commission for the TST using the Commission field.
3. Use the Apply Commission check box to apply the previously entered
commission to all the TSTs in the booking file or to a specific subset of TSTs
(including the one you are modifying).
To apply commission to specific TSTs, click on the All TSTs link and select
the TSTs to apply the commission to.
4. Click on Update and Confirm.
How to Add or Remove a Form of Payment for a TST
Note:
You can only remove the FOPs that are exclusively associated to the
TST being updated. If a FOP is associated to several documents, it is
not possible to remove it from the TST pop-up. This must be done from
the general FOP section in the Booking File.
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the Form of Payment Summary section of the TST window, add or
remove the FOP as required:
To add a new FOP:
a) Click on Add a New Form of Payment. This link is only available if the
issuing status of the TST is other than reissue.
b) Select the number of FOPs (with a maximum of three), select the
payment type and enter the payment details.
c) Click on Add.
To remove a single FOP:
Click on Remove from TST.
-
For global FOPs, the FOP is no longer associated with the current TST.
-
For a FOP associated with the current TST, the FOP is deleted.
To remove all FOPs:
Click on Remove All from TST.
How to Manage a Form of Payment for TST Manual Reissue
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the Form of Payment Summary section of the TST window, click on
Manage Form of Payment for Reissue.
Note:
The option to manage a form of payment for reissue is only
available when the TST has an issuing status of reissue.
3. Select the old FOP.
If you choose to manually create an old FOP, select the old FOP type from
the drop-down list.
4. Enter the FOP details and click on Add.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
79
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Prepare a TST for Manual Reissue
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. Click on Set TST for Manual Reissue.
How to Add or Remove a Passenger
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the TST header, click on Add/Remove Passengers.
3. Select the passenger that you want to add or remove and click on Update.
How to Add or Remove a Segment
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the TST header, click on Add/Remove Segments.
3. Select the segment that you want to add or remove and click on Update.
How to Add or Modify TST Taxes
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the TST header, click on View/Modify Taxes.
3. To add taxes, click on Add Tax and enter the tax details, or modify the tax
details already present.
4. Click on Update.
80
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Add or Modify TST Fees
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the TST header, click on View/Modify Fees.
3. To add fees, click on Add and enter the fee details, or modify the fee details
already present.
4. Click on Update.
How to Split a TST
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TST.
2. In the TST header, click on Split TST.
The Split TST link is only available if there is more than one passenger
associated with the TST.
3. Select the passengers to be split from the TST and click on Split TST.
Managing TSMs
Working With TSMs
How to Create a TSM
Note:
The Booking File must contain at least one special service request
(SSR) or an auxiliary service (SCV) before you can create a TSM.
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Create TSM.
Alternatively, click on Create TSM in the What do you want to do next?
section of the Booking File.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
81
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
-
If you are only creating one TSM and there are no existing TSMs in the
Booking File, a TSM pop-up window is displayed with the TSM details.
-
If you are creating multiple TSMs or there are existing TSMs in the
Booking File, a list of available TSMs is displayed in the pop-up window.
2. Click on Update.
Example: TSM
How to Display TSM History
In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View TSM History.
82
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Delete a TSM
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Delete beside the TSM
that you want to delete or click on Delete All to delete all TSMs in the
Booking File.
2. To confirm the deletion, click on OK.
Modifying TSMs
How to Modify TSM Information
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM beside
the TSM that you want to modify.
2. Modify the information as required and click on Update.
How to Modify TSM Coupons
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM beside
the TSM that you want to modify coupons for.
2. In the TSM pop-up window, click on Modify Coupons.
3. Modify the coupon information and click on Update.
How to Add or Remove a Form of Payment for a TSM
Note:
You can only remove the FOPs that are exclusively associated to the
TSM being updated. If a FOP is associated to several documents, it is
not possible to remove it from the TSM pop-up. This must be done from
the general FOP section in the Booking File.
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
83
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. In the Form of Payment Summary section of the TSM window, add or
remove the FOP as required:
To add a new FOP:
a) Click on Add a New Form of Payment.
b) Select the number of FOPs (with a maximum of three), select the
payment type and enter the payment details.
c) Click on Add.
To remove a single FOP:
Click on Remove from TSM.
-
For global FOPs, the FOP is no longer associated with the current TSM.
-
For a FOP associated with the current TSM, the FOP is deleted.
To remove all FOPs:
Click on Remove All from TSM.
How to Manage a Form of Payment for TSM Manual Reissue
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM.
2. In the Form of Payment Summary section of the TSM window, click on
Manage Form of Payment for Reissue.
Note:
The option to manage a form of payment for reissue is only
available when the TSM has an issuing status of reissue.
3. Select the old FOP.
If you choose to manually create an old FOP, select the old FOP type from
the drop-down list.
4. Enter the FOP details and click on Add.
How to Prepare a TSM for Manual Reissue
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM beside
the TSM that you want to modify.
2. Click on Set TSM for Manual Reissue.
How to Add or Modify TSM Taxes
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on View/Modify TSM beside
the TSM that you want to add taxes to.
2. In the TSM pop-up window, click on View/Modify Taxes.
3. Click on Add Tax and enter the tax details, or modify the tax details as
required.
4. Click on Update.
84
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Managing Fees
How to Create a TASF
Note:
The Booking File must contain at least one passenger before you can
create a TASF.
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Create TASF.
Alternatively, click on Create TASF in the What do you want to do next?
section of the Booking File.
Note:
You cannot add any remarks to the TASF when you first create it.
Remarks can only be added when you modify an existing TASF.
2. Check the passenger and fare information and update if required.
3. Select any necessary transaction information such as Reason for Issuance
Code (RFIC).
4. Add or remove any required taxes.
5. Click on Create TASF.
How to View or Modify a TASF
Note:
The only updates that can be made to a TASF is the addition of
remarks and miscellaneous information.
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on View/Modify TASF beside the
TASF that you want to view or modify.
2. Add any additional information and click on Update.
3. If you are not making any updates, click on the Close
button to exit.
How to View TASF Taxes
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on View/Modify TASF beside the
TASF that you want to view taxes for.
2. Click on Taxes.
3. To return to the Booking File, click on the Close
button.
How to Issue a Single TASF
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Issue TASF beside the TASF
that you want to issue.
2. In the Issue TASF pop-up window, click on Issue.
How to Issue Multiple TASFs
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Issue.
2. In the Issue pop-up window, select the elements that you want to issue.
Note:
You can combine the issuance of TASFs with other elements such
as TSTs and TSMs.
3. Click on Issue.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
85
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Delete a TASF
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Delete beside the TASF that
you want to delete or click on Delete All to delete all TASFs in the Booking
File.
2. To confirm the deletion, click on OK.
How to Void a Single TASF
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void TASF beside the TASF
that you want to void.
2. Click on Void.
How to Void Multiple TASFs
Note:
You can void multiple TASFs in combination with e-tickets and EMDs.
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void E-ticket/EMD/TASF.
2. Select the documents you want to void and click on Void.
Managing E-Tickets and EMDs
Issuing, Refunding and Voiding EMDs
How to Issue a Single EMD
Note:
There must be at least one TSM available in the Booking File before
you can issue an EMD.
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Issue EMD beside the
appropriate TSM.
2. In the Issue EMD pop-up window, select the Issue Directly on Airline
Stock check box if you want to issue the EMD directly on airline stock.
This option is only available if you can directly issue the EMD.
3. Click on Issue.
How to Issue Multiple EMDs
Note:
There must be at least one TSM available in the Booking File before
you can issue an EMD.
1. In the Tickets, EMD & TASF section, click on Issue.
2. Select the elements that you want to issue.
Note:
Some elements may be preselected depending on their ticketing
status. If you select different elements, the corresponding check
boxes are systematically selected irrespective of their ticketing
status.
3. If you want to issue the EMDs directly on airline stock, select the Issue
Directly on Airline Stock check box.
This option is only available if you can directly issue the EMD on airline stock.
86
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
4. Click on Issue.
Example: EMD
How to Void a Single EMD
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void EMD beside the EMD
that you want to void.
If all coupons in the EMD have a status of OPEN or AIRPORT CONTROL,
you can also void the EMD by displaying the EMD and clicking on the Void
hyperlink.
2. In the Void EMD pop-up window, select the Void directly on airline stock
check box if you want to void an EMD issued on airline stock.
3. Click on Void to confirm the action.
How to Void Multiple EMDs
Note:
You can void multiple EMDs in combination with e-tickets and TASFs.
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void E-ticket/EMD/TASF.
2. Select the documents you want to void.
3. Select the Void directly on airline stock check box if you want to void etickets or EMDs issued on airline stock.
4. Click on Void to confirm the action.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
87
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Are the Refund Types for EMDs?
Refund
Type
Description
Basic
Allows you to refund fully open or partially used EMDs. All remaining open
coupons (coupons with status O: Open or A: Airport Control) can be
refunded.
Full
Allows you to process the refund of fully open EMDs without displaying the
refund record first.
Zero
Allows you to process a refund with a total refund equal to zero.
How to Refund a Single EMD
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on the EMD that you want to
refund.
2. In the Display EMD window, click on Refund.
How to Refund Multiple EMDs
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Refund.
2. In the Refund window, select EMD as the document type.
3. Select the refund type.
4. Select the EMD that you want to refund and proceed as required for the
chosen refund type.
If the refund type is Basic or Zero:
a) Click on Continue to Refund Record.
b) When you are ready to process the refund, click on Save and Confirm.
If the refund type is Full:
Click on Refund Now.
Issuing, Refunding and Voiding E-Tickets
How to Issue a Single E-Ticket
Note:
There must be at least one TST available in the Booking File before you
can issue an e-ticket.
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Issue beside the relevant
TST.
2. Select the Issue Directly on Airline Stock check box if you want to issue on
airline stock.
This option is only available if you can directly issue the e-ticket on airline
stock.
3. Click on Issue.
88
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Issue Multiple E-Tickets
Note:
There must be at least one TST available in the Booking File before you
can issue an e-ticket.
1. In the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section, click on Issue.
2. Select the elements you want to issue.
Note:
Some elements may be preselected depending on their ticketing
status. If you select different elements, the corresponding check
boxes are systematically selected irrespective of their ticketing
status.
3. Select the Issue Directly on Airline Stock check box if you want to issue on
airline stock.
This option is only available if you can directly issue the e-ticket on airline
stock.
4. Click on Issue.
How to Void a Single E-Ticket
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void E-ticket beside the eticket that you want to void.
2. In the Void E-ticket pop-up window, select the Void directly on airline
stock check box if you want to void an e-ticket issued on airline stock.
3. Click on Void.
How to Void Multiple E-Tickets
Note:
You can void multiple e-tickets in combination with EMDs and TASFs.
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Void E-ticket/EMD/TASF.
2. Select the documents you want to void.
3. Select the Void directly on airline stock check box if you want to void etickets or EMDs issued on airline stock.
4. Click on Void.
What Are the Refund Types for E-Tickets?
Refund Type
Description
Basic
Allows you to refund fully open or partially flown etickets. All remaining open coupons (coupons with
status O: Open or A: Airport Control) can be refunded.
Basic Full
Allows you to process the refund of fully open e-tickets
without displaying the refund record first.
No Report
Allows you to process the refund with the airline
without displaying the refund record first.
Tax Only
Allows you to refund the tax only.
Zero
Allows you to process a refund with a total refund equal
to zero. For example, you can refund an e-ticket with
its TST total set to zero.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
89
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Refund Type
Description
ATC Basic
An automated refund that automatically populates the
refund record with refund data. Unlike ATC Full, you
must then process the refund record.
ATC Full
Similar to ATC Basic but the refund is processed
directly. You cannot update the refund record before
processing. This type of refund is only applicable to
fully open e-tickets.
How to Refund a Single E-Ticket
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on the e-ticket number of the eticket that you want to refund.
2. In the E-ticket window, click on Refund.
3. In the Refund window, select the refund type.
If the refund type is Basic, Tax Only, Zero or ATC Basic:
a) Click on Continue to Refund Record.
b) Update the record if necessary and when you are ready to process the
refund, click on Save and Confirm.
If the refund type is Full, No Report or ATC Full:
Click on Refund Now.
How to Refund Multiple E-Tickets
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Refund.
2. In the Refund window, select E-tickets as the document type.
3. Select the refund type: (Manual) Full, (Manual) No Report or (ATC) Full
Refund.
4. Select the e-tickets that you want to refund and click on Refund Now.
Revalidating E-Tickets
When Can E-Tickets be Revalidated?
Revalidation can only be performed on e-tickets that are associated with the
current retrieved Booking File, which contains at least one flight segment that is
not in the past.
Instead of reissuing an e-ticket when segments have been modified, you can
revalidate the e-ticket provided that the segment has one the following:
90
•
Different flight number.
•
Different flight date or time.
•
Different arrival or departure airport within the same city.
•
Different airline (if allowed, within the same airline group).
•
Same fare.
•
Status A or O.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Revalidate a Single E-Ticket
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on the e-ticket that you want to
revalidate.
2. In the E-Ticket pop-up window, click on Revalidate.
3. Select the modified segments and select the e-ticket coupons to revalidate.
4. Click on Revalidate.
How to Revalidate Multiple E-Tickets
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Revalidate.
You can also click on Revalidate E-Tickets if you receive an Information
pop-up message in the Booking File when e-ticket revalidation is
recommended.
2. Select the passengers for each e-ticket that you want to revalidate and click
on Next step.
3. Select the modified segments and e-ticket coupons to revalidate.
4. Click on Revalidate.
Associating E-Tickets and EMDs to a Booking File
How to Manually Associate an E-Ticket to a Booking File
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Add Manual E-ticket (FHE).
2. Enter the e-ticket number in the text field and select a passenger and
segment association for the e-ticket.
3. Click on Save.
How to Manually Associate an EMD to a Booking File
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Add Manual EMD (FHD).
2. Enter the EMD reference in the text field and select a passenger and
segment association for the e-ticket.
3. Click on Save.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
91
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Retrieving E-Tickets and EMDs
How to Retrieve an E-Ticket
1. On the Main page, expand the Retrieve E-ticket or EMD menu and click on
the e-ticket option to display the search panel.
2. Enter the search criteria and click on Search E-ticket.
If only a single record is returned in the search results, the e-ticket pop-up is
displayed.
-
To open the Booking File associated with the e-ticket, click on Open
Booking File.
If several records are returned, the results are listed in the Search panel.
-
To display a specific e-ticket, select the e-ticket and click on Display Eticket. Alternatively, double-click on the e-ticket.
-
To open the Booking File associated with the e-ticket, click on Open
Booking File.
How to Retrieve an EMD
1. On the Main page, expand the Retrieve E-ticket or EMD menu and click on
the EMD option to display the Search panel.
2. Enter the search criteria and click on Search EMD.
If only a single record is returned in the search results, the EMD pop-up is
displayed.
-
To open the Booking File associated with the EMD, click on Open
Booking File.
If several records are returned, the results are listed in the Search panel.
-
To display a specific EMD, select the EMD and click on Display EMD.
Alternatively, double-click on the EMD.
-
To open the Booking File associated with the EMD, click on Open
Booking File.
Changing an Itinerary and Reissuing E-Tickets Using ATC
What Is ATC?
Amadeus Ticket Changer (ATC) allows you to reissue or revalidate e-tickets and
create or update the relevant documents (such as TSTs and TSMs). It
determines the re-pricing details between the original and new itinerary to
include:
•
Additional amount to be paid or refunded
•
Penalty
•
Grand total for the re-pricing solution
ATC does not apply to group Booking Files. You can re-price for multiple
passengers but they must all have the same itinerary.
92
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Example: ATC
Which Itinerary Changes is ATC Used For?
•
Travel date
•
Flight numbers
•
Booking class
•
Routing (domestic or international)
•
Past date of segments that have not yet been flown
How to Reissue an E-Ticket Using ATC
Note:
To access ATC, the Booking File must contain at least one e-ticket.
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on ATC Reissue.
2. If there are multiple e-tickets, select the e-tickets you want to reissue.
3. To view the flight information, click on the active link for the operating carrier
in the Coupons column.
4. Select your new itinerary. You can select multiple segments.
5. To define additional options such as private fares, public fares, corporate
codes, point of ticketing or point of sale, click on Show More ATC Options.
6. Select a re-pricing mode of either Standard or Best Pricer.
Note:
If you choose the Best Pricer mode, the itinerary may be re-priced
in a different booking class from the class originally chosen.
7. To display the price details and fare conditions, click on Informative ATC.
Note:
Using Informative ATC does not make any change to the Booking
File.
8. Click on Confirm and Create TST.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
93
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The TSTs for the exchanged tickets are deleted. As required, ATC creates
new elements for the additional collection, residual value, and change
penalty.
9. In the Form of Payment pop-up window, select the form of payment to
reissue or create a new form of payment.
See also How to Reissue a Form of Payment on page 113.
10. Review the passenger and payment details and click on Reissue.
11. Go to the Command Page and add the validating carrier for the new stored
fares.
12. As necessary, add a form of payment for the automatically created TSMs
corresponding to residual values or change penalties. Every TSM must have
a form of payment.
Refer to How to Add or Remove a Form of Payment for a TSM on page 83.
13. To complete the reissue, jointly issue the automatically created stored fares:
a) Click on Issue in the Stored Fares (TST & TSM) section.
b) Select the document you want to issue and click on Issue.
Video: How to Manually Reissue an E-Ticket
Launch
How to Print, Email or Fax an E-Ticket or EMD Receipt
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on Print/Email/Fax Document
Receipt.
2. Select the document type.
3. Select the e-ticket or EMD.
4. Select the language for the document.
5. Select the delivery method and click on the corresponding button to:
94
-
Print
-
Email
-
Fax
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Set a Ticketing Arrangement
1. Click on Set Ticketing Arrangement in the Tickets, EMD and TASF
section.
2. Enter the required details in the Ticketing Arrangement pop-up window and
click on Add Ticketing Arrangement.
3. Click on OK.
Note:
A time limit ticketing arrangement can also be entered directly using the
Set Ticketing Arrangement calendar field in the Booking file
Information section.
How to Create an Original Issued Document (FO)
1. In the Tickets, EMD and TASF section, click on the link entitled Create
Original/Issued in Exchange For.
Note:
There must be at least one e-ticket or EMD in the Booking File to
see this option.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
95
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Select the document for which you want to create the FO element and modify
the original document number if required.
3. Select whether you want to include all coupons or only specific coupons for
FO element creation. Only coupons with an Open status will be included.
-
If you choose to include all coupons, the Coupon field in the Original
Document section will be prefilled with a value of 1.
-
If you choose to include only specific coupons, you must manually enter
the corresponding coupon numbers in the Coupon field and separate
them by a comma or dash.
4. To add segment association:
a) Click on Associate to Specific Segments.
b) Enter the segment ID in the text box.
c) Select the required segments.
5. By default, the details of the first and second exchange documents are
hidden.
-
To display or update the first exchange document, deselect the check
box entitled First Exchange Document is the Same as Original
Document.
-
To add or update the second exchange document, click on Add Second
Exchange Document.
6. Click on Create.
How to Issue a Car E-Voucher
Note:
To issue a car e-voucher, a car segment must be active within the
Booking File and include a contact point (AP element) and ticketing
information (TK element).
1. Click on the Car E-Voucher tab in the Tickets, EMD and TASF section.
96
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
2. Enter the required details in the Issue E-Voucher pop-up window and click
on Issue.
Working With Manual Bookings
Managing Manual Bookings
What Is a Manual Booking?
A manual booking is a graphic representation of an Extended Travel Record
(ETR), a feature of a Total Travel Record (TTR). It allow you to store bookings
that are made on non-GDS external booking systems in a structured and
standardised format.
Manual bookings can be added to a Booking File as new segments, which are
displayed together with GDS segments in chronological order to allow a full trip
view in the Itinerary Details section.
Examples of manual bookings include a flight that is booked through the airline's
website or a taxi journey that is booked directly with the taxi provider.
Note:
Any changes or cancellations to manual bookings must be done directly
with the provider outside of Selling Platform Connect.
What Are the Types of Manual Booking?
•
Activities Miscellaneous
•
Air
•
Car
•
Cruise
•
Excursion
•
Hotel
•
Insurance
•
Rail
•
Service Miscellaneous
•
Show and Event
•
Taxi
•
Transfer
How to Add a Manual Booking to a Booking File
Note:
You need to first create the booking with the provider before adding it
as a manual booking to the Booking File.
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, click on Add manual
booking and select the booking type.
Or:
In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add manual booking, select the booking type, and click on Add.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
97
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Enter any summary information for the booking, including passenger
association. See also Associating Passengers With a Manual Booking on
page 99.
3. Expand the Details section to enter more comprehensive information for the
booking.
4. To add the booking to the Booking File, click on Add.
5. To associate a purchase price to the booking before adding it to the Booking
File, click on Add with pricing.
a) In the Create manual booking price pop-up window, check the manual
booking details and define the necessary pricing information.
The passengers who are associated with the manual booking are
displayed in the Passenger Association section. Passenger association
is mandatory for adding a purchase price. See also Adding a Purchase
Price to a Manual Booking on page 100.
-
You can select which passengers in the manual booking to associate
with the pricing. To add other passengers that are not listed, you need to
close the pop-up and add them to the manual booking.
-
You can define either the global price for the booking and all of the
associated passengers, or just the price per passenger.
b) Click on Create.
Example: Adding an Air Manual Booking
How to Modify a Manual Booking
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking segment and click on Modify.
To change the booking status of a manual booking, see How to Modify the
Booking Status of a Manual Booking on page 99.
98
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
To modify the passenger association of a manual booking, refer to How to
Modify the Passenger Association of a Manual Booking below.
2. Update the information as required and click on Modify.
What Are the Booking States of a Manual Booking?
•
HK (Confirmed)
•
HL (Waitlisted)
•
HX (Cancelled)
•
HN (On Request)
•
TT (Time to Think)
•
NB (Not Booked)
How to Modify the Booking Status of a Manual Booking
Note:
Changing the status of a manual booking to cancelled (HX) does not
cancel the non-GDS booking with the provider and it does not delete it.
The booking must be cancelled directly with the provider.
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking that you want to modify and click on the Modify button.
2. Select the new booking status from the Status drop-down list and click on
Modify.
How to Remove a Manual Booking from a Booking File
Note:
To cancel the booking, you must cancel it directly with the provider.
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking that you want to remove and click on Cancel.
2. To confirm, click on Cancel Segments.
The manual booking is removed from the Booking File.
Associating Passengers With a Manual Booking
When Can Passengers Be Associated With a Manual Booking?
•
When you are adding the manual booking to a Booking File. See How to Add
a Manual Booking to a Booking File on page 97.
•
When you are modifying the manual booking. See How to Modify a Manual
Booking on page 98 and How to Modify the Passenger Association of a
Manual Booking below.
How to Modify the Passenger Association of a Manual Booking
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking segment and click on Modify or the Edit link next to the passenger.
2. To delete a passenger association, click on the Delete icon
passenger.
next to the
Alternatively, select the passenger and press the Delete or Backspace key.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
99
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Note:
You can only delete passengers who have not yet been associated
with a manual booking price.
3. To add a new association, start to type the passenger name or number,
including the letter P (for example, P1 for passenger 1), in the Associated to
field and select the passenger from the autocomplete options.
Note:
You can only associate passengers that are already in the Booking
File. If a passenger is not available in the autocomplete options, you
need to first add them to the Booking File.
4. Click on Modify.
Adding a Purchase Price to a Manual Booking
When Can a Purchase Price Be Added to a Manual Booking?
•
When you are adding the manual booking to the Booking File. See How to
Add a Manual Booking to a Booking File on page 97.
•
When the manual booking already exists in the Booking File. See How to Add
a Purchase Price to a Manual Booking below.
How to Add a Purchase Price to a Manual Booking
Note:
The relevant site parameters must be configured and activated before
you can add a price to a manual booking.
1. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking that you want to add a price to and click on Manual Booking
Pricing.
Note:
You can add a purchase price to several Air or Rail manual
bookings at the same time by using the Ctrl button when selecting
them.
2. In the Create manual booking price pop-up window, check the manual
booking details and define the necessary pricing information.
Passenger association is mandatory for adding a purchase price.
-
You can select which passengers in the manual booking to associate
with the pricing. See also How to Modify the Passenger Association of a
Manual Booking on page 99.
-
To add other passengers that are not listed, you need to close the pop-up
and add them to the manual booking.
-
You can define either the global price for the booking and all of the
associated passengers, or just the price per passenger.
Note:
An infant cannot be associated to a purchase price.
3. Click on Create.
100
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Example: Adding a Purchase Price for an Air Manual Booking
How to Modify the Purchase Price of a Manual Booking
1. In the Manual Booking Prices section of the Booking File, select the manual
booking and click on Modify.
2. In the Modify manual booking price pop-up window, check the booking
details and update the pricing information as required.
Note:
For an existing purchase price, the passenger association cannot
be modified. To change this information, you need to:
a) Cancel the manual booking.
b) Create a new manual booking with the correct passenger selection for
the purchase price creation.
c) Add a price to the new manual booking.
3. Click on Modify to save the changes.
Working With Offers
What Are Offers?
Offers are trip quotations where you price the different elements of the itinerary
for your customer before booking any segments.
After an offer is manually confirmed in the Offers section of the Booking File, it is
converted to segment information in the Itinerary Details section.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
101
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Image: Offers Section in the Booking File
What Are the Types of Offer?
Manual
GDS (Air)
Description
Manual offers are based on the information
that is available on the external provider's
website. The types of manual offer are the
same as the types of manual bookings.
Refer to What Are the Types of Manual
Booking? on page 97. When a manual
offer is confirmed, it is converted to a
manual booking.
When a GDS offer is
confirmed, the offer is
automatically converted
to a GDS segment and a
TST is created.
Actions
Possible
Add, modify, confirm, send offer notice,
and cancel.
Verify, confirm, send offer
notice, and cancel.
How to Add a Manual Offer to a Booking File
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the Booking File, click on
Add manual offer, select the offer type, and click on Add.
If an offer was already added to the Booking File, you can also click on Add
manual offer in the Offers section of the Booking File and select the offer
type.
2. Complete the required information and click on Add.
102
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Modify a Manual Offer
Note:
You can only modify a manual offer with a Valid status, and you cannot
modify a manual offer that has already been sent by email.
1. In the Offers section of the booking file, select the manual offer and click on
Modify.
2. Update the information as required and click on Modify.
How to Verify a GDS Offer
1. To verify if an Air GDS offer is still valid, select the offer in the Offers section
of the Booking File and click on Verify.
A pop-up message confirms whether the offer is still valid or not.
2. Click on OK or the Close button
to close the pop-up message.
How to Confirm an Offer
1. In the Offers section of the Booking File, select the offer and click on
Confirm.
A pop-up message is displayed to indicate whether the confirmation was
successful or not.
2. Click on OK or the Close button
to close the pop-up message.
If the offer is successfully confirmed, it appears in the Offers section (with a
Confirmed status), Itinerary Details section and, if activated, in the Sales
section.
-
When a GDS offer is confirmed, it is converted into a GDS segment.
-
When a manual offer is confirmed, it is converted to a manual booking
and also displayed in the Manual Booking Prices section of the Booking
File. The booking must be confirmed directly with the provider.
How to Send an Offer Notice By Email
1. Select the offer in the Offers section of the Booking File and click on Send
Offer Notice.
You can select more than one offer to send.
2. In the Send offer notice pop-up window, the email address is prefilled with
the first email address (APE) from the general contact that is stored in the
current Booking File. Enter a new address if required and click on Send.
A confirmation pop-up message is displayed to indicate whether the offer
notice was successfully sent or not.
If the notice was successfully sent, each of the selected offers in the notice
will display an email icon with the date that the notice was sent.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
103
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Cancel an Offer
1. In the Offers section of the booking file, select the offer that you want to
cancel.
You can select more than one offer.
2. Click on Cancel offers.
3. In the Confirmation pop-up window, confirm the cancellation.
Working With Sales Information
Understanding Sales Information
What Are Sales Items?
Sales items are financial items resulting from bookings made through the
Amadeus GDS (such as Air, Car, and Hotel) and manual bookings that are added
directly to the Booking File.
All sales items are displayed together with manual (non-GDS) bookings in the
Sales section of the Booking File, where you can do all booking- and salesrelated actions in the same view.
Note:
The Sales section is only displayed in the Booking File when sales item
information is available in the Total Travel Record (TTR).
When Are Sales Items Created?
Booking Type
Sales Item Creation
Manual bookings
When the Quotation Purchase element is available.
Air GDS bookings
When the TST exists.
Car, Hotel, and other GDS
bookings
When the corresponding segment is available in the
TTR.
EMD bookings
When the TSM exists.
What Are the Types of Sales Item?
104
Sales Item
Description
Air
GDS and manual (non-GDS) air booking.
Ancillary Service
Ancillary service booking through GDS EMD.
Car
GDS and manual car booking.
Cruise
Manual cruise booking.
Excess Baggage
Excess baggage booking through GDS EMD.
Food
Food booking through GDS EMD.
Hotel
GDS and manual hotel booking.
Insurance
GDS insurance booking.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Sales Item
Description
Other
General item type that is displayed when no other
supported item type is appropriate.
External (manual)
The following types of manual booking are specified as
external:
•
Rail
•
Transfer
•
Excursion
•
Taxi
•
Activities miscellaneous
•
Service miscellaneous
Package
Package is the parent item for a bundle of sales items.
Service Fee
Sales item created using the Sales section dedicated
to a service fee.
Show and Event
Manual ticket booking for shows and events.
What Are the States for a Sales Item?
State of Sales Item
Description
ACT
An active sales item. However, this state abbreviation is never
displayed. All items with no other status abbreviation are active
by default.
CAN
A cancelled item with the original amount. This type is usually
available as a pair together with a refunded item. Cancelled
and refunded sales items are usually the result of an autocorrection process that is triggered by a segment change after
invoicing.
COR
A corrected item with the original amount. This type is usually
available as a pair together with a correct item with a reverse
amount. Corrected items are usually the result of a manual
sales item correction after invoicing.
CR2
A corrected item with the reverse amount. This type is usually
available as a pair together with a correct item with an original
amount. Corrected items are usually the result of a manual
sales item correction after invoicing.
IGN
These items are displayed in grey with a strikethrough price if
they still have a link to an active child item. Otherwise, they are
not displayed in the Sales section.
RFN
A refunded item with the reverse amount. This type is usually
available as a pair together with a cancelled item. Cancelled
and refunded sales items are usually the result of an autocorrection process that is triggered by a segment change after
invoicing.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
105
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Explanation: Sales and Documents Section

The general sales information section displays the trip summary. You can also
directly edit the details in this section using the Edit General Information link.

The Sales table action bar enables you to perform sales actions on one or more
selected items.

The filter section enables you to switch between:

•
All items view, except ignored (IGN) items.
•
Reduced view of only the active items.
•
Invoicing view of only the items that need to be invoiced.
The Sales table enables you to select and access the details of each sales item
that is listed.
The default customer that is displayed for each item is based on how the Booking
File was created.
•
The first company profile that is entered in the Booking File is the default
customer.
•
If there is no company profile, then the default is the first customer profile that
is entered in the Booking File.
•
If there is no customer profile, then nothing is displayed in the Customer
column.
It is possible to change the default customer that is displayed in the Sales table.
Refer to Changing Customer Associations on page 119.

The Documents section displays all issued documents. See What Are the Types
of Sale Documents? on page 109.
The Amount Paid and Balance fields are only filled for invoice documents.
The Balance is the Amount Paid minus the Sales Price:
106
•
If the Balance is zero, the invoice is fully paid.
•
If the Balance is a negative value, the invoice is not yet fully paid and the
value displayed is the remaining amount due.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Displaying and Modifying Sales Information
How to Display Sales Information
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File:
-
Click on Show items beside a document to expand all items belonging to
that document only.
Or:
-
Click on Show all items to expand all items belonging to all documents.
2. Click on the Details link of a sales item.
3. In the Details pop-up window, click on the relevant tab to display the required
details.
What Price Details Can be Modified?
You can only edit the purchase price information for Fee and Package items.
You can edit the margin and discount information for all sales items provided they
have not yet been invoiced.
You can enter positive and negative values in all editable price fields.
The Cancellation Penalty is displayed in read-only mode for GDS and manual
bookings. It can only be edited for refunded items.
Explanation: Price Details Display

The Base Fare value summarises all applied base fares.
For non-invoiced packaged items, use the Details link to display and edit the
detailed fare information and add or remove a base fare.

The Additional Charges value summarises all applied additional charges.
For non-invoiced packaged items, use the Details link to display and edit the
detailed charges information and add new charges.

The Airline Fees value summarises all applied airline fees for Air sales items.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
107
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect

User Guide
The Taxes value summarises all applied base taxes.
For non-invoiced packaged items, use the Details link to display and edit detailed
tax information and add or remove taxes.

The Cancellation Penalty is displayed in read-only mode for GDS and manual
bookings. The cancellation penalty can only be edited for refunded (RFN) items.

The Subtotal Fare represents the calculated sum on all purchase price
components of one sales item.

The Margin refers to the mark-up for the travel agency. This field is displayed in
edit mode for non-invoiced items only.

The Discount refers to the rebate granted by the travel agency. This field is
displayed in edit mode for non-invoiced items only.

The Sales Price is calculated based on the subtotal fare plus the margin and
minus the discount.

The Gross Profit Calculation is the calculation of the travel agency's gross profit
based on the available values for commission, margin, and discount.
How to Modify Price Details
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on the Details link of the sales
item you want to modify.
2. In the Details pop-up window, click on the Price Details tab.
3. Modify the price details as required and click on Update.
What Sales Details can be Modified?
The sales details that are displayed depend on the sales item.
The currency refers to the currency used for the sale.
The fields that can be modified depend on the item status:
•
For invoiced sales items, no modification is possible and a correction process
must be applied if a modification is needed.
•
For non-invoiced sales items, the sales information can be modified but the
booking information (GDS and manual bookings) cannot be modified.
•
For corrected items with the original amount (COR) or reverse amount (CR2),
no modification is possible.
How to Modify Sales Details
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on the Details link of the sales
item you want to modify.
2. In the Details pop-up window, click on the Sales Details tab.
3. Modify the sales details as required and click on Update.
To change the customer association for a sales item, refer to Changing Customer
Associations on page 119.
108
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
Displaying and Issuing Documents and Invoices
What Are the Types of Sale Documents?
•
Invoice
•
Credit note
•
Quotation (offer)
•
Payment receipt
What Are the Prerequisites for Issuing Sales Documents and
Invoices?
•
At least one sales item must be selected.
•
If you are selecting several sales items, each item must belong to the same
customer.
•
The selected items cannot contain any ignored items.
•
If a trip package or supplement is selected, all items in the package or
supplement must be selected.
•
Any new active or refunding items cannot be invoiced before the correcting
item. They must be issued together.
How to Display the Details of a Sales Document
In the Documents section of the Booking File, click on the link in the Document
Name column for the document you want to display.
Or:
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on the Details link of the sales
item you want to display.
2. In the Details pop-up window, click on the Documents tab.
3. Click on the link in the Document Name column for the document you want
to display.
How to Preview a Sales Document Before Issuing
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the item that you want to
preview the document for.
2. Click on Issue Document and select the document type from the drop-down
list.
3. In the expanded Documents section, click on Preview to display the
document as a PDF in a new window.
How to Issue a Sales Document
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the items that you want to
issue a document for.
2. Click on Issue Document and select the document type from the drop-down
list.
3. In the expanded Documents section, complete the relevant information.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
109
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. When complete, click on one of the following:
-
Preview: to preview the document in PDF format.
-
Issue and Display: to issue the document and display it in a new
browser window.
-
Issue: to issue the document directly without displaying it.
The document appears in the Documents tab of the Details pop-up window
and also in the Documents section of the Booking File.
See How to Display the Details of a Sales Document on page 109.
How to Preview an Invoice Before Issuing
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the item that you want to
preview the invoice for.
2. Click on Issue Invoice.
3. In the expanded Invoice section, click on Preview to display the invoice as a
PDF in a new window.
How to Issue an Invoice
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the items that you want to
issue the invoice for.
You can select several items for the same issue action. However, you can
only issue an invoice document once.
2. Click on Issue Invoice.
3. In the expanded Invoice section, complete the relevant information.
4. If payment options are not yet registered in the Booking File, click on Add
Payment and enter the necessary payment details.
5. If you want to remove a newly added manual payment, click on Remove.
Note:
You cannot remove existing payments. You can only remove a
manual payment before it is saved. You can select or clear an
existing payment. If it is not used, it is still available in the Booking
File.
6. If you do not want to issue a travel agency payment receipt, clear the Issue
Payment Receipt check box.
7. When complete, click on one of the following:
-
Preview: to register the payment and preview the invoice or document in
PDF format.
-
Issue and Display: to issue the invoice and display it in a new browser
window.
-
Issue: to issue the invoice directly without displaying it.
A link to the issued document is displayed in the Status column.
The document appears in the Documents tab of the Sales Information
pop-up window and also in the Documents section of the Booking File.
See How to Display the Details of a Sales Document on page 109.
110
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
What Is a Duplicate Invoice?
A duplicate invoice synchronises payments that are collected after the original
invoice was issued.
You issue a duplicate invoice to show that the invoice has been paid when
payment is received after initial invoicing.
A duplicate invoice contains the same information as the original invoice with the
exception of the document name and updated payment information.
How to Issue a Duplicate Invoice
1. In the Documents section of the Booking File, select the invoice that you
want to issue a duplicate of.
Note:
You can only select one invoice. You cannot select multiple
invoices for the same duplicate action.
2. Click on Issue Duplicate Invoice.
3. Enter the invoice and email options and any remarks that you want to have
printed on the document.
4. When complete, click on one of the following:
-
Preview: to preview the duplicate invoice in PDF format.
-
Issue and Display: to issue the duplicate invoice and display it in a new
browser window.
-
Issue: to issue the duplicate invoice directly without displaying it.
You can create a duplicate invoice several times.
A duplicate invoice is not stored in the archive, and it will not create a new
document entry in the Documents section.
Managing Travel Agency Fees
How to Add a Travel Agency Fee to a Sales Item
1. In the What do you want to do next? section of the relevant Booking File,
click on Add Fee. The Booking File must have been previously saved to add
a fee using this option.
Or:
In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on Add Fee and select
General.
2. The fee type is selected as Service Fee.
3. Enter the fee amount and complete any other required details.
4. Click on Add General Fee.
How to Void a Travel Agency Fee
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the fee item.
2. Click on Correction and select Void Fees.
For non-invoiced items:
-
The item status changes to IGN (ignored).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
111
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
-
User Guide
The item is no longer visible in the Sales table unless it is linked to a
product item such as Air, Car, or Hotel.
For invoiced items:
-
A link to the item appears in the Status column, followed by the status
COR in brackets.
-
A new item with the reverse amount is created with a status of NonInvoiced (CR2). The item type is prefixed with the word Corrective.
Image: Invoiced Item with Voided Fees
Managing Payments
What Are the Different Forms of Payment?
Payment
Description
Automatic supplier payment
Relates to any GDS booking paid by credit card (global
FOP). The travel agency does not receive any payment
from the customer; the booking is paid directly to the
supplier. This is indicated on the invoice as 'already
paid'.
Manual supplier payment
Relates to manual bookings. These payments must be
manually created to ensure that the invoice document
correctly shows that it has already been paid. These
payments appear in the Manual Payment to Supplier
sub-section of the Form of Payment section of the
Booking File.
Travel agency payments
Created during or after invoicing to indicate the amount
due to the travel agency. These payments appear in
the Payment to Travel Agency sub-section of the
Form of Payment section of the Booking File.
Example: Form of Payment Section
What Is a Credit Card Approval Code?
An approval code is a credit card authorisation and validation number that is
received from the bank. The code is an optional entry (activated by a site
parameter) when adding a credit card form of payment to a Booking File. After
112
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
the form of payment is added, the approval code is displayed in the Form of
Payment section of the Booking File starting with either the letter A for automatic
or the letter N for manual.
Image: Credit Card Approval Code
How to Add a Global Form of Payment to a Booking
Note:
A global form of payment is valid for all documents (such as TSTs and
TSMs) that do not have an associated form of payment. This is also
valid if documents are created after the form of payment is entered.
1. In the What do you want to do next? section or the Form of Payment
section of the Booking File, click on Add a Form of Payment.
2. In the FOP tab of the Form of Payment pop-up window, select the form of
payment from the drop-down menu.
If you select Credit Card:
-
Enter the credit card details.
-
If activated at site level, enter an optional approval code.
3. Enter the payment details and click on Add.
4. To return to the Booking File, click on Close.
How to Delete a Form of Payment
In the Form of Payment section of the Booking File:
•
Click on Delete beside the form of payment that you want to delete.
Or:
•
Click on Delete All to delete all forms of payment.
How to Reissue a Form of Payment
1. In the Form of Payment section of the Booking File, click on Reissue a
Form of Payment.
2. Select the form of payment to reissue.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
113
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
If you select a global form of payment:
-
The FOP tab is displayed. Click on Reissue.
If you select an associated form of payment:
-
The Advanced FOP tab is displayed with the passenger and document
associations preselected. Click on Reissue.
If you select to manually create a form of payment:
a) Select the old form of payment.
b) Select either a global or advanced form of payment.
c) Select the new form of payment and enter the details.
d) Click on Reissue.
How to Add a Travel Agency Payment to an Invoice Before Issuing
1. When you have selected the sales item for issuing, enter the payment
options as required.
2. If payment options are not yet registered in the Booking File, click on Add
Payment and enter the necessary payment details.
The payment details will also be available in the archived invoice.
3. If you want to remove a newly added payment, click on Remove.
Note:
You cannot remove existing payments. You can only remove a
payment before it is assigned. However, you can select or clear
existing payments.
4. When complete, click on one of the following:
-
Preview: to register the payment and preview the invoice in PDF format.
-
Issue: to register the payment without displaying the invoice, link the
payment to the new invoice, and issue the invoice.
-
Issue and Display: to register the payment, display the invoice, link the
payment to the new invoice, and issue the invoice.
How to Add a Travel Agency Payment to an Issued Invoice
1. In the Documents section of the Booking File, select the invoice and click on
Assign Payment.
2. Enter the payment options as required.
The payment details will not be available in the archived invoice.
3. If you want to remove a newly added payment, click on Remove.
Note:
You cannot remove existing payments. You can only remove a
payment before it is assigned. However, you can select or clear
existing payments.
4. If you do not want to issue a travel agency payment receipt, clear the Issue
Payment Receipt check box.
5. Any previously registered payments are displayed. Select a registered
payment if you want to use it.
6. To add a new payment, click on Add Payment.
A new payment line is displayed to allow you to enter the payment details.
7. When complete, click on Assign Payments.
114
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Issue a Travel Agency Payment Receipt
1. Under Payments to Travel Agency in the Form of Payment section of the
Booking File, click on Issue Payment Receipt next to the item that you want
to issue a receipt for.
2. You can also issue a payment receipt when:
-
Issuing an invoice.
-
Adding a travel agency payment using the Form of Payment section.
-
Adding a travel agency payment to an issued invoice.
See How to Issue an Invoice on page 110, How to Add a Travel Agency
Payment Using the Form of Payment Section below, and How to Add a
Travel Agency Payment to an Issued Invoice on page 114.
3. Enter the email options and click on one of the following:
-
Preview: to preview the receipt in PDF format.
-
Issue and Display: to issue the receipt and display it in a new browser
window.
-
Issue: to issue the receipt directly without displaying it.
The payment receipt document is archived and a new document entry for the
receipt is displayed in the Documents section.
Note:
You can only issue a payment receipt once for a payment.
How to Register a Supplier Payment
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on Register Supplier
Payment.
2. Enter the supplier payment options, and click on Register supplier
payment.
How to Void a Supplier or Travel Agency Payment
In the Form of Payment section of the Booking File, click on Void Payment
beside the supplier or travel agency payment that you want to void.
Note:
The Void Payment link is only available if the payment has not yet
been used in an invoice or payment receipt.
How to Add a Travel Agency Payment Using the Form of Payment
Section
1. In the Form of Payments section, click on Add a Form of Payment.
2. In the Payments to Travel Agency tab of the Form of Payment dialogue
box, enter the required details.
3. To search for a profile, click on Search a Profile.
a) In the Search Active Profile pop-up window, enter the search criteria
and click on Retrieve.
b) Select the profile in the results list and click on Select.
4. To add a new payment, click on Add Payment.
A new payment line is displayed to allow you to enter the payment details.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
115
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
5. If you do not want to issue a travel agency payment receipt, clear the Issue
Payment Receipt check box.
6. When complete, click on Create Payment.
Image: Adding a Travel Agency Payment Using the Form of Payment Dialogue Box
Handling Trip Packages
What Is the Purpose of a Trip Package?
A trip package is used to structure the content that is displayed on the invoice.
All item details are listed separately, but only one summary package price is
shown for all of these items. Therefore if you add a mark-up to a trip package,
this specific price is not displayed on the invoice.
How to Create a Trip Package
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the items you want to add to
the trip package.
2. Click on the Package button and select Create Package.
3. Enter any optional information for the package.
Note:
If you enter an end date for the package in the To field, you must
also enter an earlier start date in the Date From field.
4. Click on Create Package.
A new sales item, of the type Package, appears in the Sales section in
addition to each individual item that is included in the package. All items will
be displayed in the printed document.
How to Add Items to a Trip Package
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the items you want to add to
the trip package.
Any selected items that are linked to other items (for example, linked fees)
are added to the package with their parent item.
2. Click on the Package button in the action bar.
A list of existing packages is displayed.
3. Click on the package name you want to add the items to, which is prefixed by
'Add to Package'.
116
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
If the selected items already belong to another package, they are removed
from the original package and added to the selected package.
How to Remove Items From a Trip Package
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the items you want to remove
from the trip package.
2. Click on the Package button and select Remove From Package.
-
The selected items are redisplayed as individual items in the Sales
section and are no longer associated with the parent trip package.
-
If you remove all items from a trip package, the package is ignored and
removed from the Sales section.
How to Delete a Trip Package
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the package item.
2. Click on Correction and select Delete Packages.
All child items are removed from the package and the status of the package
item changes to Ignored (IGN).
Note:
If all child items are selected and removed from the package, then
the package automatically disappears due to its status of Ignored
(IGN).
Replacing Invoiced Items
What Is the Purpose of Replacing an Invoiced Item?
The replacement of an invoiced item automatically creates a reversing credit
sales item and a new, non-invoiced, copy of the original invoiced item.
The reversing credit item is not changeable but you can make any necessary
corrections to the new debit item.
How to Replace an Invoiced Item From the Sales Section
1. Select the invoiced item.
You can replace any invoiced item regardless of the item type.
2. Click on Correction and select Replace Invoiced Items.
-
A link to the item appears in the Status column, followed by the status
COR in brackets.
-
A new item with a reversing amount and a state of Non Invoiced (CR2)
is created and its item type is prefixed with the word Corrective.
-
A new active item with the same amount is created with a state of Non
Invoiced that can be edited to correct the original item.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
117
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Image: Replaced Invoiced Car Item
How to Replace an Invoiced Item From the Documents Section
1. Select the invoiced item.
2. Click on Replace document.
-
To replace the item and issue a credit note, select Replace Invoice and
issue credit note.
-
Otherwise, select Replace invoice.
What Are the Invoicing Options for Replaced Invoiced Items?
All new sales items resulting from correction should be invoiced to ensure that
they are in a correct financial state.
For the two new, non-invoiced, corrected items, the following invoicing options
are available:
•
Invoice the items separately. This creates two documents: a credit note and
new invoice document.
•
Invoice both items together. This creates one common credit note or invoice
document for the difference:
-
If the document price is zero or positive, an invoice document is issued.
-
If the document price is negative, a credit note is issued.
Automatic Correction of Sales Items
What Prompts Automatic Correction of Sales Items?
•
The removal of a passenger triggers the automatic correction of all sales
items associated with that passenger.
•
The removal of a car or hotel segment triggers the automatic correction of all
sales items associated with that segment.
•
The removal of the TST/TSM/QT pricing element triggers the automatic
correction of all sales items associated to this element (TST/QT for AIR GDS,
TSM/QT for EMD and QT for ETRs).
How Does Automatic Correction Affect Invoiced Sales Items?
If a committed segment/passenger/pricing element (TST/TSM/QTP) is removed
and the sales item is already invoiced, which implies that the sales item is
restricted, and it has an Active (ACT) status:
118
•
The status of the sales item is updated to Cancelled (CAN).
•
A new sales item is created with a Refund (RFN) status. This new sales item
is identical to the original sales item created with a negative price sign.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
You can edit the new refund item with Margin/Discount information.
Invoicing the new refund item results in a credit note document.
How Does Automatic Correction Affect Non-Invoiced Sales Items?
If a committed segment/passenger/pricing element (TST/TSM/QTP) is removed
and the sales item is not invoiced, which implies that the sales item is not
restricted, and it has an Active (ACT) status:
•
The status of the sales item is updated to Ignored (IGN).
•
The sales item is no longer displayed in the Sales section.
•
The link between the sales item and the deleted element is cancelled.
How Does Automatic Correction Affect Ticketing After Invoicing?
If the ticket is issued after the invoice was already created:
•
The status of the original sales item is updated to Cancelled (CAN).
•
A new sales item is created with a Refund (RFN) status. This new sales item
is identical to the original sales item created but it has a negative price sign.
•
Another new active sales item is created containing the new price and the
ticket number.
You can now edit the new refund and the new active sales item with
Margin/Discount information.
Invoicing the new refund item results in a credit note document.
Invoicing the new sales item results in a new invoice document containing the
ticket number.
Changing Customer Associations
How Is the Default Customer Defined For Sales Items?
Provided the sales item did not have a change of customer association, the
default customer is defined as follows:
•
The first company profile that was entered in the Booking File.
•
If no company profile is available, the first customer profile that was entered
in the Booking File.
•
If there is no customer profile, then nothing is displayed in the Customer
column.
This default customer is prefixed by the letter A (Automatic).
If you manually change the customer association, the customer is prefixed by the
letter M (Manual).
Which Sales Items Allow a Change of Customer Association?
You can only change the customer association for an item that is active and not
yet invoiced.
Refund items must have the same customer as the item they refund.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
119
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
An item that has already been refunded can have a change of customer
association provided the item is active and not yet invoiced. The customer
association of the related refund item changes automatically.
What Are the Ways to Change the Customer Association for a Sales
Item?
•
•
Using the Sales Details tab of the Details pop-up window, you can:
-
Directly enter the customer record locator.
-
Select a previously linked profile from another sales item.
-
Search for a profile provided that the profile is not linked to another item.
Refer to Searching for Profiles From Sales Items below.
Using the Change Customer menu in the Action bar in the Sales section of
the Booking File, you can:
-
Select a previously linked profile from another sales item.
-
Search for a profile provided that the profile is not linked to another item.
Refer to Searching for Profiles From Sales Items below.
How to Change the Customer Association for a Sales Item
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the sales items and click on
Change Customer.
A list of all passengers in the Booking File is displayed. Any profiles that are
already linked to the Booking File are also displayed (prefixed by their record
locator).
2. Select the customer or profile from the list.
3. To link a new profile to the Booking File, search for the profile directly from
the Change Customer menu. Refer to Searching for Profiles From Sales
Items below.
Or:
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on the Details link of the sales
item you want to modify.
2. In the Details pop-up window, click on the Sales Details tab.
3. Enter the customer record locator in the Customer Record Locator field.
The name of the customer is displayed in the Customer field.
4. If there is already a profile linked to other sales items in the booking file, you
can display the profile using the drop-down box for the Customer Record
Locator field.
5. To link a new profile to the sales item, click on Search a Profile. Refer to
Searching for Profiles From Sales Items below.
6. Click on Update.
Searching for Profiles From Sales Items
What Are the Ways to Search for a Profile From a Sales Item?
•
120
Using the Search a Profile link in the Sales Details tab of the Details popup window.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
•
Using the Change Customer menu in the Action bar in the Sales section of
the Booking File.
How to Search for a Profile From a Sales Item
1. In the Sales section of the Booking File, select the sales items, click on
Change Customer and select Search a Profile.
Or:
In the Sales section of the Booking File, click on the Details link of the sales
item and click on the Sales Details tab.
2. Click on Search a Profile.
3. In the Search Active Profile pop-up window, enter the search criteria and
click on Retrieve.
4. Select the profile in the results list and click on Select.
5. Click on Update.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
121
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Search Active Profile Window
Managing Attachments
How to Add an Attachment
Note:
You should save the Booking File before adding an attachment.
Note:
You must have Internet Explorer Version 10 or higher to add an
attachment.
1. If an attachment has not yet been added to the Booking File, click on Add
attachment in the What do you want to do next? section.
If attachments have already been added to the Booking file, you can either:
-
Click on Add attachment in the What do you want to do next? section.
Or:
-
Click on Add attachment in the Documents section.
2. You are prompted to either continue to add the attachment, or to save your
changes to the Booking File before adding the attachment.
-
If you have not yet saved the Booking File, click on Do not add
attachment to exit the workflow and save the Booking File.
-
If you want to continue, click on Add attachment.
3. Click on Choose file and browse to the attachment that you want to add.
4. Enter any other relevant details and click on Add attachment.
How to Delete an Attachment
Note:
You should save the Booking File before deleting an attachment.
1. Click on Delete attachment in the Documents section.
122
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
2. You are prompted to either continue to delete the attachment, or to save your
changes to the Booking File before deleting the attachment.
-
If you have not yet saved the Booking File, click on Do not delete
attachment to exit the workflow and save the Booking File.
-
If you want to continue, click on Delete attachment.
Managing Service Recommendations
What Are Service Recommendations?
Service recommendations are tailored proposals for services, such as car rental,
transfers, hotel, or insurance, that are displayed in Command page when the
relevant site parameter is enabled.
Initially, the graphical recommendations appear in a preview panel at the bottom
of the page to ensure they do not interfere with any ongoing tasks.
If you want to see details of a proposal, you can then expand the proposal
window where you can proceed to select and book it.
Example: Expanded Recommendations View
What Services Recommendations Are Available?
•
Insurance
•
Cars
•
Hotels
•
Transfers
What Triggers the Recommendations Process in the Booking File?
•
Retrieve an eligible Booking File.
•
Show an eligible Booking File from Command page.
•
Save and confirm (ER and ERK).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
123
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Expand or Collapse Recommendations
•
To minimise or maximise the teaser view of the recommendations panel, click
on the minimise icon
or the maximise icon
.
•
To expand a recommendation, click on the Expand icon
Recommendations panel.
in the
Alternatively, click on the tab for the recommendation.
•
To collapse a recommendation, click on the Collapse icon
Recommendations panel.
in the
Alternatively, click anywhere on the Command page.
How to Navigate Recommendations
If there are too many recommendations to fit on the screen, click on the Left and
Right arrows each side of the Recommendations panel to navigate the
recommendations.
How to Book a Hotel Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel.
Each hotel recommendation includes a guest rating based on sentiment
analysis.
2. To view the details of a recommendation, click on Details.
-
If the Booking File contains more than one passenger, you are prompted
to select the number of rooms and their respective occupancy.
-
Depending on your site parameter settings, either the graphic Hotel
module or the Command page opens on the details page for the hotel.
From here, you can review full details of the recommendation and
complete the booking.
3. To view more hotel options, click on More Hotels.
-
If the Booking File contains more than one passenger, you are prompted
to select the number of rooms and their respective occupancy.
-
Depending on your site parameter settings, either the graphic Hotel
module or the Command page opens on the availability page. From here,
you can continue to check for availability and complete a booking.
How to Book a Car Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel and click on Select.
2. Depending on your site parameter settings, either:
-
The graphic Car module opens with the selected recommendation
displayed, in addition to alternatives for the same date and destination
from the same provider. From here, you can complete the booking.
Or:
-
124
The cryptic command to book the selected car is triggered in the
Command page, in addition to alternatives for the same date and
destination from the same provider. From here, you can complete the
booking.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 5 Booking File
How to Book an Insurance Recommendation
Expand the Recommendations panel and click on Book.
This triggers the cryptic command to book the selected recommendation in the
Command page.
How to Book a Transfer Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel.
2. To access the Transfers module and book a recommendation, click on
Details.
Note:
Smart Content must be enabled and configured correctly for the
Details button to display the Transfers module.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
125
Chapter 6
Hotels
Getting Started With Amadeus Hotels
What Is Amadeus Hotels?
Amadeus Hotels is a graphic module that enables you to search for and book
hotels from a large variety of hotel providers.
You can search for hotel content from hotel chains, independent hotels, and
aggregators. You can select the aggregators of your choice and register with
them online.
See How to Register for Aggregator Content on page 129.
You can use Hotels to:
•
Find hotel chains and aggregator hotels in a city, at an airport, on a specific
street, or close to a landmark.
•
Display search results based on your customer's criteria, with real-time rate
and room availability.
•
Sort hotels according to criteria such as price, distance, or guest rating.
•
Filter hotels and rates based on criteria such as the hotel category, hotel
facilities, traveller’s budget, and payment conditions.
•
Choose and book a hotel directly from a map (for example, road map or
aerial view) based on its proximity to a landmark.
•
Compare hotels and email them to your customer.
•
Retrieve previous searches and bookmark up to ten favourite hotels.
•
Display and email detailed information about the hotel, including real-time
availability and rates, descriptive information, photos, and location on the
map.
•
Retrieve and print booking confirmations.
•
Cancel bookings.
How to Display Your User Settings
1. Go to the Command Page.
2. Enter JGD to display parameters such as currency and distance unit.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
127
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Displaying Your User Settings
What Types of Hotel Content Are Available?
There are two types of hotel content available:
•
Hotel chain
•
Aggregator
What Is the Customer Mode Display?
Throughout the shopping and booking flow, there is a customer mode option
to hide travel agency commission or mark-up
information, such as estimated earnings, if you are sharing your screen with a
customer.
You can then return the display to agency mode when you are finished sharing by
using the toggle button
.
Registering With Aggregators
What Are Aggregators?
Aggregators are hotel content providers who gather content from multiple
sources. Each aggregator provides access to a range of hotels.
You can access a number of aggregators, and you can enable or disable a
specific aggregator at any time on the aggregator registration page.
Note:
128
The list of aggregators is continuously increasing as new aggregators
are added.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
How to Register for Aggregator Content
1. Click on Aggregators.
2. Click on Register Now.
3. Click on No Account Yet? Create It!
4. Complete and submit the registration form.
You receive an email with your login credentials from the aggregator.
Note:
Some aggregators do not require credentials. For more information
on aggregator options, see What Are the Aggregator Registration
Actions? on page 130.
5. Click on Register Now.
6. Complete the login fields.
7. Click on Submit.
Example: Registering with Aggregators
How to Disable an Aggregator
1. Click on Aggregators.
2. Select an aggregator and click on Disable.
The aggregator is disabled and is not displayed in the search results.
How to Update Aggregator Credentials
1. Click on Aggregators.
2. In the aggregator panel of the Registration page, click on Update
Password.
3. Enter the new credentials and click on Submit.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
129
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Are the Aggregator Registration Actions?
Action
Description
Register
Select this option to register with a specific aggregator.
Enable
Select this option to enable the display of a specific
aggregator hotel contents in your search results.
Enable public rates
Select this option to view rates available to everybody.
Some aggregators give you the option to choose
between rates available to everybody and rates
available only to you.
No login credentials are required.
Register for private rates
Select this option to view the rates that are available
only to you. For private rates, you need login
credentials for the aggregators page.
What Is the Booking Flow?
The graphical user interface guides you through the complete booking flow.
Each step in the flow is presented on a separate page. A highlighted arrow at the
top of the screen shows which step you are at in the booking process.
Table: Hotel Booking Flow
Step
Description
1.
Use the Search page to specify the search criteria,
including location and dates of stay.
Search for a hotel.
See Searching for Hotels and Refining Your Search on
page 131.
2.
Select and book a hotel
room.
The Hotels page displays a list of hotels that match the
search criteria and have rooms available for the dates
that you requested.
From this page, you can display hotel details, choose a
hotel, and book a room.
See Selecting and Booking a Hotel Room on page 137.
3.
Enter the traveller and
payment details.
When you have selected a hotel room, the Booking
page is displayed automatically, allowing you to enter
the traveller and payment details.
See Entering Traveller and Payment Details on page
143.
130
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Step
Description
4.
After you have completed the booking and it has been
confirmed by the hotel, the Confirmation page is
displayed.
Confirm the booking.
The Confirmation page shows all the details of the
hotel booking, including traveller information, hotel
reservation number, hotel details, rate information, and
hotel preferences.
From this page, you can print or email the booking
details or book another hotel for the same traveller (in
the same Booking File).
To confirm the hotel booking, you should complete the
Booking File by entering all the required Booking File
elements (for example, Contact, Received From) and
then save the Booking File.
You can do this either in the Booking File module or in
the Command Page.
See Confirming a Hotel Booking on page 146.
Searching for Hotels and Refining Your Search
Searching for a Hotel
What Are IATA Codes?
An IATA code is a unique three-letter code that is used to identify an airport or
city. The codes are assigned and governed by the International Air Transport
Association (IATA).
You use IATA codes to identify a location. However, you can also easily find
hotels within a city or around an airport without any prior knowledge of IATA
codes or find hotels in locations that are not IATA-coded.
What Are Geocoded Locations?
A geocoded location is one that has associated geographic coordinates (often
expressed as latitude and longitude). The coordinates of a location are
determined by geographic data; for example, address and postal code.
You can find hotels using a radius search. The default radius for the Geographic
search is 25 km.
The coordinates of a location can be embedded into media such as street maps.
This enables you to show hotels on a map or 3D aerial photograph.
What Is a Landmark?
A landmark is a building, monument, or any other type of landmark considered
important enough to be used when searching for and booking hotels. Each
landmark is assigned to a category according to its nature. For example, an
airport, a university, a sports stadium or a tourist attraction.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
131
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
You can search for hotels that are within a certain distance of an address or
landmark. When you start to enter a destination, a list of registered landmarks is
displayed,
A landmark is sometimes referred to as a point of reference.
Note:
The list is built using an Amadeus-specific list of references and
business locations, together with data supplied by third party map
providers. Consequently, Amadeus is unable to guarantee the accuracy
of all references.
What Is a Property Code?
Each hotel stored in the Amadeus Central System has a property code that is
composed of three parts:
•
Hotel provider code.
•
Location IATA code.
•
Three-character code consisting of letters, digits, or both.
Examples: ILMSP753, RTNCEFRT, LWNCE003, DHDXBAHT
You can search for a specific hotel using its property code. The search result
displays the available rooms and rates for that hotel.
What Is the Star Rating System?
When you select a star rating in your search, the search displays only hotels of
the selected star rating.
Table: Star Rating
Star Rating
Hotel Category
Tourist
Standard
First
Luxury
What Is the Merged Display?
The merged display allows you to concurrently view both hotel chain and
aggregator content in your search results.
To benefit from the merged display, you need to:
•
Have Hotels activated.
•
Register with one or more aggregators.
The merged display improves hotel comparison and selection because it displays
content from multiple sources, while eliminating hotel duplication.
By default, the merged display shows the lowest rate of all providers.
132
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Note:
The merged display of hotel chain and aggregator content is only
available for single-room searches with no extra child bed. When you
search for more than one room and for an extra child bed, only
aggregator offerings are displayed.
What Are the Different Search Options?
•
City
•
Airport
•
IATA
•
Address
•
Landmark
•
Hotel property code
How to Search for a Hotel
1. In the New Booking tab of the Search page, enter the destination.
When you have entered three letters, an autocomplete list of the locations,
addresses or registered landmarks beginning with these letters is displayed.
If the destination you want does not appear in the autocomplete list, continue
typing until you have entered the full destination.
See What Are the Different Search Options? above.
2. Select the dates.
3. Select the number of guests.
Note:
The default selection is one guest.
4. Use the Advanced search criteria section to refine your search.
-
If multiple credentials are registered for an aggregator, you can select the
relevant name from the Corporation name field. Otherwise, this field is
not displayed.
-
Depending on your settings, you may have the option to select the
country of residence and nationality of the traveller.
Refer to Refining Your Search on page 134.
5. Click on Switch to customer mode if you want to hide agency commission
or mark-up information. See What Is the Customer Mode Display? on page
128.
6. Click on Search.
The Hotels page displays the results of your search.
To reduce response time, a number of hotels that match your search criteria
are displayed while the search for more hotels continues in the background.
After the search is completed, you can add the other hotels that have become
available to the results list by clicking on Show all.
Note:
The 10 most recent searches are saved.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
133
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Search for a Hotel With an Active Booking File
1. Go to the Booking File module to retrieve an existing Booking File or create a
new one.
2. Go to Hotels to search for a hotel using the New booking tab.
-
If you have already booked a flight using the city or airport, the dates and
length of stay are taken from the flight segment and automatically loaded
in the Search page.
-
If you have loaded a traveller profile that contains traveller preferences,
these preferences fill the related fields in the Search page automatically.
3. Continue with your hotel booking process as usual.
If traveller information is already available in the Booking File, it is filled in
automatically when you are asked to enter traveller details.
Example: Searching for a Hotel
Refining Your Search
How to Define a Price Range
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, click on Advanced search
criteria.
2. Enter the minimum price per night, the maximum price per night, or both.
134
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
3. Enter the currency or click on
Note:
to select it from a list.
The system may return hotel rooms up to 10% outside your price
range.
How to Search for a Published Rate
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, click on Advanced search
criteria.
2. In the Published rates field enter the rate codes, separated by semicolons,
to select them from a list.
or click on
Example: RAC;CON;MIL
How to Enter Room Occupancy Details
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, enter your room criteria for
Room 1.
2. To add another room, click on Add room and enter your criteria.
How to Define a Radius for the Search
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, click on Advanced search
criteria.
2. Select the radius criteria in the Geographical preferences section.
How to Request Only Hotel Chain Content or Only Aggregator
Content
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, click on Advanced search
criteria.
2. Expand the Sources drop-down menu.
-
To search for hotel chain content only, select GDS only.
-
To search for aggregator content only, select Aggregators only.
You can also type the options in the Sources field to use autocomplete
instead of using the drop-down list.
Note:
If you have already selected a hotel chain or an aggregator in the
Sources drop-down list, you cannot request only hotel chain
content or only aggregator content. You must first clear the
Sources field.
How to Include or Exclude Rates from Different Sources
Note:
You do not have the option to include or exclude rates from different
sources if you request hotel chain content only or aggregator content
only. The option is only available if you request a specific chain.
1. In the New booking tab of the Search page, click on Advanced search
criteria.
2. Enter the hotel chain in the Sources field.
-
To include rates from different sources other than the requested chain,
select the check box entitled Include rates from other sources.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
135
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
-
User Guide
To exclude rates from different sources and ensure the results only
contain the requested chain, clear the check box entitled Include rates
from other sources.
How to Change the Search Criteria
1. On the Hotels page, click on the
icon at the top of the screen.
The New booking tab of the Search page is displayed.
2. Click on Reset to clear the search criteria.
3. Enter the new criteria and click on Search.
What Are the Filter Options?
Filter Name
Description
Hotel Category
Specify the star rating.
Distance
Specify the distance of the hotel from a location
entered in the Destination field, such as a city centre.
Location
Specify the search area by entering one or more city
names.
Hotel Chain
Specify any preferred hotel chain.
Hotel Name
Specify any preferred hotel name.
Facilities
Specify any preferred facilities.
Budget
Specify the maximum budget value, in your preferred
currency. Select Per Stay to specify the total cost of a
stay. If you select Per Night for a stay of multiple
nights, the price displayed is the average.
Optionally select BAR to show only hotels offering
"Best Available Rates", or NEGO to show only hotels
that offer the requested negotiated rate(s).
Payment
Specify one or more preferred payment types. The
lowest value for the selected payment type is updated
for the hotel in the results, and only hotels that offer
rates with the selected payment type(s) are displayed.
Note:
Guest Rating
This filter is not available for multi-room
searches.
Specify the range from 1 to 6, and optionally select the
Include Hotels With No Rating check box.
How to Use Filters to Find Hotels
In the Filter panel, select the filters you want to apply from the category. (If
necessary, click on to display the filter options.)
The search results are instantly narrowed down to display only the hotels for the
categories that you have requested. The number of matching hotels resulting
from the filter is indicated.
136
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Example: Selecting the Filter Options
Selecting and Booking a Hotel Room
Choosing a Hotel
What Do the Hotel Facilities Icons Indicate?
Internet access
Air conditioning
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
137
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Parking
Swimming pool
Health club
Note:
These facilities are only displayed if they are available.
How to Display All Hotel Facilities
On the Hotels page, hover the mouse over the More link under the facilities
icons, or over the Facilities link if no icons are displayed.
A list of additional facilities is shown.
How to Display Hotel Reviews
On the Hotels page, click on the reviews rating icon for a hotel, if available.
Example: Hotel Reviews
How to Display Source Names for Multiple Source Results
On the Hotels page, mouseover the Multiple Sources link.
A pop-up appears, showing a list of sources, including the lowest rate offered by
each source.
Example: Viewing Sources
How to Display Rate Details
On the Hotels page, click on the room rate button.
Note:
This applies to single room searches only.
A list of available rate types is shown.
138
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Example: Viewing Rate Details
How to Display Room Conditions
1. On the Hotels page, click on the room rate button.
2. Click on the room name to open the Conditions pop-up window.
How to Display Payment Policy Details
1. On the Hotels page, click on the room rate button.
2. Hover the mouse over the policy link under the Book button, for example,
Deposit, Prepaid, or Guarantee.
A tooltip is displayed with the respective policy details.
What Are the Different Rate Types Offered By Hotels Chains?
The rates available for hotel chains are:
•
Negotiated Rates
•
BAR rates (Best Available Rates)
Negotiated rates are indicated in the availability display by the NEGO icon.
You can store any negotiated rates in your sign preferences, and use them
automatically when you search for hotel availability.
The BAR program acts as a guarantee that the rates available are the best public
rates for:
•
Rack Rates
•
Non-negotiated Rates
•
Corporate Rates
•
Weekend Rates
•
Lowest Unrestricted Rates
This is the lowest rate available to the general public, on a particular day for a
particular stay. These rates do not require prepayment, and do not impose
cancellation and change penalties or fees, other than those resulting from the
hotel property's normal cancellation policy.
•
Promotional/Special Rates
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
139
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The BAR rates are indicated in the availability display by the BAR icon.
Comparing and Saving Hotel Details
How to Compare Hotels Using the Comparison Feature
1. On the Hotels page, mouseover either the hotel or a specific hotel rate and
click on the Add to comparison link.
The hotel or room rate is added to the Selected Hotels panel.
2. When you are ready to compare, click on Compare these hotels.
3. In the Compared Hotels window, you can edit the rate information and add
any necessary comments to the comparison file.
to print the file or click on the Email icon
4. Click on the Print icon
send the file to the customer.
to
Example: Comparing Hotels
How to Save Hotel Details
1. On the Hotels page, mouseover the hotel and click on the Add to
comparison link.
The room rate and the hotel are added to the Selected hotels panel.
2. Click on Save these hotels in the Selected hotels panel.
140
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Using the Map
What Are the Map Types?
Map Type
Description
Road
The road map displays the hotel on a normal road map
view. This is the default display.
Aerial
The aerial map displays an aerial photo of the hotel
location.
How to Expand and Collapse the Map
1. On the Hotels page, click on the Show hotels on map button in the
condensed map view.
If you have selected a hotel for comparison, its rate is shown in a different
colour to the other hotels in the map view.
2. To collapse the map view, click on the Close map button in the expanded
map view.
How to View the Location of a Hotel
On the Hotels page, click on the location of the hotel.
The map view is expanded, centred on the location of the hotel. The selected
hotel is indicated by an orange price tag.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
141
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Viewing the Location of a Hotel
Booking a Room
How to Book a Room
1. On the Hotels page, click on the button that displays the room rate.
2. Click on Book next to the room and rate that you want to book.
142
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Example: Booking a Room
Entering Traveller and Payment Details
What Is the Booking Page?
The Booking page is where you enter the traveller and payment details. The
information requested varies depending on whether you are booking with a chain
or an aggregator.
If traveller information is already available in the Booking File, the related fields
are automatically completed.
If you have retrieved a profile, some of the fields may already be completed with
the traveller's preferences.
If no data has been loaded, you need to manually complete the fields.
How to Request Special Services
1. In the Traveller Information section of the Booking page, enter the details
of the main traveller and any additional travellers.
-
If the details of the main traveller and any additional travellers are already
in the Booking File, you can select these from the corresponding dropdown menu. However, you cannot add another name to the booking.
-
If the main traveller details are already in a profile, you can select these
from the autofill box that is displayed. You can also add a new traveller
name.
2. In the Hotel Preferences section of the page, specify any special requests to
the hotel, such as a non-smoking room, early or late check-in or other
available requests, in the Supplementary Information field.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
143
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Note:
User Guide
The Supplementary Information field is not displayed if the
selected aggregator does not support supplementary information.
3. In the Payment Information section, select the method of payment from the
drop-down menu.
The method of payment for hotel chains is predefined.
4. Click on Send reservation request.
How to Complete a Hotel Booking
1. In the Traveller Information section of the Booking page, enter the details
of the main traveller and any additional travellers.
-
If the details of the main traveller and any additional travellers are already
in the Booking File, you can select these from the corresponding dropdown menu. However, you cannot add another name to the booking.
-
If the main traveller details are already in a profile, you can select these
from the autocomplete box that is displayed. You can also add a new
traveller name.
2. In the Hotel Preferences section, specify any preferences or special
requests, such as a non-smoking room, early or late check-in or other
available requests.
3. In the Payment Information section, enter the payment details or select the
method of payment from the dropdown list.
The method of payment for hotel chains is predefined.
4. For aggregator bookings, you need to enter a Travel Agency email address
where the aggregator can send the booking documentation such as a
voucher or confirmation email.
5. Review the hotel and pricing summary.
6. To view the booking conditions and cancellation policies, mouseover the rate
link in the Pricing Details section.
7. Click on Send reservation request.
144
-
For hotel chain bookings, you are prompted to perform an end
transaction on the Booking File.
-
For aggregator bookings, the Booking File is automatically saved (ER) by
the system. When the booking is confirmed by the aggregator, the
Confirmation page is displayed, showing full details of the hotel booking.
If a Booking File was not created initially, a Booking File is created
containing the hotel segment. A Name element is also added if it was not
already present.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Example: Booking Page with Rate Conditions
What Are the Payment Requirements for an Aggregator Booking?
For aggregators, most bookings are made in a prepaid model. This means that
the booking is paid for by the traveller at the agency.
You select the method of payment in the Booking page.
The method of payment depends on the aggregator, and may vary if you have a
specific agreement with the aggregator. For example, Agency Account.
The payment is either processed immediately or at a later stage, depending on
the specification in the Booking page.
Book Now, Pay Later
Some aggregators allow you to reserve a room at a given rate for a certain time
with an option to pay later.
If this option is available, it is also displayed with the rate conditions during the
booking flow. The time limit for payment is also provided.
If you choose this payment option, you receive an email notification of the
payment deadline three days before the payment is due. If the payment is not
made before the deadline, the booking is automatically cancelled.
For information on how to make the payment before the reservation expires, see
How to Confirm an Aggregator Booking With a Pay Later Option on page 147.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
145
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Confirming a Hotel Booking
Confirming a Hotel Chain Booking
Your booking is only fully confirmed after the Booking File has been completed
and saved.
You can do this in either the Booking File module or the Command page.
You can still modify or cancel the booking after it has been confirmed. However, it
is important to first read the hotel's or the aggregator's conditions to check if any
penalties apply.
Confirming an Aggregator Booking
The hotel booking is automatically confirmed at the time of booking.
You can cancel the booking after it has been confirmed.
Note:
It is important to first read the hotel's or the aggregator's conditions to
check if any penalties apply.
You can modify dates for aggregator hotel bookings using a cryptic command in
the Command page. For all other aggregator hotel booking modifications, you
must cancel and rebook.
146
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Example: Booking Confirmation
How to Confirm an Aggregator Booking With a Pay Later Option
1. Retrieve the booking. See How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using a
General Search on page 148 and How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation
Using the Confirmation Number and Provider on page 149.
You can select the status of Pending Payment in Your Booking Search
Options to refine the search.
2. Click on the Add Payment button on the Confirmation screen.
3. Enter the payment details and click on Make Payment.
How to Confirm a Hotel Booking in the Booking File Module
1. Go to the Booking File module.
Some of the elements that are mandatory in a Booking File are already
completed from the information you entered in the hotel booking, for example,
the Name element and the hotel segment.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
147
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Complete the Booking File with any remaining mandatory elements:
-
Contact
-
Received From
-
Ticketing Arrangement
3. End transact the Booking File to confirm the hotel booking.
The Booking File is assigned a record locator, which you can use to retrieve
the Booking File if required.
How to Confirm a Hotel Booking in the Command Page
1. Go to the Command Page.
2. Use the RT transaction entry to retrieve the active booking.
Some of the elements that are mandatory in a Booking File are automatically
completed using the information you entered in the booking, for example, the
NM - Name element and the hotel segment.
3. Complete the Booking File with any remaining mandatory elements:
-
AP - Contact
-
RF - Received From
-
TK - Ticketing Arrangement
Note:
Enter HE BOOKING FILE for help on how to complete a Booking
File using cryptic transaction entries.
4. Use either the ET or ER transaction entry to save (end transact) the Booking
File and confirm the booking.
The Booking File is assigned a record locator, which you can use to retrieve
the Booking File if required.
Retrieving, Printing, and Emailing a Hotel Booking
Confirmation
You can print and email a confirmation for a new booking from the Confirmation
page at the end of the booking flow.
You can also retrieve, print, or email a previous booking confirmation using the
Booking list tab on the Search page. From here, you can also display a list of
bookings that have something in common, such as all bookings made by the
same agent.
How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using a General Search
1. On the Search page, click on the Booking list tab to display Your booking
search options.
The office in which you are logged into is displayed by default in the Office ID
field. The search is based on this office.
148
Edition 13.0
Chapter 6 Hotels
Note:
You cannot update the Office ID field for a search. To search for
bookings made by a different office, you must sign into that office
and search from there.
2. Enter the search criteria and click on Search.
To retrieve a booking using the confirmation number and provider, even if the
booking was made by a different office, see How to Retrieve a Booking
Confirmation Using the Confirmation Number and Provider below.
All active bookings that match the search criteria are displayed, up to a
maximum of 200.
3. To display the details of a booking and access the print and cancel follow-up
actions, click on the booking in the search results list.
How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using the Confirmation
Number and Provider
1. On the Search page, click on the Booking list tab to display Your booking
search options.
2. Click on the Quick Retrieve link to display the Confirmation number and
Provider fields.
Note:
You can retrieve a booking that was made by an office other than
the office you are signed into, provided that you have the security
rights for that office.
3. Enter the search criteria and click on Search.
4. To display the details of the booking and access the print and cancel followup actions, click on the booking.
How to Print a Previous Booking Confirmation
1. Retrieve and display the booking that you want to print. See How to Retrieve
a Booking Confirmation Using a General Search on page 148 or How to
Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using the Confirmation Number and
Provider above.
2. Click on Print and follow your standard printing instructions.
How to Print a New Booking Confirmation
After a booking is confirmed, the Confirmation page displays the booking
summary.
Click on Print and follow your standard printing instructions.
How to Email a New Booking Confirmation
After a booking is confirmed, the Confirmation page displays the booking
summary.
1. To email the booking confirmation, click on Send.
2. Enter the destination email address and click on Send Email.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
149
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Cancelling a Hotel Booking
How to Cancel a Confirmed Hotel Booking
1. Retrieve and display the booking that you want to cancel. See How to
Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using a General Search on page 148 and
How to Retrieve a Booking Confirmation Using the Confirmation Number and
Provider on page 149.
2. Click on Cancel.
The cancellation policy is displayed in the Cancel Booking pop-up window
so that you can review the policy details before completing the cancellation.
3. To confirm the cancellation, click on Yes.
The Booking File is updated to reflect the cancellation.
How to Cancel a Confirmed Hotel Booking in the Booking File
Module
1. Before you cancel a confirmed hotel booking, read the hotel's cancellation
policies to check if any penalties apply.
2. Retrieve the Booking File and select the hotel segment you want to cancel.
3. Click on Cancel to open the Cancel window.
-
To cancel the selected hotel segment only, select the Cancel Element(s)
- XE option.
-
To cancel the whole itinerary, select the Cancel Itinerary - XI option.
Note:
You can click directly on Cancel All to cancel the whole itinerary
without opening the Cancel window.
How to Cancel an Unconfirmed Hotel Booking
Unless you save the Booking File after you make your hotel booking, your
booking is unconfirmed.
To cancel an unconfirmed hotel booking, ignore the Booking File by clicking on
Ignore (IR).
150
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7
Cars
Getting Started With Amadeus Cars
What Is Amadeus Cars?
Amadeus Cars is a reservation tool designed to guide you through the entire
reservation process using a predefined sequence of steps.
Example: Workflow Sequence
Workflow: Booking a Car
Step
Description
Searching for a car
In the Search page, you specify the car search
criteria.
See Searching for a Car on page 153.
Booking a car
In the Cars page, you select and book a car.
See Selecting and Booking a Car on page 156.
Entering traveller and payment
details
In the Checkout page, you enter the traveller and
payment details as well as any additional requests
such as special equipment.
See Entering Traveller and Payment Details on
page 160.
Confirming your reservation
In the Reservation page, you check your booking
and traveller details, and save the reservation to the
Booking File.
See Confirming, Cancelling and Modifying Your
Booking on page 162.
Video: How to Create a Car Booking
Launch
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
151
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Working With Leisure Cars
What Is Leisure Cars?
Leisure Cars is an additional search option that displays rates and availability for
leisure rental.
Your travel agency must be registered with the Leisure Cars programme before
you can book a car using this option.
There are no cancellation fees if the booking is cancelled up to 48 hours before
the rental is due to commence. However, bookings that are cancelled within 48
hours of collection are charged 100%.
When a booking is confirmed, a pre-paid car rental voucher is issued as a proof
of payment and emailed to the customer. Therefore, an email address for a car
voucher is mandatory when confirming a Leisure Cars booking in the Checkout
page.
What Are the Two Rate Packages for Leisure Cars?
Rate Package
Description
Standard
Includes all mandatory inclusions that a customer is required
to pay before driving their rental car.
Inclusive
Includes all mandatory inclusions plus additional cover,
known as Super CDW. This cover significantly reduces or
waives any excess that the customer is required to pay in the
event of damage to the vehicle.
Inclusive cover is arranged with the car rental supplier that
provides the rental vehicle so that the customer:
•
Is not required to leave a large deposit.
•
Will not be offered additional cover at the counter.
•
Will not be required to claim from a third party in the
event of damage to the vehicle.
Inclusive rates are indicated by a crown icon
.
How to Register With Leisure Cars
Note:
You can register with Leisure Cars throughout the booking flow in the
Search, Cars, or Checkout pages.
1. Click on the More info and registration process link for Leisure Cars.
2. In the Leisure Cars pop-up window, click on the Registration Page tab.
3. Complete the information as required and click on Register.
How to Display Rate Information for Leisure Cars
1. Click on the More info and registration process link for Leisure Cars.
2. In the Leisure Cars pop-up window, click on the Product Description tab.
152
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
Searching for a Car
Example: Search Page
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
153
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Search for a Car
1. If you want to include Leisure Cars in your search, select the Search with
Amadeus Leisure Cars check box.
If you are not yet registered with Leisure Cars, refer to How to Register With
Leisure Cars on page 152.
2. Enter the details for the Pick-up location and Drop-off location.
3. Define the date and time for pick up and drop off.
4. If you are not including Leisure Cars in your search, you can enter a Car
Provider.
5. Click on More search options (optional) to define additional search criteria.
Under Rate options:
-
Select the Currency to be displayed.
-
Select the rate from the Show Rates drop-down list.
Under Vehicle options, specify one of the following to restrict your search:
-
Vehicle options: Specify car class, air conditioning and other options.
You can enter up to five car classes.
-
Pseudo Code: Used to group sets of car features in your search.
-
ACRISS code: A four-letter code used to specify any combination of
category, type, transmission/drive and fuel/air conditioning. You can use
up to five ACRISS codes during a search. Each ACRISS code must be
separated by commas. You can use * as a wildcard. Example:
ECMN,CC.
Under Discount options:
-
Add up to four corporate discounts codes for each car provider.
6. Click on Search.
What Is a Special Rate?
Special rates apply to different types of customers. Special rates are agreed
between the travel agency and the car provider, and they are displayed if specific
discount codes are used in the search.
154
Rate
Description
Non-prepaid rate
This rate is intended for corporate customers. The
corporate rate is flexible and allows booking
modification and cancellation.
Prepaid rate
This rate is intended for leisure customers. This rate is
fully inclusive, which means that it usually includes
unlimited mileage.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
How to Add Discount Codes to a Search
1. On the Search page, click on More search options.
2. Under Discount options, select the Car provider.
3. Select the discount type (for example, Rate Code).
For more information, see What Are the Discount Types? below.
4. Enter the discount code.
5. Click on Add.
When you do a search, the discount rate appears in the Listing view on the
Cars page, under the Special Rate column.
Your discount table is automatically updated.
Note:
If an error message is displayed, check that the discount code that
you have entered has been saved.
What Are the Discount Types?
You can access different discount types for each provider. The discount types
that are available depend on the provider that you select in the search. Discounts
types are identified by discount codes.
Discount codes are subject to change, and you can add them or remove them as
required.
See How to Add Discount Codes to a Search above.
Table: Example Discount Types
Discount Type
Description
Booking source
The booking source identifies the origin of the booking.
For more information, refer to What Is the Booking
Source?
Corporate rate
This rate is granted to specific companies or travel
agencies.
Rate code
This rate is negotiated between the car provider and
the travel agency.
Customer ID
This rate is granted by the car provider to an individual
traveller.
Promotional code
This rate is offered by the car provider.
What Is the Booking Source?
The Booking Source enables you to store new booking codes that you can use
to retrieve negotiated rates.
The booking codes are stored by the office ID, which means that you can share
the stored booking codes with your colleagues, provided that you are connected
to the same server.
The car providers can identify you by means of your predefined booking codes.
When you store a booking source, you can view your booking codes in the
Search page in the More search options drop down list.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
155
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is a Special Code?
You use a special code when you need to specify the vehicle option in the
Additional search criteria.
Table: Special Codes
Code
Description
ACRISS code
An ACRISS code is a four-letter code used to specify
any combination of category, type, transmission/drive
and fuel/air conditioning.
You can use up to five ACRISS codes during a search.
Each ACRISS code must be separated by commas.
You can use * as a wildcard.
Example: ECMN,CC.
Pseudo code
A pseudo code is used to group sets of car features in
your search.
Example: All hybrid vehicles.
IATA code
An IATA code is a unique three-letter code that is used
to identify an airport or city. The code is assigned and
governed by the International Air Transport Association
(IATA).
Video: How to Use Car Discount Codes
Launch
Selecting and Booking a Car
Example: Cars Page
156
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
How to Book a Car
1. Review the results returned by your search.
2. Click on the Listing view, Category view or Map view tabs to display the
results in different ways. See What Are the View Options? below.
3. To narrow the search results, click on any of the Filters and enter filter
criteria. See What Are the View Options? below.
The search results page updates and displays only cars that meet your
criteria.
Note:
For Leisure Cars results, the travel agent commission is displayed,
for any available packages. You can filter on
as well as an icon
packages in the Filter section.
4. Select the car.
5. Click on Book to complete the rental.
Modifying Your Search Results Display
What Are the View Options?
Views
Description
Listing View
This view shows the offers with the lowest estimated
price for each provider.
•
To group results by car rental station, click on
Group rates by: Car rental station.
•
To see all the offers for a car provider, click on the
More Rates link.
•
To view the provider conditions summary, click on
the Conditions link.
Category View
This view displays a table with all the rates with the
cars organised by category. Note that the car image is
a generic one, not the actual car.
Map View
This view displays a map with the car rental stations.
Blue markers indicate the car rental stations that are
geocoded. The markers turn green if you select car
providers in the list on the right.
Hover over a marker to view the car details.
Note:
The map view is only available if at least one
geocoded car rental station is present in the
selected location.
How Do Filters Work?
Search filters allow you to display only car providers that meet the selected filter
criteria.
The filter settings are applied in all three views: Listing view, Category view and
Map view.
A check box for masked rates appears in the Price filter. If a search does not
return any masked rates, this check box is unavailable. If the results include
masked rates, this check box is selected and the number of masked rates is
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
157
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
shown. If the search returns only masked rates, the price slider is greyed out and
the masked rate details are displayed.
What Are the Filter Options?
Filters
Description
Distance
Use the slider to define the maximum distance from the
searching centre.
Note:
This filter is only displayed when you search
using the Address or Landmark option.
Area
Choose between the different areas linked to your
search location.
Car Provider
Choose to display all car providers or select specific
car providers.
Price
Use the slider to define the price range and select
whether to display masked rates.
Car Class
Select the car categories that you want to display.
Shuttle Information
Select the type of shuttle service required.
Note:
This filter is only displayed for terminal and
off-terminal locations and when at least one
of them has associated shuttle information.
Services
Select whether to have Delivery or Collection services.
Mileage
Select to display vehicles with limited or unlimited
mileage or both.
Prepaid
Select to display only prepaid rates or non-prepaid
rates or both.
Boot Size
Select the boot size requirements for the luggage.
Passenger Capacity
Define a rate according to the passenger capacity of
the vehicle.
Transmission
Select whether you want automatic or manual
transmission rates.
Exact Match
Select the rates that have an exact match with the
request selection.
If the vehicle ACRISS code matches the vehicle
options criteria from the search, a check box is
displayed to allow you to select the rates with an exact
match.
Package
This filter option is specific to Leisure Cars only.
See What Are the Two Rate Packages for Leisure
Cars? on page 152.
How to Filter Search Results
1. Click on Filters.
2. Select all the filters that apply.
The search results page updates and displays only cars that meet your
criteria.
158
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
How to Compare Car Offers
1. In the Listing view or Category view, select two or more cars.
2. Click on Compare These Rates in the area on the left.
3. In the Comparison pop-up window, use the Print and Email icons to print or
email the page.
Note:
For Leisure Rates, the commission is not printed.
4. Click on the Conditions link to display more information on the car offer.
5. Click on Book to go to the Checkout page and complete the booking.
Using the Map View
What Are the Map View Options?
Map View
Description
Road
The road view displays the car rental station on a
normal road map view. This view is the default.
Aerial
The aerial view displays an aerial photo of the rental
station location.
How to Change the Display Area
1. Select one of the map views.
2. Click on the Plus icon to zoom in.
3. Click on the Minus icon to zoom out.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
159
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Entering Traveller and Payment Details
Example: Checkout Page
How to Complete the Checkout Page
1. Check that the car booking details are accurate.
2. Request any special equipment in the Special Equipment section as follows:
-
Enter the name or code.
Or:
-
Click on
to select special equipment from a list.
You can enter a maximum of three special equipment names or codes. Use a
comma to separate each item.
3. In the Traveller Identification section, enter the name of the driver.
If the Booking File already contains the traveller's details, select the name of
the driver from the list or select New Traveller to add a new traveller.
4. In the Additional Sell Information section, enter additional information and
issue an e-voucher if applicable (for non-prepaid rates only).
160
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
For more information on issuing an e-voucher, see How to Issue an EVoucher During Checkout.
5. In the Form of Payment section, select the form of payment.
-
If your agency collects the payment or guarantee information, this
information is sent to the agency's mid or back office.
-
If the car provider collects the payment or guarantee information, this
information is sent to the car provider.
Note:
For Leisure Cars, this section is called Agency Payment.
6. Select the guarantee type from the Guarantee Type drop-down list for nonprepaid rates.
Note:
A guarantee is not required for prepaid rates.
7. Specify the delivery and collection point, if it differs from the car provider
rental location.
8. Click on Send reservation request to display the Confirmation page and
complete the reservation.
You can also click on:
-
Reset to reset all the fields in the page with the default values.
-
Back To Search to return to the Search page.
-
Back To Cars to display the Car availability page.
How to Issue an E-Voucher During Checkout
1. In the Checkout page, complete the Additional Sell Information and eVoucher section.
Note:
E-vouchers can only be issued for non-prepaid rates.
2. Specify either a Booking source or a Billing number.
3. Select the voucher value in the Voucher value drop-down list.
4. Select the Issue e-voucher and end-transact Booking File box to complete
the payment.
The Booking File record locator number is displayed. Note down this number
for future reference.
Note:
When you issue an e-voucher, the booking is automatically
confirmed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
161
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Confirming, Cancelling and Modifying Your
Booking
Example: Reservation Page
How to Confirm a Booking
1. Click on Conditions to review your car provider's rates.
When you click on Conditions, you can review rate details, rate rules and
station policies.
2. Click on Save and Confirm (ER) to confirm and save your booking to the
Booking File.
Note:
162
If you do not click on Save and Confirm within 30 minutes, your
booking is cancelled.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 7 Cars
How to Modify a Booking From the Booking File
1. Click on Go to Booking File.
2. Click on Modify in the Itinerary details section.
The Modification window is displayed.
3. Enter the required modifications.
4. Click on Send Modification Request to save your changes.
5. To ensure that your changes have been saved, click on Back to Booking
File.
Video: How to Modify a Car Booking
Launch
Cancelling a Booking
How to Cancel an Unconfirmed Booking
Click on Ignore (IG) in the Reservation page.
How to Cancel a Confirmed Booking
1. Click on Go to Booking File.
2. Click on Cancel in the Itinerary Details section.
When you cancel a booking you can choose between:
a) Cancelling a car segment
b) Cancelling the whole itinerary
3. Click on Save and Confirm (ER) to save the booking cancellation.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
163
Chapter 8
Rail Display
Getting Started With Rail Display
What Is Rail Display?
Rail Display is a web-based rail-booking tool that is designed to guide you
through the complete booking flow.
Rail Display enables you to:
•
Book one-way, round-trip or multi-destination rail trips (open jaw) for
corporate and leisure passengers using real-time availability and fares.
•
Share content with the Profiles Plus and Booking File modules.
•
Indicate a seat or berth preference.
•
Select multiple proposals and display a Trip Comparison table prior to
booking.
•
Issue tickets for all train segments in the Booking File.
•
Add or cancel a bound from an existing Booking File.
•
Refund all issued rail tickets from a retrieved Booking File.
•
Exchange tickets from an existing Booking File.
•
Modify, cancel, or reprice rail segments for specific carriers.
How to Access Rail Display
There are several ways to access Rail Display, either by starting a new booking
file or from within an existing one.
If you do not already have a booking file, you can create one by doing one of the
following:
•
In the Your Desktop area, click on Rail search
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
165
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
•
Click on the drop-down arrow on the New Booking File button and select
Rail.
•
Select File > New Booking File > Rail.
If you have an existing open booking file, do one of the following:
•
166
Select Go To > Add Rail Booking.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
•
Click on the Rail icon in the Go To panel on the right of the screen.
•
Click on the Rail Booking link in the What do you want to do next? section.
Workflow: Booking a Rail Trip
Step
See
1.
Search for availability and fares.
Searching for Availability on page 169.
2.
Compare trips and fares.
Selecting a Fare on page 173.
3.
Book your trip.
Adding Passenger Information and Booking
Your Trip on page 178.
4.
Confirm and save your booking.
How to Save Your Booking on page 180.
The step you are at in the workflow is indicated on a banner at the top of the Rail
screen.
What Are the After-Sales Actions?
Action
See
Modifying, cancelling, and
repricing segments.
Modifying, Cancelling, and Repricing Swedish Rail
and SNCF Rail Segments on page 181 and
Modifying and Cancelling Other Provider Rail
Segments on page 182.
Modifying passenger details
before issuance.
Modifying Passenger Details Before Issuance on
page 184.
Issuing tickets.
Issuing Tickets on page 184.
Refunding tickets and releasing
bookings.
Refunding Tickets and Releasing Bookings on
page 186.
Voiding SNCF Tickets.
Voiding SNCF Tickets on page 189.
Exchanging tickets.
Exchanging Tickets on page 189.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
167
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Using the Keyboard to Navigate
You can use the following keys to move around a rail availability display:
Key
Function
Ctrl + F
Launch the search.
Ctrl + Left Arrow
Continue from the Availability and Fares page to the
Payment page.
Ctrl + Right Arrow
Go back from Payment page to the Search page.
Ctrl + B
Launch the booking.
Viewing Rail News Items
To view the latest updates and news, click on the What's New? link on the
Search page, then click on Previous and Next to scroll through the list of news
items.
Transferring and Creating Profiles
How Are Profiles Transferred to Rail Display?
You cannot transfer a profile directly to Rail Display. You must transfer the profile
to a Booking File before starting a rail booking flow or create a new profile using
the Profiles module.
How to Transfer a Profile to a Booking File
1. Open a Booking File and expand the Retrieve Profile tab on the Main Page
menu.
2. Enter the profile details and click on Retrieve.
3. Click on Transfer.
4. In the Transfer pop-up window, select the transfer type and click on Select.
Note:
It is not possible to transfer only Rail remarks in the profile. If you
choose to transfer remarks, all remarks are transferred.
How to Create a Profile
1. In the main menu bar of Selling Platform Connect, click on File > New Profile
and select the profile type.
For example, to create a Traveller profile, select Traveller. Alternatively, click
on the New Traveller Profile button.
A new profile page opens.
2. Complete the fields for the new profile.
Note:
Mandatory fields are highlighted in yellow.
Each tab in the profile page is used to store a specific category of
information. For example, use the Payment Data tab to store payment details
such as credit cards.
168
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
3. Click on
to add more than one entry for each element, for example, a
telephone number.
4. Select Preferred next to the option to mark an option as preferred.
A preferred option is displayed with a
Note:
.
If the corresponding site parameters are enabled, you can define
air, car, hotel, and rail preferences using the respective tabs. If the
site parameters are not enabled, you will not see these tabs.
5. Click on the save icon
to save the new profile.
How Is Rail Information Displayed in Profiles?
Rail information is displayed in a Rail Preferences tab, which is activated by a
site parameter.
The Rail Preferences tab displays remarks (RMRs) for:
•
Loyalty cards
•
Discount cards
•
Corporate programmes
You can also create, edit, and remove remarks in this tab.
If the Rail Preferences tab is not activated, Rail remarks are displayed in the
Remarks tab.
Searching for Availability
How to Retrieve a Booking File
1. Enter a name or reference number in the search box on the main toolbar of
Selling Platform Connect.
2. Click on Retrieve.
Alternatively, expand the Retrieve Booking File tab on the Main Page menu
of Selling Platform Connect, enter the search criteria and click on Retrieve.
One or more Booking Files appear in a list.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
169
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3. Select a Booking File from the list and click on Open Booking File.
Note:
A maximum of four Booking Files can be open at once.
How to Search for a Fare
1. If you access Rail from an existing Booking File, the Your passengers
section shows the passenger details from the Booking File.
You cannot add any more passengers. The booking must reflect the number
of passengers in the existing Booking File.
2. If a Booking File has not yet been created, enter the required information in
the Your passengers section. Specify the correct number of passengers to
ensure an accurate trip pricing in the Availability page that follows.
See How to Add Passengers Directly to a Search on page 172.
Note:
You can choose to leave the Your passengers section blank and
add passenger details later in the Passenger Information page. A
Booking File is created automatically at the end of the booking flow.
3. Select your train provider from the Provider drop-down.
4. Enter the name of the Departure and Destination stations.
Enter the first few characters to display a pop-up list of stations to choose
from. Click on the correct entry.
SNCF:
A station alias name is also shown for each station, such as FRPAR
for Paris. You can enter the appropriate alias name instead of the
first characters.
5. Select the Date and Time of departure.
6. If desired, select any of the other options, such as whether you want to
search only for a Direct Train, or if you want to limit results based on a
Maximum number of changes, or the preferred Class of service.
7. Depending on the selected provider, various other options may be available.
Table: Provider-Specific Search Options
Provider
Option
Description
Deutsche Bahn
Add Via,
Click on the Add Via link to add a second
Via Station option to both the outbound
and inbound trips. You can also specify
the minimum stopover time for each Via
Station option.
Stopover
170
Deutsche Bahn,
Swedish Rail
Transfer
duration
This allows you to specify a minimum
change time between trains for trips that
involve a change of train. This is only
available if Direct Train is not selected.
Deutsche Bahn
Equipment
Type
Select one or more train types.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Provider
Option
Description
SNCF
Open date
ticket
This allows you to book open-date trips.
This check box is only enabled for
bounds containing at least one segment
for which seat reservation is not
mandatory (for example, TER). If this
check box is selected for a bound, it is
still possible to modify seat preferences
for any segment for which seat
reservation is mandatory (for example,
TGV), but not for other segments. The
word Open is shown for open-date
segments in the Confirmation page or in
the Booking File instead of departure or
arrival times.
This check box is only enabled if you
have chosen E-ticket or ATB-agency
pick up for Issuing Mode.
Note that Rail does not show details of
time limits on the ticket, if any.
SNCF
Display RIT
fares
This option provides access to SNCF
special fares. These are inclusive fares
that are sold with tour packages. These
options are activated at office ID level in
agreement with SNCF.
This check box is selected by default if
you have activated this option. See
Selling SNCF Railcards on page 192.
SNCF
Advanced Fare
Options
This allows you to specify a booking
class code, fare code, fare name, and
passenger type.
SNCF,
Swedish Rail
Display fully
booked trains
Fully booked trains are greyed out with a
sold out description in the Availability
and Fares display.
For Swedish Rail only, it is possible to
see fully booked fares.
8. If you wish to book a one-way trip, you can remove the return trip by clicking
on Remove next to the trip.
9. Click on Search.
The fares are shown in the Availability and Fares display. See Using the
Availability and Fares Display on page 173.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
171
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Search Page
How to Add Passengers Directly to a Search
1. Enter the passenger's name in the Last Name and First Name fields.
2. Enter the Date of Birth in the order Day-Month-Year (for example, 04nov85
or 041185).
Note:
If a SNCF loyalty card is used (SNCF Carte Grande Voyageur) and
e-Billet is selected as the method of delivery then the Date of Birth
field is not required.
3. If the passenger has a railcard, click on the railcard icon
.
4. From the Rail Card Selection window, select the rail provider and the
appropriate railcard type(s).
For details of selling SNCF Railcards, see Selling SNCF Railcards on page
192.
Any fare reductions allowed by the selected card will be displayed in the
Availability and Fare display.
Note:
If rail card information has been transferred from the company or
traveller profile it will be prefilled. The Rail card field may also be
prefilled if this information has been added to the PNR using the
Command Page.
5. If the passenger is a member of a corporate programme, select the provider
from the Corporate Programme drop-down list, and enter the programme
number. For more details see What Is a Corporate Programme? on page
173.
6. Depending on the selected provider, various other options may be available.
172
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Table: Provider-Specific Search Options
Provider
Option
Description
Swedish Rail
Campaign
Code
A campaign code allows you to access
discounted and reduced rail fares where
applicable.
SNCF
CUI code
A CUI code is an advantage code that
enables individual passengers to benefit
from discounted and reduced fares.
What Is a Corporate Programme?
A corporate programme represents an agreement or a contract between a
company and the rail provider.
If a corporate programme code is entered for a multi-passenger booking, the
code will apply to all passengers. If the code should not apply to all passengers,
you must create two separate bookings: one for passengers who have a
corporate code and one for passengers who do not have a code.
Corporate programme information is prefilled in the search page of Rail Display if
the information is available in the Company profile or Booking File.
In the Availability page, search results include both standard fares and corporate
fares. Corporate fares are indicated by the
icon.
Note:
You cannot edit the corporate programme information after the initial
booking.
SNCF:
If you apply a corporate programme during booking, it will be
automatically retrieved in the case of adding a new bound to the
booking or performing an exchange. It will however not be retrieved in
the case of creating a new reservation.
Selecting a Fare
Using the Availability and Fares Display
Understanding the Availability and Fares Display
The Availability and Fare display shows a selection of fares and itineraries that
match your search criteria.
•
The shortest trips and the lowest fares per trip are both displayed in green.
•
Click on View more fares to see additional fares.
•
Sort the fares by clicking on the following criteria headers:
-
Compact View (default)
-
Duration
-
Flexibility
-
Class
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
173
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
-
User Guide
Price
•
On the left of each fare line is a diamond-shaped icon that indicates the
flexibility. Hover the mouse over the icon to see details of the flexibility. For
an explanation of these icons, see Explanation: Availability and Fares Icons
below.
•
Click on the fare price to see the fare details.
•
Click on the train service number to display more service information such as
train equipment and on-board services.
•
Click on Earlier trains or Later trains above and below the time display to
see earlier or later trains.
Example: Viewing Availability and Fares
Explanation: Availability and Fares Icons
Icons
Description
Indicates the most flexible fare (depending on the rail
provider's regulations/conditions).
Indicates a semi-flexible fare.
Indicates a fare that is not flexible.
Appears next to one of the above flexibility icons, to indicate
the fare is also exchangeable.
Indicates the exact number of seats still available at booking
time.
When coloured red, this icon indicates that there are ten or
less seats available.
Indicates that no information on seats is currently available.
Booking is possible.
Indicates that a reduction is available for discount card
holders.
Indicates a return fare.
Indicates that a reduction linked to a corporate code is
174
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
available.
Indicates that a reduction is available depending on the
passenger type, for example, student.
Indicates that ancillary services are available. Click on the icon
to view the available services. Ancillary services can be added
in the Passenger Information page.
SNCF: Indicates the level of carbon-dioxide emissions per
passenger for the selected train journey.
SNCF: This icon indicates an overbooked proposal.
Explanation: SNCF Special Fares Icons
The following are special fares and must be selected from the list in the Rail Card
Selection dialog. See Selling SNCF Railcards on page 192.
Icons
Description
Indicates a Forfait Bambin fare.
This fare is displayed if one of the passengers is under four
years old.
Indicates a Enfant+ fare.
This fare must be booked for both infant and parent: different
prices will be returned for the child and the adult.
Indicates a Enfant Famille fare.
This fare must be booked for both infant and parent: different
prices are returned for the child and the adult.
Indicates a Carte d’Invalidité or Carte d'Invalidité
Accompagnateur fare.
Wheelchair space is automatically selected. This is set in the
Seat selection window, with the Preferences option selected
under the Environment drop-down.
Even if the second passenger (trips with a disabled passenger
are limited to two passengers maximum) is not using a
disabled rail card, the wheelchair space accommodation type
will automatically be selected for both passengers.
Indicates an RIT fare. This allows inclusion of RIT fares in the
full booking flow. After-sales operations (for example, refund,
exchange and void) are possible with RIT fares.
Note:
To access SNCF RIT fares, the check box Display RIT Fares must be
selected in the Search page.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
175
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Viewing Fares Quoted in a Different Currency
In the Availability and Fares display, if the fare is displayed in a different
currency from your own, you can display the equivalent price by clicking on the
currency drop-down menu and selecting your currency.
For each fare, the price in the provider's currency is shown in blue, and the
equivalent price in the selected currency is shown in grey between brackets.
Note:
The price in the selected currency is for information purposes only.
Comparing Multiple Trips
How to Compare Multiple Trips
Note:
You can only use Trip Comparison for single-passenger bookings with a
maximum of four proposals per comparison.
1. To select a fare, move the mouse over the fare and click on the selection
button that appears next to the fare.
2. Click on Add trip for comparison.
3. From the list, select another fare.
The extra trip is added as a new Your trip tab.
You can add up to four trips.
4. Click on Compare.
5. The details of the selected trips are displayed side-by-side in the Trip
Comparison window.
You can print or mail this summary page. Before printing or mailing, you can
choose to hide particular sections, such as the price, by modifying the layout
using the link at the top of the window, or add comments in the Comments
fields.
6. To continue booking one of the trips, click on Continue booking under the
relevant column.
Example: Comparing Trips
176
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
How to Select a Fare
1. Select the appropriate fare in the Availability page by moving the mouse
over the fare and clicking on the selection button that appears next to the
fare.
For a return trip, select the appropriate fare for both outbound and inbound
trips.
Note:
When you select a trip, the trip is added to the shopping basket and
a summary of the trip is displayed. You can delete or change your
selections using the Clear and Change links.
If you want to compare multiple trips for a single-passenger booking, refer to
How to Compare Multiple Trips on page 176.
2. Click on Continue.
The Passenger Information page is displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
177
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Adding Passenger Information and Booking Your
Trip
How to Add Passenger Information and Book Your Trip
1. On the Passenger Information page, enter the passenger's Last Name and
First Name, if not already entered in the Search page.
Enter any other traveller information, such as Date of Birth, E-mail or
Phone.
If Loyalty Card information has been transferred from the company or
traveller profile, it will be prefilled. The Loyalty code field may also be
prefilled if this information has been added to the PNR using the Command
Page. Otherwise enter the details.
2. In the Seat or berth preferences section, if you wish change the automatic
seat selection for each bound, click on Modify.
Note:
The Modify link is not available for an open ticket segment.
The Seat selection window opens.
-
To have the system automatically assign a seat for you, select
Automatic.
-
To specify general seat type preferences, select Preferences.
This lets you choose either a window or aisle seat, and depending on the
provider, a choice of environment, such as a quiet zone. You can also
specify a wheelchair accessible seat in the Profile drop-down.
-
To choose a specific seat, select Assignment.
Note:
Seat or berth selection does not guarantee seat allocation.
Click on Apply to apply your selections, or Ignore and Close.
3. If you wish to add ancillary services, click on Add Services.
The Ancillary Services section expands to show the available services.
Swedish Rail: The Ancillary Services section allows you to add, delete or
modify an ancillary service. Select any required ancillary services and click on
Add to your selection.
SNCF: You cannot modify ancillary services as they are already included in
the fare.
4. In the Payment Information section, specify the form of payment.
The available forms of payment vary per provider, and depending on the type
of ticket selected. For more details see What Are the Accepted Forms of
Payment? on page 196.
You can confirm the booking without a form of payment by selecting the No
Payment option. When issuing the ticket, you can then add a form of
payment using the Command page.
Deutsche Bahn: If you select Credit Card as the form of payment, you are
notified that a specific payment transaction fee may apply at ticketing time.
Deutsche Bahn: If you select Credit Card as the form of payment, and you
select UATP/Airplus as the credit card type, you must enter some additional
billing information. Click on Billing Information to enter this.
5. In the Issuing Mode section, select the Issuing Mode. This specifies the
type of ticket issued. The choices available depend on the rail provider.
178
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
6. In the Remarks section, click on Add a Remark to add any additional
information. You can either add a rail-categorised remark (RMR) or an
accounting remark (RM).
If the booking is based on an existing Booking File that already contains
remarks, these are displayed.
7. To automatically add a ticketing arrangement to the Booking File, select the
Add TK OK element check box.
8. Swedish Rail: To enable the passenger to request a VAT exemption, select
the VAT exemption check box in the Your trips section. This is applicable
for international journeys (by train or with an international flight connection)
where a Swedish border is crossed. It is the responsibility of the traveler to
ensure they meet VAT exemption conditions. Note that a warning will be
displayed on booking.
9. Click on Book to confirm the booking.
The booking is done on the provider side and a provider record locator is
displayed.
Example: Entering Passenger Information
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
179
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Save Your Booking
1. You can print or email the booking confirmation, either before or after saving
the booking, by using the Print
Confirmation page.
and Email
icons at the top of the
2. To save your booking, do one of the following:
-
Click on Save, Confirm and Stay on This Page to save the booking to
the Booking File.
The Confirmation page is refreshed. The Booking File is displayed and
the Issue Tickets link is enabled.
-
Enter an ER command in the Command page.
After the Issue Tickets link is enabled, you can issue tickets. See Issuing Tickets
on page 184.
Before you issue tickets, you can still:
•
Modify or cancel rail segments. See Modifying, Cancelling, and Repricing
Swedish Rail and SNCF Rail Segments on page 181 and Modifying and
Cancelling Other Provider Rail Segments on page 182.
•
Modify passenger details. See Modifying Passenger Details Before Issuance
on page 184.
Example: Confirming Your Booking
180
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Modifying Bookings Before Issuance
Modifying, Cancelling, and Repricing Swedish Rail and SNCF
Rail Segments
How to Add a Rail Segment to an Existing Booking
Note:
This option is only available for reservations that have been confirmed
(by an EOT) but not yet ticketed.
1. Retrieve the Booking File and click on the Rail icon
.
2. Under Reservation management in the Confirmation page, click on Add a
bound.
3. For existing reservations, you can choose to either:
-
Create a new reservation for the bound
-
Merge the new bound into an existing reservation.
4. In the Search page, search for a new rail trip.
-
You can choose to create open-jaw or multi-passenger segments.
-
You can optionally specify a new corporate code or loyalty card.
5. Select the rail trip from the availability display.
6. On the Passenger Information page, click on Book to confirm the booking
with the rail provider and add the booking to the Booking File.
Note:
You cannot change the method of delivery or form of payment when
adding a trip to an existing SNCF reservation.
The bound is added for all passengers in the Booking File.
How to Cancel a Rail Segment From an Existing Booking
Note:
This option is only available for reservations that have been confirmed
(by an EOT) but not yet ticketed, and that contain at least one
cancellable segment, or a segment with a ticketing time limit.
1. Retrieve the Booking File and click on the Rail icon
.
The segments for each bound are displayed in the Confirmation page.
2. Under Reservation Management, click on Cancel Segment(s).
3. In the Cancellation mode pop-up window, select the rail segments that you
want to cancel.
You can select and cancel specific rail segments using the drop-down button.
Note:
Return fares cannot be separated. Therefore, it is not possible to
cancel only an inbound or an outbound fare. Similarly, segments in
a Through fare cannot be cancelled separately.
4. Click on Confirm Cancellation.
5. To save the booking, click on Save and Confirm or use ET in the Command
page.
-
Partial cancellation: If you did not select all segments for cancellation
(and the cancellation is successful), you are returned to the
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
181
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Confirmation page. The segments that were selected for cancellation
are no longer displayed. They are deleted from the Booking File, and the
fares are updated.
-
Full cancellation: If you selected all segments for cancellation (and the
cancellation is successful), you are returned to the Search page. Any
information that is not linked to a bound remains prefilled in the search
fields, such as travellers and contact points.
How to Reprice a Rail Segment in an Existing Booking
Note:
This option is only available for reservations that have been confirmed
(by an EOT) but not yet ticketed (either fully or partially).
1. Retrieve the Booking File and click on the Rail icon
.
2. Under Reservation Management in the Confirmation page, click on
Reprice.
Note:
It is not possible to use a CUI or corporate program, or add a loyalty
card during the reprice.
3. Using the Reservation drop-down arrow in the Reprice reservation pop-up
window, select the reservation that you want to reprice.
All segments in the reservation are displayed.
4. Click on Reprice this segment next to the relevant segment.
For an individual segment and per passenger, you can modify the:
-
Booking class: This field must be filled.
-
Fare code: This field can be left empty, in which case the segment is
priced at the most expensive fare by the provider.
-
Passenger type: This field must be filled.
5. Click on the selector button
entries.
next to each field to display a list of valid
6. If you want to replicate your changes for all segments, click on the selector
button to select the segments.
7. Click on Replicate changes to selected segments.
8. Click on Confirm reprice. This sends the request to the provider to reprice
the selected reservation.
Handling a Lost Repriced SNCF Rail Segment
After a reprice, the price of the SNCF reservation can be lost. A warning icon is
displayed next to the reservation record locator, and in the price information
section, for the segments corresponding to the reservation with no price.
You can either cancel the reservation, ticket it, or reprice it again. The ticketing
will result in the assignment of a new price.
Modifying and Cancelling Other Provider Rail Segments
This section refers to carries other than Swedish Rail and SNCF. For details on
how to cancel segments for those carriers, see Modifying, Cancelling, and
Repricing Swedish Rail and SNCF Rail Segments on page 181.
182
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
How to Add a Rail Trip to an Existing Booking
Note:
A maximum of eight bounds can be contained in the same Booking File.
1. Retrieve the Booking File. See How to Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. Click on the Rail icon
.
3. Click on Add a Bound.
The trip is added for each passenger in the Booking File.
Note:
After you add a rail trip, you cannot change the number of
passengers in the Booking File.
4. Search for a new rail trip.
5. Select the rail trip.
6. In the Passenger Information page, click on Book to confirm the booking
with the rail provider and add the booking to the Booking File.
7. Save the Booking File.
The new bound is booked in a new reservation on the provider side.
How to Modify a Rail Trip
1. Retrieve the Booking File. See How to Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the rail segments
you want to cancel and:
-
Click on Modify.
Or:
-
Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
3. Update the information as required and click on Save and Confirm (ER).
How to Cancel a Rail Segment From an Existing Booking Before
Issuing Tickets
1. Retrieve the Booking File. See How to Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section of the Booking File, select the rail segments
that you want to cancel and click on Cancel.
Or:
In the Itinerary Basket panel of the Booking File, click on Cancel for the rail
segments that you want to cancel.
3. Click on Cancel Segments to confirm the cancellation of the segments.
How to Cancel All Rail Segments Before Issuing Tickets
1. In the Confirmation page, click on Cancel Bounds in the What do you
want to do next? section.
The Cancellation mode section is displayed.
2. Click on Confirm Cancellation.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
183
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Modifying Passenger Details Before Issuance
Before you issue tickets you can modify certain passenger details:
•
Passenger name (SNCF)
•
Email address
•
Loyalty card number and details
•
Date of Birth (SNCF)
This allows you, for example, to create a booking where not all the passenger
details are available at booking time, and to add these at a later date prior to
ticketing.
Note:
Name changes are only made in Rail Display and are not possible for
multi-modal reservations. Also, if a valid loyalty card is used, any name
change is made only in the Amadeus system, not in SNCF.
Note:
Reprice is not automatic after a change of date of birth. So, for
example, if you change the passenger type from Adult to Child, you will
have to perform the reprice manually and enter the correct passenger
type.
How to Modify Passenger Details
1. In the Confirmation page, in the Passenger and contact details section, click
on Edit.
2. Modify the passenger details as necessary.
3. Click on Confirm modification.
Issuing Tickets
How to Issue Train Tickets
1. Retrieve a Booking File. See How to Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
The Booking File must be end-transacted, contain a form of payment and
have a rail segment.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Issue Tickets in the What do you want to do next? section.
The Ticketing Mode section is displayed and all rail segments are selected.
Note:
You can request a partial issue.
5. SNCF: If you wish, you can change the method of delivery at this point.
a) Click on the Issuing mode link for any DV, then select the new Issuing
mode from the drop-down list.
You can also change the email address, date of birth or loyalty card
details at this point.
b) Click on Confirm Modification.
184
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
The modification is made locally in Rail Display. No modification of the
SNCF DV is performed until the ticketing is confirmed.
Notes:
Only one method of delivery per PNR (DV) is allowed.
It is not possible to change the method of delivery if there have
been voided tickets on the DV.
You cannot change the method of delivery form of payment when
adding a trip to an existing SNCF reservation.
The method of delivery can only be changed for PNTs created after
23 March 2017.
6. In the Ticketing Mode section, click on Confirm Ticketing.
The Confirmation page and the Booking File are updated with the ticket
number, the issue date and the type of ticket issued.
Deutsche Bahn: If a payment transaction fee applies, a warning is displayed.
To accept this fee, you must re-transact the ticketing command or change the
form of payment.
Resending E-tickets
Resending is only available for:
•
BeNeRail International (SNCF partition) E-billet and Thalys Ticketless
bookings.
SNCF partition only provides access to routes eligible for E-billet via SNCB
Europe & NS International. Note that for SNCB/NS, only the e-mail
confirmation can be resent.
•
Swedish Rail bookings
The availability of this feature depends on your Selling Platform environment
settings.
See Provider-specific Features on page 200 for more information.
Why Resend a Ticket?
The Resend feature allows you to:
•
Resend a ticket that is identical to the original ticket issued. This feature is
useful if, for example, a passenger has lost the paper ticket or the device on
which the e-ticket is stored.
•
Update and resend a ticket if you want to make changes to the ticket's
issuing mode, language or contact information. If, for example, there is an
error in the passenger's email address, you can reissue a corrected ticket.
What Are the Requirements for Resending E-tickets?
•
The PNR contains one or more issued E-tickets.
•
The PNR is saved.
•
The tickets are issued, exchanged, or refunded.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
185
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Resend E-tickets
1. On the Confirmation page, under Issuance, click on Resend Confirmation.
A pop-up window opens, allowing you to change the ticket type and recipient
emails or phone number.
By default, the pop-up window displays the passenger email or phone
number provided when the ticket was booked.
SNCF:
You can also modify the email language.
SNCF:
Optionally, you can also add a Global email address. If you add
a Global email address, all tickets and passenger itineraries associated with
the booking are sent to this email. Emails will only be resent to those
recipients whose emails appear in this pop-up window.
Note:
Changes made to these fields will not update the PNR.
2. Click Confirm resend to resend the tickets.
SNCF:
For issued and exchanged E-billet tickets, the confirmation email and
tickets are resent. For refunded E-billet tickets, only the confirmation
email is resent. For issued, exchanged and refunded Thalys Ticketless
tickets, only the confirmation email is resent.
Refunding Tickets and Releasing Bookings
What Are the Requirements for Refunding Tickets?
Ticket refunds are limited to rail bookings for which tickets have already been
issued.
The following rules apply:
•
You must refund all bounds included in one ticket.
•
If the booking contains rail segments from multiple providers, you must
refund each segment separately.
Trenitalia, Swedish Rail, and Deutsche Bahn allow you to refund a nonrefundable ticket in case of an operator error.
•
Exceptionally, SNCF allows you to refund a non-refundable ticket in case of a
strike.
How to Refund Tickets
1. Retrieve the Booking File that has ticketed rail segments. See How to
Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Refund in the What do you want to do next? section.
186
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
5. In the Refund Tickets section, select the tickets for the journeys you wish to
refund.
SNCF:
If the booking is for multiple passengers, you can choose to perform
a refund for a specific passenger. Select the check box next to the
passenger name. There will be an automatic split on provider side
with a new SNCF DV number created, and the original PNR is
updated accordingly (that is, the segments that are refunded are
removed from the PNR).
For other providers, if the ticket is for multiple passengers, all
passengers are selected automatically.
6. Select a refund reason if applicable. This can be performed if the refund is
not triggered by the passenger. For example, a strike is taking place.
See What Are the Requirements for Refunding Tickets? on page 186.
7. Click on Get Conditions.
The ticket details are displayed, including the amount to be refunded and any
associated penalties and fees.
Deutsche Bahn: A possible payment transaction fee is displayed as a
separate ticket with a special icon .
8. Click on Refund.
The Confirmation page is updated to show that the tickets have been
refunded. If you refunded only one of two tickets, the Status field of the
Confirmation page changes to Mixed.
Note:
Refund per bound is not applicable to all providers.
How to Refund SNCF Tickets Due to a Strike
Note:
This applies to SNCF only.
1. Retrieve the Booking File that has ticketed rail segments. See How to
Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Refund in the What do you want to do next? section.
5. Click on the Exceptional Refund link.
6. Select Strike as the reason for the refund.
7. In the Refund Tickets section, select the tickets for the journeys you wish to
refund.
Note:
If the ticket is for multiple passengers, all passengers are selected
automatically.
8. Click on Get Conditions.
The ticket details are displayed, including any associated penalties and fees.
9. Click on Refund.
The Confirmation page is updated to show that the tickets have been
refunded.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
187
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Releasing a Booking or Seat (SNCF and Swedish Rail)
In the case where the traveller wishes to cancel the booking and receive a refund,
but is not able to physically return the paper ticket when requesting a refund, you
can perform a Release Booking, and perform the refund later when the traveller is
able to return the paper ticket.
You can release a booking for specific bounds or passengers, as well as for a
booking for a bound that is linked to a return fare.
Limitations
•
This feature is only available for SNCF and Swedish Rail bookings. However,
it is not possible to allow the release of bookings made with a mixture of
providers.
•
SNCF:
-
•
It is not possible to allow the release of one bound for one passenger and
the release of a different bound for a different passenger within the same
request.
Swedish Rail:
-
It is not possible to release one ticket from one sales order ID and
another ticket from different sales order ID in same request.
-
It is not possible to perform an exchange for released tickets.
-
It is not possible to release seat via cryptic.
How to Release a Booking
1. Retrieve the Booking File containing the reservation using the Command
page.
2. Select the Rail Display tab.
The segments for each bound are displayed in the Confirmation page.
3. Under After Sales, click on Release Seat.
The Release tickets panel shows the tickets that were issued, along with
their ticket number and price. All check boxes are unchecked by default.
4. Select the segments you wish to release.
5. To check the conditions, click on Get Conditions.
The Refund tickets panel appears, showing the conditions of the refund.
6. Click on Release to confirm the seat release.
In the Confirmation window, in the General information panel, the Status
displays 'Seat released' if the global Booking File status is 'Released' (that is,
all seats are released), otherwise it displays 'Mixed'.
An example of mixed status might be where two tickets have a status of 'Seat
Released' and the other two tickets are 'Ticketed'.
7. Click on Save, confirm and stay on this page.
A confirmation message is shown.
188
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Voiding SNCF Tickets
What is a Voided Ticket?
Tickets that have been issued can be voided during the same day. The void is
different from a refund, since there is no transaction and therefore no penalties or
fees. All types of tickets can be voided.
A voided ticket can be modified if necessary, and reissued.
How to Void SNCF Tickets
1. Retrieve the Booking File that has ticketed rail segments. See How to
Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Void in the What do you want to do next? section.
A Void tickets section appears, displaying a list of tickets for this trip. Only
voidable tickets can be selected.
If several tickets are associated to different bounds, each ticket can be voided
separately. However, if several tickets apply to the same bound and different
passengers, all tickets must be voided together; in other words, in the case of
multi-passengers, all tickets related to the same bound cannot be voided
separately.
5. Select the ticket you want to void and click on Confirm Void.
If the void is successful, the Confirmation page is refreshed, with the status
of the tickets changed to Voided.
If the void is not successful, a message is displayed.
Reissuing a Voided Ticket
Once a ticket has been voided, the Issue Tickets link is enabled, allowing you to
reissue the ticket.
Click on Issue Tickets to select the itineraries corresponding to the voided
tickets.
Exchanging Tickets
Exchanging Swedish Rail Tickets
What Are the Requirements for Exchanging Swedish Rail Tickets?
•
The Booking File must contain one or more issued Swedish Rail tickets.
•
You can exchange one or more issued tickets for one new ticket.
•
A Swedish Rail ticket can only be exchanged for another Swedish Rail ticket.
Cross-provider exchange is not possible.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
189
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
•
User Guide
If a ticket contains several passengers, the exchange must be done for all
passengers. It is not possible to exchange individual passengers on the same
ticket.
How to Identify Exchangeable Swedish Rail Tickets
Exchangeable tickets have the letter E in the Fare Collection View icon.
Table: Ticket Exchange Icons
Icon
Description
This icon is only shown for Swedish Rail. It indicates a
semi-flexible fare that can be exchanged with a fee.
How to Exchange Swedish Rail Tickets
1. Retrieve the Booking File that has ticketed rail segments. See How to
Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Exchange in the What do you want to do next? section.
5. Select the tickets that you want to exchange and click on Exchange
Selection.
The Your Passengers section is prefilled with the passengers in the Booking
File.
6. Complete the Change Your Trips section as required and click on Search.
Note:
You cannot change the provider from Swedish Rail.
7. Select the new proposal in the Availability page and click on Continue.
Only exchangeable proposals are displayed.
8. Review the passenger and purchase information.
Any exchange penalties or fees are displayed in the Exchange Tickets
section.
-
If the new reservation amount is greater than the original amount, the
difference to be paid is displayed in the Amount to Collect column.
-
If the new reservation amount is less than the original amount, the
residual amount is lost and will not be refunded. A zero value is displayed
in both the Amount to Collect and Amount to Refund columns.
9. Click on Book.
10. Review the new itinerary in the Confirmation page and click on Confirm
Exchange.
11. Click on Yes to confirm the exchange.
The Confirmation page is refreshed with the new ticket details, and the ticket
status is updated.
190
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Exchanging SNCF Rail Tickets
What Are the Requirements for Exchanging SNCF Tickets?
•
The Booking File must contain one or more issued SNCF tickets.
•
All SNCF content (Thalys, Eurostar, Lyria, Gala and Alleo) is supported,
except for Hermes tickets.
•
Any number of tickets can be exchanged for any other number of tickets. For
example: 1 ticket to 1 ticket; 1 ticket to multiple tickets; multiple tickets to 1
ticket, and so on.
•
Multi-carrier exchange is not supported. For example, SNCF tickets can only
be exchanged for SNCF; Eurostar tickets can only be exchanged for
Eurostar, and so on.
•
It is not possible to exchange return fare tickets. Only individual bounds can
be exchanged.
How to Identify Exchangeable SNCF Rail Tickets
Exchangeable tickets are indicated by an icon containing the letter E in the
Availability page. Hover the mouse over the icon to see the flexibility conditions.
Table: Ticket Exchange Icons
Icon
Description
Indicates a fully flexible fare that can be exchanged.
Indicates a semi-flexible fare that can be exchanged.
How to Exchange SNCF Rail Tickets
1. Retrieve the Booking File that has ticketed rail segments. See How to
Retrieve a Booking File on page 169.
2. In the Itinerary Details section, click on Details to expand the rail segment.
3. Click on After Sales.
The Confirmation page of Rail opens.
4. Click on Exchange in the What do you want to do next? section.
5. The Search page of Rail opens with the Your Passengers section prefilled
with the passengers in the Booking File.
Note:
The CUI field is not prefilled, even if a CUI was used in the previous
reservation. You must enter the previous CUI or a new one.
SNCF:
If a PNR contains multiple segments, you can choose to exchange
specific tickets within the PNR.
6. Complete the Change Your Trips section as required and click on Search.
Note:
You cannot change the provider from SNCF.
7. Select the new proposal in the Availability page and click on Continue.
Only exchangeable proposals are displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
191
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
8. In the Passenger Information page, review the passenger information.
Note:
If a Loyalty card was entered in the previous reservation, it cannot
be changed. If there was no loyalty card in the previous reservation,
you cannot add a new one.
9. Review the other information, and click on Continue.
10. Review the new itinerary on the Confirmation page.
Any exchange penalties or fees are displayed in the Exchange Tickets
section.
-
If the new reservation amount is greater than the original amount, the
difference to be paid is displayed in the Amount to collect column.
-
If the new reservation amount is less than the original amount, the
residual amount to be refunded is shown in the Amount to refund
column.
-
If the new reservation amount is equivalent to the original amount, a zero
value is displayed in both the Amount to collect and Amount to refund
columns.
11. Click on Confirm Exchange.
12. Click on Yes to confirm the exchange.
The Confirmation page is refreshed with the new ticket details, and the ticket
status is updated.
Selling SNCF Railcards
What Types of Railcard Can Be Sold?
You can sell coupons for the following SNCF subscriptions:
•
Abonnement Forfait sur Ligne Classique
•
Abonnement Fréquence 25 and 50
•
Abonnement Forfait Ligne à Grande Vitesse
•
Carte Enfant+
•
Enfant Famille
•
Carte d'Invalidité
•
Carte d'Invalidité Accompagnateur
These subscriptions can be sold together with an SNCF railcard for new
subscribers, or on their own as renewals for existing subscribers. You cannot sell
railcards without a coupon.
Additionally, it is not possible to:
192
•
Combine a rail reservation and railcard purchase in the same Booking File.
•
Buy multiple coupons in the same flow, either for a single passenger or for
multiple passengers.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Image: Rail Cards Selection for SNCF
How to Sell a Railcard
1. Click on the Cards & Vouchers tab.
2. In the Selection page, select the SNCF subscription that you want to
purchase a coupon for.
3. Select one of these options:
-
The traveller has no card. This is a first-time railcard purchase.
Selecting this option assumes that the traveller does not already own a
card.
-
The traveller already has a card. This is for the renewal of a
subscription. In this case, enter the traveller's card number, first name,
and date of birth.
4. Enter the Departure and Destination stations.
Note:
For Fréquence railcards, you can specify all stations by selecting
the check box entitled: The traveller would like to travel in all
France.
5. Click on Search.
-
In the case of a first-time purchase, a list of subscription coupon options
is displayed showing the prices by duration and class of service. For
example, 3-month, annual, first or second class, and so on.
-
In the case of a renewal, a list of coupon prices is shown based on the
subscription valid for the entered stations. Since the exact price depends
on the traveller's profile, it is necessary to obtain a quote.
6. Select a coupon type and click on Continue.
7. In the Purchase page, enter the traveller's contact details in the Traveller
Information and Contact Details section.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
193
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
If the Booking File already contained traveller details, then these fields are
pre-filled.
Note:
The Railcard field can be filled or left blank regardless of whether
you selected the option: Traveller already has a card.
8. In the Payment and Delivery section, select the form of payment and the
method of delivery.
9. The Your selection section shows a summary of the selected subscription.
-
For Abonnement Fréquence, click on the price to display a pop-up with
the fare conditions.
-
For the annual subscriptions, the fare conditions are shown in an
expandable section.
10. Click on Quote.
The Confirmation page show a summary of your purchase, including a
provider record locator.
11. Click on Save, confirm and stay on this page.
This performs an end transaction. The page is refreshed and the Amadeus
record locator is displayed. The Issue Railcard link is now enabled.
12. Click on the Issue Railcard link.
13. Click on Confirm ticketing.
The Confirmation page is refreshed and a Ticket details section is
displayed, showing the status as ticketed.
In the case of a first-time purchase, two lines are shown; one for the railcard
and one for the coupon.
Note:
Unlike rail reservations, an email is not sent to the traveller.
How to Cancel the Purchase of a Railcard Coupon
Note:
You can only cancel the purchase of a railcard coupon if you have not
yet issued the coupon.
Note:
It is not possible to refund a coupon.
1. In the Confirmation page, click on Cancel.
2. Click on Confirm Cancel to return to the Selection page.
Frequently Asked Questions
Profiles
What Is the Correct Format for Profile Information?
Railcard, loyalty card and corporate card information must be stored in structured
rail remarks.
For information about specific structure and codes (provider and cards), contact
your local representative.
194
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
How Can I Correct an Error in a Retrieved Profile?
The error must be corrected in the Profiles module. You cannot update profile
information in Rail.
Can I Make a Booking for a Passenger Without a Profile?
Yes, you will be prompted to enter the passenger details before confirming the
booking.
Searching
Can I Select the Passenger Type on the Search Page?
The Passenger type selection is only available to Swedish Rail.
How Do I Select a Railcard in the Search?
You can select a railcard manually by using the Railcard drop-down list or by
using the autocomplete feature for the Railcard field.
Or:
You can upload a passenger profile and select a railcard using the Railcard dropdown list.
Railcards that are associated with a profile are selected by default.
Is it Possible to Have a Discount Card Per Passenger?
Yes, you can have a discount card per passenger.
Fare Collection View
Where Can I Find Railcard Discount Fares?
The railcard discount fares are displayed in the Fare Collection View and they
are represented by the
icon.
Booking
Can I Make Multi-Destination or Open-Jaw Bookings?
Yes. You can make an open-jaw booking for two segments, except for Trenitalia
and Deutsche Bahn trips.
Multi-destination bookings need to be managed as separate bookings.
Note:
In some cases, two different stations in the same city (for example,
Lyon Perrache and Lyon Part Dieu) are considered as the same station
when making a booking and are not regarded as multi-destination
bookings.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
195
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Can I Make Group Bookings?
No. You can only make multi-passenger bookings limited to nine passengers.
How Are Seats Allocated During a Booking?
By default, seats are allocated when you make a booking. You can modify this
selection.
Does a Seat Selection for a Passenger Guarantee that a Seat Is
Reserved?
No. Selecting a seat preference for a passenger does not guarantee that the rail
provider can respect this preference. You must check the seat allocation granted
by the provider (coach number and seat/berth number) in the Confirmation
page.
Can I Use a Loyalty Card for Bookings?
Yes. You can add loyalty card details on the Passenger Information page. If the
loyalty card information is stored in the profile, the Passenger Information page
displays it automatically.
Can I Print or Email a Booking Confirmation?
Yes. You can use the Print and Email icons in the Confirmation page to print or
email the booking confirmation.
Payment
What Are the Accepted Forms of Payment?
Each rail provider accepts different forms of payment.
The form of payment that is accepted depends on the commercial agreement
with each provider.
Table: Accepted Forms of Payment
196
Form of Payment
SNCF
Swedish Rail
Trenitalia
Deutsche Bahn
No Payment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cash
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credit Card
No
No
No
Yes
Account
Yes
No
No
No
Invoice
No
No
No
Yes
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Ticketing and Refunding
What Are the Ticketing Options?
SNCF
Ticket Option
Feature
E-ticket
An e-ticket is collected at a ticket vending machine on
departure.
E-billet
A PDF ticket is sent to the passenger to print at home. You
can select the ticket and confirmation email language on
the Confirmation page. The ticket must be presented at
departure.
Ticketless SMS
An SMS is sent to the passenger with the e-ticket
containing the reservation code.
By default, the passenger receives the SMS ticket 24
hours before the departure date.
To distribute the SMS ticket to the passenger immediately
after it is booked, select the Send SMS upon ticket
issuance check box on the Passenger Information page.
This option is only available if the booking is scheduled
less than 90 days before the booking date.
ATB - Agency Pickup
If you select the ATB ticketing option, it is not possible to
process the ticketing in Rail. Ticket issuance and any other
actions must be performed in the Command page.
Paper Value - Agency
Pickup
Paper value is a PDF ticket printed on the provider’s
secured paper. The travel agency prints the ticket on the
provider's secured paper and delivers it to the passenger.
Thalys Ticketless
Enter a Thalys’ loyalty card or an email address in the
Reservation page before or after you select the issuing
mode.
The passenger can book a trip using one of the following
methods:
•
Ticketless loyalty card: By entering the loyalty card
number, the traveller will be able to travel with his
Thalys TheCard as proof of transportation.
•
Ticketless E-mail: In case the traveller does not have
a Thalys TheCard, it will be sufficient to simply enter
the e-mail address, and Thalys will send the travel
document by e-mail.
All passengers receive a confirmation email from
distributor and a Ticketless booking confirmation from
Thalys afterward, providing the details of their journeys.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
197
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Swedish Rail
Ticket Option
Feature
Ticketless SMS
An SMS is sent to the passenger with the e-ticket
containing the reservation code.
By default, the passenger receives the SMS ticket 24
hours before the departure date.
To distribute the SMS ticket to the passenger immediately
after it is booked, select the Send SMS upon ticket
issuance check box on the Passenger Information page.
This option is only available if the booking is scheduled
less than 90 days before the booking date.
Pick Up at Station
The passenger can collect the ticket at departure from a
vending machine or from an operator. The passenger
needs to present a valid reservation code.
Ticketless Email
A PDF ticket is emailed to the passenger to print at home.
The ticket must be presented at departure.
Trenitalia
Ticket Option
Feature
Ticketless
Email:
A PDF ticket is emailed to the passenger to print at home.
The ticket must be presented at departure. If multiple email
addresses were entered for a multi-passenger booking, the
PDF ticket is sent to each address.
Reservation record:
The provider reservation record is displayed on the
Confirmation page. The Reservation record must be
shown when boarding.
Deutsche Bahn
Ticket Option
Feature
E-ticket (Bahn-Tix)
A Bahn-Tix e-ticket is collected at any Deutsche Bahn
long-distance ticket-vending machine in any German
station.
The e-ticket can be collected after the booking is paid.
Online Ticket (OLT)
A PDF ticket is sent to the passenger to print at home. The
ticket must be presented while on board together with the
original form of identification (FOID) used at payment time.
Only both ticket and FOID together are accepted as valid
proof of a correct OLT. Otherwise, a penalty will be
applied.
198
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Under What Circumstances Are Tickets Refunded?
Each rail provider may refund a ticket under special circumstances.
The following table shows the refund reasons that each provider accepts.
Table: Refunding Reasons
Refund Reason
SNCF
Trenitalia
Swedish Rail
Deutsche Bahn
Strike
Yes
No
No
No
Passenger Request
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Operator Error
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Approved By Provider
No
No
Yes
No
Do I Need a Form of Identification to Process a Refund?
No. It is not mandatory.
Trenitalia: A form of identification is an optional step in the refund process.
Can I Refund a Train Ticket Due to a Strike?
You must contact SNCF to obtain a refund.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
199
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Provider-specific Features
Area
Functionality
SNCF
BeneRail (NS,
NMBS/SNCB)
Trenitalia
Swedish
Rail
Deutsche
Bahn
Searching
Passenger Type
No
No
No
Yes
No
Multi-Destination
Journeys (open jaw)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Via Station
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Minimum Stopover
Time (for multiple
via stations)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Transfer Duration
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Maximum Number
of Changes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Arrival Time
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Class of Service
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Train Type
No
No
No
No
Yes
Advanced Fare
Search
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Display Fully
Booked Trains
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
(including
fully booked
fares)
Yes
Split Booking File
Before Booking
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Specific Seat
Assignment
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Ancillary Services
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Ticket Number
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Booking
Ticketing
200
Edition 13.0
Chapter 8 Rail Display
Functionality
SNCF
BeneRail (NS,
NMBS/SNCB)
Trenitalia
Swedish
Rail
Deutsche
Bahn
Ticketing All
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ticketing per
Passenger
No
No
No
No
No
Resending
Electronic Ticket
Resend
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Refunding
Refund All
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Refund per Bound
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Refund per
Passenger
No
No
No
Yes
(only applies
if multipassenger
booking is
created.)
No
Void All
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Partial Void
No
No
No
No
No
Void per Passenger
No
No
No
No
No
Ticket Exchange
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Partial Exchange
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Exchange per
Passenger
No
No
No
No
No
Area
Void
Exchanging
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
201
Troubleshooting
Retrieving Session Information
What is Session Information?
Rail maintains information about the current browser session. When creating an
IR for the Amadeus second level help desk, you must include this information.
The session information includes the following details:
•
JSession ID
The JsessionID is a key element which allows the help desk to retrieve traces
from the Service Integrator logs of the request or reply. The help desk can
then diagnose the cause of the problem in the Rail application.
•
General information
This indicates information about your environment.
How to Retrieve Session Information
1. On the Search page, click on Session Info.
The session information window is displayed.
2. Click on Copy to clipboard and paste it into the incident record (IR).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
203
Chapter 9
Cryptic Magic
Getting Started With Cryptic Magic
What Is Cryptic Magic?
Cryptic Magic provides a text field from within the graphic workflow into which you
can enter a limited number of cryptic commands that will populate the Booking
File. See Using Cryptic Magic Commands below.
How to Access Cryptic Magic
The Cryptic Magic entry line is available from anywhere in the application:

This is the Cryptic Magic text field. Enter cryptic commands here.

By clicking on this symbol, a history of recent commands will be displayed. These
can be edited and re-entered.

Use this drop-down list to select another GDS provider.
What Are the Features of Cryptic Magic?
The Cryptic Magic entry line has the following features:
•
A cryptic command can be typed directly into the Cryptic Magic text field.
•
After a command is recognised, the background changes to green.
•
If a command is not recognised, you are prompted to switch to the
Command Page.
Using Cryptic Magic Commands
Cryptic Magic can be used to enter a variety of commands, including (but not
limited to) availability and scheduling, fare quote display, fare notes, flight
information, short sell and pricing commands for Amadeus. You can also use
some Sabre commands with Cryptic Magic.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
205
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Cryptic Magic Availability and Scheduling Commands
Request
Entry
One-way routing, specified
date, city pair, time
AN11JULHOULAX1430
Local time if today is 11JUL,
or 0000 in the future
AN11JULHOULAX
Current day departure,
specified time
ANMIAATL1130
Departure city is the same as
the office profile
AN11JULNYC1130
Current location and current
day departure, local time
ANATL
Seven-day search
AN/11JULMADNYC1430
Round-trip routing, specified
dates and times
AN11JULMADCPH8A*23AUG2P
Round trip, returning on the
same day
AN11JULMADCPH*
Departure on current day,
local time
ANMADSCL*11JUL1200
Seven-day search
AN/11JULMADBKK*29JUL7A
Dual city pair display,
specified dates
AN9JULFRAMAD*23JULBCNDUS
Second pair a number of
days later A
AN11JULMADCPH*+4STOBCN
Same day availability
AN9JULMADFRA*DUSBCN
Open-jaw availability
AN12OCTFRAMAD*BCN
Seven-day search
AN/8FEBANCNOU*//3MARPPTANC
AD23OCTPDXOMA7A
AA23OCTSEASFO11A
AD23OCTPDXORD/AUA
206
Airline preference (maximum
six)
AN11JULMADCPH13/ASK,IB
Availability for a specific flight
number
AN11JULATHROM/AAZ717
Number of seats (maximum
nine)
AN11JULSINFRA/B3
Specified cabin type
(maximum two)
AN11JULSINSYD/KF,C
Specified classes (maximum
three)
AN11JULLHRBOM/CF
Specified classes on all
segments
AN15SEPJFKAMS/CF-Y
Connecting cities (up to two)
AN11JULLONTYO14/XBKKHKG
Non-stop flights only
AN11JULLAXNYC/FN
Edition 13.0
Chapter 9 Cryptic Magic
Cryptic Magic Fare Quote Display Commands
Request
Entry
Origin city different from CRT
location, today
FQDFRAMNL
Origin city and CRT location
same, today
FQDMNL
Specific airline only
FQDFRAMNL/A-LH
Multiple airlines (maximum of
three)
FQDFRAMNL/ALH,PR,KL
Common fares only
FQDFRAMNL/AYY
Three-month display, starting
in April
FQDFRAMNL/DAPR
Specific date
FQDFRAMNL/D11APR
Exact outbound travel dates
FQDFRAMNL/A-LH/D26NOV*
Range of travel start dates
FQDFRAMNL/D21JUL**14AUG
From a specific date to seven
days ahead
FQDFRAMNL/D21JAN**7D
From a specific date to three
months ahead
FQDBCNMNL/AIB/D21JAN**3M
Fares from today's date to a
specific date
FQDFRAMNL/D**3MAR
Specific past date
FQDFRAMNL/ALH/D23JAN09
Different travel and ticketing
dates
FQDPARFRA/D5JUN08/AAF/R,06APR08
Travel date (with date range)
different from ticketing dates
FQDHELNBO/D15AUG08**/R,10MAY08
Front cabin position (first
class)
FQDFRAMNL/KF
Front cabin position
(business class)
FQDFRAMNL/KC
Rear cabin position
(economy class)
FQDFRAMNL/KY
Rear cabin (economy and
premium class)
FQDFRAMNL/KW
Rear cabin (economy class,
excluding premium)
FQDFRAMNL/KM
One-way fares
FQDFRAMNL/IO
Round-trip fares
FQDFRAMNL/IR
Fares in NUC
FQDFRAMNL/R,NUC
Add tax (if not included by
default)
FQDFRAMNL/R,AT
Withhold tax (if included by
default)
FQDFRAMNL/R,WT
Fare request types, APEX,
PEX and MILITARY
(maximum of three codes)
FQDFRAMNL/ALH/R,-APX-PEX-MIL
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
207
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Request
Entry
Expanded parameters, fares
with no penalty
FQDNYCLON/ABA/R,*NPE
Expanded parameters, fares
with a percentage penalty
FQDNYCPAR/AAF/R,*PE25P
Round-the-world (RTW) or
Circle Trip (CT) fares
FQDLONLON/AQF/VRW, FQDSYDSYD/AQF/VCT
Unifares
FQDNYCMAD/R,U
Unifares for a corporate
contract
FQDNYCMAD/R,U364477
Unifares by corporate name
FQDNYCMAD/R,UU*IBM
Unifares for a specific airline
FQDNYCSFO/AUS/R,U
Negotiated fares for a
corporate contract
FQDNYCMAD/R,C364477
Cryptic Magic Fare Notes Commands
Request
Entry
Fare notes
FQN3
Cryptic Magic Flight Information Commands
Request
Entry
From an availability or
schedule display (line two),
maximum two
DO2
From an availability display,
third flight from line one
(multi segment)
DO1/3
Cryptic Magic Informative Display Commands
208
Request
Entry
Display a list of fares
FQPLONSINLON
View the ticket image for the
fare on line 3
FQQ3
Different airlines, each
segment
FQPLON/ABASINJKT/ASQBKK
Same airline for all segments
FQPNCE/AAFMIAPARNCE
Same airline for all segments
FQPNCEMIAPARNCE/OAF
Travel dates
FQPLON/D04SEPSIN/D18OCTLON
Edition 13.0
Chapter 9 Cryptic Magic
Request
Entry
Past travel and validation
date (maximum six months
for US and Canada and 12
months for the rest of the
world)
FQPMUC/D01APRPARMAD/R,07JUN08
Fare break point at the next
city
FQPLON/BPARHEL
Inhibit fare break point at the
next city
FQPLON/BPARHEL
Global routing via the eastern
hemisphere
FQPLON/VEHSINLON
Global routing round-theworld (RTW)
FQPLON/ABA/VRWCHIHNLSYDBKKLON
Passenger discount
FQPMADPARMAD/RCH
Multiple discounts (maximum
six codes)
FQPMADPAR/RCH**ZZ**IN
Passenger type code
FQPLAX/AYXNYC/RMIL
Booking codes
FQPLON/CFSIN/CYLON
Return as a mirror of
outbound segments
FQPLONSIN/M
Expanded parameters, fares
with no maximum stay
FQPPARSYDPAR/R,*NMX
Expanded parameters,
multiple restrictions
FQPNYC/AAAMIABOS/R,*NPE-NAP
Point-of-sale override
FQPMADPARMAD/R,LON
Ticketing city override
FQPMADPARMAD/R,.FRA
Point-of-sale and ticketing
city override
FQPMADPARMAD/R,LON.FRA
Price in a foreign currency
FQPLONSIN/R,FC-USD
Stopover sector
FQPLONFRA-MUCDUSLON
Stopover and surface sector
FQPLONFRA---MUCDUSLON
Transfer at all points before
the hyphen (FRA and MUC)
FQPLONFRAMUCGVA-
Tax exemption, all taxes
FQPMADPARMAD/R,ET
Add taxes
FQPBOG/ACOMIA-EWR-BOG/R,AC-US
Withhold taxes
FQPPAR/AAFFRA-LON-PAR/R,WC-DE
Withhold surcharges
FQPNYC/AAARIO/R,WQ
Withhold all taxes
FQPLONNCELON/R,WT
Unifares
FQPNCE/ABALHRNCE/R,U
Unifares for a corporate
contract
FQPNCE/ABALHRNCE/R,U364477
Negotiated fares for a
corporate contract
FQPNCE/ABALHRNCE/R,C364477
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
209
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Cryptic Magic Long Sell, Ghost, Passive, Information Commands
Request
Entry
Sell one seat
SSEI154C12JULDUBLHR1
Departure date is today
SSBA352C/LHRNCE1
Unaccompanied minors
SSBA343L10JULNCELHRUM2/5,6
Stretcher
SSBA343L10JULNCELHRST2
Interline passenger with a
reservation
SSAF2402C10JULNCEORYID1
Reconfirm segment booked
outside Amadeus
SSDL071C12JUNCPHJFKRR1
Cancel a segment booked
outside Amadeus
SSAC111C19DECYULYVRIX1
Create passive segment
SS1G2/PK/ABC123
Create service segment
SS1G2/HK/ABC123
Create ghost segment
SS1G2/GK/ABC123
Create passive segment from
dual city pair display
SS1L5/PK/ABCDE*12/PK/ABCDE
Add airline record locator to
passive segment
3/*ABC123
Create flight segment for
information
SIKL171C28JUNAMSCPHHK2/08501120
Arrival unknown
SIARNK
Create open segment
specifying only airline, class,
departure and arrival cities,
for one passenger
SOBAC25NOVLHRJFK/P2
Two airline codes
SOSKBA/C20SEPSTOLHR
Cryptic Magic Pricing Commands
210
Request
Entry
Price a PNR without creating
a TST
FXX
View the ticket image for the
fare on line 3
FQQ3
View the fare calculation for
the fare on line 3
FQH3
Global routing round-theworld (RW), whole itinerary
FXX/S2RW
Global routing Round-theWorld (RW), selected
segments
FXX/S2,RW,3-7,10
Global routing circle trip (CT),
whole itinerary
FXX/S2CT
Global routing circle trip (CT),
selected segments
FXX/S2,CT,3-7,10
Edition 13.0
Chapter 9 Cryptic Magic
Request
Entry
Passenger type codes
(maximum six codes)
FXX/RMIL*CD*CH
Price passenger type code,
military only
FXX/RMIL,*PTC
Expanded parameters, fares
with no restrictions
FXX/R,*NR
Expanded parameters,
multiple restrictions
FXX/R,*NPE-NAP
Expanded parameters,
penalty with percentage
FXX/R,*PE25P
Point-of-sale override
FXX/R,LON
Ticketing city override
FXX/R,.FRA
Point-of-sale and ticketing
city override
FXX/R,LON.FRA
Pricing in a foreign currency
FXX/R,FC-USD
Tax exemption, all taxes
FXX/R,ET
Tax exemption, all FR taxes
FXX/R,ET-FR
Tax exemption, SE type of
FR tax
FXX/R,ET-FRSE
Add taxes (maximum four)
FXX/R,AC-US-GB
Withhold taxes (maximum
four)
FXX/R,WC-DE-FR
Unifares
FXX/R,U
Unifares for a corporate
contract
FXX/R,U123001
Unifares for up to six
corporate codes or names
FXX/R, U000001-000002-*IBM
Negotiated fares
FXX/R,NEGO
Negotiated fares for a
corporate contract
FXX/R,C123001
Price a new or retrieved
PNR, without TST
FXA
Price a PNR without creating
a TST
FXA
Price passenger 1
FXA/P1
Price passengers 1,2, and 5
FXA/P1,2,5
Price passengers 1 to 3
FXA/P1-3
Price only infants
FXA/INF
Price only non-infants
FXA/PAX
Same discount for all
passengers
FXA/RDG
Multiple discounts
FXA/RCH*ZZ*CD
Passenger discount for
passenger 1
FXA/P1/RDG
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
211
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
212
User Guide
Request
Entry
Passenger discount for
passengers 1 and 3
FXA/P1,3/RDG
Different discounts for
specified passengers
FXA/P1/RCH/P2/RZZ//P3/RCD
Passenger type codes
(maximum six codes)
FXA/RMIL*CD*CH
Price passenger type code,
military only
FXA/RMIL,*PTC
Expanded parameters, fares
with no restrictions
FXA/R,*NR
Expanded parameters,
multiple restrictions
FXA/R,*NPE-NAP
Expanded parameters,
penalty with percentage
FXA/R, *PE25P
Point-of-sale override
FXA/R,LON
Ticketing city override
FXA/R,.FRA
Point-of-sale and ticketing
city override
FXA/R,LON.FRA
Pricing in a foreign currency
FXA/R,FC-USD
Price segment 4
FXA/S4
Price segments 4 and 5
FXA/S4,5
Price segments 4 to 6
FXA/S4-6
Tax exemption, all taxes
FXA/R,ET
Tax exemption, all FR taxes
FXA/R,ET-FR
Tax exemption, SE type of
FR tax
FXA/R,ET-FRSE
Add taxes (maximum four)
FXA/R,AC-US-GB
Withhold taxes (maximum
four)
FXA/R,WC-DE-FR
Unifares
FXA/R,U
Unifares for a corporate
contract
FXA/R,U123001
Unifares for up to six
corporate codes or names
FXA/R,U000001-000002-*IBM
Negotiated fares
FXA/R,NEGO
Negotiated fares for a
corporate contract
FXA/R,C123001
Specify the cabin class
FXA/KC
Price a new or retrieved
PNR, without TST
FXA/LO
Price a PNR without creating
a TST
FXA/LO
Price passenger 1
FXA/LO/P1
Price passenger 1, 2 and 5
FXA/LO/P1,2,5
Edition 13.0
Chapter 9 Cryptic Magic
Request
Entry
Price passengers 1 to 3
FXA/LO/P1-3
Price only infants
FXA/LO/INF
Price only non-infants
FXA/LO/PAX
Same discount for all
passengers
FXA/LO/RDG
Multiple discounts
FXA/LO/RCH*ZZ*CD
Passenger discount for
passenger 1
FXA/LO/P1/RDG
Passenger discount for
passengers 1 and 3
FXA/LO/P1,3/RDG
Different discounts for
specified passengers
FXA/LO/P1/RCH//P2/RZZ//P3/RCD
Passenger type codes
(maximum six codes)
FXA/LO/RMIL*CD*CH
Price passenger type code,
military only
FXA/LO/RMIL,*PTC
Expanded parameters, fares
with no restrictions
FXA/LO/R,*NR
Expanded parameters,
multiple restrictions
FXA/LO/R,*NPE-NAP
Expanded parameters,
penalty with percentage
FXA/LO/R,*PE25P
Point-of-sale override
FXA/LO/R,LON
Ticketing city override
FXA/LO/R,.FRA
Point-of-sale and ticketing
city override
FXA/LO/R,LON.FRA
Pricing in a foreign currency
FXA/LO/R,FC-USD
Price segment 4
FXA/LO/S4
Price segments 4 and 5
FXA/LO/S4,5
Price segments 4 to 6
FXA/LO/S4-6
Tax exemption, all taxes
FXA/LO/R,ET
Tax exemption, all FR taxes
FXA/LO/R,ET-FR
Tax exemption, SE type of
FR tax
FXA/LO/R,ET-FRSE
Add taxes (maximum 4)
FXA/LO/R,AC-US-GB
Withhold taxes (maximum 4)
FXA/LO/R,WC-DE-FR
Unifares
FXA/LO/R,U
Unifares for a corporate
contract
FXA/LO/R,U123001
Unifares for up to 6 corporate
codes or names
FXA/LO/R,U000001-000002-*IBM
Negotiated fares
FXA/LO/R,NEGO
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
213
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Request
Entry
Negotiated fares for a
corporate contract
FXA/LO/R,C123001
Select the fare on line 3 for
all passengers, rebook and
create a TST
FXU3
Select different fares for
selected passengers, rebook
and create TST
FXU1/P1,3//5/P2
Cryptic Magic Short Sell Commands
Request
Entry
Sell one seat on line 2 in C
class
SS1C2
Sell two seats on line 1, in C
class for first flight, remaining
flights in B class
SS2CB1
Sell seats from dual
availability display, same
class
SS1Y2*11
Sell seats from dual
availability display, different
class
SS1Y3*C12
Stretcher
SS2C3/ST
Interline passenger with a
reservation
SS2C3/ID
Waitlist
SS1D3/PE
Reconfirm segment booked
in Amadeus
3/RR
Cryptic Magic Timetable Commands
214
Request
Entry
One-way routing, specified
date, city pair, time
TN11JULCPTCAI0830
Departures from 0000 for a
date in the future
TN11JULCPTCAI
Current day, specified time
TNCPTCAI0830
Departure city is the same as
the office profile
TN11JULRIO0830
Current day, local time
TNMIARIO
Departure city is the same as
the office profile, current day
TNRIO
Flights operating on a
specific day of the week
TN29AUGHOUMEX1430/WE
Edition 13.0
Chapter 9 Cryptic Magic
Sabre Cryptic Magic Commands
Request
Entry
Local time if today is 11JUL,
or 0000 in the future
123OCTPDXOMA
Current day departure,
specified time
123OCTPDXOMA7A
Departure city is the same as
the office profile
123OCTSEASFO/11A
Current location and current
day departure, local time
123OCTPDXORD‡UA
Seven-day search
01C2
Round-trip routing, specified
dates and times
01C1B2
Round trip, returning on the
same day
WP
Departure on current day,
local time
WPN1.1
Seven-day search
WPS4/5
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
215
Chapter 10
Command Page
Getting Started With the Command Page
How to Open a New Command Page
On the main Selling Platform Connect menu, click on File > New Command
Page.
What Are the Command Page Shortcuts?
Action
Entry
Scroll between previously entered commands
Alt + up arrow and down arrow
Move up
F7
Move down
F8
Clear screen without erasing previous entries
Pause
Clear screen while erasing previous entries
Pause + Shift
View and edit command history
Alt + right arrow
How to Print Command Page Content
1. Select the content that you want to print and do one of the following:
-
On the main Selling Platform Connect menu, click on File > Print or click
on the Print icon
.
Or:
-
Right-click the selected text and select Print.
2. Follow the standard printing process for your printer.
Which Command Page Settings Can Be Changed?
•
Graphical or cryptic TST display.
•
Font colour and background colour.
•
Speedmode activation and deactivation.
•
Default option of either 4505 or 3270 for new Command pages.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
217
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
•
User Guide
Option to show or hide the button for dynamic switch between the Command
page types.
How to Change the Command Page Settings
1. On the main Selling Platform Connect menu, click on Settings.
Alternatively, on the main accordion menu, click on Personal Settings.
2. Click on Command Page.
3. Change the settings as required and click on Save Your Settings.
Splitting the Command Page Screen
What Are the Screen Split Options?
You can split the Command page screen vertically or horizontally. Within these
splits, you can do a secondary horizontal or vertical split so that the screen is
divided into four sections. Each split screen has separate prompts and
commands.
How Are Commands Saved for Screen Splits?
All commands are saved when a split is closed. When the same split is opened
again in the same session, all commands in the history are retrieved. Up to 10
commands are stored for each of the four splits.
How to Split the Screen
218
•
To split the screen vertically, click on the Vertical Split icon in the upper
right-hand corner of the screen.
•
To split the screen horizontally, click on the Horizontal Split icon.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
How to Reverse a Split Screen
•
To reverse a horizontal split, click on the Horizontal Split icon.
•
To reverse a vertical split, click on the Vertical Split icon.
How to Resize a Split Screen
•
To resize a screen that is split horizontally, drag the horizontal split bar to the
required location.
•
To resize a screen that is split vertically, drag the vertical split bar to the
required location.
Switching Between the Command Page and
Graphic Mode
What Are the Options for Switching from the Command Page?
Switch From Command
Page
Result
Go to Booking File
If there is no PNR in cryptic, the Booking File is empty.
If there is a PNR in cryptic, the details are in the
Booking File.
Go to Booking Tool/Air
If an Air availability search has not been done, or it has
been reset, the Search page is displayed.
If an Air availability search was already done, the last
search result is displayed.
How to Switch Between the Command Page and Graphic Mode
1. When on the Command page, click on Show in Graphic Mode in the side
panel.
2. To return to the Command page, click on Show in Command Page.
What Are Ticketing Hotkeys?
Ticketing hotkeys refer to the display of the ticketing number as a link in the
Command page. By clicking on this link, you open a graphical E-ticket Display
pop-up window that shows the details of the e-ticket as it appears in the Booking
File.
Which Graphical Displays can be Opened Using Commands?
Graphical Display
Commands that Open the Display
TST
TQT
TQT/Tn (n = TST number)
TQT/Pn (n = passenger number)
TQT/Sn (n = segment number)
TQT/Sm-n (m, n = segment numbers)
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
219
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Graphical Display
Commands that Open the Display
Refund
TRF command followed by one of the following:
Seats and Services
Catalogue
•
Document number
•
Booking File line number
•
Query report
SM opens the graphic catalogue with the Seat Map
section displayed (except if it is followed by a flight
number). If a graphic seat map is not available for an
airline, you can continue with the cryptic seat map.
If you close the graphic catalogue, the cryptic
catalogue remains open.
FXK opens the graphic catalogue.
FXK/G-BG opens the graphic catalogue with the
Baggage section displayed.
TSM
TQM
TQM/M1
TQM/P1
Working With Speedmode
What Is Speedmode?
Speedmode is a functionality that allows you to access a list of predefined
shortcut commands based on the last cryptic response that was displayed. If the
classic (4505) Command page display contains rail or low-cost segments,
Speedmode can be used with these.
You highlight and select items on the display and send the command requests
using either the mouse or a keyboard action.
Where is Speedmode Available?
Display
Description
Air availability response
Speedmode is triggered by the AN command.
The following elements are highlighted:
Queues
•
Line number
•
Airline code
•
Flight feature
•
Flight number
•
Aircraft code
•
Class of service
Speedmode is triggered by the QT command and
commands starting with QC.
The category number is highlighted.
Itinerary pricing
Speedmode is triggered by the FXA, FXB, FXP,
FXR, and FXX commands.
The line number is highlighted.
220
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
Display
Fare selection with TST
creation
Ticketing: TST
Description
Speedmode is triggered by the FXT command.
The line number is highlighted.
Speedmode is triggered by the TQT command.
The TST number is highlighted.
PNR
The office ID and segment number of each item in the
PNR is highlighted.
Speedmode is available for the following PNR items:
Fare Quote Display
•
Office ID
•
Passenger name
•
Air segment
•
Car segment (CCR)
•
Rail segment (TRN)
•
Hotel segment (HHL)
•
Contact element (AP)
•
Remark element (RC, RM, RX, RQ, AB, AM)
•
Ticket element (TK)
•
Fare element (FA, FB, FP, FV)
•
SSR remark element (SSR)
•
OSI remark element (OSI)
•
Generic element
Speedmode supports all screen displays returned by
any command starting with FQD.
Speedmode is available for the following Fare Quote
Display items:
Fare Notes
Informative Pricing
•
List of airline codes.
•
List of fares.
Speedmode is available for the following FQN items:
•
List of categories.
•
List of paragraphs.
There are two types of FQP screens:
•
List of fares (the line number of each fare is
highlighted).
•
List of airline codes (all airline codes are
highlighted).
Informative Pricing Index
Table
There is one FQU screen that displays a list of fares.
The line number of each fare is highlighted.
Routing Information
Speedmode is available for the following FQR items:
RT screen
•
List of fares.
•
List of airline codes.
Speedmode is triggered by the RT command.
The line number is highlighted.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
221
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Explanation: Speedmode Cursor Highlighting
Usually, only one cursor highlight box is displayed on the cryptic display.
However, you can also have multiple and permanent cursor highlighting
depending on the context.
Multiple Cursors
Multiple cursors are displayed when you navigate the Class of Service elements.
When you place the cursor on a Class of Service element, every identical Class
of Service element in the following segment of the same availability display is
also highlighted.
Permanent Cursors
For the Class of Service elements in two-way availability displays, multiple
cursors are replaced by permanent cursors. The first Class of Service element
and all of its equivalents are marked by a permanent cursor. The same applies to
the return flights section.
Permanent cursors remain on the display while you navigate it.
What Are the Navigation Options in Speedmode?
You navigate Speedmode using keyboard and mouse actions with the cryptic
response, and a highlighted box shows the current focus.
222
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
Table: Keyboard Actions
Keyboard Action
Result
Up Arrow
Selects the next element of the same type above the
current element.
If there is no line above, the new selection is done
starting from the last line until finding one with the
same element.
Down Arrow
Selects the next element of the same type below the
current element.
If there is no line below, the new selection is done
starting from the first line until finding one with the
same element.
Left Arrow
Selects the previous element on the same line.
If there is no other element before, the new selection is
the last element of the previous line.
Right Arrow
Selects the next element on the same line.
If there is no other element after, the new selection is
the first element of the following line.
Tab
Same as the Right Arrow but selects the next element
with a different type to the current element.
Shift+Tab
Same as the Left Arrow but selects the previous
element with a different type to the current element.
Home
Selects the first element of the displayed response.
End
Selects the last element of the displayed response.
Single Space
Displays the available Speedmode commands for the
selected element.
Closes the pop-up window that is displayed with a
mouseover action or single left-click.
Double Space
Places a permanent cursor on the selected element.
A permanent cursor only applies to a two-way
availability response, where you can only interact with
a Class of Service element if it is first marked with a
permanent cursor.
Enter
Directly sends the default shortcut command
corresponding to the selected element.
Escape
Removes the Speedmode highlighting.
Shift + Escape
Restores the Speedmode highlighting.
Table: Mouse Actions
Mouse Action
Result
Mouseover
Displays a pop-up window with the additional
information about the element under the cursor (if
additional information is available).
To close the pop-up window, left-click outside
the pop-up window.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
223
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Mouse Action
Result
Single left-click
Displays a pop-up window with the available
Speedmode command for the clicked element.
To send the selected command, left-click on
the command.
To close the pop-up window, left-click outside
the pop-up window.
Double left-click
Triggers the default Speedmode command for the
clicked element.
Explanation: Optional Selection of Elements
You can interact with the Speedmode display by optionally selecting elements,
which allows you to select more than one element.
How to Optionally Select an Element in the Speedmode Display
•
Place the cursor on the element in the display and press Control + Space.
Or:
•
Press Control and click on the element.
Video: How to Use Command Page's Speedmode Feature
Launch
Working With 3270 Command Page
What Is 3270 Command Page?
3270 Command page is an independent page that is a combination of the
existing 4505 Command page and the IBM 3270 terminal.
You can modify a cryptic response and send new requests. Speedmode is not
supported for low-cost or rail-only availability displays. See also Working With
Speedmode on page 220.
You can switch between 4505 and 3270 Command page. You can also display
both 4505 and 3270 Command page at the same time by splitting the screen.
See How to Split the Screen on page 218.
Note:
The 3270 Command page option is only available if it has been
activated. You must have administrator rights to activate 3270
Command page.
How to Switch Between 4505 and 3270 Command Page
Click on the 3270 Command page icon
224
.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
Explanation: 3270 Command Page Screen
Each cell on the screen can contain one character and the cells are grouped into
different colour-coded fields. You can change the colour scheme using the
Command page settings. Refer to How to Change the Command Page Settings
on page 218.
The 3270 Command page screen is a mixture of display and interactive fields.
•
Display fields cannot be edited.
•
Interactive fields can be edited.
Some fields are specifically numeric, which means only a valid numeric entry is
allowed (numbers from 0 to 9, '.' and '-').
You can cut or copy from the 3270 Command page and paste to an external
location. You can also cut or copy from an external location and paste to the 3270
editable panel.
Example: 3270 Command Page
What Are the Keyboard Options in 3270 Command Page?
Key Type
Keys
Result
Action
Up Arrow
Moves the cursor up the panel line by line. If the cursor is on the
first line, it will move to the last line.
Down Arrow
Moves the cursor down the panel line by line. If the cursor is on the
last line, it will move to the first line.
Right arrow
Moves the cursor right cell by cell. If the cursor is on the last cell of
the line, it will move to the first cell of the next line.
Left Arrow
Moves the cursor left cell by cell. If the cursor is on the first cell of
the line, it will move to the last cell of the previous line.
Tab
Moves the cursor to the next editable field when reading left to
right and top to bottom.
Shift + Tab
Moves the cursor to the previous editable field.
Home
Moves the cursor to the first editable field of the 3270 panel.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
225
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Key Type
Input Value
User Guide
Keys
Result
End
Moves the cursor to the last editable field of the 3270 panel.
Ctrl + Enter
Moves the cursor to the first editable cell of the following line.
Ctrl + Left Arrow
Moves the cursor to the first character of the previous word.
Ctrl + Right Arrow
Moves the cursor to the first character of the following word.
Enter
Submits an action to the 3270 server.
Pause
Clears an action from the 3270 server.
F1 to F12
Sends a program function, PF#, to the 3270 server. Program
function depends on the 3270 server backend.
Shift + F1 to F12
Sends a program function, PF#, to the 3270 server. Program
function depends on the 3270 server backend.
Ctrl + F1 to F3
Sends a program access, PA#, to the 3270 server. Program
function depends on the 3270 server backend.
Page Up
Sends a program function, PF7, to the 3270 server.
Page Down
Sends a program function, PF8, to the 3270 server.
Alt + Right Arrow
In Normal mode only, opens the Command History pop-up
window.
Alt + Up Arrow
In Normal mode only, displays the previous cryptic command in
the history if the field is editable.
Alt + Down Arrow
In Normal mode only, displays the next cryptic command in the
history if the field is editable.
An input value key will modify the content of the cell where the cursor is located in the 3270
panel only if the associated field is editable.
Delete
Deletes the content at the cursor position.
Backspace
Moves the cursor to the left until the next editable cell and deletes
its content.
Ctrl + Z
Cancels a modification in the cell and retrieves the previous
content.
Any Latin1 character
key
Deletes the editable cells of the selection, places the cursor on the
first editable cell, and changes its value to the typed character.
Insert
Switches the cursor between overtype mode and insert mode.
•
Overtype mode is the default mode. It overwrites any text that
is present in the current cursor location. The cursor is
represented by a block in overtype mode.
•
Insert mode inserts a character at the current cursor location,
and moves all characters after it one position further. The
cursor is represented by an underline in insert mode.
What Are the Mouse Options in 3270 Command Page?
A single left click of the 3270 Command page icon
between 4505 and 3270 mode.
switches the page
A single left click inside the 3270 panel places the cursor on the clicked cell.
You can select multiple cells by holding the left-click button.
226
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
What Are the Different Screen Modes?
When you modify a response, the request can be interpreted in either Inline
Mode or Panel Mode.
Inline Mode
Only the fields that have been edited are part of the request, and the response is
returned in a completely new context.
For example, you modify a HE response to send an availability request.
The command is interpreted as a completely new request that is unrelated to the
existing HE screen.
Inline Full Screen Mode is a combination of Inline Mode and Panel Mode.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
227
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Screen Format for Inline Mode - Full Screen
Example: Screen Format for Inline Mode - Normal
Panel Mode
The request is interpreted as part of the existing screen that was modified and so
the response is returned in the same context.
For example, you enter the following commands in 3270 Command page:
NM1AVERSA/ANTONIO
ANPARLON/ABA
SS1Y1
AP
FPCASH
TKOK
RFTEST
ER
FXP
ER
TQT
All commands are sent in Inline Mode, which means each command is executed
in its own context.
However, the TQT response is a separate screen. Therefore, the page switches
to Panel Mode.
228
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
If you send an availability request from within the TQT response, it is interpreted
as a simple update of the TQT response.
Therefore, the response is returned within the TQT screen.
To send any more commands, you must exit the TQT screen.
Example: Screen Format for Panel Mode
How to Display 3270 Command Page History
Use the scrollbar to see the previous command requests.
All fields previously modified in a response are highlighted in red.
What Is the User Key Buffer?
The 3270 Command page is not available while a request is being processed.
The page only becomes available again after the response is displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
229
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The user key buffer allows you to keep working while a request is being
processed. All keyboard strokes that are typed during the processing of a request
are stored in the buffer.
When the response is displayed, all stored keyboard strokes are then executed in
chronological order.
All keys stored in the buffer are displayed under the last panel on the 3270
Command page.
How are Input Keys Represented in the User Key Buffer?
Input Key
Buffer Representation
Up Arrow
↑
Down Arrow
↓
Left Arrow
←
Right Arrow
→
Tab
Tab
Shift + Tab
BackTab
Home
Home
End
End
Ctrl + Enter
NxtLn
Ctrl + Left Arrow
PrevWord
Ctrl + Right Arrow
NextWord
Enter
Send
Pause
Pause
F# Keys
PF#
Shift + F# Keys
PF#
Ctrl + F# Keys
PA#
Page Up
PgUp
Page Down
PgDown
Delete
Del
Backspace
BckSpc
Ctrl + Z
Clear
Insert
Insert
Using the You Select Feature
What Is the You Select Feature?
The You Select feature allows you to select text in the Command page and send
it as a cryptic command. It is:
•
230
Available for both 4505 and 3270 Command page.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
•
Available on the Speedmode display. However, the Speedmode interaction
related to the highlighted elements has priority over the You Select feature.
•
Available for previous commands that were sent, which you can access by
using the scrollbar.
•
Useful for help screens that involve numerous follow-up entries.
What Are the Ways of Using the You Select Feature?
Action
Result
Double-click on a piece of
text.
Sends the text as a cryptic command. For example, if
you double-click on a page reference, it displays the
page.
Press Ctrl+Shift+S on a
piece of text selected using
the mouse.
Sends the selected text as a cryptic command.
Ctrl+Shift+C on a piece of
text selected using the
mouse.
Writes the selected text in the input line.
Note:
Any You Select interaction will not remove the text already added to
the command prompt but will append the selected text to the input. In
3270 Command page, the text will be added starting from the position
of the cursor (prior to the double click).
Example: You Select in Help Pages
If you double-click on HA in the example below, You Select sends the command
HE HA.
You can also select HE HA and press Ctrl+Shift+S to achieve the same result.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
231
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Using Command History
How to Display Command History
In the Command page of a Booking File, press Alt+right-arrow or click on the
Command History icon
to display the previously entered commands.
There is no limit to the number of commands that you can display using the
command history.
Note:
If the selected commands have not been run, the Command History
pop-up window is empty and all buttons are unavailable.
How to Run a Command From Command History
In the Command History pop-up window, select the command that you want to
run and click on Send or press Enter.
You can also double-click on the command.
What Are the Navigation Options in Command History?
Action
Result
Up-arrow
Navigate up and down the command list.
Down-arrow
Shift+mouse click
Select multiple commands sequentially.
Shift+up-arrow
Shift+down-arrow
Ctrl+mouse click
Select multiple commands non-sequentially
Ctrl+up-arrow+space bar
Ctrl+down-arrow+space
bar
Enter
Run a command in standard display mode or edit
mode.
Ctrl+Space
Select or deselect a command.
Shift+Space
Select a command and deselect all previous
selections.
Single left click
232
Ctrl+left click
Select or deselect a command and keep all previous
selections.
Shift+left click
Select a list of commands based on the last command
focus.
Shift+Enter
Add a new line to a selected command when command
history is in edit mode (the right column of the
Command History pop-up window for editing selected
commands).
Ctrl+Enter
Add a new line to insert a new command when
command history is in edit mode (the right column of
the Command History pop-up window for editing
selected commands).
Tab
Move the focus of selection in the Command History
pop-up window.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
How to Create a Smart Flow Using Command History
1. Display command history. Refer to How to Display Command History on
page 271.
2. Select the commands in the Command History pop-up window that you
want to use in the Smart Flow.
3. If you want to edit the commands before creating the Smart Flow, click on
Edit and update as required. See also How to Edit Command History on
page 272.
4. Click on Create Smart Flow.
The application automatically switches to the Smart Flow Editor.
The selected commands are pasted from the Command History pop-up
window to the Smart Flow Editor, where you can edit, save, or add
questions to the commands. For more information, see How to Create a
Question on page 278.
How to Remove All Commands in Command History
1. Display command history. See How to Display Command History on page
271.
2. Click on Clear all entries in the Command History pop-up window.
How to Edit Command History
1. Display command history. See How to Display Command History on page
271.
2. Click on Edit in the Command History pop-up window.
The window splits into two columns: a left column that displays the previously
run commands in the command history, and a right column to edit the chosen
commands.
3. Select a command in the left history column and click on Add to move the
command to the editing column.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
233
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
See also What Are the Navigation Options in Command History? on page
271.
4. Edit the selected command as required.
-
To run the edited commands, click on Send or press Enter.
-
To copy and paste the edited commands to the Command page, select
the commands and click on Copy.
-
To create a smart flow from the edited commands, click on Create Smart
Flow. See also How to Create a Smart Flow Using Command History on
page 272.
-
To remove a command from the editing column, select the command and
click on Remove or click on Remove All to remove all commands.
5. To return to the standard display mode, click on Standard Mode.
6. To close the Command History pop-up window, click on Close or press
Esc.
Image: Editing Command History
How to Exit Command History
Click on the Close button in the Command History pop-up window or press Esc.
234
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
Managing Service Recommendations
What Are Service Recommendations?
Service recommendations are tailored proposals for services, such as car rental,
transfers, hotel, or insurance, that are displayed in Command page when the
relevant site parameter is enabled.
Initially, the graphical recommendations appear in a preview panel at the bottom
of the page to ensure they do not interfere with any ongoing tasks.
If you want to see details of a proposal, you can then expand the proposal
window where you can proceed to select and book it.
Example: Expanded Recommendations View
What Services Recommendations Are Available?
•
Insurance
•
Cars
•
Hotels
•
Transfers
What Triggers the Recommendations Process in Command Page?
•
Retrieve an eligible Booking File in Command page
•
Show an eligible Booking File from Command page.
•
End transaction.
How to Expand or Collapse Recommendations
•
To minimise or maximise the teaser view of the recommendations panel, click
on the minimise icon
or the maximise icon
.
•
To expand a recommendation, click on the Expand icon
Recommendations panel.
in the
Alternatively, click on the tab for the recommendation.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
235
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
•
To collapse a recommendation, click on the Collapse icon
Recommendations panel.
User Guide
in the
Alternatively, click anywhere on the Command page.
How to Navigate Recommendations
If there are too many recommendations to fit on the screen, click on the Left and
Right arrows each side of the Recommendations panel to navigate the
recommendations.
How to Book a Hotel Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel.
Each hotel recommendation includes a guest rating based on sentiment
analysis.
2. To view the details of a recommendation, click on Details.
-
If the Booking File contains more than one passenger, you are prompted
to select the number of rooms and their respective occupancy.
-
Depending on your site parameter settings, either the graphic Hotel
module or the Command page opens on the details page for the hotel.
From here, you can review full details of the recommendation and
complete the booking.
3. To view more hotel options, click on More Hotels.
-
If the Booking File contains more than one passenger, you are prompted
to select the number of rooms and their respective occupancy.
-
Depending on your site parameter settings, either the graphic Hotel
module or the Command page opens on the availability page. From here,
you can continue to check for availability and complete a booking.
How to Book a Car Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel and click on Select.
2. Depending on your site parameter settings, either:
-
The graphic Car module opens with the selected recommendation
displayed, in addition to alternatives for the same date and destination
from the same provider. From here, you can complete the booking.
Or:
-
The cryptic command to book the selected car is triggered in the
Command page, in addition to alternatives for the same date and
destination from the same provider. From here, you can complete the
booking.
How to Book an Insurance Recommendation
Expand the Recommendations panel and click on Book.
This triggers the cryptic command to book the selected recommendation in the
Command page.
236
Edition 13.0
Chapter 10 Command Page
How to Book a Transfer Recommendation
1. Expand the Recommendations panel.
2. To access the Transfers module and book a recommendation, click on
Details.
Note:
Smart Content must be enabled and configured correctly for the
Details button to display the Transfers module.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
237
Chapter 11
Integrated Partners and Smart
Content
What Are Integrated Partners and Smart Content?
Integrated Partners and Smart Content are booking tools that allow you to access
global, regional, or local non-GDS travel products for ground transportation,
events, and entertainment from within a booking flow.
These products can be booked through the external provider’s booking tool that is
integrated in Selling Platform Connect. The newly booked segment is
automatically added to the itinerary.
How to Access and Exit Integrated Partners and
Smart Content
1. Click on the Down arrow on the New Booking File button in the main tool
bar.
Or:
If a Booking File is already open, click on the More Products button in the
Go To panel.
2. Select the required booking option from the drop-down list.
3. To return to the Booking File, click on Show Booking File in the Go To
panel.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
239
Chapter 12
Queues
Getting Started With Queues
What Is a Queue?
A queue is a holding area for Booking Files or messages that require further
action at a later date or time. It is identified by a number from 1 to 99. Each queue
can be divided into categories, which are numbered from 0 to 254. Some queues
may also be further divided into four date ranges.
Some queue numbers are predetermined by Amadeus because of industry
standards. Booking Files and messages are automatically placed in these
predetermined queues by airlines, hotel companies, car companies, other
providers and Amadeus.
Every office has its own queue bank. Travel agencies are automatically provided
with 16 predefined queues and airline offices with 19 queues.
You can create additional queues where you can manually place Booking Files
and messages that require follow-up. You can also select one category to be
associated to your Amadeus sign, so that any Booking Files or messages you
create will be placed in the appropriate queue in your assigned category.
What Is a Queue List?
A queue list displays all queues corresponding to the travel agent's office ID and
contains some or all of the following details:
•
Queue number
•
Flight number
•
Record locator
•
PTA/TKT/INS
•
Auxiliary
•
Office ID
•
Message
•
General
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
241
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Access the Queues Module
On the Main page, click on the Queues menu to expand it.
How to Display a Queue List
On the Queue page, enter the queue number and click on the Display Queue
List button.
How to Display a Queue Message
On the Queue page, enter a queue message number in the Queue field and click
on Start Queue.
242
Edition 13.0
Chapter 12 Queues
How to Start a Queue
1. On the Queue page, enter the queue number in the Queue field.
Note:
The Category and Date Range fields are optional and all fields in
yellow must be completed.
2. Click on Start Queue.
Working With Queues and the Booking File
How to Place a Booking File in a Queue
1. On the Booking File page, click on Place on Queue in the Booking File
Information panel.
2. Add the queue number and category or the category nickname.
3. Add the date and hour or the date range.
4. Click on OK.
Note:
If the date range is not specified, the Booking File is placed on the
queue immediately.
How to Delay a Booking File in a Queue
Note:
A Booking File can only be delayed from within an open Booking File.
1. On the Booking File page, click on Delay Booking File in the Booking File
Information panel.
2. Fill in the date and time in the Delay Until fields.
3. Select a reason from the Reason drop-down list.
4. Click on Delay and Open next PNR, or Delay and Exit Queue.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
243
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to End a Transaction in a Queue
1. On the Booking File page, click on Save and Confirm (ER).
2. To save changes, select a Save option in the Save Changes panel and enter
the caller's details.
Alternatively, select an option from the Other Actions panel.
3. Click on OK.
Working With Queues in Cryptic Mode
What Is Speedmode?
Speedmode is a functionality that allows you to access a list of predefined
shortcut commands based on the last cryptic response that was displayed. If the
classic (4505) Command page display contains rail or low-cost segments,
Speedmode can be used with these.
You highlight and select items on the display and send the command requests
using either the mouse or a keyboard action.
Which Queue Commands Trigger Speedmode?
QT and commands starting with QC (for example, QC1C0 and QC1CE).
Which Queue Commands are Supported in Speedmode?
244
Command
Description
QC
Display all queue counters.
QS
Start queue.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 12 Queues
Command
Description
QSB
Start queue browse.
QT
Queues count total.
QD
Delay to bottom of queue.
QN
Remove from queue and display next.
QI
Ignore and exit queue.
QU
Redisplay message from queue.
How to Optionally Select an Element in the Speedmode Display
•
Place the cursor on the element in the display and press Control + Space.
Or:
•
Press Control and click on the element.
How to Display a Queue Count
Note:
The queue count functionality is only available using cryptic entries. See
HE QUEUES in cryptic mode for more information on cryptic entries for
queues.
1. On the Booking File page, click on the Cryptic Mode button in the side
panel.
2. Enter the required queue count command. For example, enter QT to display
total workload.
How to Display a Queue Planner
Note:
The queue planner functionality is only available using cryptic entries.
See HE QUEUES in cryptic mode for more information on cryptic
entries for queues.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
245
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
1. On the Booking File page, click on the Cryptic Mode button in the side
panel.
2. Enter the required queue planner command. For example, enter QCT to
display the summary planner for time-deferred PNRs.
How to Access Queue Administration
Note:
The queue administration functionality is only available using cryptic
entries. See HE QUEUES in cryptic mode for more information on
cryptic entries for queues.
1. On the Booking File page, click on the Cryptic Mode button in the side
panel.
2. Enter the required queue administration command. For example, enter
QA40C2 to add a special queue with two categories.
246
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13
Productivity Suite
Getting Started With Productivity Suite
What Is Productivity Suite?
Productivity Suite is a suite of tools that increases the quality of the Booking File
(or PNR in cryptic mode) by streamlining the overall booking flow. Each tool can
be activated or deactivated individually, which means each agency can choose
only the tools it requires.
Video: What Is Productivity Suite?
Launch
How to Access Productivity Suite
On the Main page of Selling Platform Connect, expand the Tools menu.
What User Roles are Available in Productivity Suite?
Role
Description
User
This role is assigned by default to any agent who
requires access to Selling Platform Connect.
Any user can perform the following actions with
Productivity Suite tools:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
•
Run Smart Flows.
•
Create and manage personal Smart Flows.
[email protected]
247
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Role
Description
Office Administrator
This role is assigned specifically to an office
administrator.
An office administrator can perform the following
actions with Productivity Suite tools:
•
Create and manage File Finishing rules.
•
Create and manage personal and office Smart
Flows.
•
Create and manage Smart Triggers.
•
Create and manage Quality Monitor rules.
•
Share or stop sharing items.
An office administrator can be granted the rights to
manage all the Productivity Suite tools or to manage
individual tools only.
Explanation: Main List Page
The Main List page is the default page for Productivity Suite tools. It displays all
the items that have been created at user or office level.
Note:
For each item, the Created in column shows the office in which the
item was created. Items can be shared with other offices. For more
information, see Sharing Items in Productivity Suite on page 249.
You can sort the columns in the list by clicking on the title bars.
The action buttons at the bottom of the list allow you to manage items, depending
on the tool you are using.
Example: Main List Page for Smart Flows
Note:
248
If you are an office administrator, the Switch to Sharing View link also
appears at the bottom of the list of office-level items.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Sharing Items in Productivity Suite
What Is Sharing?
Sharing allows Productivity Suite items to be shared between offices.
What Are the Prerequisites for Sharing?
You must be the office administrator for all the offices that want to share an item.
Which Items Can be Shared?
You can share office-level File Finishing rules, Quality Monitor rules, Smart Flows
and Smart Triggers.
Sharing Restrictions
•
An item can only be shared and edited from the office in which it was created.
•
After it is shared, an item cannot be renamed.
Activating and Deactivating Shared Items
If applicable, you can activate and deactivate a shared item in an individual office
without affecting its status (active or deactivated) in the other offices.
Deleting Shared Items
•
You can only delete a shared item from the office where it was created.
Note:
•
If a sharing office does not want to use the shared item, it can be
deactivated or hidden in that office.
When a shared item is deleted, it is deleted in all the offices that share it.
How to View the Sharing Status of an Item
1. In the Main List page, click on Switch to Sharing View.
For each item in the list:
-
The Created in column shows the office in which the item was created.
-
The Shared with column shows the office with which the item is currently
shared or the number of sharing offices, when there is more than one.
2. Click on Back to Managing View to return to the Main List page.
How to Share or Stop Sharing an Item
1. Select the item that you want to share on the Main List page.
You must have created the item that you want to share or stop sharing.
2. Click on Switch to Sharing View.
3. Select or clear the offices that you want to share or stop sharing the item
with.
Note:
These are all the offices to which you currently have login access.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
249
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. To filter the list of offices displayed, use the Filter field.
5. To confirm your selection, click on Save Changes.
6. Click on Back to Managing View to return to the Main List page.
File Finishing
Getting Started With File Finishing
What Is File Finishing?
The File Finishing tool in Productivity Suite allows an office administrator to
build business rules that add missing elements to a Booking File.
When File Finishing rules are executed, the relevant mid- and back-office
information is added to the Booking File without any action from the user.
250
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
When Are File Finishing Rules Executed?
File Finishing rules are executed when a user enters one of the following in the
Command page or its graphical equivalent in the Booking File:
•
ET
•
ER
•
ERK
•
ETK
The user will then see the results of the File Finishing rules in the Command page
or Booking File.
Note:
If the Intelligent rule sending feature for File Finishing is activated,
and a Booking File is saved multiple times, File Finishing only executes
the matching rules once. If Intelligent rule sending is not activated,
File Finishing executes all the matching rules every time the Booking
File is saved.
File Finishing and Automated Queueing
Because File Finishing rules typically run before the Booking File is saved to the
PNR in the Amadeus reservation system, File Finishing for automated queueing
is not supported.
What Are the Prerequisites for Managing File Finishing Rules?
The optional Productivity Suite module must be activated by a site parameter
before you can access the tool to manage File Finishing rules.
How to Access File Finishing Rules Management
On the Tools menu of Selling Platform Connect, expand Productivity Suite and
click on File Finishing.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
251
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Managing File Finishing Rules
What Is the Rule Logic of File Finishing?
The if;then logic of File Finishing allows you to build relevant rules in a graphical
way.
A rule consists of conditional tests and associated actions. When conditions are
verified in a Booking File (or PNR in cryptic mode) at the end of transaction stage,
all listed commands are executed. The results are reflected graphically in the
relevant areas in addition to the Command page.
Rules can contain a maximum of two conditions, linked by the operators AND or
OR, and a maximum of three lines of commands.
What Are the Elements of a File Finishing Rule?
Element
Description
Condition
if
You can select shortcuts from the drop-down list or
enter them manually.
Each shortcut is a name that corresponds to a variable
in the Booking File. For example, Traveller's email
address is the email address entered in the Booking
File.
For more information, see Reference: Variables Used
in File Finishing Rules on page 253.
Operator
Variable
The operator is used to compare the shortcut to a
variable or another shortcut. Examples include:
•
EQUALS
•
LESS THAN
•
GREATER THAN
•
NOT EQUALS
•
CONTAINS
The variable can be entered as free-flow text or
selected from the predefined Variable drop-down list.
Action
252
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Element
Description
Command
Commands are executed at the end of transaction
stage. A minimum of one command is required for a
rule and you can enter up to three command lines.
You can enter more than one command in the same
line by separating them with a semicolon (;). For
commands that do not work with a semicolon, you
must use the Add Command link to add multiple
command lines.
If there is more than one command line, the sequential
numbering of each command line indicates the
sequence in which the commands are executed.
You can use predefined shortcuts when entering
commands. You can display the list of shortcuts by
typing < in the Command field.
Reference: Variables Used in File Finishing Rules
Shortcut Name
Variable Description
Variable Type
Category in GUI
Accounting client reference
The accounting client
reference added to the
PNR.
STRING
MID_BACK_OFFICE
Accounting company
number
The accounting company
name added to the PNR.
STRING
MID_BACK_OFFICE
Accounting cost center
The accounting cost centre
added to the PNR.
STRING
MID_BACK_OFFICE
Accounting number
The accounting number
added to the PNR.
STRING
MID_BACK_OFFICE
Accounting tax details
The accounting tax details
added to the PNR.
STRING
MID_BACK_OFFICE
Air booking split ticket
True or false depending on
whether the PNR contains
multiple TSTs.
BOOLEAN
AIR
Air payment credit card
number
The number of the credit
card used to pay for the air
booking.
STRING
AIR
Air payment credit card type
The company code of the
credit card used to pay for
the air booking.
STRING
AIR
Air price quoted to user
The price of the air booking
that was quoted to the user.
STRING
AIR
Air trip is international
True or false depending on
whether the air booking is
international or not.
BOOLEAN
AIR
Airports in the itinerary
The codes of all the airports
included in the trip.
STRING
AIR
Destination country code
The code of the destination
country where the maximum
amount of time is spent.
STRING
AIR
Fare basis list
The fare basis codes for all
of the air bookings.
STRING
AIR
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
253
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Shortcut Name
Variable Description
Variable Type
Category in GUI
Final destination airport
code
The airport code of the trip
destination.
IATA
AIR
Final destination city code
The city code of the trip
destination.
IATA
AIR
First airline in the
reservation
The code of the first airline
included in the trip.
STRING
AIR
First fare basis
The fare basis code of the
first air booking in the trip.
STRING
AIR
List of car air conditioning
codes
The air conditioning codes
of all car bookings in the
trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car city IATA codes
The codes of all the cities
where cars are booked in
the trip.
LIST_IATA
CAR
List of car classes
The car class codes of all
car bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car company codes
The company codes of all
car bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car estimated total
prices
The estimated total prices of
all car bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car rate codes
The rate codes of all car
bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car rate plans (dy,
wy, etc.)
The rate plans of all car
bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car rates in local
currency
The car rates in the local
currency for all car bookings
in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car status codes
The status codes of all car
bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car transmissions
The transmission type
codes of all car bookings in
the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of car type codes
The car type codes of all car
bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
CAR
List of carrier codes
The codes of all the airlines
included in the trip.
LIST_STRING
AIR
List of confidential remarks
All of the confidential
remarks (RC) entered in the
PNR.
LIST_STRING
REMARKS
List of general remarks
All of the general remarks
(RM) entered in the booking.
LIST_STRING
REMARKS
List of hotel city IATA codes
The city codes of all the
hotels booked in the trip.
LIST_IATA
HOTEL
List of hotel location IATA
codes
The location codes of all the
hotels booked in the trip.
LIST_STRING
HOTEL
List of hotel names
All of the hotel names
included in the trip.
LIST_STRING
HOTEL
List of hotel rate codes
The rate codes of all the
hotel bookings in the trip.
LIST_STRING
HOTEL
254
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Shortcut Name
Variable Description
Variable Type
Category in GUI
List of hotel rates in local
currency
All of the hotel room rates in
the trip, in local currency.
LIST_STRING
HOTEL
List of invoice and itinerary
remarks
All the invoice and itinerary
remarks (RI) entered in the
PNR.
LIST_STRING
REMARKS
List of other service
information
All of the other service
information included in the
air bookings.
LIST_STRING
AIR
Number of air segments
The number of air segments
in the trip.
INTEGER
AIR
Number of car products
The number of car products
included in the trip.
INTEGER
CAR
Number of hotel products
The number of hotel
products included in the trip.
INTEGER
HOTEL
Origin country code
The country code of the trip
origin.
STRING
AIR
Originating airport code for
trip
The airport code of the
starting point of the trip.
IATA
AIR
Originating city code for trip
The city code of the starting
point of the trip.
IATA
AIR
TSA Applicable
True or false depending on
whether the PNR contains
an air segment to which the
Transportation Security
Administration (TSA) check
applies.
BOOLEAN
AIR
Tour code
The tour code, as entered
using the FT command.
STRING
AIR
Traveller's complete e-mail
address
The traveller's email
address.
STRING
PROFILE
Traveller's first name
The first name of the
traveller.
STRING
PROFILE
Traveller's last name
The last name of the
traveller.
STRING
PROFILE
Traveller's mobile phone 1
The traveller's mobile phone
number.
STRING
PROFILE
Traveller's mobile phone 2
The traveller's additional
mobile phone number.
STRING
PROFILE
User Identification
The sign of the Selling
Platform Connect user.
STRING
OTHER
How to Create a File Finishing Rule
1. In the File Finishing Rules list, click on New.
The File Finishing Editor opens and allows you to complete the required
fields for the rule.
2. Enter a name and first command as a minimum. The name of the rule must
be unique.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
255
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
For details about adding conditions to a rule, refer to Why Add Conditions to
a File Finishing Rule? below and How to Add Conditions to a File Finishing
Rule below.
3. To execute the rule when a Booking File (or PNR in cryptic mode) is saved,
select the Activate This File Finishing Rule check box.
4. When complete, click on Save.
The new rule is added to the File Finishing Rules list. By default, the rule is
saved with a deactivated status.
Why Add Conditions to a File Finishing Rule?
You add a condition to a rule to enable the execution of what is in the action field
under limited conditions (for example, if only a certain airline is found in the
Booking File/PNR). A condition is unique, and the data it is compared to can be
either free text or a shortcut.
You can add a second condition to a rule. The second condition is linked to the
first condition by an AND or OR operator.
You can build rules without any conditions if you want to add an element to every
Booking File that is processed.
How to Add Conditions to a File Finishing Rule
1. With the rule open in the File Finishing Editor, and ensuring that the rule
has a name and command, enter a variable, operator and value for the
condition.
2. To add a second condition, select either AND or OR in the Add Condition
drop-down list.
3. Enter a variable, operator and value for the second condition.
4. Click on Save.
256
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Note:
If a cryptic command is used to add credit card information to a rule,
this information is not stored in an encrypted format in the database.
Therefore, you should not add credit card information directly to a File
Finishing rule.
How to Create a New File Finishing Rule from an Existing Rule
1. In the File Finishing Rules list, select the rule that you want to copy and
click on Copy to New.
The new rule opens in the File Finishing Editor. The name field contains the
string "Copy of <name of the selected rule>" and the other fields are prefilled
with data from the existing rule.
2. Edit the rule as required.
3. Click on Save.
4. To return to the File Finishing Rules list, click on Close.
How to Open a File Finishing Rule
1. In the File Finishing Rules list, select the rule that you want to open.
2. Click on Open.
Alternatively, double-click on the rule.
How to Edit a File Finishing Rule
Note:
To edit a rule, you must be logged into the same office that created it.
1. Open the rule you want to edit.
See How to Open a File Finishing Rule above.
2. Update the rule as required and click on Save.
Note:
If you are deleting commands from a rule, at least one command must
be present.
How to Activate a File Finishing Rule
1. Select the non-active rule in the File Finishing Rules list.
2. Click on Activate.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
257
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The activated rule is then applied to a Booking File at the end of transaction
stage.
Note:
You can also activate a rule in the File Finishing Editor by selecting
the Activate This File Finishing Rule check box.
How to Deactivate a File Finishing Rule
1. Select the active rule in the File Finishing Rules list.
2. Click on Deactivate.
The deactivated rule is greyed out in the File Finishing Rules list and
ignored at the end of transaction stage.
Note:
You can also deactivate a rule in the File Finishing Editor by clearing
the Activate This File Finishing Rule check box.
How to Delete a File Finishing Rule
1. Select the rule in the File Finishing Rules list.
2. Click on Delete.
3. In the Delete Rule pop-up window, click on Delete.
Note:
If you delete a shared rule, it is deleted from all offices that it was
shared with.
Video: How to Create a File Finishing Rule
Launch
Smart Flows
Getting Started With Smart Flows
What Is the Smart Flows Tool?
The Smart Flows tool in Selling Platform Connect allows a user or office
administrator to build and launch predefined, customisable workflows.
Smart Flows are triggered on request to help users complete repetitive booking
and fulfilment tasks.
You can create Smart Flows at the following levels:
•
Personal
The Smart Flow is only available to the user who creates it. Any user can
create and edit a personal Smart Flow.
•
Office
The Smart Flow can be made available to other users in the same office. You
must have the office administrator role to create, share and edit an office
Smart Flow.
258
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
What Are the Two Types of Editor in Smart Flows?
Smart Flow Editor
The Smart Flow Editor is available to users and office administrators.
It allows you to enter cryptic commands and easily add questions and variables to
these commands.
Advanced Language Editor
The Advanced Language Editor is only available to office administrators.
It allows you to create a Smart Flow using a specific language defined for Smart
Flows. For more information, see What Is the Smart Flow Advanced Language?
below.
You can also test a Smart Flow directly from the Advanced Language Editor
before saving it. See How to Test a Smart Flow on page 270.
When Is it Possible to Switch Between Editors?
You can only switch between editors if you are an office administrator.
When you first create a new Smart Flow that has not yet been saved, you can
switch from the Smart Flow Editor to the Advanced Language Editor by
clicking on the Advanced Language Editor link. Provided you have not saved
any changes in the Advanced Language Editor, you can undo the switch and
return to the Smart Flow Editor by clicking on Undo Changes and Go Back to
Smart Flow Editor. However, you will lose any changes you made in the
Advanced Language Editor.
When you reopen an existing Smart Flow, it opens in the editor that it was last
saved in. If it opens in the Advanced Language Editor, you can no longer switch
between editors.
What Is the Smart Flow Advanced Language?
The Smart Flow advanced language is a logical syntax language that is compiled
by structuring specific statements in basic sentence format. It is used to create
Smart Flows in the Advanced Language Editor, and it is an alternative to the
default Smart Flow Editor that uses commands to build Smart Flows.
You can only use the Smart Flow advanced language using the Advanced
Language Editor if you are an office administrator.
For more information about using the Smart Flow advanced language, see
Reference: Smart Flow Advanced Language Syntax on page 263.
How Is Credit Card Information Stored in Smart Flows?
If credit card information is entered directly with a cryptic command, this
information is not stored in an encrypted format in the database. Therefore, you
should not include credit card information directly in a Smart Flow.
This does not apply to Smart Flows that accept credit card information at run time
using command-based questions or the ask command. In this case, the value is
sent to the central system immediately and stored in an encrypted format.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
259
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Are the Prerequisites for Accessing Smart Flows?
The optional Productivity Suite module must be activated by a site parameter
before you can access Smart Flows.
How to Access Smart Flows
To manage Smart Flows:
1. On the Tools menu of Selling Platform Connect, expand Productivity Suite.
2. Click on Smart Flows.
For information about running Smart Flows, see Running and Stopping Smart
Flows on page 279.
Creating and Testing Smart Flows
How to Create a Smart Flow in the Smart Flow Editor
1. In the Smart Flows list, click on New.
2. For details on how to write commands for Smart Flows, mouseover the link
entitled How to Write Command Based Smart Flows.
3. Enter a name, an optional description, the content of your Smart Flow and
click on Save.
260
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
How to Create a Smart Flow in the Advanced Language Editor
Note:
You must be an office administrator to create a Smart Flow in the
Advanced Language Editor.
1. In the Smart Flows list, click on New.
2. Click on Switch to Advanced Language Editor.
3. For details on how to write advanced Smart Flows, mouseover the link
entitled How to Write Advanced Smart Flows.
4. Enter a name, an optional description, and the definition of your Smart Flow.
You can define a Smart Flow question to accept a specific format only. For
example, the Smart Flow for a date must be in the format DDMMYYYY. See
also What Is the Smart Flow Advanced Language? on page 259.
Note:
For security reasons, do not enter credit card information in a Smart
Flow. For more information, see How Is Credit Card Information
Stored in Smart Flows? on page 259.
5. To test the Smart Flow before saving it, click on Run in a New Command
Page.
6. When complete, click on Save.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
261
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
262
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Reference: Smart Flow Advanced Language Syntax
Statement
Description
Examples
ask
Prompts the user with a question.
ask “What is your first
name?” assign to firstname
The answer must be assigned to a
variable.
The string in quotes between ask and
assign to is the question that appears
in the prompt when the Smart Flow is
running.
ask “<h1>What is your first
name?</h1>” assign to
firstname
The string after assign to is the name
of the variable to which the answer is
assigned.
ask “<font size=\“3\”
color=\“red\”>What is your
last name?</font>” assign to
lastname
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask statement to
format the appearance of the question.
For more information, see Reference:
HTML Tags in the Smart Flow
Advanced Language on page 269.
mandatory
ask
Same as the ask statement except that
the user must answer the question.
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
ask email
Prompts the user with a question where
the answer must be an email address.
If an incorrect email address format is
entered, the user receives an error
message when the Smart Flow is
running.
mandatory ask “What is
your last name?” assign to
lastname
ask email “What is your
email address?” assign to
customeremail
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask email statement
to format the appearance of the
question. For more information, see
Reference: HTML Tags in the Smart
Flow Advanced Language on page
269.
mandatory
ask email
Same as the ask email statement
except that the user must answer the
question.
mandatory ask email “What
is your email address?”
assign to customeremail
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
ask number
Prompts the user with a question where
the answer must be a number.
ask number “What is your
age?” assign to age
If a number is not entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask email statement
to format the appearance of the
question. For more information, see
Reference: HTML Tags in the Smart
Flow Advanced Language on page
269.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
263
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Statement
Description
Examples
mandatory
ask number
Same as the ask number statement
except that the user must answer the
question.
mandatory ask number
“What is your age?” assign
to age
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
ask date
Prompts the user with a question where
the answer must be in an accepted
date format.
ask date “What date do you
want to return?” assign to
returndate
The accepted formats are:
•
DDMON (example: 19APR)
•
DDMONYY (example: 19APR15)
•
DDMONYYYY (example:
19APR2015)
•
DDMM (example: 1904)
•
DDMMYY (example: 190415)
•
MMYY (example: 0415)
If an accepted date format is not
entered, the user receives an error
message when the Smart Flow is
running.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask date statement to
format the appearance of the question.
For more information, see Reference:
HTML Tags in the Smart Flow
Advanced Language on page 269.
mandatory
ask date
Same as the ask date statement
except that the user must answer the
question.
mandatory ask date “What
date do you want to return?”
assign to returndate
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
ask date with
format
Same as the ask date statement
except that you can define the exact
date format that the user must enter.
For example:
ask date “What date do you
want to return?” assign to
returndate with format
DDMON
Only the date format of DDMON is
acceptable. If a date in any other format
is entered, the user receives an error
message when the Smart Flow is
running.
mandatory
ask date with
format
Same as the ask date with format
statement except that the user must
answer the question.
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
264
mandatory ask date “What
date do you want to return?”
assign to returndate with
format DDMON
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Description
Examples
ask with
format
Prompts the user with a question where
the answer must match the format
defined by a regular expression.
ask “What is your cost
centre?” with format
“\D{2}\d{3}” assign to
costcentre
If the answer is not entered in the
required format, the user receives an
error message when the Smart Flow is
running.
For more information about using
regular expressions, see Reference:
Syntax Used in Regular Expressions on
page 298.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask with format
statement to format the appearance of
the question. For more information, see
Reference: HTML Tags in the Smart
Flow Advanced Language on page
269.
mandatory
ask with
format
Same as the ask with format
statement except that the user must
answer the question.
If no answer is entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
mandatory ask “What is
your cost centre?” with
format “\D{2}\d{3}” assign to
costcentre
send
Send the cryptic entries.
send “NM1SMITH/JOHN”
send “NM1” + lastname + “/”
+ firstname
capture
Capture part of the cryptic screen. The
capture instruction is followed by three
parameters, separated by commas:
capture line:2, column:3,
length:10 assign to lastname
•
Line: and a number to indicate
which line of the screen the
beginning of the string is captured.
•
Column: and a number to indicate
which column of the screen the
beginning of the string is captured.
•
Length: and a number to indicate
the length of the string that is
captured.
The string after assign to is the name
of the variable in which the captured
string is stored.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
265
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Statement
Description
Examples
if, else
Perform different actions depending on
whether a condition is true or false.
ask “What is your
destination?”
The if instruction is always followed by
an expression that is between
parenthesis. The expression is a
comparison between two terms that
can be a variable or a constant.
assign to destination
•
The == operator verifies whether
the two terms are equal.
send “rm no”
•
The != operator verifies whether
the two terms are different.
•
The > operator verifies whether the
first term is greater than the
second term.
•
The < operator verifies whether the
first term is less than the second
term.
•
The >= operator verifies whether
the first term is greater than or
equal to the second term.
•
The <= operator verifies whether
the first term is less than or equal
to the second term.
if (destination == “PAR”) {
send “rm ok”
} else {
}
If the condition is true, the first block of
instructions that is delimited by the
curly brackets is executed.
If the condition is false, the second
block of instructions that is delimited by
the word else and curly brackets is
executed.
ask until
Asks a question until a particular
answer is reached.
ask “Do you need to include
visa information?”
The string with quotes between ask
and until are the instructions that
appear in the prompt when a Smart
Flow is running.
1 : Yes - ESTA for the USA
The string after the word until is the
value of the answer that stops the
iteration of the block of instructions.
The string after the word when
determines the action.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in an ask until statement to
format the appearance of the
instructions. For more information, see
Reference: HTML Tags in the Smart
Flow Advanced Language on page
269.
mandatory
ask until
2 : Yes - other countries
3 : No - continue” until “3” {
when(“1”) {
send “RIR for travel to the
USA, an ESTA (online visa)
is required”
}
when(“2”) {
send “RM no visa required”
}
}
Same as the ask until statement
except that the user must answer the
question.
If no answers are entered, the user
receives an error message when the
Smart Flow is running.
266
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Description
Examples
today
The today variable is a global variable
that is used to get the value of the date
when executing a Smart Flow. The date
is in the IATA format (DDMMM).
send “rm visa information
added on” + today
lastCommand
If the Smart Flow is executed by a
Smart Trigger, you can use the
lastCommand variable to re-use the
triggering command within the Smart
Flow.
send lastCommand
Note:
A Smart Flow using the
lastCommand variable
should be hidden so that
users cannot launch the
Smart Flow manually. For
more information, see
Showing and Hiding Smart
Flows on page 277.
Caution: To prevent the possibility of
an infinite loop, do not use
lastCommand in the last
action of a Smart Flow.
choose
Prompts the user with a limited choice
where only one choice is possible.
choose “Do you want to” {
The string within the quotes that follow
the choose statement is the question
that is asked when the Smart Flow is
run.
send “rm 1”
The when statements are the options
that are provided for the question. The
first when statement is the default.
The user can only choose one when
statement by either selecting the option
button in the prompt or using the
keyboard shortcuts from letters A to Z.
When the user makes a choice, the
content of the when statement is
executed and the flow exits the choose
block.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in a choose statement to
format the appearance of the question.
For more information, see Reference:
HTML Tags in the Smart Flow
Advanced Language on page 269.
choose until
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
when (“send pax remark”) {
}
when (“send comment”) {
send “rm 2”
}
}
choose “<b><i>Do you want
to</i></b>” {
when (“Send pax remark”) {
send “rm 1”
}
when (“Send comment”) {
send “rm 2”
}
}
Similar to the choose statement except
the prompt continues to loop when the
Smart Flow is run.
choose “Do you want to”
until “end” {
The exit option is represented by the
until statement. The user can also exit
by pressing the X key on the keyboard.
send “rm pax”
When the user makes a choice, the
content of the when statement is
executed, after which the flow returns
to the choose until loop unless the
user exits.
when (“Send comment”) {
when (“Send pax remark”) {
}
send “rm comment”
}
}
[email protected]
267
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Statement
Description
Examples
group
The group instruction is used to group
several questions in the Smart Flow
prompt that are defined by the ask or
select instructions.
group {
This allows you to include several
questions in the same Smart Flow
prompt rather than having separate
prompts for each ask instruction.
call
select
ask “Enter first name” assign
to name
ask “Enter last name” assign
to lastname
ask date “Enter DOB”
assign to dob
The group instruction can only contain
ask and select instructions; it cannot
contain any other instructions.
}
The call instruction is used to call
another Smart Flow from the running
Smart Flow.
ask “What is the passenger
last name?” assign to
lastname
The call instruction is followed by the
name of the Smart Flow to call.
call “mySmartFlow”
You can also explicitly call either an
office Smart Flow or a personal Smart
Flow with the same name by defining
either office or personal in the call
syntax.
call office “mySmartFlow”
Allows the user to select one option
from a drop-down list of predefined
options.
select “What is the
passenger title?” from
“MR,MRS,DR” assign to title
The string with quotes between the
words select and from is the question
that appears in the prompt when a
Smart Flow is running.
The comma-separated string with
quotes between the words from and
assign to defines the predefined list of
options from which the user can
choose.
send “RM” + lastname
call personal “mySmartFlow”
select “<b>What is the
passenger title?</b>” from
“MR,MRS,DR” assign to title
A comma is used to separate the
options. There is no limit to the number
of options you can provide.
The string after the words assign to is
the name of the variable in which the
answer is stored.
You can also use a specific set of
HTML tags in a select statement to
format the appearance of the question.
For more information, see Reference:
HTML Tags in the Smart Flow
Advanced Language on page 269.
268
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Description
Examples
append
Used to append variables by text or
variable name.
append “name” + var1 +
“toto” to var2
The value between the words append
and to can be a concatenation of
different strings and variables.
The string after the word to is the name
of the variable to store.
The first character of this variable name
should be a lowercase letter [a-z] and
the other characters should be a
number or letter [a-zA-Z0-9] or an
underscore character. If the variable is
not empty, the value is appended to the
variable.
comment
Allows you to enter comments in the
Advanced Language Editor.
// your comments
Reference: HTML Tags in the Smart Flow Advanced Language
Only the HTML tag elements included in the following table are supported in
Smart Flows.
Element
Type
b
Tag
br
Tag
color
Attribute
color
SubAttribute
div
Tag
font
Tag
font-size
SubAttribute
font-weight
SubAttribute
h1
Tag
h2
Tag
h3
Tag
i
Tag
p
Tag
size
Attribute
span
Tag
style
Attribute
text-decoration
SubAttribute
u
Tag
For an example of using these HTML tag elements, see Example: Smart Flow
With HTML Tags on page 270.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
269
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Smart Flow
The following Smart Flow prompts the user to enter passport information for each
passenger in the Booking File.
Note:
This example shows a Smart Flow defined by an office administrator in
the Advanced Language Editor.
Example: Smart Flow With HTML Tags
The following Smart Flow uses HTML tags to format the questions defined in ask,
mandatory ask, select and choose statements.
Note:
This example shows a Smart Flow defined by an office administrator in
the Advanced Language Editor.
Why Test a New Smart Flow?
Testing a new personal or office Smart Flow allows you to run it before saving it,
without impacting any other users.
How to Test a Smart Flow
When you have created the Smart Flow, click on Run in a New Command Page.
270
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
The Smart Flow runs in an unsaved mode.
How to Create a New Smart Flow from an Existing Smart Flow
1. In the Smart Flows list, select the Smart Flow that you want to copy.
2. Click on Copy to New.
The new Smart Flow opens in the same editor that it was originally created in
(either the Smart Flow Editor or Advanced Language Editor). The name
field contains the string "Copy of <name of the selected smart flow>" and all
other fields are prefilled with data from the existing Smart Flow.
How to Display Command History
In the Command page of a Booking File, press Alt+right-arrow or click on the
Command History icon
to display the previously entered commands.
There is no limit to the number of commands that you can display using the
command history.
Note:
If the selected commands have not been run, the Command History
pop-up window is empty and all buttons are unavailable.
What Are the Navigation Options in Command History?
Action
Result
Up-arrow
Navigate up and down the command list.
Down-arrow
Shift+mouse click
Select multiple commands sequentially.
Shift+up-arrow
Shift+down-arrow
Ctrl+mouse click
Select multiple commands non-sequentially
Ctrl+up-arrow+space bar
Ctrl+down-arrow+space
bar
Enter
Run a command in standard display mode or edit
mode.
Ctrl+Space
Select or deselect a command.
Shift+Space
Select a command and deselect all previous
selections.
Single left click
Ctrl+left click
Select or deselect a command and keep all previous
selections.
Shift+left click
Select a list of commands based on the last command
focus.
Shift+Enter
Add a new line to a selected command when command
history is in edit mode (the right column of the
Command History pop-up window for editing selected
commands).
Ctrl+Enter
Add a new line to insert a new command when
command history is in edit mode (the right column of
the Command History pop-up window for editing
selected commands).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
271
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Action
Result
Tab
Move the focus of selection in the Command History
pop-up window.
How to Edit Command History
1. Display command history. See How to Display Command History on page
271.
2. Click on Edit in the Command History pop-up window.
The window splits into two columns: a left column that displays the previously
run commands in the command history, and a right column to edit the chosen
commands.
3. Select a command in the left history column and click on Add to move the
command to the editing column.
See also What Are the Navigation Options in Command History? on page
271.
4. Edit the selected command as required.
-
To run the edited commands, click on Send or press Enter.
-
To copy and paste the edited commands to the Command page, select
the commands and click on Copy.
-
To create a smart flow from the edited commands, click on Create Smart
Flow. See also How to Create a Smart Flow Using Command History
below.
-
To remove a command from the editing column, select the command and
click on Remove or click on Remove All to remove all commands.
5. To return to the standard display mode, click on Standard Mode.
6. To close the Command History pop-up window, click on Close or press
Esc.
How to Create a Smart Flow Using Command History
1. Display command history. Refer to How to Display Command History on
page 271.
2. Select the commands in the Command History pop-up window that you
want to use in the Smart Flow.
3. If you want to edit the commands before creating the Smart Flow, click on
Edit and update as required. See also How to Edit Command History above.
4. Click on Create Smart Flow.
272
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
The application automatically switches to the Smart Flow Editor.
The selected commands are pasted from the Command History pop-up
window to the Smart Flow Editor, where you can edit, save, or add
questions to the commands. For more information, see How to Create a
Question on page 278.
What Happens When Command History Is Used to Create a New
Smart Flow?
If the Smart Flows list is open:
•
The application automatically switches to the Smart Flow Editor.
•
The definition text area displays the cryptic commands that were sent when
creating the new Smart Flow.
If the Smart Flow Editor is open:
•
If there are any unsaved changes for the previous Smart Flow, you are
prompted to choose either the Save, Do Not Save, or Keep Editing option.
•
If there are no unsaved changes for the previous Smart Flow, a new Smart
Flow is created and the definition text area displays the commands from the
Command History pop-up window.
Video: How to Create and Run a Personal Smart Flow
Launch
Video: How to Create an Office Smart Flow Using the Advanced
Language Editor
Launch
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
273
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Managing Smart Flows
How to Open a Smart Flow
1. In the Smart Flows list, select the Smart Flow that you want to open.
2. Click on Open.
Alternatively, double-click on the Smart Flow.
How to Edit a Smart Flow
Note:
You must be an office administrator to edit an office Smart Flow. If the
Smart Flow is shared, you must be logged into the office in which it was
created before you can edit it and you cannot rename a shared Smart
Flow.
1. Open the Smart Flow. See How to Open a Smart Flow above.
A Smart Flow is opened in the editor that it was last saved in.
2. Update the fields as required and click on Save.
How to Delete a Smart Flow
Note:
You must be an office administrator to delete a shared or office Smart
Flow. If you delete a shared Smart Flow, it is deleted from all offices
that it was shared with.
Caution: Before you delete a Smart Flow, make sure it is not being used by
another Smart Flow, a Smart Trigger or Quality Monitor. Otherwise, you
risk blocking a user's booking flow.
1. Select the Smart Flow that you want to delete in the Smart Flows list.
2. Click on Delete.
3. In the Delete Smart Flow pop-up window, click on Delete to confirm the
deletion.
What Is Autocomplete?
Autocomplete is a feature that automatically completes the statements you are
typing in the Advanced Language Editor or Quality Monitor Editor. Inside the
editor you can display a list of available proposals and select the appropriate
statement instead of manually typing it.
Where Can I Find Information on Autocomplete?
In the Advanced Language Editor, click on How to Write Advanced Smart
Flows.
274
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
How to Display Autocomplete
1. Place the cursor on a line in the editor.
2. Press Ctrl+space bar.
3. To display more specific proposals based on alphabetical filtering, enter the
first letter of the statement and press Ctrl+space bar.
The available autocomplete proposals are displayed.
How to Select a Proposed Statement in Autocomplete
1. To highlight a proposal, press the up-arrow or down-arrow key.
2. To select a proposal, press Enter when the proposal is highlighted.
Alternatively, use the mouse to highlight and select a proposal.
Which Smart Flow Statements Are Supported by Autocomplete?
Statement
if
Text Inserted When Selected
if (condition) {
}
if else
if (condition) {
}
else {
}
else
else {
}
when
when (“”) {
}
choose when
choose “” {
when (“”) {
}
when (“”) {
}
}
choose until when
choose “” until “” {
when (“”) {
}
when (“”) {
}
}
send
send “COMMAND”
ask
ask “question” assign to variable
mandatory ask
mandatory ask “question” assign to variable
ask email
ask email “question” assign to variable
mandatory ask email
mandatory ask email “question” assign to variable
ask number
ask number “question” assign to variable
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
275
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Statement
Text Inserted When Selected
mandatory ask number
mandatory ask number “question” assign to variable
ask date
ask date “question” assign to variable
mandatory ask date
mandatory ask date “question” assign to variable
ask date with format DDMM
ask date “question” with format DDMM assign to
variable
mandatory ask date with
format DDMM
mandatory ask date “question” with format DDMM
assign to variable
ask date with format
DDMMYY
ask date “question” with format DDMMYY assign to
variable
mandatory ask date with
format DDMMYY
mandatory ask date “question” with format DDMMYY
assign to variable
ask date with format DDMON
ask date “question” with format DDMON assign to
variable
mandatory ask date with
format DDMON
mandatory ask date “question” with format DDMON
assign to variable
ask date with format
DDMONYY
ask date “question” with format DDMONYY assign to
variable
mandatory ask date with
format DDMONYY
mandatory ask date “question” with format
DDMONYY assign to variable
ask date with format
DDMONYYYY
ask date “question” with format DDMONYYYY assign
to variable
mandatory ask date with
format DDMONYYYY
mandatory ask date “question” with format
DDMONYYYY assign to variable
ask date with format MMYY
ask date “question” with format MMYY assign to
variable
mandatory ask date with
format MMYY
mandatory ask date “question” with format MMYY
assign to variable
ask with format
ask “question” with format “regular expression” assign
to variable
group ask
group {
ask “question” assign to variable1
ask “question” assign to variable2
}
group mandatory ask
group {
mandatory ask “question” assign to
variable1
mandatory ask “question” assign to
variable2
}
ask until
ask “question” until “exit” {
when (“”) {
}
}
276
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Text Inserted When Selected
mandatory ask until
mandatory ask “question” until “exit” {
when (“”) {
}
}
call
call “name”
capture
capture line:1, column:1, length:1 assign to variable
select
select “question” from “option 1, option 2, option 3”
assign to variable
How to Exit Autocomplete
Press Esc or the left-arrow or right-arrow key.
Or:
Click outside the autocomplete suggestion area.
Or:
Select a proposal.
Showing and Hiding Smart Flows
Understanding Hidden Smart Flows
As a user or office administrator, you can choose to hide or show Smart Flows in
the Your Smart Flows menu.
See also How to Run a Smart Flow on page 280.
A hidden Smart Flow can still be called by other Productivity Suite tools. For
example, the Smart Flow can still be executed by Quality Monitor and Smart
Triggers.
Example: Hidden and Visible Smart Flows in the Smart Flows List
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
277
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Hide a Smart Flow in Your Smart Flows
1. In the Smart Flows list, select the Smart Flow that you want to hide.
2. Click on Hide from Your Smart Flows.
Alternatively, clear the Show in Your Smart Flows check box in the editor.
The Smart Flow is no longer available in Your Smart Flows in the main
toolbar and you cannot run it. However, it can still be launched by other
Smart Flows, Smart Triggers and Quality Monitor.
How to Show a Smart Flow in Your Smart Flows
1. In the Smart Flows list, select the Smart Flow that you want to show.
2. Click on Show in Your Smart Flows.
Alternatively, select the Show in Your Smart Flows check box in the editor.
The Smart Flow is now available in Your Smart Flows in the main toolbar
and can be run.
Using Questions in the Smart Flow Editor
What Is the Purpose of Creating Questions?
Questions define the prompt that is displayed during the execution of a Smart
Flow. Cryptic commands are sent with the answers that are provided. A colourhighlighted rectangle indicates which sections of a command have a question
associated with them. The highlight is orange when the question is active and the
highlight is blue when the question is selected but not active.
How to Create a Question
1. Open or create a Smart Flow in the Smart Flow Editor.
2. Select the part of the command that you want to create a question for.
3. Click on Create New Question.
4. Enter a title for the question in the Label field.
5. Enter the question in the Question field.
6. Click on Save.
278
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
How to Edit a Question
Note:
Changes made to a question are saved automatically even if you do not
click on Save. Therefore, if you edit a question and activate another
question, the changes to the first question are saved automatically.
1. Activate the question in command mode by clicking on the section of the
command that the question relates to. Alternatively, use the keyboard arrows
to navigate to the command.
The question is activated when the Label and Question fields are prefilled
with the question details and the section of the command in the definition field
is highlighted in orange.
2. Edit the question as required.
How to Delete a Question
Note:
Ensure that the question is not active because an active question
cannot be deleted.
Place the cursor at the beginning of the label of the coloured rectangle for the
question and press Delete.
Alternatively, place the cursor at the end of the label of the coloured rectangle for
the question and press Backspace.
Running and Stopping Smart Flows
What Happens When You Run a Smart Flow?
•
If the Smart Flow contains questions or instructions, you can enter the
responses in the Smart Flow pop-up window using free text. If there is a list
of options to choose from, you can select the correct response using the
keyboard or mouse.
•
The commands that are sent by the Smart Flow are echoed in the Command
page.
•
If several Booking Files are open when you run a Smart Flow, the Smart Flow
only affects the current Booking File.
•
When you run a Smart Flow from graphic mode, the cryptic response is
displayed in the Command Page Output section of the Smart Flow pop-up
window. This cryptic display is read-only and cannot be edited.
•
You can expand or collapse this Command Page Output section using the
Expand and Collapse arrows.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
279
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Example: Command Page Output Section of Smart Flow Window
•
If there is more than one page of Command Page Output, you can use the
Previous Page and Next Page options to navigate from one page to
another.
Example: Navigation Links in Command Page Output
How to Run a Smart Flow
1. Click on Your Smart Flows on the main toolbar of Selling Platform Connect
to display the list of Smart Flows.
If you have both personal and office Smart Flows, the Your Smart Flows
panel is divided into Office Smart Flows and Personal Smart Flows.
2. Click on the link for the Smart Flow that you want to run.
Example: Your Smart Flows
How to Stop a Smart Flow
1. Run a Smart Flow. See How to Run a Smart Flow above.
A prompt appears to confirm that the selected Smart Flow is running.
2. Click on Stop or the
Note:
280
icon.
You can only stop a Smart Flow when there is a prompt available.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Smart Key Translation
Getting Started With Smart Key Translation
What Is the Smart Key Translator?
The Smart Key Translator allows you to translate Smart Keys from Amadeus
Selling Platform to personal or office Smart Flows in Selling Platform Connect.
Note:
Any user can save Smart Key translations as personal Smart Flows but
you must be an office administrator to save Smart Key translations as
office Smart Flows.
How to Access the Smart Key Translator
On the main page of Selling Platform Connect, expand the Tools menu and click
on Smart Key Translation.
Understanding Smart Key Translation
Which Smart Keys Can Be Translated to Smart Flows?
Command Code
Command Description
<SEND
Send command
<send
<?
Prompt action
<CHOOSE
Choose command
<choose
<@
Use variable
<TODAY>
Today date value
<today>
<SET>
Paste the save value
<set>
<GET>
Copy selected text
<get>
<REPEAT UNTIL
Repeat until instruction
<repeat until
<*
Add a comment
<IF THEN ELSE>
If then else instruction
<if then else>
[
Optional prompt
<%
Add an embedded Smart Key
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
281
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Translate a Smart Key to a Smart Flow
1. Copy the Smart Key that you want to translate and paste it in the Smart Key
to Translate column of the Smart Key Translator.
2. Click on Translate.
The Smart Key appears as a Smart Flow in the Translated Smart Flow
column and it can be edited if needed.
3. You can copy the translated Smart Flow either to a new personal Smart Flow
or a new office Smart Flow using a Copy to New memory button. The
previous selection is retained and displayed on the memory button for the
duration of the session. To display the copy options, click on the drop-down
arrow on the Copy to New memory button.
Note:
You must be an office administrator to copy a translated Smart Flow
to a new office Smart Flow.
a) To copy to a new personal Smart Flow, click on Copy to New Personal
Smart Flow.
The Advanced Language Editor opens and displays the personal Smart
Flow.
b) To copy to a new office Smart Flow, click on Copy to New Office Smart
Flow.
The Advanced Language Editor opens and displays the office Smart
Flow.
4. Click on Save.
What If the Smart Key Does Not Contain Command Code?
If you are translating a Smart Key that does not contain any command code and
contains only text, insert the Smart Key between the append.... to commandline
syntax.
The value inserted between 'append' and 'to' is placed in the command line while
waiting to be modified or executed.
282
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Example: Append to... Command Line
Smart Triggers
Getting Started With Smart Triggers
What Is the Smart Triggers Tool?
Smart Triggers is a tool that launches extensions such as scripts or Smart Flows
in Selling Platform Connect. For example, a Smart Trigger can be a rule that
triggers the launch of a script when a certain command is entered in the prompt
of the Command page.
The different types of extensions that can be run are:
•
Smart Flows
•
Plus scripts
•
Server-side scripts
•
Smart Tools
Note:
Smart Flows and server-side scripts are advanced options that must be
enabled by a site parameter.
You must be an office administrator to define rules using the Smart Triggers tool.
Running Smart Triggers
A Smart Trigger runs its associated flow or script according to the way you define
the Smart Trigger using the Smart Trigger Editor. For more information, see
What Is the Smart Trigger Editor? on page 284.
If multiple Command pages are open, a Smart Trigger only impacts the
Command page where the user enters the triggering command.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
283
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Stopping Smart Triggers
You cannot stop a Smart Trigger at run time.
However:
•
If the Smart Trigger launches a Smart Flow, you can stop it, as long as there
is a prompt available to stop it.
•
If the Smart Trigger launches a script, you can stop it, as long as the script
allows itself to be stopped.
What Are the Different Types of Smart Triggers?
Smart Trigger Type
Description
Smart trigger on command
match
These Smart Triggers are used to launch a script
instead of the standard response of a cryptic
command.
They intercept the command and launch the script.
There is no response match on these Smart Triggers
because there is no response from the Amadeus
central system.
Smart trigger on response
match
These Smart Triggers are used to launch a script in
addition to the standard response of a cryptic
command.
They do not intercept the command but launch the
script in addition to the result of the cryptic command.
When creating this trigger type, the cryptic commands
are filtered depending on response type and response
match.
For more information see Explanation: Using the Smart
Trigger Editor on page 285.
Note:
You can also create a Smart Trigger that combines both types of
trigger: command match and response match.
What Is the Smart Trigger Editor?
The Smart Trigger Editor is displayed when you click on the New or Open
buttons at the bottom of the Smart Triggers list.
You use the Smart Trigger Editor to perform the following tasks:
•
Create a new Smart Trigger.
•
Copy or edit an existing Smart Trigger.
•
Activate or deactivate a Smart Trigger.
•
Handle errors.
Note:
284
A Smart Trigger with Error 2401 can be saved in the Smart Triggers
list, but it cannot be activated.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Explanation: Using the Smart Trigger Editor
Smart Trigger Editor Field
Explanation
Name
You must enter a name for the Smart Trigger.
Activate This Smart Trigger
Select this option to activate the Smart Trigger from
the Smart Trigger Editor.
Description
This field allows you to enter an optional description
for the Smart Trigger.
Priority
There can be multiple Smart Triggers for the same
command.
Use this field to determine which trigger is run first.
The lower the number you enter in the field for each
Smart Trigger (zero is the lowest), the higher the
priority.
Triggers that intercept commands always run before
triggers without interception.
Note:
When there are two triggers that intercept
the same command, only the trigger with
the lower number (higher priority) runs.
For more information, What Are the Different Types
of Smart Triggers? on page 284.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
285
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Smart Trigger Editor Field
Explanation
Cryptic Command Only
Use either or both of these fields to define the
commands or actions that run the Smart Trigger.
Cryptic Command or Graphic
Action, When Available
•
In the Cryptic Command Only field, enter a
regular expression that you expect the command
to match.
For example, a regular expression of ^AN
causes the Smart Trigger to launch a Smart Flow
or script every time the user enters a command
starting with AN in the Command page.
•
In the Cryptic Command or Graphic Action,
When Available field, select the command
family and command that you expect to match.
This includes the cryptic command and its
equivalent graphical action.
For example, if you select End of Transaction
and ER, the Smart Trigger launches a Smart
Flow or script every time the user enters ER in
the Command page or clicks on Save and
Confirm (ER) in the Booking File.
The command families and commands available
are the same as those available for Quality
Monitor. See What Are the Trigger Commands in
Cryptic and Graphic? on page 306.
Both of these fields can be left empty if a match is
only needed on the response type. In this case, you
must define a regular expression to match the
response of the command in the Response field.
Test This Command
Use this field to test the regular expression entered in
the Cryptic Command Only field.
1.
2.
Enter a command.
Click on Test This Command.
Match or No Match is displayed to confirm whether
or not the regular expression matches the command
you entered.
Action
This drop-down list allows you to define how the
Smart Trigger is run.
If you want the Smart Trigger to intercept the
command and run the Smart Flow or script, select
Immediately Launch. In this case, there will be no
response to match.
If you want the Smart Trigger to launch the Smart
Flow or script in addition to the response of a cryptic
command, select Send Command and Wait for
Response.
Note:
286
If you defined a graphical action and
cryptic command to run the Smart Trigger,
the only option available is Immediately
Launch.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Smart Trigger Editor Field
Explanation
Response
This section only appears if you select Send
Command and Wait for Response in the Action
field.
1. Categorise the response type.
Select Any Type or select a specific response
category.
2. Enter the regular expression that you want the
response to match.
You can also set the Smart Trigger to match a
command only and leave this field empty.
Test This Response
Use this field to test the regular expression entered in
the Response field.
1.
2.
Enter a response.
Click on Response Test.
Match or No Match is displayed to confirm whether
or not the regular expression matches the command
you entered.
Launch
Select the type of action that you want to trigger and
select from the Name drop-down list.
Note:
Only office-level Smart Flows can be used
with Smart Triggers.
Example: Smart Trigger
In this example, the Smart Trigger intercepts any cryptic command beginning with
NM. If the response in the Command page contains the words INVALID
FORMAT, the Smart Trigger launches an office Smart Flow to help the user add
a passenger using the correct format.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
287
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Note:
User Guide
In this example, the command and response matches have been
successfully tested using the Test this command and Test this
response options.
Reference: Syntax Used in Regular Expressions
Character
Description
\
Marks the next character as either a special character, a literal, a
back reference, or an octal escape.
For example, 'n' matches the character "n".
'\n' matches a new line character. The sequence '\\' matches "\"
and "\(" matches "(".
288
^
Matches the position at the beginning of the input string. If the
RegExp object's Multiline property is set, ^ also matches the
position following '\n' or '\r'.
$
Matches the position at the end of the input string. If the RegExp
object's Multiline property is set, $ also matches the position
preceding '\n' or '\r'.
*
Matches the preceding sub expression zero (or more) times. For
example, zo* matches "z" and "zoo". * is equivalent to {0,}.
+
Matches the preceding sub expression one or more times. For
example, 'zo+' matches "zo" and "zoo", but not "z". + is equivalent
to {1,}.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Character
Description
?
Matches the preceding sub expression zero or one time. For
example, "do(es)?" matches the "do" in "do" or "does". ? is
equivalent to {0,1}.
{n}
n is a nonnegative integer. Matches exactly n times. For example,
'o{2}' does not match the 'o' in "Bob," but matches the two o's in
"food".
{n,}
n is a nonnegative integer. Matches at least n times. For example,
'o{2,}' does not match the "o" in "Bob" and matches all the o's in
"foooood". 'o{1,}' is equivalent to 'o+'. 'o{0,}' is equivalent to 'o*'.
{n,m}
m and n are nonnegative integers, where n<=m. Matches at least n
and at most m times. For example, "o{1,3}" matches the first three
o's in "fooooood". 'o{0,1}' is equivalent to 'o?'. Note that you cannot
put a space between the comma and the numbers.
?
When this character immediately follows any of the other
quantifiers (*, +, ?, {n}, {n,}, {n,m}), the matching pattern is nongreedy. A non-greedy pattern matches as little of the searched
string as possible, whereas the default greedy pattern matches as
much of the searched string as possible. For example, in the string
"oooo", 'o+?' matches a single "o", while 'o+' matches all 'o's.
.
Matches any single character except "\n". To match any character
including the '\n', use a pattern such as '[.\n]'.
x|y
Matches either x or y. For example, 'z|food' matches "z" or "food".
'(z|f)ood' matches "zood" or "food".
[xyz]
A character set. Matches any one of the enclosed characters. For
example, '[abc]' matches the 'a' in "plain".
[^xyz]
A negative character set. Matches any character not enclosed. For
example, '[^abc]' matches the 'p' in "plain".
[a-z]
A range of characters. Matches any character in the specified
range. For example, '[a-z]' matches any lowercase alphabetic
character in the range 'a' through 'z'.
[^a-z]
A negative range characters. Matches any character not in the
specified range. For example, '[^a-z]' matches any character not in
the range 'a' through 'z'.
\b
Matches a word boundary, that is, the position between a word and
a space. For example, 'er\b' matches the 'er' in "never" but not the
'er' in "verb".
\B
Matches a non-word boundary. 'er\B' matches the 'er' in "verb" but
not the 'er' in "never".
\cx
Matches the control character indicated by x. For example, \cM
matches a Control-M or carriage return character. The value of x
must be in the range of A-Z or a-z. If not, c is assumed to be a
literal 'c' character.
\d
Matches a digit character. Equivalent to [0-9].
\D
Matches a non-digit character. Equivalent to [^0-9].
\f
Matches a form-feed character. Equivalent to \x0c and \cL.
What Are the Prerequisites for Accessing Smart Triggers?
The optional Productivity Suite module must be activated by a site parameter
before you can access Smart Triggers.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
289
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Access Smart Triggers
On the Tools menu of Selling Platform Connect, expand Productivity Suite and
click on Smart Triggers.
Working With Smart Triggers
How to Create a Smart Trigger
1. In the Smart Triggers list, click on New.
The Smart Triggers Editor opens.
2. Complete the required fields for the trigger.
Refer to Explanation: Using the Smart Trigger Editor on page 285 and
Reference: Syntax Used in Regular Expressions on page 298.
3. Click on Save.
How to Activate a Smart Trigger
Select the deactivated Smart Trigger in the Smart Triggers list, and click on
Activate.
You can also activate a Smart Trigger in the editor by selecting the Activate this
Smart Trigger check box.
An active Smart Trigger can be run.
How to Deactivate a Smart Trigger
Select the active Smart Trigger in the Smart Triggers list, and click on
Deactivate.
You can also deactivate a Smart Trigger in the editor by clearing the Activate
this Smart Trigger check box.
A deactivated Smart Trigger cannot be run.
290
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
How to Delete a Smart Trigger
Note:
If you delete a shared Smart Trigger, it is deleted from all offices that it
was shared with. You cannot delete a Smart Trigger that was created in
an office other than the one you are logged into.
1. Select a Smart Trigger in the Smart Triggers list, and click on Delete.
2. A pop-up confirmation is displayed. Click on Delete.
How to Create a Smart Trigger from an Existing Smart Trigger
1. Select a Smart Trigger in the Smart Triggers list, and click on Copy To New.
The Smart Trigger Editor page is displayed showing a copy of the selected
alarm.
2. Modify the required fields and click on Save.
3. Click on Close.
How to Edit a Smart Trigger
Note:
To edit a shared Smart Trigger, you must be logged into the same office
that created it.
1. Select a Smart Trigger in the Smart Triggers list and click on Open.
2. In the Smart Trigger Editor, modify the necessary fields and click on Save.
3. Click on Close.
Note:
If you enter a new name for an existing Smart Trigger, it is overwritten,
rather than creating a copy. White spaces included before and after a
Smart Trigger name are removed at save time.
Quality Monitor
Getting Started With Quality Monitor
What Is Quality Monitor?
Quality Monitor uses rules, defined by an office administrator, to check that the
Booking File complies with the correct booking process.
It displays blocking, warning and information messages that prompt the user to
apply corrections before completing a booking.
Quality Monitor is executed when the user:
•
Enters a cryptic command or its equivalent graphical action that is defined in
a rule as a trigger for Quality Monitor checks.
Or:
•
Clicks on Check All in the Quality Monitor checklist.
For more information, see Managing Checks and Trigger Commands on page
305.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
291
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is the Quality Monitor Editor?
The Quality Monitor Editor is used to create and edit rules and add checks to
these rules. You can also activate and deactivate rules in the editor.
For more information, see Creating and Managing Quality Monitor Rules on page
301 and Managing Checks and Trigger Commands on page 305.
See also Explanation: Main List Page on page 248.
For information on the autocomplete functionality, refer to Using Autocomplete on
page 299.
What Is the Quality Monitor Language?
The Quality Monitor language is used to write the check definitions of a Quality
Monitor rule. The first instruction of a check definition can be an if instruction or a
choose instruction.
For specific examples of Quality Monitor rules, refer to Creating and Managing
Quality Monitor Rules on page 301.
Reference: Quality Monitor Language Statements
Statement
Definition
if (condition) {
CONDITION is used in the if instruction, and it is
evaluated during the execution of a check.
instructions
The operators AND and OR are used in checks for
multiple conditions.
}
INSTRUCTIONS are a single optional choose
instruction and a mandatory single set status
instruction.
There must be a set status instruction for every check.
A set status instruction without an if condition will
prevent a success status for a check in the Quality
Monitor checklist and result in a syntax error.
Note:
choose "Do you want to" {
when ("send pax remark") {
send "rm1"
}
when ("call smart flow") {
call "my smart flow"
INSTRUCTIONS cannot be empty.
The string within the quotes that follow choose is the
question that is asked in the overlay. See What Are the
Corrective Actions for a Check? on page 308.
The choose instruction should contain at least one
when statement.
The when statement can only contain send or call
instructions.
}
}
call
The call instruction calls an office Smart Flow from the
overlay.
Note:
292
The Smart Flow must exist at office level
and have exactly the same name (including
capitalisation) that you use in the call
instruction. Otherwise, the call will fail.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Definition
call smart tool
The call smart tool instruction calls a Smart Tool from
the overlay.
Note:
send
The Smart Tool must be already be
available in the user's office and have
exactly the same name (including
capitalisation) that you use in the call
instruction. Otherwise, the call will fail.
The send instruction is used to manually send a cryptic
command.
The user can edit the command, if required, before it is
sent.
send auto
The send auto instruction is used to automatically
send a cryptic command.
This means that the command is sent without any user
interaction, as long as the corresponding if condition is
true.
set status
The mandatory set status instruction allows you to
define the status of a check if the condition is evaluated
as true.
There are three possibilities:
•
INFO: This status is displayed as information for
the user. It does not block the user's booking flow
and can be ignored.
•
WARNING: This status is displayed as a nonblocking error. It advises the user to complete
specific actions but can be ignored.
•
BLOCKING: This status is displayed as a nonblocking error or a blocking error, depending on
whether the rule is run from the Check All link in
the Quality Monitor checklist or the corresponding
trigger command family.
For more information, see What Are the Statuses of a
Check? on page 307.
Examples
For examples of how to use Quality Monitor Language statements in rules, see
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Form of Payment on page 302 and Example:
Quality Monitor Rule for Fax or Email Contact on page 303.
Reference: Operators Used in Conditions
Operator
Definition
==
Used in conditions and property closures and used with
numbers, Booleans and strings.
In strings, it means 'exact match'.
!=
Used in conditions and property closures and used with
numbers, Booleans and strings.
In strings, it checks if the strings are not an exact
match.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
293
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Operator
Definition
>
Used in conditions and property closures.
Used mainly with numbers but can be used with
Booleans and strings.
In strings, it is based on alphabetical order.
In Booleans, true > false.
<
Used in conditions and property closures.
Used mainly with numbers but can be used with
Booleans and strings.
In strings, it is based on alphabetical order.
In Booleans, true > false.
>=
Used mainly with numbers but can be used with
Booleans and strings.
In strings, it is based on alphabetical order.
<=
Used mainly with numbers but can be used with
Booleans and strings.
In strings, it is based on alphabetical order.
CONTAINS
Used only in property closures and with strings.
contains
Example:
if GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlowText contains "NON
SMOKER").count >= 1
Explanation:
Checks if there is one or more general remarks
containing the term 'non smoker'.
DOESNOTCONTAIN
Used only in property closures and with strings.
doesnotcontain
MATCHES
Used only in property closures and with strings.
matches
Examples:
AirSegment.where(BoardPointCountryState matches
“US|CA”) matches any air segment where departure
point is located in North America.
AirSegment.where(DepartureDate matches “0\dDEC)
matches any air segment where departure date is
during the first nine days of December.
Explanation:
Checks if a Booking File/PNR element matches a
specific regular expression pattern.
For more information about writing regular expressions,
see Reference: Syntax Used in Regular Expressions
on page 298.
DOESNOTMATCH
Used only in property closures and with strings.
doesnotmatch
Example:
if GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlowText DOESNOT
MATCH "Non smoking flight").count >0
Explanation:
Checks if a Booking File element does not match a
specific regular expression pattern.
294
AND
Used only between conditions.
and
This is the logical && between Booleans.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Operator
Definition
OR
Used only between conditions.
or
This is the logical || between Booleans.
where
Used to find one or several properties of an insert
variable.
Example:
airSegment.where((airline == "AF") AND (destination
== "NCE")).count > 1
Explanation:
Checks if there is more than one air segment where
the airline is Air France and the destination is Nice.
count
Used to count the number of insert variables or the
number of properties that satisfy the given conditions.
Example:
contact.count == 0
Explanation:
Checks if there is no contact information for the
passenger.
For more information, see Reference: Count Operator
Examples below.
Reference: Count Operator Examples
Example
Explanation
AirSegment.count >=2
Checks that there are AT LEAST two air
segments.
GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlow contains
"abc".count ==1
Checks that there is EXACTLY one
general remark containing the text "abc".
AirSegment.where(Airline =="AF").count
<3
Checks that there are LESS THAN three
AF air segments.
GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlow contains
"abc".count <=1
Checks that the number of general
remarks containing the text "abc" is LESS
THAN OR EQUAL to one.
AirSegment.where(Airline =="AF").count
>0
Checks that the number of AF air
segments is GREATER THAN zero.
GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlow contains
"abc").count >=1
Checks that the number of general
remarks containing the text "abc" is
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO one.
AirSegment.where(Airline=="AF").count
<7 AND
AirSegment.where(Airline=="AF").count
>4
Checks that there are BETWEEN four and
seven AF air segments.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Note:
The number of segments must
be GREATER THAN four but
LESS THAN seven.
[email protected]
295
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Reference: Insert Variables Used in Conditions
Insert Variable
Description
Properties of the Insert
Variable
Description
Accounting
Accounting (AI)
elements
AccountNumber
Returns the account number.
AirItinerarySegm
ents
Examines the air
segments as a whole
instead of looking at
one air segment at a
time. Most of the
properties are
calculated dynamically.
DestinationCountryState
Extracts destination country or
state code. For example, FR
or USNY.
DestinationAirport
CDG, for example.
AirSegment
CarSegment
296
A single air segment
element
CCR elements
If it is a round trip, this is the
airport for the longest stopover segment. Otherwise, it is
the airport of the last segment.
OriginCountryState
Extracts origin country or state
code for the first segment. For
example, FR or USNY.
RoundTrip
True if this is a round trip.
OriginAirport
Origin airport. For example:
LHR.
Airline
Airline code.
Class
Class.
OffPoint
Destination airport of the
segment.
BoardPoint
Origin airport of the segment.
OffPointCountryState
Country or state of the
destination airport. For
example, USNY for JFK or FR
for CDG.
BoardPointCountryState
Country or state of the origin
airport. For example, USNY for
JFK or FR for CDG.
DepartureDate
Departure date.
ArrivalDate
Arrival date.
OffPointCity
City of the destination airport.
For example, NYC for JFK or
PAR for CDG.
BoardPointCity
City of the originating airport.
Company
Vendor code for each car
segment.
Location
Location of the car.
PickUpDate
Date for the car pick up.
DropOffDate
Date for the car drop off.
TotalCurrencyCode
Currency code (for example,
EUR or USD).
TotalRate
Total price for the car rental.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Insert Variable
Description
Properties of the Insert
Variable
Description
Contact
AP elements
ContactType
Type of phone elements which
corresponds to the third letter
of the tag when present (for
example, B for APB, E for
APE, or X for APX) or empty
string when the tag is simply
AP (that is, there is no third
letter).
ContactText
Free-flow text following the
third letter of the tag when
present or equal to the current
'Free flow' property when the
tag is simply AP.
FreeFlow
Returns the whole free flow
message starting after the AP
text (and until the passenger
or segment information).
FormOfPaymentText
Text after the FP command
without passenger or segment
associations.
CreditCardCompany
Credit card company (for
example, AX, VI, or CA).
ManualApprovalCode
Manual approval code for the
credit card form of payment (if
any).
Category
Category of the remarks (for
example, for category H it is
'RM H').
FreeFlow
Whole text of the general
remark, after the category
information, excluding the
passenger and segment
associations.
ChainCode
Code for the hotel chain.
CheckInDate
Date of the hotel check in.
PropertyName
Name of the property.
TotalRate
Total price.
TotalCurrencyCode
Currency code that the rate is
expressed in (for example,
EUR or USD).
CheckOutDate
Date of the hotel check out.
SsrElementCode
For example, VGML, XBAG, or
INFT.
AirlineCode
Airline code of the element.
FreeFlow
Text after the status code
excluding the passenger or
segment associations.
StatusCode
Status code for the element
(for example, HN or HK).
FormOfPayment
Remark
HotelSegment
SpecialServiceR
equest
FP items
RM, RC, RX, RIF, RII,
RIR, RIZ and RQ items
HHL elements
SSR elements
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
297
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Insert Variable
Description
Properties of the Insert
Variable
Description
TourCode
FT elements
Text
Text after the FT command,
excluding the passenger or
segment associations.
TransitionalStore
dTicketing
Allows the querying of
TST items
TotalCollection
Total fare value of each TST in
the Booking File.
TotalCollectionCurrency
Currency of each total
collection (for example, EUR
or USD).
Carrier
Airline code.
ValidatingCarrier
FV elements
Reference: Syntax Used in Regular Expressions
Character
Description
\
Marks the next character as either a special character, a literal, a
back reference, or an octal escape.
For example, 'n' matches the character "n".
'\n' matches a new line character. The sequence '\\' matches "\"
and "\(" matches "(".
298
^
Matches the position at the beginning of the input string. If the
RegExp object's Multiline property is set, ^ also matches the
position following '\n' or '\r'.
$
Matches the position at the end of the input string. If the RegExp
object's Multiline property is set, $ also matches the position
preceding '\n' or '\r'.
*
Matches the preceding sub expression zero (or more) times. For
example, zo* matches "z" and "zoo". * is equivalent to {0,}.
+
Matches the preceding sub expression one or more times. For
example, 'zo+' matches "zo" and "zoo", but not "z". + is equivalent
to {1,}.
?
Matches the preceding sub expression zero or one time. For
example, "do(es)?" matches the "do" in "do" or "does". ? is
equivalent to {0,1}.
{n}
n is a nonnegative integer. Matches exactly n times. For example,
'o{2}' does not match the 'o' in "Bob," but matches the two o's in
"food".
{n,}
n is a nonnegative integer. Matches at least n times. For example,
'o{2,}' does not match the "o" in "Bob" and matches all the o's in
"foooood". 'o{1,}' is equivalent to 'o+'. 'o{0,}' is equivalent to 'o*'.
{n,m}
m and n are nonnegative integers, where n<=m. Matches at least n
and at most m times. For example, "o{1,3}" matches the first three
o's in "fooooood". 'o{0,1}' is equivalent to 'o?'. Note that you cannot
put a space between the comma and the numbers.
?
When this character immediately follows any of the other
quantifiers (*, +, ?, {n}, {n,}, {n,m}), the matching pattern is nongreedy. A non-greedy pattern matches as little of the searched
string as possible, whereas the default greedy pattern matches as
much of the searched string as possible. For example, in the string
"oooo", 'o+?' matches a single "o", while 'o+' matches all 'o's.
.
Matches any single character except "\n". To match any character
including the '\n', use a pattern such as '[.\n]'.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Character
Description
x|y
Matches either x or y. For example, 'z|food' matches "z" or "food".
'(z|f)ood' matches "zood" or "food".
[xyz]
A character set. Matches any one of the enclosed characters. For
example, '[abc]' matches the 'a' in "plain".
[^xyz]
A negative character set. Matches any character not enclosed. For
example, '[^abc]' matches the 'p' in "plain".
[a-z]
A range of characters. Matches any character in the specified
range. For example, '[a-z]' matches any lowercase alphabetic
character in the range 'a' through 'z'.
[^a-z]
A negative range characters. Matches any character not in the
specified range. For example, '[^a-z]' matches any character not in
the range 'a' through 'z'.
\b
Matches a word boundary, that is, the position between a word and
a space. For example, 'er\b' matches the 'er' in "never" but not the
'er' in "verb".
\B
Matches a non-word boundary. 'er\B' matches the 'er' in "verb" but
not the 'er' in "never".
\cx
Matches the control character indicated by x. For example, \cM
matches a Control-M or carriage return character. The value of x
must be in the range of A-Z or a-z. If not, c is assumed to be a
literal 'c' character.
\d
Matches a digit character. Equivalent to [0-9].
\D
Matches a non-digit character. Equivalent to [^0-9].
\f
Matches a form-feed character. Equivalent to \x0c and \cL.
What Are the Prerequisites for Accessing Quality Monitor?
The optional Productivity Suite module must be activated by a site parameter
before you can access Quality Monitor.
How to Access Quality Monitor
On the Tools menu of Selling Platform Connect, expand Productivity Suite and
click on Quality Monitor.
Using Autocomplete
What Is Autocomplete?
Autocomplete is a feature that automatically completes the statements you are
typing in the Advanced Language Editor or Quality Monitor Editor. Inside the
editor you can display a list of available proposals and select the appropriate
statement instead of manually typing it.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
299
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Display Autocomplete
1. Place the cursor on a line in the editor.
2. Press Ctrl+space bar.
3. To display more specific proposals based on alphabetical filtering, enter the
first letter of the statement and press Ctrl+space bar.
The available autocomplete proposals are displayed.
How to Select a Proposed Statement in Autocomplete
1. To highlight a proposal, press the up-arrow or down-arrow key.
2. To select a proposal, press Enter when the proposal is highlighted.
Alternatively, use the mouse to highlight and select a proposal.
How Does Autocomplete Work With Insert Variables?
You can display autocomplete for an insert variable and for the property of the
insert variable.
Example Instruction:
if (AirSegment.where(Airline == ”AF”).count>=1
In this example, autocomplete is available for the 'AirSegment' insert variable and
the 'Airline' property of that variable.
How to Display Autocomplete for Insert Variables
1. Place the cursor within the brackets of the if condition and press Ctrl+space
bar.
All supported insert variables are displayed.
2. Select a variable.
3. Place the cursor within the brackets after the 'where' clause of the variable
and press Ctrl+space bar.
All properties associated with the insert variable are displayed.
Which Quality Monitor Statements Are Supported by Autocomplete?
Statement
Text Inserted when Selected
if
if (condition) {
}
when
when (“”) {
}
300
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Statement
Text Inserted when Selected
choose when
choose “” {
when (“”) {
}
when (“”) {
}
}
send
send “COMMAND”
send auto
send auto “COMMAND”
call
call “NAME”
set status
set status “WARNING”
Note:
The statuses (INFO, WARNING,
BLOCKING) are also supported by
Autocomplete.
How to Exit Autocomplete
Press Esc or the left-arrow or right-arrow key.
Or:
Click outside the autocomplete suggestion area.
Or:
Select a proposal.
Creating and Managing Quality Monitor Rules
What Are the Elements of a Quality Monitor Rule?
Element
Explanation
Rule name
The name of the Quality Monitor rule.
Description
An optional description of the rule.
Trigger Command
The cryptic command or its equivalent graphical action
that triggers the Quality Monitor checks defined in the
rule.
Note:
Check name
Each command or action belongs to a
specific triggering command family. For
example, TTP belongs to the Ticketing
family.
The name of each check.
This name is displayed in the Quality Monitor checklist.
Check message
An optional generic message that can provide more
information for each check.
This message is displayed in the check overlay.
Check definition
The set of conditions and instructions that define the
behaviour of each check.
You create check definitions using the Quality Monitor
Language.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
301
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
For more information, see Managing Checks and Trigger Commands on page
305.
How to Create a Quality Monitor Rule
1. In the Quality Monitor Rules list, click on New.
The Quality Monitor Editor opens and allows you to complete the required
fields for the rule.
2. Enter a name and first check as a minimum. The name of the rule must be
unique.
For details on checks, refer to Managing Checks and Trigger Commands on
page 305.
3. To activate the rule, select the Activate this Rule checkbox.
Activation allows the rule to be applied to a Booking File when a cryptic
command or its equivalent graphical action from their corresponding trigger
family is used or the next time the Check All link in the Quality Monitor
checklist is clicked.
Note:
By default, the rule will be saved with a deactivated status.
4. Click on Save.
The new rule is added to the Quality Monitor Rules list.
How to Create a New Quality Monitor Rule from an Existing Rule
1. In the Quality Monitor Rules list, select the rule that you want to copy and
click on Copy to New.
The new rule opens in the Quality Monitor Editor. The name field contains
the string "Copy of <name of the selected rule>" and the other fields are
prefilled with data from the existing rule.
2. Edit the rule as required.
3. Click on Save.
4. To return to the Quality Monitor Rules list, click on Close.
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Form of Payment
This rule checks for an FOP element in the PNR. If no FOP is found, a warning is
displayed with options to send cryptic commands to add a FOP either as cheque
or as cash. Alternatively, the user can also add a credit card by calling a Smart
Flow.
302
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Fax or Email Contact
This rule checks for an email address or fax contact element in the PNR. If no
contact is found, a warning is displayed with options to either call a Smart Flow to
add a fax number or call a Smart Flow to add an email address.
After a contact is added for the passenger, the if condition becomes false and the
check is successful.
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for ESTA Warning
Rule Purpose
If the origin of an air segment is FR and the destination is US, automatically send
a remark warning that a valid ESTA is required for entry to the US.
Rule Definition
if (AirSegment.where(BoardPointCountryState=="FR").count>0
AND AirSegment.where(OffPointCountryState CONTAINS
"US").count>0) {
set status WARNING
send auto "RIR REMEMBER YOU WILL NEED A VALID ESTA TO ENTER
THE US" }
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Hotel Booking Suggestion
Rule Purpose
If there is at least one air segment, no hotel segments and no remark indicating
that hotel booking is not required, ask the user if hotel booking is required.
•
When the answer is Yes, prompt the user to search for hotels.
•
When the answer is No, send a remark indicating that hotel booking is not
required.
Rule Definition
if (AirSegment.count>=1 AND HotelSegment.count==0 AND
GeneralRemark.where(FreeFlow CONTAINS "Hotel no
needed").count==0 {
set status WARNING
choose "Does your traveller need accommodation?" {
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
303
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
when (''Yes - Please search for available hotels using the
Hotels module in Sell Connect") {
}
when ("No") {
send "RM Hotel not needed"
}
}
}
How to Open a Quality Monitor Rule
1. In the Quality Monitor Rules list, select the rule that you want to open.
2. Click on Open.
How to Edit a Quality Monitor Rule
1. Select the rule in the Quality Monitor Rules list and click on Open.
2. Update the rule as required and click on Save.
Note:
If you are deleting commands from a rule, at least one command must
be present.
How to Activate a Quality Monitor Rule
1. Select the non-active rule in the Quality Monitor Rules list.
2. Click on Activate.
You can also activate a rule in the Quality Monitor Editor by selecting the
Activate this Rule check box.
The activated rule is then applied to a Booking File when a cryptic command or
its equivalent graphical action from their corresponding trigger family is used or
the next time the Check All link in the Quality Monitor checklist is clicked.
How to Deactivate a Quality Monitor Rule
1. Select the active rule in the Quality Monitor Rules list.
2. Click on Deactivate.
The deactivated rule is greyed out in the Quality Monitor Rules list. The checks
in the rule will not appear in the Quality Monitor checklist, and they will not be
executed when a command or graphical action from their corresponding trigger
family is used or when the Check All link in the Quality Monitor checklist is
clicked.
How to Delete a Quality Monitor Rule
Note:
You must be an office administrator to delete a shared or office rule. If
you delete a shared rule, it is deleted from all offices that it was shared
with.
1. Select the rule in the Quality Monitor Rules list.
304
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
2. Click on Delete.
3. In the Delete Rule pop-up window, click on Delete.
Video: How to Create a Quality Monitor Rule
Launch
Managing Checks and Trigger Commands
What Is a Check?
A check verifies if a condition in a Booking File is true or false during the
execution of Quality Monitor.
The check can also define the corrective action when the condition is true. After
Quality Monitor is executed, the booking flow is interrupted by a message or
blocked, in which case the user must perform the corrective action in the Booking
File or Command page.
You can also define checks for information purposes only. These checks have no
conditions so they are always true for every Booking File.
What Is the Quality Monitor Checklist?
In the Booking File and Command page, all the active checks are displayed to the
user in the Quality Monitor checklist.
For example:
The checks are ordered according to their status severity, starting with the most
severe. The current status of each check is indicated by icon and colour. For
more information, see What Are the Statuses of a Check? on page 307.
If an error occurs during Quality Monitor execution, the top of the checklist shows:
•
An error message.
•
The name of the relevant check, as a link. You can click on this link to display
the corresponding check overlay.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
305
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is a Trigger Command?
A trigger command is a cryptic command or equivalent graphical action that is
used to trigger a rule. Each trigger and its equivalent action belong to a specific
trigger command family, and only specific commands and actions are defined for
each family.
The trigger family is defined in the Trigger field of the Quality Monitor Editor.
When a trigger command is entered or its equivalent graphical action performed,
only the rules defined for that trigger command are executed.
Any rules defined for other command families are not executed. Therefore, these
rules remain in the same state as they were prior to the execution of the trigger
command. You must click on the Check All link in the Quality Monitor checklist to
see the most recent state of the checks.
What Are the Trigger Commands in Cryptic and Graphic?
Command Family
Command
Graphical Equivalent
Description
End of Transaction
BT
Not yet available.
Create IMR.
ER
Click on Save and Confirm (ER)
or click on the Save icon at the
top of the Booking File.
Save and Redisplay.
ERK
Click on Save and Confirm (ER)
and select Save and Change
Status (ERK).
Save, Changes code, Redisplay.
ET
Click on the Close button of the
Booking File and then click on
Save in the Close pop-up
window.
Save, Remove.
ETK
Click on the Close button of
Command page and then select
Change advice codes (ETK) in
the Close Command Page popup window.
Save, Change code, Remove.
QE
Click on Place on Queue and
then click on the OK button in the
Place PNR on Queue pop-up
window.
Place on queue.
QF
Not yet available.
Save, Remove from queue.
QFR
Not yet available.
Save, Remove from queue,
Retrieve.
QM
Not yet available.
Place on multiple queues.
TTP
Click on Issue for an e-ticket
selection
Issue tickets.
TTR
Not yet available
Reprint coupons.
TTM
Click on Issue for an EMD
selection
Print MCO.
INE
Not yet available
Print invoice, extended.
INV
Not yet available
Print invoice.
IMP
Click on Print/Email/Fax
itinerary in the Itinerary section
of the Booking File.
Print itinerary.
Ticketing
306
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Command Family
Pricing
Command
Graphical Equivalent
Description
ITR
Click on Print/Email/Fax
Document Receipt in the ETicket and EMD section of the
Booking File.
E-ticket itinerary receipt.
TRDC
Click on the Void button in the
Void E-Ticket or Void ETicket/EMD/TASF pop-up
window.
Cancel ticket refund.
TRFP
Click on the Refund Now button
in the Refund pop-up window or
click on Continue to Refund
Record in the Refund pop-up
window and then click on the
Save and Confirm button.
Process and print ticket refund.
FXP
Selection of Price with TST
(FXP) in the Air Pricing page.
Price PNR and create TST.
FXU
Choice of a lower fares option
(for example, FXA) in the Air
Pricing page, selection of a fare
and click on Create and Confirm
TST.
Re-book using specific fare,
Create TST.
FXB
Selection of Book Lowest Fare
with TST (FXB) in the Air
Pricing page.
Re-book using lowest fare,
Create TST.
What Are the Statuses of a Check?
Status
Severity
Status
Description
1
Blocking
If the condition for the check is true when Quality Monitor is executed, the
check is displayed with a Blocking status.
The state varies between Warning and Blocking depending on whether or
not a trigger has been sent.
A warning only turns into a blocking state when a trigger command (such
as ET or ETK) from the trigger family is entered.
A blocking state check will block the Booking File. Therefore, the user must
correct it before continuing with the associated trigger command. For
example, if the check is defined for a pricing trigger command, the user
cannot price until the blocking state is fixed.
If the user mouseovers the Blocking state check, an overlay is displayed. If
the user clicks on the check, the Validate button on the overlay display can
be used to launch corrective actions.
In the Quality Monitor checklist, checks with a Blocking status appear in red
and are preceded by the icon.
Note:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
If a check has the Blocking status when the user tries to save a
Booking File, an error message also appears advising the user
to check the Quality Monitor checklist.
[email protected]
307
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Status
Severity
Status
Description
2
Warning
In the editor, a check is defined as a warning using the set status
instruction. If the condition for the check is true when Quality Monitor is
executed, the check is displayed with a Warning status.
A Warning state is also called a Non-blocking state, which means that this
check will not block the Booking File. Therefore, the user can continue with
the booking without having to take any immediate action.
If the user mouseovers the Warning state check, an overlay is displayed. If
the user clicks on the check, the Validate button on the overlay display can
be used to launch corrective actions.
Refer to What Are the Corrective Actions for a Check? below.
In the Quality Monitor checklist, checks with a Warning status appear in
blue and are preceded by the icon.
3
Information
If the condition for the check is true when Quality Monitor is executed (or
there is no condition in the check), the check is displayed with an INFO
status.
This state will not block the Booking File.
If the user mouseovers the Information state check, an overlay is displayed.
If the user clicks on the check, the Validate button can be used to launch
corrective actions.
In the Quality Monitor checklist, checks with an Information status appear in
blue and are preceded by the icon.
4
Unchecked
This is the state of a check immediately after the user opens a Booking File
and before Quality Monitor is executed for the first time.
It is also the state of a check if the checklist is refreshed by an Ignore or
End Transaction.
If the Booking File is empty and the user click on the Check All link in the
Quality Monitor checklist, every check remains in an unchecked state.
5
Success
This is the state of a check when its condition is evaluated as false during
the last execution of Quality Monitor.
In the Quality Monitor checklist, checks with a Success status are preceded
by the
icon.
What Are the Corrective Actions for a Check?
Manual Corrective Action
If the state of a check for a Booking File is Information, Warning or Blocking,
corrective actions are displayed when the user clicks on or mouseovers the
check.
The actions only appear if you use the choose... when statements when defining
the check.
You can choose to:
•
Call an existing office Smart Flow (a personal Smart Flow cannot be called).
•
Call an existing Smart Tool (the Smart Tool must already be available in the
user's office).
•
Send an editable cryptic command.
Note:
308
When a corrective action is performed, Quality Monitor is not triggered
automatically. The user must perform a manual check by clicking on the
Check All link in the Quality Monitor checklist to refresh the state of
each check.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
Editing a Cryptic Command for a Manual Corrective Action
The command that was included in inverted commas after the send instruction
appears in the editable text field of the corrective action overlay. The user can
edit this command before sending it.
However, if the text field is left empty after editing, no cryptic command is sent
when the user clicks on Validate in the overlay.
Automatic Corrective Action
Corrective actions can also be launched automatically if you use a send auto
statement when creating the rule.
The relevant cryptic command is automatically sent during Quality Monitor
execution, and each command that is sent is displayed with its cryptic response
in the Command page.
How to Launch a Corrective Action for a Check
If there is only one corrective action possible for the check
1. In the Quality Monitor checklist, click on the
icon for the check.
If there are multiple corrective actions possible for the check
1. In the Quality Monitor checklist, click on the check.
2. Choose a corrective action in the overlay:
-
Call an existing office Smart Flow. If you try to call a personal or nonexisting Smart Flow, you will receive an error.
-
Call an existing Smart Tool. If you try to call a Smart Tool that is not
available in your office, you will receive an error.
-
Send a cryptic command. Before you send the command, you can edit it
using the field provided.
3. Click on Validate.
How to Add Checks to a New Quality Monitor Rule
1. In the Quality Monitor list, click on New.
2. In the Quality Monitor Editor, complete the required fields for the new rule.
For each check you want to add:
3. Click on the Add Check link.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
309
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. Enter the check name and message.
The check name will be displayed in the Quality Monitor checklist and the
message will be displayed on the check overlay.
5. Enter the check definition.
Note:
To add variables in your definition, use the Autocomplete feature.
For information, see Using Autocomplete on page 299.
For examples of defining checks in Quality Monitor rules, see:
-
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Form of Payment on page 302
-
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Fax or Email Contact on page 303
-
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for ESTA Warning on page 303
-
Example: Quality Monitor Rule for Hotel Booking Suggestion on page
303
You can add up to 10 checks to a rule. To define more than 10 checks, split them
between two rules.
How to Add Checks to an Existing Quality Monitor Rule
1. In the Quality Monitor list, select the rule you want to add a check to and
click on New.
For each check you want to add:
2. In the Quality Monitor Editor, click on the Add Check link and enter the
check name and message.
3. Enter the check definition.
Note:
To add variables in your definition, use the Autocomplete feature.
For information, see Using Autocomplete on page 299.
You can add up to 10 checks to a rule. To define more than 10 checks, split them
between two rules.
How to Change the Order of Checks for a Quality Monitor Rule
Note:
If you change the order of checks for a rule, it changes the order in
which the checks are displayed and executed in Quality Monitor.
1. Open the rule in the Quality Monitor Editor. See How to Open a Quality
Monitor Rule on page 304.
2. Mouseover the check to see the Up and Down options.
These options are available for both expanded and collapsed checks.
3. Click on Down for the check you want to move down and click on Up for the
check you want to move up in the checklist.
The check that has been moved is highlighted briefly.
4. Click on Save.
The order of the checks is updated in the Quality Monitor checklist.
310
Edition 13.0
Chapter 13 Productivity Suite
How to Delete a Check from a Quality Monitor Rule
With the rule open in the Quality Monitor Editor, click on Delete beside the rule
you want to delete.
Note:
If there is only one check for the rule, you cannot delete it because a
single check is mandatory for all rules.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
311
Chapter 14
Sales Report
Getting Started With Sales Report
What Is Sales Report?
Sales Report allows you to display sales information and accounting statistics
about the transactions that are stored in the document database. Sales Report
data is stored for a maximum of 45 days.
Several types of report are available. The output of each report is defined using
report options.
How to Access Sales Report
Expand the Tools menu on the Main page and click on Sales Report.
How to Display a Report
1. Expand the Sales Report menu and click on the report that you want to
display.
2. If the report information is not displayed by default, enter the required
information. If you want to modify the report display, refer to How to Modify
the Report Display on page 314.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
313
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3. Click on Display Report.
How to Modify the Report Display
1. In Your Report Options, click on Add or Change Your Report Options.
2. Select or clear the relevant options and click on Apply These Options.
3. Enter the required information and click on Display Report.
Understanding the Types of Sales Report
What Is the Query Report?
The Query Report contains a list of all documents that were issued or refunded
for a single date or date range.
The report includes the total fare, taxes, fees and commission.
Explanation: Query Report

The document sequence number of the transaction, from 00001 to 99999.
An asterisk after the sequence number indicates that the sale has been
confirmed.

The three-character code for the validating airline of that document.

The 10-digit document number.

The form of payment: either CA for cash or check, CC for credit card payment,
MX for multiple forms of payment (cash and credit card), or NR for net remit.

The last two characters of the agent sign of the issuing agent.

The four-character transaction code.
What Is the Net Remit Report?
The Net Remit Report provides a list of all documents that were issued using an
incentive ticketing method such as nego, IT/BT or net remit. The report shows all
documents issued for a single day or date range. The selling fare, net fare,
commission and the remit amount are included in the report.
314
Edition 13.0
Chapter 14 Sales Report
Explanation: Net Remit Report

The document sequence number of the transaction, from 00001 to 99999.
An asterisk after the sequence number indicates that the sale has been
confirmed.

The three-character code for the validating airline of that document.

The 10-digit document number.

The tour code. If a sale has been cancelled, this field remains blank.

The remit amount, which is the difference between the net amount and the
commission amount. If the net amount is zero, then 'N/A' is displayed. If a sale
has been cancelled, this field remains blank.
A conjunction ticket is displayed with blanks in all columns except for the REMIT
AMT amount column where CNJ for conjunction ticket is displayed.
If the selling or the net amount exceeds 10 characters, the system truncates the
amount and displays a T for truncated in the last position of the field. The same
applies for the commission and remit amounts if they exceed nine characters.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
315
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is the Transaction Report?
The Transaction Report provides additional ticketing information for any
document that is listed in the Query Report. You must first obtain the document
number from the Query Report before you can display a Transaction Report for
that document.
The Transaction Report displays the credit, tax, cash and commission amounts
from the Query Report.
Explanation: Transaction Report

The document type can be:
OPATB SALE
(OP)ATB Ticket Sale
CANX SALE
Cancelled Sale
MAN TKT SALE
Manual (OP)TAT Ticket Sale
ELEC TKT SALE
Electronic Ticket Sale
TOUR ORDER
Manually Registered Tour Order
MAN PTA
Manually Registered PTA
MAN MCO
Manually Registered MCO
AUTO MCO
Automated MCO
AUTO XSB
Automated Excess Baggage Ticket
MAN XSB
Manually Registered Excess Baggage Ticket
ACM
Agent Credit Memos
ADM
Agent Debit Memos
RECALL COM
Recall Commission Statement
REFUND NOTICE Refund with Refund Exchange Notice
316
MAN REN
Refund without Refund Exchange Notice
AUTO DEDUCT
Agent Automated Deduction

Airline numeric code and stock provider.

The credit, cash, tax, fees and commission amounts from the Query report.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 14 Sales Report
What Is the Daily Report?
The Daily Report provides a summary of all sales that were collected and
refunded during a single day.
The sales, refunds and resulting balance are reported by cash, credit and
combined cash/credit totals, and also by individual form-of-payment type.
Adjustment totals are also displayed in some markets. The report also shows the
number of documents issued and cancelled by document type.
Explanation: Daily Report
AGY NO - 23205980
DAILY REPORT 09MAY
CURRENCY EUR
OFFICE - NCE1A098R

AGENT - 0102BE
09 MAY 2009
--------------------------------------------------------------PAYMENTS X DOCUM
SALES 
REFUNDS 
BALANCE
--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT CA 
21433.00
2285.0019148.00
TAX
AMOUNT CA
543.84
106.72437.12
FEE
AMOUNT CA
0.00
0.00
0.00
DOC
AMOUNT CA
21976.84
2391.7219585.12
COMM AMOUNT CA
883.43109.25
774.18REMIT AMOUNT CA
21093.41
2282.4718810.94
--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT CC 
3279.00
0.00
3279.00
TAX
AMOUNT CC
80.00
0.00
80.00
FEE
AMOUNT CC
20.00
0.00
20.00
DOC
AMOUNT CC
3379.00
0.00
3379.00
COMM AMOUNT CC
143.740.00
143.74REMIT AMOUNT CC
163.740.00
163.74--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT TOT 
24712.00
2285.0022427.00
TAX
AMOUNT TOT
623.84
106.72517.12
FEE
AMOUNT TOT
20.00
0.00
20.00
DOC
AMOUNT TOT
25355.84
2391.7222964.12
COMM AMOUNT TOT
1027.17109.25
917.92REMIT AMOUNT TOT
20969.67
2282.4718687.20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FORM OF PAYMENTS 
SALES
REFUNDS
BALANCE
CA/CASH
16824.12
2391.7214432.40
CA/CHECK
5152.72
0.00
5152.72
CC/CCDC
3379.00
0.00
3379.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DOCUMENT VOLUME  ISSUED CANCELLED
SOLD
AMT DOC SOLD
AUTO MCO
2
0
2
135.00
RFND
3
1
2
2391.72
ELECTRONIC
11
0
11
25220.84
MANUAL TKT
1
1
0
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------->

Report header

Sales values

Refunds values
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]

317
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect

Balance (sales minus refunds)

Breakdown by cash (cash and cheques)

Breakdown by credit (all credit cards)

Breakdown totals (combined cash and credit)

Breakdown by individual form-of-payment types

Number of documents issued and cancelled, by document type
User Guide
For detailed information about each field in the report, enter HE TJD in the
Amadeus Information Pages.
What Is the Summary Sales Period Report?
The Summary Sales Period Report provides a summary of all sales that were
collected and refunded during a sales period.
The sales, refunds and resulting balance are reported by cash, credit and
combined cash/credit totals, and also by individual form-of-payment type.
Adjustment totals are also displayed in some markets. The report also shows the
number of documents issued and cancelled by document type.
318
Edition 13.0
Chapter 14 Sales Report
Explanation: Summary Sales Period Report
AGY NO - 23205980
SUMMARY REPORT ***
CURRENCY EUR
OFFICE - NCE1A098R
SALE PERIOD 
AGENT - 0102BE
CURRENT
09 MAY 2009
--------------------------------------------------------------PAYMENTS X DOCUM
SALES 
REFUNDS 
BALANCE
--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT CA 
21433.00
2285.0019148.00
TAX
AMOUNT CA
543.84
106.72437.12
FEE
AMOUNT CA
0.00
0.00
0.00
DOC
AMOUNT CA
21976.84
2391.7219585.12
COMM AMOUNT CA
883.43109.25
774.18REMIT AMOUNT CA
21093.41
2282.4718810.94
--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT CC 
3279.00
0.00
3279.00
TAX
AMOUNT CC
80.00
0.00
80.00
FEE
AMOUNT CC
20.00
0.00
20.00
DOC
AMOUNT CC
3379.00
0.00
3379.00
COMM AMOUNT CC
143.740.00
143.74REMIT AMOUNT CC
163.740.00
163.74--------------------------------------------------------------FARE AMOUNT TOT 
24712.00
2285.0022427.00
TAX
AMOUNT TOT
623.84
106.72517.12
FEE
AMOUNT TOT
20.00
0.00
20.00
DOC
AMOUNT TOT
25355.84
2391.7222964.12
COMM AMOUNT TOT
1027.17109.25
917.92REMIT AMOUNT TOT
20969.67
2282.4718687.20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FORM OF PAYMENTS 
SALES
REFUNDS
BALANCE
CA/CASH
16824.12
2391.7214432.40
CA/CHECK
5152.72
0.00
5152.72
CC/CCDC
3379.00
0.00
3379.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DOCUMENT VOLUME  ISSUED CANCELLED
SOLD
AMT DOC SOLD
AUTO MCO
2
0
2
135.00
RFND
3
1
2
2391.72
ELECTRONIC
11
0
11
25220.84
MANUAL TKT
1
1
0
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------->

Report header

Sales values

Refunds values

Balance (sales minus refunds)

Breakdown by cash (cash and cheques)

Breakdown by credit (all credit cards)

Breakdown totals (combined cash and credit)

Breakdown by individual form-of-payment types

Number of documents issued and cancelled, by document type
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]

319
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is the Item Sales Period Report?
The Item Sales Period Report lists all documents issued in a sales period, with
the cash and credit totals against each item. The report is split into three main
sections: sales, refunds and non-issued documents.
Explanation: Item Sales Period Report
AGY NO - 38200201
ITEM REPORT ***
CURRENCY EUR
OFFICE - ROMAL2117
SALE PERIOD 
AGENT - 0001AA
CURRENT
02 APR 2009
-------------------------------------------------------------------------DOCNUM
PAYMENT
CREDIT
CASH
TAX
FEE
COMM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SALES 
----4117069177 CASH
0.00
323.31
31.31
0.00
15.91
4117069178 E 220-4117069049
0.00
100.00
0.00
0.00
1.00
179 CASH
4117069180 CHECK
0.00
738.60
43.60
0.00
6.95
4117069181 XXXXXXXXXXXX2402
190.76
0.00
21.76
10.00
14.31
4117069182 CASH
0.00
338.95
27.95
0.00
16.95
4117069183 XXXXXXXXXXXX1004
190.76
0.00
21.76
10.00
14.31
4117069184 CANCELLED
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SALES
!
CREDIT
381.52
TAX
146.38
TOTALS
!
CASH
1500.56
COMMISSION
-69.43
FEE
20.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------REFUNDS 
------4117069176 CASH
0.00
656.20
26.20
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------REFUNDS
!
CREDIT
0.00
TAX
26.20
TOTALS
!
CASH
656.20
COMMISSION
0.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------REPORT  !
CREDIT
381.52
TAX
120.18
TOTALS
!
CASH
844.36
COMMISSION
-69.43
FEE
20.00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------NON ISSUED DOCUMENTS 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------4117069150
4117069152
4117069153
4117069154
4117069156
4117069160
4117069161
4117069163
4117069164
4117069165
>
320

Report header

Sales details and totals

Refunds details and totals

Report totals

Non-issued documents
Edition 13.0
Chapter 14 Sales Report
What Is the Cross-reference Report?
The Cross-reference Report cross-references ticket numbers against invoice
numbers (for (OP)TAT and (OP)ATB tickets) or stock control numbers (for
(OP)ATB only), and vice versa. The report also shows the PNR record locator
and amount associated with the ticket number.
You can report on a specific ticket number, stock control number or invoice
number, or on all numbers issued on a particular day or date rate.
Note:
By default, the system reports data created by all agents in an office,
not only your own sign.
The Cross-reference Report is only available for airlines or markets that print
(OP)ATB tickets, or that print invoices and have the ticket invoice crossreferencing field (CRF) set to YES in the office profile.
Explanation: Cross-reference Report
AGY NO - 19490471
XREF REPORT
02APR
CURRENCY EUR
OFFICE - HELAT2120

AGENT - ALL
02 APR 2009
--------------------------------------------------------------PNR REC LOC
AMOUNT
 DOC NUM
 INVOICE
2144219673
0000001000
2XAPS5
373.69
2144219674 E
0000001001
2X7XBN
347.56
2144219675 E
0000001002
2X7XBN
347.56
2144219676 E
0000001003
2SMSWG
293.89
2144219677
0000001004
2VM7AQ
41.96
2144219678
0000001005
2VM7AQ
41.96
2144219679 E
0000001006
NOPNR
362.56
2144219680 E
0000001007
NOPNR
362.56
2144219681
0000001008
NOPNR
962.56
2144219682
2144219683
0000001009
NOPNR
362.56
2144219684
0000001010
2WICFR
316.59
2144219685
0000001011
2YDJFL
318.89
2144219686
0000001012
2WICFR
316.59
2144219687
0000001013
2YBMTQ
229.68
2144219688
0000001014
2V73RM
229.68
2144219689
0000001015
2V73RM
229.68
>

Report header

Ticket number

Invoice number
Refunding in Sales Report
Which Items Are Refunded in Sales Report?
•
E-tickets
•
EMDs
•
TASFs
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
321
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Refund an Item
Note:
The sale must have been confirmed to allow a refund. This is indicated
by an asterisk after the sequence number of the item in the Query
Report.
1. Display the Query Report and select the item that you want to refund.
The item must have a transaction code of TTKT, EMDA or EMDS.
2. Click on Refund.
3. In the Refund window, select the refund type. The refund type depends on
whether you are refunding an EMD or an e-ticket.
-
If you select Basic, Tax Only, Zero or ATC Basic Refund:
a) Click on Continue to the Refund Record to review the refund details and
update if necessary.
b) When you are ready to process the refund, click on Save and Confirm.
c) Click on Close to return to the Query Report.
-
If you select Basic Full, No Report or ATC Full Refund:
a) Click on Refund Now.
The Refund window is updated with confirmation of the refund.
b) Click on the Close button
to return to the Query Report.
The transaction code of the refunded item changes to RFND.
How to Display a Refund
1. Select the item in the Query Report that you want to display a refund for.
The transaction code for the item must be RFND to indicate that it has been
refunded.
2. Click on Display Refund.
Note:
The Display Refund button is only available if the item has been
refunded.
How to Update a Refund
1. Click on the refund item in the report that you want to update.
The transaction code for the item must be RFND to indicate that it has been
refunded.
2. Click on Display Refund.
The Refund Record opens in edit mode.
3. Update the information as required and click on Save and Confirm.
322
Edition 13.0
Chapter 14 Sales Report
Voiding in Sales Report
Which Items Are Voided in Sales Report?
•
E-tickets
•
EMDs
•
TASFs
•
Refunds
How to Void an Item
Note:
You cannot void an item if the sale has been confirmed.
1. Select the item in the Query Report that you want to void and click on Void.
The item must have a transaction code of TTKT, EMDA, EMDS.
2. To confirm the void, click on Void in the pop-up window.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
323
Chapter 15
Australian Visa
Getting Started With Australian Visa
What Is Australian Visa?
The Australian Visa module allows you to:
•
Request an Australian visa from the Electronic Travel Authority System
(ETAS).
•
Check if a passenger has previously been granted an Australian visa.
•
View all Australian visas that have been requested by your office.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
325
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Access Australian Visa
On the main page of Selling Platform Connect, expand the Tools menu.
Working With Australian Visa
How to Apply for a Visa
1. In the Tools menu, expand Australian Visa and click on Visa Application.
Alternatively, click on Australian Visa Application in the What do you want
to do next? section of an open Booking File.
2. Complete the Visa Request Form and click on Request Visa.
The visa response informs you if the visa is accepted or rejected.
3. To request another visa, click on Request Next Visa.
4. Otherwise, click on Close.
How to Enquire about a Visa Status
1. In the Tools menu, expand Australian Visa and click on Visa Enquiry.
2. Enter the search criteria and click on Search.
How to View Visa History
In the Tools menu, expand Australian Visa and click on Visa History.
326
Edition 13.0
Chapter 16
Timatic
Getting Started With Timatic
What Is Timatic?
Timatic is a graphical application that replaces the Amadeus Timatic cryptic
entries.
It allows you to check travel requirements directly in the IATA database using
your IATA credentials.
To search for and check travel information, you can either:
•
Manually add the passenger and itinerary details.
Or:
•
Load the passenger and itinerary details from a Booking File before adding
any additional information.
What Are the Prerequisites to Accessing Timatic?
•
Timatic content must be activated by your administrator.
•
You must have IATA credentials. See How to Request IATA Credentials
below.
How to Request IATA Credentials
1. On the Timatic login page, click on Register now.
2. Enter the required details.
3. To add an additional user, click on Add user and enter their details.
4. Confirm that you have read the Terms and Conditions, and click on Submit.
Alternatively, contact your regular IATA consultant.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
327
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Access Timatic
1. On the main Selling Platform Connect menu, click on Scripts and select
Timatic.
2. Sign in using your IATA credentials.
For more information, see Searching for Travel Information below.
Searching for Travel Information
What Are the Two Ways of Searching for Travel Information?
Search Without an Active Booking File
Without having an active Booking File open, you can perform a basic itinerary
search, which retrieves visa and passport requirements.
If you need to enter additional information regarding the passenger or itinerary,
you need to do this manually because there is no option to load a Booking File in
this mode.
See also How to Search for Travel Information Without an Active Booking File
below.
Search With an Active Booking File
If you already have an active Booking File open when you access Timatic, you
can load the passenger and itinerary details from the Booking File before you
search.
You can also manually add any additional search criteria that were not
automatically loaded from the Booking File.
See also How to Search for Travel Information With an Active Booking File on
page 329.
How to Search for Travel Information Without an Active Booking
File
1. Sign in to Timatic using your IATA credentials.
2. Complete the mandatory fields, which are marked in red.
3. To add additional information, click on Itinerary and traveller details in the
Actions section and enter the required details.
-
If a passenger's nationality is different from their country of residence,
you need to select their residence document type.
-
Some destinations have an additional field for passenger gender. For a
list of these destinations, see Which Countries Require Gender
Information? on page 331.
4. Click on Check to display the travel information.
5. Use the Follow-up Actions drop-down menu in the Check Results panel to
perform additional actions such as expanding or collapsing the travel
information sections.
328
Edition 13.0
Chapter 16 Timatic
For more information on the follow-up actions, see Travel Information Followup Actions on page 331.
How to Search for Travel Information With an Active Booking
File
1. Retrieve the Booking File.
2. Sign in to Timatic using your IATA credentials.
3. Click on Load PNR to transfer the details from the Booking File.
4. Ensure that all mandatory fields are completed, which are marked in red.
5. To add additional information, click on Itinerary and traveller details in the
Actions section and enter the required details.
-
If a passenger's nationality is different from their country of residence,
you need to select their residence document type.
-
Some destinations have an additional field for passenger gender. For a
list of these destinations, see Which Countries Require Gender
Information? on page 331.
6. Click on Check to display the travel information.
If the Booking File contains multiple passengers, the information for each
passenger is displayed on separate tabs.
7. Use the Follow-up actions drop-down menu in the Check results panel to
perform additional actions such as expanding or collapsing the travel
information sections.
For more information on the follow-up actions, see Travel Information Followup Actions on page 331.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
329
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Clear the Search Results
Click on the Delete icon in the Actions section to clear the previous search
results and start a new search.
Explanation: Timatic Travel Information
Category
Description
Geographical Information
Provides general information about the destination
country.
Passport
Provides information about document validity,
additional passport information, and possible warnings
in case of particular types of the document.
The following field can influence the search results:
•
Visa
Document held.
Provides information about visa requirements and
possible warnings, such as onward ticket requirements.
The following fields can influence the search results:
Health
•
Nationality.
•
Document held.
Provides general health information, such as
vaccination requirements.
To receive more detailed and accurate information, you
should enter additional search criteria in addition to the
mandatory fields.
The following fields can influence the search results:
Airport Tax
•
Destination.
•
Transit points.
•
Countries visited in the last 6 days.
Provides airport tax information, such as the conditions
under which airport tax is levied on passengers.
The following fields can influence the search results:
330
•
Destination.
•
Purpose of stay.
•
Transit points (if the passenger will not depart
within 24 hours or has an intention to leave the
airport).
Customs
Provides sub-sections referring to export regulations,
special services, and baggage clearance.
Currency
Provides information about the currency of the
destination country.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 16 Timatic
Which Countries Require Gender Information?
•
Afghanistan
•
Bahrain
•
Benin
•
Egypt
•
Hong Kong
•
Iran
•
Jordan
•
Lebanon
•
Namibia
•
Oman
•
Singapore
•
Saudi Arabia
•
Syria
•
United Arab Emirates
Travel Information Follow-up Actions
Use the Add RM button and Follow-up Actions drop-down menu in the Check
Results panel to perform additional actions.
How to Print the Travel Information
To print all of the travel information, click on Print All in the Follow-up actions
drop-down menu.
You can also print only individual sections using the Print icon
corresponding result section.
on the
How to Download the Travel Information
To download and save the travel information, click on Download in the Followup Actions drop-down menu.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
331
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Add Travel Information Remarks to the Booking File
1. Click on Add RM in the Check Results panel.
2. Enter the details in the message box, and click on Save in PNR.
332
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17
Local Content
Getting Started With Local Content in Amadeus
Selling Platform Connect
Amadeus Local Content is a sales and booking platform for leisure travel-content
in Germany and other markets in Europe.
Amadeus Local Content comprises booking applications, a local mid-office and
other administration applications.
Launching Amadeus Local Content
You can launch Local Content masks from the:
•
Main Page via the section Local Content in the accordion menu.
•
Top menu bar via the menu selection Local Content.
Local mid-office and other administration applications except Amadeus Tour
Market mask open from the Selling Platform Connect Main page.
Note:
You can display Amadeus Tour Market as a separate booking module
in booking file tabs. A maximum of three TOMA booking file tabs can be
opened. Each TOMA booking file tab uses its own terminal ID. This
allows the user to also manage bookings in parallel with the same tour
operator.
How to Launch a Local Content Mask Through The Menu
1. Click on the Local Content section in the accordion menu.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
333
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The list shows all available Local Content masks, that can be launched on the
right side. The individual Local Content applications belonging to any of the
sub sections (example: menu Consulting/Booking) are collapsed by default
and may be shown by expanding the sub section by clicking on the section
folder or on the section folder name.
Note:
An exception is TOMA, which is not available in the accordion and
is launched differently.
2. Click on the title and choose a mask from the list to expand a sub section.
3. Click on the required mask (scroll down if required).
Alternatively, type the abbreviation or an alpha character of the Local Content
application into the Select mask field and press Enter or Tab . You can also
click on the list box icon right of the Select Mask field.
Note:
Only one Local Content application may be displayed in the main
page. A display of multiple applications in parallel through the main
page is not supported. For example, the user is displaying VERK
and now selects KD – in this case KD view will replace the VERK
display. Any data entered previously will be deleted.
How to Launch a Local Content Mask Through the Menu Bar
1. Click on the Local Content label in the menu bar.
2. Select the desired application from the menu.
Similar to the accordion menu, this includes sub menus to group the
masks/applications that belong together.
334
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
How to Navigate With the Keyboard in Local Content
The standard keyboard navigation of a browser are Tab and Shift+Tab to move
forward or backward through each local application mask. Other areas in
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect can be selected only by clicking on the
corresponding field.
Due to technical limitations of browsers it is not possible to navigate through the
local content masks by pressing the Up or Down key.
Keyboard Navigation in the Local Content Menu
Key
Function
Key
Function
Enter
Send mask
F10
Scroll request (down)
Page up
Scroll request (up)
F11
Scroll request (up)
F12
Send ignore (IGNO)
Page down
Scroll request (down)
STRG + S
Open mask save menu
STRG + L
Open mask load menu
Using the Action Bar in the Local Content Mask
What Is the Action Bar?
The Action Bar provides you with additional features and is shown on top of each
Local Content mask.
For information on the available features, see:
How to Switch to a Different Mask
You can use the input field to launch a different Local Content application. The
new mask overwrites the active mask without any notification.
1. Type the abbreviation of the mask into the Select mask field and press Enter
or Tab.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
335
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Click on the list box icon to the right of the Select mask field.
The list of available masks is shown.
3. Choose the required mask by clicking on it (scroll down if needed).
4. Select the mask with Cursor up or Cursor down and press the Enter or Tab
afterwards.
By pressing a letter only mask names starting with this character are shown.
The corresponding mask is shown in the right-hand side of the Main Page
and is also highlighted in the menu.
How to Clear the Current Mask
Click on the Clear button to clear all data of the active mask and to re-load the
mask.
How to Page Forward and Backward
Click on Page forward (icon), the Page back or use the function keys F10 or F11
to browse through when a response from the tour operator exceeds one page.
What Is the Mask Content Function?
You can save the actual content of the mask or reload content saved previously.
The content of the sub masks will not be saved.
The mask content is stored in the browser environment. Therefore, the saved
masked content is not available for reload when changing the browser or
changing to another computer. The saved masked content is available for reload
in the same browser as long the browser data has not been cleared.
How to Save Mask Content
1. Click on the Mask Content button.
2. Select Save.
A pop-up window opens where it is possible to choose/enter a name under
which the content is to be saved or to delete or rename a previously saved
content file.
When the pop-up window opens the Name for field, saving of mask content
is automatically prefilled with the mask name and the actual date and time.
This can be changed by clicking this field to edit the prefilled name.
3. Click on Save or press Enter to save the mask content.
How to Rename Saved Mask Content
1. Select the desired content file.
2. Modify the name in the Name field.
3. Click outside the Name field or pressing Enter or Tab to save the
modification.
336
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
How to Sort Saved Mask Content
1. Click on the little triangles to the right of the Name-label to sort the list by
name.
2. Click on the little triangles to the right of the Saving date and time-label to
sort the list by saved date.
How to Reload Saved Mask Content
1. Click on the Mask Content button and select Reload to reload mask content.
A pop-up window is opened where it is possible to select a stored mask to be
loaded into the current active mask or to delete or rename a previously saved
content file.
2. Select the required content file/line.
3. Click on Reload (clear) if the saved content should completely replace the
current mask content.
Or:
4. Click on Reload (add) if the saved content should only be added to the
current mask.
Previously entered fields are overwritten if they are included in the saved
content file.
How to Delete Saved Mask Content
1. Select a content file
2. Click on Delete.
Note:
If you want to delete multiple content files simultaneously press
STRG and click on all files to delete one by one. Release STRG
and click Delete afterwards.
What Is the Hardcopy Function?
The hardcopy function creates a print out of the active mask area without the
menu. In case of TOMA the hardcopy is pre-formatted. .
How to Create a Hardcopy In the Local Content?
Click on the Hardcopy button.
A print dialogue window is directly opened for printing.
Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA Mask)
The Amadeus Tour Market procedure provides you with an universal mask for
all tour services including insurances. You can directly book tour operators,
insurance companies, hotel companies and cruise operators affiliated with
Amadeus in the TOMA mask.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
337
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Requirements for using the procedure
•
You must sign a separate agency contract with each tour operator, provider
and insurer you would like to book via Amadeus.
•
Printing travel confirmations and neutral travel documents in the TOMA mask
requires a laser or dot matrix printer or a document printer.
The main functions of Amadeus Tour Market are:
•
Retrieving information about tour operators, bookings, flight times etc.
•
Requesting availabilities and vacancies
•
Performing options, confirmed bookings and booking on request
•
Booking several services
•
Displaying bookings
•
Rebooking of services
•
Cancelling bookings
•
Issuing travel documents
•
Sending of offers and travel confirmations via e-mail and fax.
Retrieving the TOMA mask
There are several ways to retrieve the TOMA mask:
1. Select the German Local Content component via the tab
and then
2. Enter the name of the mask TOMA in the field at the end of the toolbar and
press Enter or
3. Click on the Amadeus Tour Market Icon
on the toolbar or
4. Click on Menu, point to Consulting/Booking, click on "TOMA Amadeus Tour
Market" or
5. Double-click on a free tab of the Amadeus Multi Screen and enter the name
of the mask TOMA
Retrieving Amadeus Tour Market Service Functions
You can obtain information about every bookable tour operator via Amadeus Tour
Market by using the "Service Functions".
Example: Action: ?A + Provider code displays all action codes of a specific tour
operator
List of Amadeus Tour Market Service Functions
338
Entry
Explanation
Action: ?
Display an overview of all possible Service
Functions
Action ?A and provider code
Display action codes of a tour operator
Action ?C and provider code
Print the address of the tour operator
Action: ?D
Display calendar
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Action: ?E and provider code
Print the address of the tour operator on a
label
Action ?F and provider code
Display a list of all service type codes that
the tour operator provides
Action ?K and provider code
Take customer address from customer file
Action ?L and provider
Display address of the tour operator`s
headquarter
Action ?P and provider code
Print tour operator information
Action ?R and provider code
Display different travel types offered by the
tour operator
Getting Started With Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA)
What Is Amadeus Tour Market?
The Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA) application provides you with a universal
platform for booking all tour services, including insurances. You can use it to
directly book tour operators, insurance companies, hotel companies and cruise
operators affiliated with Amadeus.
TOMA features:
•
Retrieve information about tour-operators, bookings, flight times and so on.
•
Request availabilities and vacancies.
•
Perform options, confirmed bookings and booking on request.
•
Book several services.
•
Display bookings.
•
Rebook services.
•
Cancel bookings.
•
Issue travel documents.
•
Send offers and travel confirmations via e-mail and fax.
TOMA is comprised of:
•
A System line.
•
A multifunction line.
•
A system message bar (display of system messages).
•
A service booking section (entry of the service data).
•
An information display (provides availability, vacancies, booking details,
information of the service provider etc.).
•
A customer section.
•
A statistic section.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
339
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Requirements for Using TOMA
You must sign a separate agency contract with each tour operator, provider and
insurer you would like to book through the TOMA mask.
Printing travel confirmations and neutral travel documents in TOMA requires a
laser printer.
Launching TOMA mask
How to Launch the TOMA Mask Through The Toolbar Button
Click on TOMA in the toolbar.
How to Launch the TOMA Mask by the New Booking File Button
1. Click on the triangle on the right hand side of the New Booking File button to
open the select box of the drop down menu.
2. Select TOMA.
The symbol of the memory button changes to show the TOMA icon.
3. Click on the New Booking File button
A new TOMA booking file is opened. It is not necessary to open the select
box of the button again. The memory button is reset to the default display:
New Booking File when Selling Platform Connect is relaunched.
How to Launch the TOMA Mask Through the File Menu
1. Click on File in the menu bar.
2. Select New Booking File.
3. Click on TOMA.
How to Launch the TOMA Mask Through the Menu Bar
1. Click on Local Content in the menu bar.
2. Select Consulting/Booking.
3. Click on TOMA.
How to Launch the TOMA Mask Through Your Desktop
Click on the TOMA button in the Your Desktop section on the Main Page.
Handling Multiple TOMA Booking Files
You can launch a maximum of three TOMA booking files. Each TOMA booking
file tab uses a separate terminal ID which allows you to manage up to three
bookings in parallel, when using the same provider.
340
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
The TOMA booking data is not integrated into the booking file (PNR).
Due to this the Go-to panel on the right hand side is collapsed by
default. If you select an application through the Go-to panel icons, a
new booking file will be launched and the current open TOMA booking
file will be closed without saving the data.
Using the Action Bar in the TOMA Mask
In addition to the buttons available in the action bar for the Local Content masks
the following buttons are available in TOMA:
•
Save and send offers with options Save and Save and send all saved
through the SEND mask of Amadeus Fax and Email Plus.
•
Send travel confirmation with options Print and send and Send through the
SEND mask.
•
Order a travel guide through Bookes.
What Is the SEND Mask?
You can send offers and travel confirmations as email or fax through the SEND
mask of Amadeus Fax and Email Plus, which can be launched from the action
bar in the TOMA mask after a booking inquiry and booking respectively.
How to Save Offers for Sending Through Email or Fax
1. Perform a booking inquiry in TOMA.
See .
2. Click on the Offers button.
3. Click on Save.
The message bar displays:
K887 BA registered for delivery
4. Click on Back to TOMA to return to TOMA.
How to Save and Send All Offers Through Email or Fax
1. Perform a booking inquiry.
See .
2. Click on the Offers button.
3. Click on Save and send all saved.
The message bar displays:
K887 BA registered for delivery
4. Click on Back to TOMA to return to TOMA.
How to Print and Send a Travel Confirmation Through Email or Fax
1. Perform a TOMA booking.
See .
2. Enter D into the Service Voucher field.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
341
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3. Click on the Travel Confirmation button.
4. Click on Print and send.
The SEND mask is displayed.
A processing number is created for printing.
The message bar displays:
K225 Disp./CONF ok/ S111 Print DC
5. Enter email/ fax related information like address, subject and a short note.
6. Click on Send.
The message bar displays:
K872 Order registered for delivery
7. Click on Back to TOMA to return to TOMA.
How to Send a Travel Confirmation Through Email or Fax
1. Perform a TOMA booking.
See .
2. Click on the Travel Confirmation button.
3. Click on Send.
The SEND mask is displayed.
The message bar displays:
K225 Disp./CONF ok
4. Enter email/ fax related information like address, subject and a short note.
5. Click on Send.
The message bar displays:
K872 Order registered for delivery
6. Click on Back to TOMA to return to the TOMA mask.
What Is Bookes?
Through Bookes page you can order a travel guide for customers for a fee from
the Nelles Verlag website(a German travel guide publishing company).
How to Order a Travel Guide Through Bookes
1. Click on Bookes.
The Nelles Verlag website opens.
Note:
The office ID is automatically transferred to the provider as well as
the contact data of the travel agency which are prefilled in the order
form.
2. Select the desired travel guide.
3. Enter the name details.
4. Apply a salutation if required.
5. Enter the email address of the customer.
6. Enter the email address of your travel agency.
342
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
7. Select the standard salutation text.
Or:
Enter a free text if you want to use an alternative text.
8. Modify the imprint if required.
9. Click on Kostenpflichtig Bestellen to perform the order.
Further Information Services and Features in TOMA
The TOMA mask enables you to perform specific features, services, retrieve
further information and details of a booking from a tour operator/provider.
Retrieving Service Information in TOMA
You can obtain information about every bookable tour operator / provider through
the TOMA mask by using the service features.
Entry
Function
Action: ?
Display an overview of all possible service
features.
Action: ?A and provider code
Display action codes of a tour operator.
Action: ?C and provider code
Print the address of the tour operator.
Action: ?D
Display calendar.
Action: ?E and provider code
Print the address of the tour operator on a
label.
Action: ?F and provider code
Display a list of all service type codes that
the tour operator provides.
Action: ?K and provider code
Take customer address from customer file.
Action: ?L and provider
Display address of the tour operator`s
headquarter.
Action: ?P and provider code
Print tour operator information.
Action: ?R and provider code
Display different travel types offered by the
tour operator.
How to Retrieve a Tour Operator's Information Page
1. Enter I in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
The window with the tour operator information page is displayed.
4. Select an information topic.
The tour operator assigns each topic its own code (alphanumeric).
5. Enter this code in the multifunction line field.
Some tour operators work with dynamic submasks enabling a navigation
within the information submask.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
343
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
6. Click on Send or press enter.
Note:
The retrieved information can vary significantly between the tour
operators. The most frequent topics are: last-minute offers, booking
notes, cancellation or rebooking conditions, travel agent offers,
updates and so on.
You can scroll through the display using the forward and backward buttons in
the TOMA action bar.
How to Retrieve Detailed Information of a Booking
You are able to retrieve information about a performed booking, in order to share
details of the journey that are important to your customer.
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter BI in the Action field.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K367 Booking information displayed
How to Retrieve Travel Times in Amadeus Tour Market
You are able to retrieve the transportation times for a performed booking, in order
to inform the customer and match any connecting bookings.
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter GZ in the Action field.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
How to Display a Sample Booking of a Tour Operator
1. Enter B? in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K300 *** Sample booking displayed ***
Note:
344
If a tour operator provides you with different sample bookings, you
can scroll through the display using the forward and backward
buttons in the TOMA action bar.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Performing Test Bookings
Some tour operators provide you with action codes for test bookings, enabling
you to familiarise yourself with the individual booking steps without affecting the
tour operator's inventory.
Test action
Explanation
Corresponding
Confirmation codes
real action
TB
Test booking
(B)
260 ** Testb.** ok
TD
Test display
(D)
265 ** Testdisp** ok
TF
Test fixed
booking
(F)
264 ** Testfi** ok
TO
Test optional
booking
(O)
261 ** Tstopn.** ok
TS
Test cancellation
(S)
262 ** Tstcan.** ok
TU
Test rebooking
(U)
263 ** Testm.** ok
Note:
It is obligatory to check that all the test action codes begin by the letter
T. All other actions are real actions.
What Is a Tour Operator Protocol?
You can print out a protocol of each tour operator comprising most important
information and among other things the provided action codes. The protocol
contains the following details:
•
Provider code.
•
Amadeus code number.
•
Tour operator's address and contact details.
•
Action code list.
•
Service type code list.
•
Travel types.
•
Further Information.
How to Print a Tour Operator Protocol
1. Enter ?P in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K018 Print Prot
How to Perform a Catalogue Order
You must have a travel agency contract with a tour operator.
1. Enter IP in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
345
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The tour operator provides displays a selection of the valid catalogues and
brochures and the available shipping units.
4. Mark the desired catalogues of some tour operators with an X and enter the
number of items.
5. Click on Send or press enter.
Note:
A catalogue order is not an automated procedure, and therefore,
not necessarily made available by all tour operators.
How to Print Self Adhesive Tour Operator Address Labels
1. Enter ?E in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter a contact person (if available) into the multifunction line field.
5. Enter the remaining number of labels (on the sheet) and the number of labels
to be printed divided by a slash into the Service Type field: 6/5.
The first number indicates the number of labels remaining on the sheet (to be
counted from the upper-left to the lower-right).
The second number indicates the number of labels to be printed.
Note:
If you want to print a single label, just leave a blank in the Service
Type field and insert a complete label sheet in your printer's manual
feeder.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
UO26 Printing labels
The system displays the tour operator details.
Performing Availability and Vacancy Requests
You can check availabilities or vacancies for a specific service like flights, hotels,
holiday homes, rental cars, cruises and so on.
How to Request a Flight Availability
1. Enter G in the Action field.
Note:
You can enter the action code GF to display only free contingents if
a tour operators provides this action.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter the number of travellers into the Travellers field.
5. Enter the following field elements into the service section:
346
Field
Example for a transport availability
Service Type
F for Flight (see drop-down list).
Service code
HAM PMI (city pair)
From/To
120707 / 260707 or total days of stay;
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
alternatively use the Date-Picker.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The system displays now information about availability, flight times and
alternative dates.
These are the common availability status codes in the system display:
Codes
Meaning
1..9
From 1 to 9 seats free.
*
More than 9 seats free.
0
Booked out or not available.
P
Can only be booked as tour.
R
Possible on request.
W
Waiting list possible.
-
Not available to the tour operator.
You can scroll through the display using the forward and backward keys in
the Amadeus Tour Market action bar.
Note:
Please pay attention to the instructions in the tour operator's
catalogue or in the system display.
What is the Multifunction Line?
Through the multifunction line you can select flights, record further information
and perform a detailed order search. This field is located below the action field.
Note:
This is tour operator-specific. Please pay attention to the instructions in
the tour operator's catalogue or in the system display.
How to Select a Flight From the Availability Display Through the
Multifunction Line
1. Enter the desired two letters displayed from the availability, one for the
outbound and one for the return, into the multifunction line.
2. Click on the Send button or press enter.
The flights are transferred into the TOMA mask. Now you can perform a
booking inquiry (action BA) or a booking (action B) or retrieve an availability
or vacancy for another service.
How to Select a Flight From the Availability Submask
1. Select a flight from the submask by marking the respective boxes with an X.
2. Mark the TOMA selection box with an X.
3. Press enter.
The flights are transferred into the TOMA mask. Now you can perform a
booking inquiry (action BA) or a booking (action B) or retrieve an availability
or vacancy for another service.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
347
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
How to Request Hotel Vacancies
1. Enter H in the Action field.
Note:
You can enter the Action code HF to display only free contingents
if a tour operator provides this action.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter number of travellers into the Traveller field.
5. Enter H in the Service Type field.
Note:
You can use the action code ?F together with the provider code to
retrieve the tour operator-specific service type codes.
6. Enter the service code of the desired hotel from the operator’s catalogue in
the Service Code field.
Or:
Enter the three letter code of the destination into the Service Code field.
7. Enter a date into the From and To fields or select the date through the date
picker.
8. Click on Send or press enter.
The system displays an information about hotels, vacancies, alternative
dates, room types, board and occupancy options.
These are the usual codes in the system display:
Codes
Decoding
>10
More than 10 rooms are available.
*
Nine or more rooms are available.
-/NO
Not available or on request.
RQ
Room only on request available.
EZ/EC
Single bed room available.
DZ/DC
Double bed room available.
HP/H
Half board available.
AI/A
Full board available.
You can scroll through the display using the forward and backward keys in
the Amadeus Tour Market action bar.
How to Select a Hotel After a Vacancy Request
1. Select the desired hotel offer from the vacancy submask by marking the
respective boxes with an X.
2. Mark the TOMA selection box with an X.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
Or:
Enter the service code of the available hotel offer manually into the Service
code field.
4. Enter the accommodation code into the Acc. field manually.
348
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
The service type, service code and accommodation codes are tour
operator-specific. Please pay attention to the instructions in the tour
operator's catalogue or in the system display.
Booking inquiries
Through a booking inquiry you are able to check the availability of all desired
services and fare details in one action.
How to Perform a Booking Inquiry
1. Enter BA in the Action code BA.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. Alternatively you can enter the service type codes manually
depending on the tour operator. For further information see .
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter the number of travellers into the Travellers field.
5. Enter the field elements in the customer section (not mandatory for all tour
operators for a booking inquiry):
Field
Entry
Example
Address
Form of address.
H for Mr, D for Mrs (or select
via the drop-down menu)
Name/First name/Title
Customer name.
Enter first name/last name
and academic title (if
required), for example:
KELLER/FRANZ/DR.
Note:
Last name, first
name and title are
separated by a
slash.
If the next traveller has the
same family name, enter
only the first name after a
slash.
KELLER/ANGELA or
/ANGELA (not provided by
all tour operators)
Age/Reduction
Eter the age or date of birth
for persons entitled to
reductions (e.g. children and
infants).
3 for 3 years for children
(depending on the tour
operator)
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays a message after a successful booking inquiry:
K712 Booking possible, please use Action B
Or:
The following message is displayed if only booking on request is possible:
K733 Booking possible, please use Action BQ
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
349
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
How to Send Offers Through Email or Fax Manually
1. Perform a booking inquiry.
See .
2. Enter AM in the Action field.
3. Enter B in the Service voucher field.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The SEND mask is displayed.
5. Enter the customer's fax number or email address into the respective fields in
the SEND mask.
6. You can enter free text into the Free text field.
7. Enter a complimentary closing phrase into the Salutation line field.
8. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K872 Order registered for delivery
The offer is sent immediately to your customer as a PDF file (in case of an
email).
Note:
You can send up to five offers. To do so, first save the offers with
action AM (recording offer) and do not enter B in the Service
voucher field until you reach the last offer to switch to the SEND
mask. Enter AL in the Action field (deleting (all) offers) to delete
already saved offers. Unlike to the manual sending, you can click
on the button Send in the action bar and select the desired option.
For further information see How to Save and Send All Offers
Through Email or Fax on page 341. You cannot resend the offer
and retrieve the offer again. The system sends the offer to your
recorded email address in bcc. You can contact Amadeus Germany
Sales for turning off this feature.
Booking and Printing Travel Confirmation
You can complete a booking with or without printing a travel confirmation.
How to Perform a Booking
Note:
You have entered all mandatory field elements and may have
performed a booking inquiry (action code BA). For further
information see .
1. Complete a booking by entering the following action codes in the Action field
(depending on the tour operator and type of booking).
350
Action
Explanation
B
Booking.
BC
Booking with confirmation of a note (confirmation).
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Action
Explanation
BM
Prebooking.
BQ
Booking on request
BR
Booking with printing a travel confirmation.
BW
Booking waiting list.
O
Option.
OC
Option with confirmation of a note (confirmation).
OQ
Option on request.
OR
Option with printing a travel confirmation.
F
Confirm booking.
FR
Confirm booking with printing a travel confirmation.
Note:
The tour operator assigns a booking number to a completed
booking, which is displayed in the Booking no. field.
The message bar displays (varies per tour operator):
K220 Booking ok
2. Print a travel confirmation after you have performed a booking successfully
which can be signed by the customer.
See
Note:
The travel confirmation is the contract between your customer and
the tour operator.
How to Print a Travel Confirmation
1. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
2. Enter DR in the Action field.
Note:
Use the action code B for booking without printing
3. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K220 Book./CONF ok/S111 Print DC
Your printer prints the travel confirmation.
How to Create a Booking and Print a Travel Confirmation
1. Enter the action code which enables you to simultaneous print.
Entry
Function
Action: BR
Book and print a travel confirmation.
Action: DR
Book and print a travel confirmation together
with the booking file number.
Action: OR
Option and print an option confirmation.
Action: FR
Confirm an option and a travel confirmation.
2. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
351
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K220 Book./CONF ok/S111 Print DC
Your printer prints the travel confirmation.
How to Send a Travel Confirmation Through Email or Fax Manually
1. Enter B in the Service voucher field for printing the travel confirmation and
transition to the SEND mask for sending the travel confirmation through fax
or email.
Note:
Alternatively enter O in the Service voucher field to switch to the
SEND mask without printing the travel confirmation.
2. Enter the respective printing Action code.
Entry
Function
Action: BR
Book and print a travel confirmation.
Action: DR
Book and print a travel confirmation together
with the booking file number.
Action: OR
Option and print an option confirmation.
Action: FR
Confirm an option and a travel confirmation.
Action: UR
Confirm a rebooking and print a rebooking
confirmation.
Action: SR
Cancel a booking and print a cancellation
confirmation.
The SEND mask is displayed; at the same time, the travel confirmation is
printed at your printer (in case of entering D in the Service voucher field).
The travel confirmation sheet is printed (in case of entering B in the Service
voucher field).
3. Enter the customer's fax number and/or email address into the respective
fields in the SEND mask.
Note:
The travel confirmation is sent as a PDF file.
4. Enter the customer's mailing address for the accompanying letter (automated
by the system).
5. You can enter free text into the Free text field.
6. Enter a complimentary closing phrase into the Salutation line field.
7. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K872 Order registered for delivery
The travel confirmation is sent immediately to your customer.
A detailed mailing protocol is displayed in your mailbox in the Amadeus INFO
System indicating send date and email address.
Note:
352
The travel confirmation is send as PDF file (in case of an email).
Alternatively to the manual sending with the print action code and
service voucher code B or O, you can click on the button Send in
the action bar and select the desired option. For further information
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
see How to Send a Travel Confirmation Through Email or Fax on
page 342.
Issuing and Cancelling Travel Documents
Some tour operators offer you the option of creating travel documents directly
through Amadeus Tour Market.
You can issue neutral vouchers for several product groups, such as hotel, car
rental, transfer. Issue DER hotel vouchers for DER hotel reservations only.
What Are the Deadlines for Printing Travel Documents?
You can only print out travel documents until a fixed deadline. Print deadlines are
tour operator-specific and may vary. Please read the specific print deadlines on
the tour operator information pages or in the Printing of Travel Documents
submask (RA).
As a rule, the following deadlines apply for printing out travel documents:
•
At least 21 days before departure.
•
Not later than one day before departure.
•
for last-minute bookings, seven days before departure and you must issue
the documents on the day of booking.
How to Print Travel Documents
1. Enter RA in the Action field to retrieve the Printing Travel Documents
submask.
2. Check the print status.
Note:
You can only print a document, if a J is displayed in the Stat. field. If
a N is displayed in the Stat. field, a print-out is not yet possible. The
earliest date for printing is displayed.
3. Select, by marking with an X, between the displayed printing options:
•
Print all documents.
•
For printing specific documents (mark corresponding document line).
4. Initiate printing by marking the voucher printing field with an X.
5. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K240 Voucher ok/248 Print DC OK
Your printer prints the travel vouchers.
The status OK is displayed in the Stat field for the printed documents. The
print date is displayed.
How to Cancel Travel Documents After a Cancellation
1. Enter RA in the Action field to retrieve the Amadeus Printing of Travel
Documents submask.
2. Click on Send or press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
353
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The submask Printing of Travel Documents is displayed.
3. Note the printing status.
The status OK must be displayed in the Stat. field.
The system displays the following message:
cancel documents
4. Select between the following options by marking the respective boxes with an
X:
•
Cancel all documents.
•
Cancel specific documents (select line by marking with an X).
5. Click on Send with _ cancelled document.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K775 The documents have been cancelled
The Printing of Travel Documents submask displays the new status. The
cancelled documents are marked with Y in the Stat. field for further
processing.
7. Void the cancelled documents and mail them informally to the respective tour
operator once a month.
8. Proceed with the cancellation as explained in the cancellation procedure. See
.
Note:
The Printing of Travel Documents submask may vary depending on
the tour operator. Please note the respective tour operator
cancellation fees.
Rebooking Procedures
Before you rebook or modify a single service or the whole booking, perform a
rebooking inquiry first to verify the conditions and advise the customer of any
applicable fees.
How to Display a TOMA Booking
Anytime, you can display a performed booking for modifications, displaying travel
times and printing a travel confirmation and so on.
1. Enter D in the Action field.
Note:
If you do not have the booking number at hand, you can perform an
order search with the action code V in the inventory of the specific
tour operator in order to retrieve a list of your orders.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter the booking number into the Booking no. field.
5. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K205 Display OK
354
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search
1. Enter V in the Action field.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Click on Send or press enter.
Or:
Enter alternative search criteria:
Field
Entry
Multifunction line
Option (Search for optional reservation).
Cancel (search for a cancelled reservation).
Name/First name/Title
The first letter with a full-stop: S.
Parts of the name with a full-stop: Schm.
The full name: Schmitt.
5. Click on Send or press enter.
The system displays a list of reservations with their corresponding reservation
numbers.
6. Select the desired reservation file by marking the respective box with an X.
Or:
Select the desired reservation by using the multifunction line.
Or:
Enter D in the Action field (if no submask is provided enter the displayed
reservation number into the Booking no. field, too).
7. Click on Send or press enter.
What Is a Rebooking Inquiry?
Through a rebooking inquiry you can verify the availability of the services to be
rebooked, the rebooking fee and the new fare in one step.
Note:
Which services can be rebooked depends on the tour operator. They
can vary from a simple name change to a complete rebooking of a
service.
How to Perform a Rebooking Inquiry
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search above.
2. Enter UA in the Action field.
3. Overwrite or modify the fields in the service section you want to rebook.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K752 Booking modification possible, please use ACTION
code "U" / "M"
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
355
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Either the rebooking fee is mentioned separately or it is displayed in the new
fare calculation in the Total amount field.
How to Rebook
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter U in the Action field.
3. Overwrite or modify the fields in the service section you want to rebook.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K203 Modificat.ok
The new fare is displayed in the Total amount field.
How to Print a Rebooking Confirmation
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
3. Enter DR in the Action field.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
How to Rebook and Print a Travel Confirmation
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
3. Enter UR in the Action field.
4. Click Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K223 Rebook OK/ Conf. OK 248 Print OK
Your printer prints the travel confirmation.
Cancellation Procedures
The acceptance of a cancellation and the extent of a partial cancellation in
Amadeus Tour Market (TOMA mask) are tour operator-specific. Retrieve details
through a cancellation inquiry or follow the instructions on the tour operator's
information pages.
356
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
Perform always a cancellation inquiry first to verify the conditions to
advise the customer of any applicable fees if necessary, before you
cancel a single service or the whole booking. For further information
see .
How to Perform a Cancellation Inquiry
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter SA in the Action field.
3. Overwrite the first digit of the reservation number with + in the Booking no.
field for cancelling the whole booking.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K760 Cancellation possible, please use Action "S"
The cancellation fee is either listed as a fee or displayed in the Total amount
field.
How to Perform a Partial Cancellation Inquiry
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter SA in the Action field.
Note:
Some tour operators use the action codes UA/U for a partial
cancellation.
3. Enter a + into the Title field of the respective passenger for deleting a
traveller.
Or:
Enter X in the respective Select field to cancel a service.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K760 Cancellation possible, please use Action "S"
The cancellation fee is either listed as a fee or displayed in the Total amount
field.
How to Cancel a Booking
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
357
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Enter S in the Action field.
3. Overwrite the first digit of the reservation number with + in the Booking no.
field for cancelling the whole booking.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K202 Cancellation OK
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
How to Cancel an Option Booking
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter the Action code S.
3. Overwrite the first digit of the reservation number with + in the Booking no.
field for cancelling the whole booking.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K 202 Cancellation OK
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
Note:
The customer is able to cancel an option booking free of charge
within a specific time limit. That time limit depends on the tour
operator and on the type of booking (in other words last minute
booking).
How to Perform a Partial Cancellation
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter S in the Action field.
3. Enter a + into the Title field of the respective passenger for deleting a
traveller
Or:
Enter an X into the respective Select field to cancel a service.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K202 Cancellation OK
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
358
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
How to Print a Cancellation Confirmation After A Cancellation
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter DR in the Action field.
3. Enter D in the Service voucher field.
4. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K225 Disp./CONF ok/ S111 Print DC
Your printer prints the cancellation confirmation.
Further Booking Procedures
In addition to a confirmed tour booking you can perform the inquiries and
bookings in Amadeus Tour Market:
•
Option inquiry.
•
Option booking.
•
Confirmation of an option booking.
•
Booking on request.
•
Waitlist booking.
•
Prebooking.
What Is an Option Inquiry
Through an option inquiry you are able to check the availability of all desired
services and find out the option deadline and fare in one action.
How to Perform an Option Inquiry
1. Enter OA in the Action field.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. For further information see . Alternatively you can enter the
service type codes manually depending on the tour operator. The
booking procedure and their entries are tour operator-specific.
Follow the respective booking guidelines.
2. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K743 Option possible, please use Action "O"
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
Note:
Please note the option deadline in the booking information. The
option deadline is tour operator and product specific.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
359
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is an Option Booking?
Through an option booking you are able to block tour services for your customer,
without making a confirmed booking. The desired services are on hold until the
set option deadline and can be cancelled free of charge or changed into a
confirmed booking at any time. This applies only for tour operators providing the
action code F.
Note:
The option deadline is tour operator and product specific. Either the
option reservation will become a confirmed booking after the option
deadline has expired! Request details through an option inquiry or
follow the instructions on the respective tour operator's information
page.
How to Perform an Option Booking
1. Enter O in the Action field.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. For further information see . Alternatively you can enter the
service type codes manually depending on the tour operator. The
booking procedure and their entries are tour operator-specific.
Follow the respective booking guidelines.
2. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K101 Option ok
The total amount of the booking is displayed in the Total amount field.
Note:
Please note the option deadline in the booking information. The
option deadline is tour operator and product specific.
How to Perform an Option Booking and Print a Travel Confirmation
1. Enter OR in the Action field to perform an option booking with simultaneous
printing of the travel confirmation.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. For further information see . Alternatively you can enter the
service type codes manually depending on the tour operator. The
booking procedure and their entries are tour operator-specific.
Follow the respective booking guidelines.
2. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays:
K201 Option ok
How to Confirm an Option Booking
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter F in the Action field.
360
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
The message bar displays:
K204 Firm book ok
Note:
After you have changed an option booking into a confirmed booking
print a travel confirmation. For further information see .
How to Confirm an Option Booking and Print a Travel Confirmation
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter FR in the Action field to confirm the booking with simultaneous printing
of the travel confirmation.
The message bar displays:
K204 Firm book ok/ Conf. OK 248 Print OK
What Is a Booking on Request?
You can perform a booking on request, if the desired service is not immediately
available and if the service can be requested through Amadeus Tour Market (RQ
status in the vacancy display). This action code is not provided by every tour
operator.
Requirement:
Some tour operators offer you a booking on request automatically when direct
booking is not possible.
How to Perform a Booking on Request
1. Enter BQ in the Action field.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. For further information see . Alternatively you can enter the
service type codes manually depending on the tour operator. The
booking procedure and their entries are tour operator-specific.
Follow the respective booking guidelines.
2. Click on Send or press enter.
The tour operator allocates a booking number to your booking on request
which is displayed in the Booking no. field.
3. Print out a confirmation of your booking on request.
See .
Note:
Check your booking on request each day whether it has been
confirmed by the tour operator. If the booking on request has been
confirmed by the tour operator, the booking status changes from
RQ to OK. In general, the tour operator does not send a message
when a booking on request is confirmed. The same rules apply as
for a confirmed booking.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
361
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
What Is a Waitlist Booking?
You can perform a booking from waiting list, if the desired service from a waiting
list can be booked (WL status) and a customer requests a binding reservation.
How to Perform a Waitlist Booking
1. Enter BW in the Action field.
Note:
You must have entered or transferred service details through the
multifunction line or the submask before you can perform a booking
inquiry. For further information see . Alternatively you can enter the
service type codes manually depending on the tour operator. The
booking procedure and their entries are tour operator-specific.
Follow the respective booking guidelines.
2. Click on Send or press enter.
The tour operator allocates a booking number to your booking from the
waiting list which is displayed in the Booking no. field.
Note:
Check your booking on waiting list each day whether it has been
confirmed by the tour operator. If the booking on request has been
confirmed, the booking status changes from WL/RQ to OK. In
general, the tour operator does not send a message when the
waitlist booking is confirmed.
What Is a Prebooking (Booking In Advance)
In case your customer would like to make a reservation beyond the next season,
many tour operators provide you with the Action code BM. By this you are able
to make a prebooking (advanced reservation) even if the catalogue for the next
season is not available yet. The reservation is on hold until the requested service
is confirmed or rejected by the tour operator.
How to Perform a Prebooking (Booking In Advance)
1. Enter customer's billing address into the customer section (if necessary).
2. Enter the Action code BM for prebooking (advanced reservation).
3. Enter the Provider code.
4. Enter the Travel Type (if necessary).
5. Enter manually the service type and service codes depending on the tour
operator.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
Please pay attention to system messages and information given by the tour
operator.
The message bar displays:
K213 Advanced reservation
Note:
362
The tour operator allocates a reservation number to your booking in
advance which is displayed in the Booking no. field. Check your
booking regularly whether it has been confirmed by the tour
operator. If the booking has been confirmed by the tour operator,
the booking status changes into OK. Please note applicable time
limits, rebooking or cancellation fees in case of a confirmation.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Amadeus Tour Market Submasks
What Are Amadeus Tour Market Submasks?
As an supplement to the TOMA mask there are submasks available for many
features.
Submasks may contain various fields, depending on the tour operator. They
serve to clarify a selection, such as the Housing request submask, or to record
further inputs, which cannot be entered through TOMA mask. In order to book
cruise and hotel-only tour operator's submasks guide you through the whole
booking process.
The most important submasks and their corresponding action codes are:
•
Direct debit collection submask - DI (forwarding payment information for noncash payments between the tour operator and the customer).
•
Housing request submask - HW (recording customer requests for holiday
houses and apartments).
•
Customer request submask - KW (entering customer requests).
•
Print travel documents submask - RA (Print request or returning neutral travel
documents).
•
Seat reservation submask - BS (Reserving bus seats).
•
Insurance offers submask - RV (Booking an insurance).
•
Seat reservation submask - PB (Reserving flight seats).
What Is the Customer Request Submask?
The customer request submask is used for entering customer requests, which are
used as default for flight and hotel vacancies. Among other things, criteria on the
amenities, accommodation, means of transportation and sport activates can be
recorded.
How to Use the Customer Request Submask
1. Enter KW in the Action.
Note:
Enter ?A in the Action field and the provider code in the Provider
field to find out whether the tour operator provides a customer
request submask (action code KW). For further information see
Retrieving Service Information in TOMA on page 343.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Click on Send or press enter.
A tour operator-specific customer request submask is displayed.
Note:
The scope of the mask varies according to the tour operatorspecifications. Not every tour operator provides a customer request
submask.
5. Enter the field elements according to the customer requests.
6. Send by marking one of the Next step options with an X.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
363
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
7. Click on Send or press enter.
The system displays now an availability or vacancy according to your
customer request: information about vacancies, alternative dates,
accommodation types, board and occupancy options.
What Is the Housing Request Submask?
The housing request submask is used for recording customer requests for holiday
houses and flats. Among other things, criteria on the amenities, accommodation,
location can be recorded. A selection of accommodations are displayed
according to the entries.
How to Use the Holiday Home Request Submask
1. Enter HW in the Action field.
Note:
Enter the Action code ?A and the Provider code to find out
whether the tour operator provides a holiday home request
submask. For further information see Retrieving Service Information
in TOMA on page 343.
2. Enter the provider code in the Provider field.
3. Enter the travel type code in the Travel type field (if necessary).
4. Enter the number of travellers into the Traveller field.
5. Enter the Service type code (tour operator-specific).
6. Enter the duration of the stay into the From and To fields.
7. Click on Send or press enter
A tour operator-specific holiday home request submask is displayed.
Note:
Tour operators can create and modify their own holiday home
request submask. The scope of the mask varies according to the
tour operator. Not every tour operator provides a holiday home
request submask.
8. Enter the field elements according to the customer preferences.
9. Send by marking one of the Next step options with an X.
10. Click on Send or press enter.
The system displays now an availability or vacancy according to your holiday
home request: information about vacancies, alternative dates,
accommodation types, board and occupancy options.
What Is the Debit Collection Submask
The direct debit collection submask is used for transferring additional information
for a cashless payment transaction between the tour operator and customer, in
other words through credit cards or direct debit. The tour operator defines the
range of possible invoice procedures.
Note:
364
The direct debit collection submask is displayed according to the
requirements of the respective tour operator and can therefore vary in
scope. Depending on the tour operator, this mask can be displayed
automatically at the beginning of the booking process.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
How to Perform a Payment Through the Debit Collection Submask
1. Display the desired booking.
See How to Display a TOMA Booking on page 354.
Or:
How to Display a Booking Through the Order Search on page 355.
2. Enter DI in the Action field.
3. Click on Send or press enter.
A tour operator direct collection submask is displayed.
4. Select the form of payment for direct debit collection.
5. Add the payment details.
Note:
Pay attention to the tour operator information displayed on your
screen.
6. Click on Send or press enter.
The message bar displays a confirmation message:
K787 Direct debit collection data passed to tour operator
HOT - Hotel vouchers
You can issue a DERTOUR voucher for services which cannot be booked via the
Amadeus Tour Market mask (TOMA).
You can issue:
•
a hotel voucher
•
a service voucher
•
a deposit voucher
Caution:
•
The reservation is not confirmed by issuing an HOT-voucher, you still need to
make a reservation with the hotel directly.
•
Manually issued HOT-vouchers (hand written) are not accepted!
•
The hotel master data is displayed for information purposes only; they are not
binding and can be overwritten
•
In any case, the details confirmed by the hotel at the time of reservation are
binding.
Please always fax a copy of the voucher to the hotel.
Usage of the voucher coupons:
Document printer
eco-print
(document 96):
(ticket paper, 3 pieces, perforated, yellow colour)
A-coupon: customer
A-coupon: travel agency
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
365
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Document printer
eco-print
(document 96):
(ticket paper, 3 pieces, perforated, yellow colour)
B+C-coupon: travel agency
B-coupon: customer
Available action codes
Action
Explanation
A
issuing a hotel-/service voucher
Note:
AI
issuing an IT-/service voucher
Note:
AP
To be used only for net fares; i.e. the hotel
booking is a part of a tour package (IT) and
no commission needs to be paid.
issuing a hotel-/service voucher with commission
added
Note:
AZ
This is the standard voucher type used for
rates where a hotel pays a commission.
DERTOUR coordinates the commission
transfer to the agency.
If a hotel offers only a net fare or does not
pay a commission, the travel agency can
add their own commission on top (if
desired).
issuing an advanced payment voucher
Note:
The travel agency still needs to issue a
residual voucher either with A, AI or AP.
Please issue the AZ voucher accordingly.
The customer needs to produce the
advanced payment voucher and the residual
voucher at the hotel.
D
displaying a voucher
V
displaying a list of files
DH
displaying hotel master data
S
cancelling a voucher
?A
displaying all possible action codes
?W
displaying actual currency exchange rate
?E
printing hotel's address on first label
Displaying hotel master data
1. Enter the Action code DH for displaying hotel master data.
2. Enter the hotel number.
366
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Entry
Hotel no.
hotel number according to the DER Hotel index (e.g.
DERTOUR Corporate HotelGuide link via the help
menu) or any further published information.
Note:
In case a hotel is not included in the hotel
information data a '+' has to be entered on
the first digit. Please add the address of the
hotel manually.
3. Press Enter.
The hotel master data is displayed.
Note:
You can change the action code in AZ, A, AI or AP and fill out the
remaining fields. The voucher can then be issued immediately.
Creating hotel voucher
1. Enter the action code A for issuing hotel/service voucher.
2. Fill out the remaining fields.
Field entries
Field
Entry
From
start of service in the following format: DDMMYY or
select via date picker
To
end of service in the following format DDMM (or select
via the date-Picker) or as duration
Number of adults/children
number of adults and children
Hotel no.
hotel number according to the DER Hotel index (e.g.
DERTOUR Corporate HotelGuide link via the help
menu) or any further published information.
The address is added automatically.
Note:
Commission/ Commission on
room
commission with two decimal places, without a comma,
if a voucher is created without reading the info file or if
a different commission rate than that assigned is
applied
Note:
Country
If a hotel number was entered in Hotel no.
this field must be left blank. The hotel data is
added automatically by the system and must
not be overwritten.
currency in which the rates are quoted, enter ISO-code
Note:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Should the commission not be applied to the
total voucher, but just to the room prices,
checkmark "Commission on room".
If you entered + in the hotel no field please enter
nationality code (vehicle code), for example: E = Spain
H = Hungary CH = Switzerland
Note:
ISO-Code Currency
In case a hotel is not included in the hotel
information data a '+' has to be entered on
the first digit. Please add the address of the
hotel manually.
The system calculates automatically; except
for a manually entered hotel with a + the
currency needs to be entered additionally
[email protected]
367
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Entry
Customer name
name of the traveller
Control display
checkmark = the voucher data is displayed
blank = the displayed voucher is charged and printed
Number
Number of rooms
Note:
Room
An entry is also required for only one room!
1st letter = room type e.g. D = double room; E = single
room
2nd letter = equipment e.g A = bath, toilet, balcony; B =
bath, toilet
3rd letter = equipment e.g. K = ground floor; R = air
conditioner
4th. letter = boarding e.g. B = breakfast buffet; H =
half-board
Price
rate per room and day in smallest unit of the respective
currency e.g.
EUR 65 = 6500
US$ 1 = 100
VAT
0 = no VAT
empty or 1= full VAT
Caution: This field may only be used if D is set in
Country.
Hotel/Street/Postal code,
City, Telephone
hotel name and address data (can be entered manually
if not available via the system)
Number
number of other services
Other services
type of other services
Note:
Price
In case a customer would like book more
than 3 services the travel agency needs to
issue a separate net voucher (AI) without
room details. Generally, a commission is not
paid for other services.
price of the other services in the smallest unit of the
respective country's currency.
individual amount, if 1-99 is entered in Number
total amount, if Number is empty
VAT
0 = no VAT
empty or 1= full VAT
Caution: This field may only be used if D is set in
Country.
368
Service surcharges/Taxes
service and tax surcharges in % or without a comma in
cents, if at Hotel no.: + is entered.
Deposit
amount of paid deposit
Total amount
displays the total amount when price details details are
calculated
Remarks
This line is for entering customer remarks and special
requests which printed out on the voucher. The hotel's
name and address are displayed if a service provider
was entered in the "Hotel/Street/Postal code, City"
field.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
You can verify the total amount by using the control display option
before creating the voucher.
3. Press Enter.
If printing via a laser or matrix printer, it is necessary to confirm the print job on
the screen before printing out.
Creating IT hotel voucher
1. Enter the action code AI for issuing IT hotel/service voucher.
2. Fill out the remaining fields. The entries are the same as creating a voucher.
3. Press Enter.
If printing via a laser or matrix printer, it is necessary to confirm the print job on
the screen before printing out.
Note:
The gross total sum is only printed in the upper section of the
document, starting with the B-copy.
Issuing hotel voucher with commission added
1. Enter the action code AP for Issue hotel/service voucher for hotel with
commission added. The entries are the same as creating a voucher.
2. Fill out the remaining fields.
3. Press Enter.
If printing via a laser or matrix printer, it is necessary to confirm the print job on
the screen before printing out.
Note:
The net amount (without the commission added) is listed on the
document (starting with the B copy).
Creating deposit voucher
1. Enter the action code AZ for Issue down payment receipt (deposit).
2. Fill out the remaining fields.
Field
Entry
From
Select the service begin in the format DDMMYY
(D=Day, M=Month, Y=Year) or via the Date-Picker.
Hotel no.
hotel number according to the DER Hotel Index
Note:
Customer name
If a hotel is not recorded in the hotel index
file, a + (PLUS SIGN) must be entered in the
1st item.
person's or group's name only in the 1st name field
Caution: The 2nd and 3rd name fields must remain
blank.
Deposit
deposit sum in the smallest unit of the respective
domestic currency
3. Also fill out the following fields, in case a Hotel no. + is displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
369
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Entry
Commission
commission with two decimal points and without a
comma
Country
If + is displayed in the
Hotel no. field, the destination country ID coincides
with the national vehicle registration ID.
Hotel
hotel name
City
city
4. Press Enter.
If printing via a laser or matrix printer, it is necessary to confirm the print job on
the screen before printing out.
Displaying hotel voucher
Requirement
You have issued a hotel voucher.
1. Enter the Action code D.
2. Enter the voucher number incl. check digit into the field Reservation no.
field.
3. Press Enter.
Cancelling hotel voucher
1. Display the hotel voucher.
2. Enter the Action code S for cancellation.
3. Overwrite the first digit in the Booking no. field with + (plus sign).
4. Press Enter.
Note:
The hotel voucher can be cancelled until one day before the service
starts. A partial cancellation is not possible.
Note:
Cancelled transactions remain saved until the service starts and can
therefore be displayed at any time.
After start of service, the voucher (A-coupon) has to be sent to the
DERTOUR Hotel voucher accounting center!
Displaying the file for hotel vouchers
1. Enter the action code V for searching reservation.
2. Enter the country ID.
3. Press Enter.
Note:
370
In addition you can enter the start and end of service in the From/To
field, and a customer name in the Name field. For the customer name,
you can enter the complete name or a letter followed by a full-stop.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
Any additional procedures are displayed on the next mask page. Use
the Forward button to access the next page.
Printing hotel address onto 1st label
1. Enter the action code E for printing hotel address onto the 1st label.
2. Press Enter.
The hotel address is printed onto the first label.
Displaying currency exchange of hotel voucher
1. Enter the action code ?W for displaying actual currency exchange.
2. Enter the country.
3. Enter the currency.
4. Press Enter.
Note:
After you have displayed the hotel voucher, you can also display the
currency exchange rate.
The currency exchange rate is displayed.
Deducting deposit payment
Requirement
You have created a deposit voucher.
1. Display the file.
2. Enter the action code A for issue hotel/service voucher.
or
AI for Issue IT hotel/service voucher
or
AP for Issue hotel/service voucher with commission added.
3. Fill out the remaining fields.
Field entries
Field
Entry
From
start of service in the following format: DDMMYY or
select via date picker
To
end of service in the following format DDMM (or select
via the date-Picker) or as duration
Number of adults/children
number of adults and children
Hotel no.
hotel number according to the DER Hotel index (e.g.
DERTOUR Corporate HotelGuide link via the help
menu) or any further published information.
The address is added automatically.
Note:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
In case a hotel is not included in the hotel
information data a '+' has to be entered on
the first digit. Please add the address of the
hotel manually.
[email protected]
371
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Entry
Commission/ Commission on
room
commission with two decimal places, without a comma,
if a voucher is created without reading the info file or if
a different commission rate than that assigned is
applied
Note:
Country
If you entered + in the hotel no field please enter
nationality code (vehicle code), for example: E = Spain
H = Hungary CH = Switzerland
Note:
ISO-Code Currency
Should the commission not be applied to the
total voucher, but just to the room prices,
checkmark "Commission on room".
If a hotel number was entered in Hotel no.
this field must be left blank. The hotel data is
added automatically by the system and must
not be overwritten.
currency in which the rates are quoted, enter ISO-code
Note:
The system calculates automatically; except
for a manually entered hotel with a + the
currency needs to be entered additionally
Customer name
name of the traveller
Control display
checkmark = the voucher data is displayed
blank = the displayed voucher is charged and printed
Number
Number of rooms
Note:
Room
An entry is also required for only one room!
1st letter = room type e.g. D = double room; E = single
room
2nd letter = equipment e.g A = bath, toilet, balcony; B =
bath, toilet
3rd letter = equipment e.g. K = ground floor; R = air
conditioner
4th. letter = boarding e.g. B = breakfast buffet; H =
half-board
Price
rate per room and day in smallest unit of the respective
currency e.g.
EUR 65 = 6500
US$ 1 = 100
VAT
0 = no VAT
empty or 1= full VAT
Caution: This field may only be used if D is set in
Country.
Hotel/Street/Postal code,
City, Telephone
hotel name and address data (can be entered manually
if not available via the system)
Number
number of other services
Other services
type of other services
Note:
372
In case a customer would like book more
than 3 services the travel agency needs to
issue a separate net voucher (AI) without
room details. Generally, a commission is not
paid for other services.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Entry
Price
price of the other services in the smallest unit of the
respective country's currency.
individual amount, if 1-99 is entered in Number
total amount, if Number is empty
VAT
0 = no VAT
empty or 1= full VAT
Caution: This field may only be used if D is set in
Country.
Service surcharges/Taxes
service and tax surcharges in % or without a comma in
cents, if at Hotel no.: + is entered.
Deposit
amount of paid deposit
Total amount
displays the total amount when price details details are
calculated
Remarks
This line is for entering customer remarks and special
requests which printed out on the voucher. The hotel's
name and address are displayed if a service provider
was entered in the "Hotel/Street/Postal code, City"
field.
Caution: Upon entering the room price and the prices for the other services,
check that the total amount (sum after the deposit amount has been
deducted) is not negative.
Note:
You can verify the total amount by using the control display option
before creating the voucher.
4. Press Enter.
Note:
The systems reduces the total amount of the voucher by the deposit
amount and assigns a new voucher number.
Creating travel registration via RAN
You can create a confirmation via the RAN mask if
•
you have performed a booking with a tour operator, who does not offer
confirmation printing via Amadeus.
•
you are an organiser (tour operator).
Creating travel registration (RAN) for own travel placement
Via the travel registration you can create a confirmation for tour operators that
cannot be booked via Amadeus or tour operators that can be booked via
Amadeus but who do not provide the option of printing out the travel confirmation
via the TOMA mask.
Requirement
You have performed a booking with an tour operator, hotel, etc. and you have all
data and prices relevant to the booking at hand.
1. Enter D into the Service voucher field for printing service voucher
or
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
373
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Enter T into the Service voucher field for printing and changing to the TV
mask.
3. Fill out the header section.
Field
Explanation
Entry example
File no.
file number
1234567
Organizer ID
provider service code
9980
Organiser's
name
the name of the tour operator
Sunshine Cruises
Street; PC; City
address fields
Bahnhofstr. 3; 24101 Kiel
Agency no.
travel agency number
12345
Outward trip
departure date or select via the
date-Picker.
200908
Currency
currency which should be printed
on the RAN
EUR
4. Fill out the travel section
Field
Explanation
Entry example
Address
gender:
H=Male;
D=Female;
K=Child
H;D;K
Traveller's name
customer name
Mueller, Klaus
Destination, hotel
destination and booked service
Cruise in eastern Mediterranean
Age
age of the traveller
30
Service code
service code for the travel
booking: number range.
Caution: General service code
plan
The indicated number
range corresponds to
the Amadeus
Germany general
service code plan. If
you are using a
different general
service code plan for
manual entries, please
use the number range
from your list. The
abbreviation for the
general service code
plan, which applies to
you, is listed in the
SISO mask.
From/Until
date
2009/0410
Accommodation
accommodation details
Cabin number 1234; Category C
Price
arrangement price as full EUR
4430
Note: The currency code is
entered above the first
arrangement price.
374
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Entry example
Remark
remarks about the booking
Regular customer
Transportation
outward trip
transportation data
Flight data: FRA - GOA on
20.09.2008 LH 1234
Transportation
return trip
transportation data
GOA FRA on 20.10.2008 LH
1235
Additional effort
miscellaneous booked services
Side trip on 27.09.
5. Fill out the fields in the accounting information according to your internal
travel agency specifications.
6. Press Enter.
Creating travel registration (RAN) for an own tour
You can create a confirmation (RAN) for an own tour.
Requirement
You are an organiser (tour operator).
1. Enter D into the Service voucher field for printing service voucher
or
2. Enter T into the Service voucher field for printing and changing to the TV
mask.
3. Fill out the header section.
Field
Explanation
Entry example
File no.
file number
1234567
Organizer ID
provider service code
9980
Organiser's
name
the name of the tour operator
Sunshine Cruises
Street; PC; City
address fields
Bahnhofstr. 3; 24108 Kiel
Agency no.
travel agency number
12345
Outward trip
departure date or select via the
date-Picker.
200908
Currency
currency which should be printed
on the RAN
EUR
4. Fill out the travel section.
Field
Explanation
Entry example
Address
gender: H=Male; D=Female;
K=Child
H;D;K
Traveller's name
customer name
Mueller, Klaus
Age
age of the traveller
Destination, hotel
destination and booked service
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Cruise in eastern Mediterranean
[email protected]
375
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation
Service code
service code for an own tour:
Number range: 450-549
Entry example
Caution: General service code
plan
The indicated number
range corresponds to
the Amadeus
Germany general
service code plan. If
you are using a
different general
service code plan for
manual entries, please
use the number range
from your list. The
abbreviation for the
general service code
plan, which applies to
you, is listed in the
SISO mask.
From/Until
date
2009/0410
Accommodation
accommodation details
Cabin number 1234; Category C
Price
arrangement price as full EUR
4430
Note: The currency code is
entered above the first
arrangement price.
Remark
remarks about the booking
Regular customer
Transportation
outward trip
transportation data
Flight data FRA - VCE on
20.09.2008 LH 509 /
Transportation
return trip
transportation data
VCE FRA on 25.09.08 LH 508
Additional effort
miscellaneous booked services
Side trip on 17.09.
5. Fill out the fields in the accounting information according to your internal
travel agency specifications.
6. Press Enter.
Document preparation (Back Screen mode)
The document preparation function, also referred to as the Back Screen
procedure, allows you to prepare a template for constantly recurring mask
entries.
The processing numbers with the number range 500 through 998 are defined for
document preparation.
Note:
376
You can save mask contents for a later completion or printout. With the
respective entries this data can be displayed at any time. No services
data is generated. The Back Screen procedure is possible for all masks,
except for CC.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Saving mask content
You can save mask contents which:
•
are constantly recurring (as a content template).
•
have not been completed yet and are required later for further entries
Note:
No services data is generated in the Back Screen procedure.
1. Open the respective mask, in which you wish to save a content.
2. Enter a processing number for the content file to be saved:
Note:
You can leave the Processing no. field empty; in this case the
Amadeus System assigns a processing number or you can enter an
unassigned processing number from the number range 500 to 998.
3. Enter the Service voucher code S to save the mask content.
4. Enter the data into the mask, which is to be saved as a template.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
Therewith this customized mask content is saved and always retrievable via the
processing number displayed in the Processing no. field.
Loading mask content file
For further entries, you can load a specific mask content file in the Back Screen
procedure. The Amadeus System continues to store the file after it has been
retrieved.
1. Open the respective mask, in which you have saved a content.
2. Enter the processing number of your saved mask content in to the
Processing no. field.
3. Enter the Service voucher code M to load mask content files for further
entries.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The message bar displays a confirmation
To continue:
Enter any information needed to complete the document.
Loading and deleting mask content files
You can load and delete a prepared mask from the Amadeus System in one step.
1. Open the respective mask, in which you have saved a content.
2. Enter the processing number of your saved mask content in to the
Processing no. field
3. Enter the Service voucher code A to load and delete saved mask content
files
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
377
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Note:
User Guide
The processing number for this document is now unassigned again.
To continue:
Enter any information needed to complete the document and print it out.
Saving and loading mask content via toolbar
Alternatively you can click on the respective icons on the toolbar to use the BackScreen procedure.
Caution: By clicking on the Load content mask icon you cannot retrieve mask
contents which were saved with a processing number.
Note:
No services data is generated in the Back Screen procedure.
Saving mask content via toolbar
The Save content mask displays all saved mask content. You can save and
assign a file name to the mask content or delete a saved file.
1. Open the respective mask, in which you wish to save a content.
2. Enter the data into the mask, which is to be saved as a template.
3. Click on the Save content mask icon
content.
on the toolbar to save a mask
4. Assign a file name to the mask content.
5. Click on Save or press Enter.
Loading mask content via toolbar
The Load content mask displays all saved mask content files. You are able to
save and delete a content file.
1. Open the respective mask, in which you have saved a content.
2. Click on the Load content mask icon
mask content or template.
on the toolbar to load a specific
3. Select, by ticking, one of following loading options:
•
Saved content of XXXX (the respective mask name)
•
Display all (including all saved content of all masks in the Amadeus System)
•
Add content to the mask
•
Clear mask before loading
4. Click on the desired content file.
5. Click on Load or press Enter.
378
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Solutions for failed printing
You can solve a failed printing of a travel confirmation, voucher, rail ticket, caused
by omitting the service voucher code "D" in Amadeus Tour Market or other
booking masks in the German Local Content (HOT, SFS, RAIL).
Option "D" for printing was not selected in the service voucher field when
printing via a booking mask.
Two options to retrieve the desired processing number in the VERK mask:
1. Retrieve the VERK mask.
2. Enter your travel agent code (PAC).
3. Press enter.
The system displays the last processing number.
or
1. Retrieve the BELG mask.
2. Enter your travel agent code (PAC).
3. Select all "open processing number for travel agent" or branch.
4. Press enter.
The system displays a list of open processing numbers.
5. Select the desired processing number.
6. Press enter.
The system switches to the VERK mask.
Print can be completed in the VERK mask afterwards:
1. Display the desired processing number.
2. Select the option "D" for printing in the service voucher field.
3. Select the option "P" for verifying in the sales receipt field.
The system displays a printing confirmation in the system message bar.
SISO - Sign in / Sign out
Before you can work with the Amadeus Selling Platform components German
Local Content and Amadeus Bahn you need to set up the branch and all travel
agents. This is done in the masks SISO and EXP.
You call up the SISO (SIGN IN SIGN OUT) mask via the Menu item
"Administration" or type "SISO" directly onto one of the Amadeus Multi Screen
tabs.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
379
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The SISO mask is used for the following administrative tasks:
•
Displaying the status of the branch
•
Displaying all travel agents logged on
•
Signing in the branch
•
Signing in the supervisor
•
Signing in the travel agent
•
Changing travel agent codes
•
Printing branch and travel agents protocols
•
Signing out travel agents, permanent travel agent codes and branch
Display the status of the branch
Click on OK next to Display generating status of the branch.
For information on the displayed master data check:
Display all travel agents logged on
To check who is logged on to the system click on OK next to Display travel
agents logged on.
Sign in the branch
Before you can work with the Amadeus System you have to register the branch:
1. Enter the travel agent number 0000 (supervisor) in the field Travel agent.
2. Click on OK next to Branch in the column SignIn.
The message bar displays the message SIGNIN OK.
Sign in the supervisor
To record and administer travel agent data you need to sign in as supervisor.
You receive a travel agent code, which you require for working with the EXP
mask. First sign in the supervisor and then record the supervisors data:
1. Enter the travel agent number 0000 in the field Travel agent.
2. Click on OK next to Travel agent in the column SignIn.
The message bar shows a confirmation with the supervisors travel agent code.
The EXP mask is automatically displayed, where you can now record the
supervisors data.
380
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Caution: This travel agent code can only be used for administrative purposes
(EXP mask). It cannot be used in any other modes.
See also
Sign in the travel agent
To be able to access the systems different functions, you need to sign in with
your travel agent number, which you receive from your agency's supervisor.
1. Enter your travel agent number.
2. Enter the password (optional).
3. Click on OK next to Travel agent in the column SignIn.
The message bar displays the following conformation with your travel agent code:
EXP SIGNIN OK
Note:
EXP-NR.:XXXX
EXP-CODE:XX
The travel agent code is variable and can be changed at any time.
Enter your travel agent code in the field Travel agent in all masks of the German
Local Component, Amadeus Bahn and Amadeus Order Solution. Services, which
were created via the system, can so be allocated to you.
Change travel agent codes
You can request a new travel agent code:
1. Enter your travel agent number.
2. Enter password (optional).
3. Click on OK next to New travel agent's code in the column SignIn.
The message bar displays your new code.
If there is a dedicated terminal for each travel agent and no other agents works
on this PC, you can set up a permanent travel agent code. A permanent code
saves you from entering your travel agent code each time you use a new mask.
1. Enter your travel agent number and password (optional).
2. Click on OK next to Travel agent (permanent) in the column SignIn.
The message bar displays a conformation:
Permanent SIGNIN OK
EXP-NR:XXXX
EXP-CODE:XX
Retrieve any mask, enter the code and press Enter. The system now
automatically uses the code. A new entry is no longer possible.
Print branch and travel agents protocols
Printing out protocols is a prerequisite for signing out travel agents and the
branch.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
381
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Print travel agent protocols
The print-out of the travel agent protocol provides assistance when checking your
cash sales as well as the processing numbers that are still open.
1. Enter the travel agent number and password (optional).
2. Click on OK next to Travel agent in the column Protocols.
The document is printed.
Your cash sales (cash counter), which have accumulated since the last print-out
of the travel agent protocol, are displayed on the travel agent protocol. Once the
travel agent protocol is printed, your cash counter is reset to zero. Any open
processing numbers are also displayed.
Printing a branch protocol
The branch protocol helps you to check your revenue and the sales receipts,
which are still open.
1. Enter the travel agent number and password (optional).
2. Click on OK next to Branch in the column Protocols.
The message bar displays: Print report
The document is printed.
The branch protocol contains the following items:
•
travel agency and branch number
•
date and time of the print-out
•
cash sales (K/A - sales slip/payment receipt)
•
sales on credit (R/G/L/S - invoice/credit receipt/delivery note/cancelled
delivery note)
•
prepayment (V - prepayment)
•
receipt counter
•
open processing numbers with travel agent number
•
multiple print-outs and misprints of all travel agents.
Once the branch protocol is printed, the counters for the cash sales and sales on
credit as well as the prepayment are reset to zero. The multiple print-out and
misprint protocol is automatically sent for printing.
Multiple print-out and misprint protocols
For checking purposes you can print a protocol of the multiple print-outs and
misprints for a single travel agent and for the branch as a whole. If problems
occur when printing service vouchers and sales receipts, the individual printing
attempts are listed on the protocol. This way, you can make sure that the service
vouchers or sales receipts are printed correctly or cancelled.
The misprint protocol for the branch is automatically send to the printer once a
branch protocol has been requested.
Note:
The misprint protocol of the travel agent can be printed as often as
needed, as long as no branch protocol is requested. Afterwards, the
misprints must be removed from the branch protocol.
1. Enter the travel agent's number and password (optional)
382
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Click on OK next to Travel agent (misprints) in the column Protocols.
The message bar displays: Print report
The document is printed.
The protocol lists each document, during which irregularities occurred. Among
other things, the following is displayed:
•
the date of the printing attempt
•
the time of the printing attempt
•
the type of document
•
the travel agent number
•
the processing number
•
the document number
•
the value of the document in EUR
Caution: A document, which is listed on the protocol as a misprint, must be
cancelled both for your service protocol and for your accounting. In
addition, you must check whether this document must be recreated.
Sign out travel agents, permanent travel agent codes and branch
You sign out a travel agent to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
A previously allocated permanent travel agent code can be removed. Cancelling
the permanent code keeps the corresponding travel agent number registered in
the system. The previous travel agent code is also still valid. However, it must
now be entered each time you switch the mask.
Signing out a branch is done if you want to permanently unsubscribe the branch
from the Amadeus system. Before you can sign out the branch you have to print
the respective protocols for the branch and the travel agent. All travel agents but
one with the authorization class 1 have to be signed out.
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the travel agent's number and the password (optional).
2. Click on the adequate OK in the column SignOut.
The message bar displays: SIGNOUT OK
BSTV - Print Branch Data on Sales Documents
Via the BSTV mask you define, which data is transferred from BSTG for printing
on sales receipts.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
383
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Determine the data for sales receipts
1. Enter Action code E (Record).
2. Select kind of sales receipt you wish to record (cash or credit).
3. Enter the document type: 17(A5 format) or 18 (A4 format).
Note:
The document type can only be entered by the supervisor
(authorization class 8).
4. Click on the Print field. A checkmark is displayed.
Note:
If no entry is made in this field, the recorded data is not printed on
the sales receipt!
5. Select the respective address data for printing.
A maximum of six lines can be printed. The content is defined in the fields, which
are arranged in a vertical column to the right of the Print field. The following
entries are possible:
Entry
Explanation
N1
Transfer from the Name 1 field in the BSTG mask
N2
Transfer from the Name 2 field in the BSTG mask
ST
Transfer from the Street field in the BSTG mask
PF
Transfer from the P.O. Box field in the BSTG mask
O
Postal code for the entry ST or PG
TF
Transfer from the Telephone field in the BSTG mask
FX
Transfer from the Fax field in the BSTG mask
EM
Transfer from the E-Mail field in the BSTG mask
IT
Transfer from the http:// field in the BSTG mask
UE, U0-U9
Bank connections, which were saved in the BSTG
mask
Important: The field below this entry must remain
empty, since bank data entry requires two lines
6. If applicable enter an advertising text in the field Info line on sales receipts.
This text is printed below the customer address.
7. Enter your VAT number and any company law information in the text field
Foot note on sales receipt.
8. Press Enter.
The message bar displays: Travel agency data recorded. At the same
time the last row of the mask, history row, is updated. The data is immediately
activated.
Display data for sales receipts
You can display the selected texts for your sales receipts:
1. Enter Action code D (Display).
384
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Select the sales receipt you wish to edit by clicking the respective radio
button.
3. Press Enter.
The saved data is displayed and can now be changed. Action code A (Change)
is automatically transferred into the Action field.
Change data for sales receipts
You can change the selected text data for your sales receipts :
1. Display the saved data: Enter Action code D (Display) and mark the radio
button of the sales receipt you wish to edit
2. Enter Action code A (Change).
3. Modify the respective data.
4. Press Enter.
The message bar displays: Update ok. The new entries are effective
immediately.
Switch to BSTG mask
To check or change the data saved in BSTG you can easily switch from BSTV to
BSTG:
1. Enter Action code W (Switch).
2. Press Enter.
You switched to BSTG. At the same time, the saved data is displayed.
OPT - Options
In the OPT mask you define mandatory fields for creating sales receipts and for
transferring marketing data, and you can preset default values for individual fields
with reoccurring standard entries thus saving you the tasks of making routine
entries.
Display pre-allocation status
To check and to change already saved data, you display the data:
1. Enter Action code D (Display).
2. Press Enter.
The individual items are displayed. A checkmark flags the fields, which are
mandatory.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
385
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Define mandatory fields
You can define mandatory fields for creating sales receipts, as well as, tourist
marketing data. This ensures that the necessary entries are always input.
1. Display the pre-allocation status (Action D).
2. Check-mark the appropriate fields:
Field
Explanation
Cost center CP
Check mark under VERK: the entry is mandatory in the
following masks: CC, HO, KART, SFS, TICK, VERK
Order number
Destination
Checkmark under Touristics mode: the entry is
mandatory in the following masks: TOMA, RAN and TV
Customer number
The entry is also mandatory for printing a cash sales
receipt.
Data transfer to TV
When printing a travel confirmation or a travel
notification, the procedure must be carried out in TV
Type of transport
Type of travel
Persons
Duration
Brochure code
The entry defines whether customer data for marketing
purposes(address etc.) is to be saved in a mid-office
system or not.
Note: Please observe the regulations of the data
protection laws.
3. Press Enter.
The message bar displays: Change ok.
Define numeric value
You can define a numeric value for the entry of specific fields.
1. Display the pre-allocation status (Action D).
2. Set a checkmark in the Numeric column.
3. Press Enter.
The message bar displays Change ok. Now, only numerical entries can be
made in these fields.
Preset automatic pre-allocation
You can preset specific values, which are then automatically applied.
1. Display the pre-allocation status (Action D).
2. Enter Action code A (Change).
386
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
3. Define the pre-allocation: you can enter default values in the following fields:
Field
Available entry
Significance
Cost center
Two-digit number
The number is
automatically applied
if you do not make an
entry
Data transfer to TV
checkmark
When a travel
confirmation is
printed, each
procedure is
automatically
transferred in TV.
Brochure code
J or N
The data is or is not
saved.
M
The travel notification
(RAN) is saved
without being printed.
4. Press Enter.
The message bar displays Change ok. The pre-allocation is effective
immediately.
Print route on sales receipts
1. You can print the travel route from Amadeus Bahn and SFS onto the sales
receipt.
2. Display the pre-allocation status (Action D).
3. Check-mark the appropriate fields (DB for Deutsche Bahn tickets, EPA for
Deutsche Bahn seat reservations, SFS for ferry reservations and tickets).
4. Press Enter.
The message bar displays Change ok.
Two additional comment lines containing the departure and destination cities are
printed on the sales receipt. The data is also forwarded to your service data
center.
BELG - Document Functions
You can display processing numbers, for which no sales receipts or service
vouchers have yet been created, in the BELG mask. They are saved in the
document memory until they are printed. In addition, you can obtain information
for which mask transactions have been saved (receipt preparation).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
387
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Displaying printer memory
You can display the documents, which were sent for printing, but have not yet
been printed.
1. Click on Printer memory within the Receipt functions' Display selection.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The document type and the printer number are displayed.
Note:
It only makes sense to use this function on a terminal that is physically
connected to a printer.
Displaying service voucher for travel agent
You can display a processing number for a stored service voucher by a specific
agent.
Note:
A travel agent cannot store more than one service voucher. Normally,
service receipts must be printed out immediately.
1. Click on Service vouchers saved for travel agent within the Receipt functions'
Display selection.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The following summary includes:
•
the travel agent number
•
the processing number
•
the type of service voucher
•
the quantity
Displaying service vouchers for branch
You can display all processing numbers of stored service vouchers for the whole
branch, which enables you to see which processing number belongs to which
travel agent.
1. Click on Service vouchers saved for branch within the Receipt functions'
Display selection.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The following summary includes:
•
the processing number
•
the number of the travel agent, who saved the service voucher
•
the quantity per travel agent
Displaying service voucher for a processing number
1. Click on Service vouchers saved for customer with processing no. within the
Receipt functions' Display selection.
388
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Enter the processing number into the corresponding field (for example, 129)
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The following summary displays:
•
the travel agent number
•
the processing number
•
the type of service voucher
•
the quantity
Displaying prepared receipts
You can display the processing numbers of the prepared receipts from a specific
Amadeus mask.
1. Click on Prepared receipts/ form entries within the Receipt functions' Display
selection.
Note:
Optionally, you can enter mask names into the corresponding field.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
If you have entered a mask name, all allocated processing numbers (reference
numbers) are displayed:
NUMBER OF OPEN PROCESSING NUMBERS RECEIPT PREPARATION
RAN SFS BUS
NT
HOT
VERO KART TOMA
0
1
0
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
1
14 0
CC
0
MANU
0
0
0
VERK
0
0
0
0
REFERENCE NUMBERS FOR MASK
503-512,515-517,600,
Note:
0
2
0
VERL
0
0
0
0
0
TOMA
If you do not enter a mask name, all available processing (free
reference) numbers for receipt preparation in the Back Screen
procedure are displayed:
# OF FREE NUMBERS FOR "BACK SCREEN"
284
FREE REFERENCE NUMBERS
501-502,513-514,518-599,601-699
Displaying open processing numbers for travel agent
1. Click on All open processing number for travel agent within the Receipt
functions' Display selection.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The travel agent number and processing numbers of all saved sales receipts are
displayed:
OPEN PROCESSING NUMBERS
243
193
114
Note:
226
130
226
225
128
223
116
222
EXP-NR 0007
221
218
212
210
209
204
201
If a processing number is displayed twice, this indicates that both the
service voucher and the sales receipt have not yet been printed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
389
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Displaying open processing numbers for branch
1. Click on All open processing number for branch within the Receipt functions'
Display selection.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
All saved service vouchers are displayed in a submask. The number of the travel
agent, who saved this voucher, is displayed after each three-digit processing
number:
Note:
If a processing number is displayed twice, this indicates that both the
service voucher and the sales receipt have not yet been printed.
3. If you wish to print a saved file, select the desired processing number (REF),
by entering an X into the corresponding box.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
A transition to the VERK mask is performed.
Displaying open processing number for travel agent with
external services
1. Click on All open processing number for travel agent with external services
within the Receipt functions' Display selection
2. Select desired Third-party system via the provided drop down list, for
example CTS
Note:
To retrieve an error list, click on the respective checkbox.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The system displays an overview of open processing numbers in the selected
third party system.
The travel agent number and processing numbers of all saved sales receipts are
displayed:
You can display all processing numbers of stored service vouchers in the
selected third party system, which enables you to see which processing number
(REF/ ANR) was generated by which agent, which system (for example thirdparty system CTS), on what date and time.
4. If you wish to retrieve a file, select the desired processing number (REF/
ANR), by entering an X into the corresponding box.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
A transition to the VERK mask is performed.
390
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Displaying open processing number for branch with external
services
1. Click on All open processing number for branch with external services within
the Receipt functions' Display selection
2. Select desired Third-party system via the provided drop down list, for
example CTS.
Note:
To retrieve an error list, click on the respective checkbox.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
ZAEH - Business Unit Counter
In the ZAEH mask, you set the number range for sales documents, protocols and
travel confirmations. In addition, you can display the cash ledger for travel agents
and the branch as well as revenue. You administer the inventories of:
•
Neutral tickets (NT tickets)
•
LH air tickets
•
ATB coupons
Displaying receipt number ranges
You can display the current number ranges for sales receipts, travel
confirmations and protocols.
1. Select Number ranges within the Display receipt counter options, by
clicking on the corresponding OK button.
The system displays a summary:
RECEIPT NUMBER RANGES AG/BST-NR [AGCY/BR-NO] 009902/001
[AGT-NO] 2312 STAND [STATUS]: 19.06.98 10:43:07
EXP-NR
K/A-ZAEHLER
NAECHSTE NR 00000005
OBERGRENZE 00000010
UNTERGRENZE 00000001
R/G/L/S-ZAEHLER NAECHSTE NR 00014000
OBERGRENZE 00015000
UNTERGRENZE 00014000
V-ZAEHLER
NAECHSTE NR 00920461
OBERGRENZE 00929999
UNTERGRENZE 00920000
N-ZAEHLER
NAECHSTE NR 00930006
OBERGRENZE 00939999
UNTERGRENZE 00930000
RAN-ZAEHLER
OBERGRENZE
001097
UNTERGRENZE
001000
NAECHSTE NR
999
004
UNTERGRENZE
001
SO-PROT.-ZAEHLER NAECHSTE NR
OBERGRENZE
999
275
UNTERGRENZE
001
NAECHSTE NR
002000
JOURNALZAEHLER
OBERGRENZE
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
391
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Those receipts, for which you yourself determine the number ranges, are
displayed as follows:
•
the receipt type
•
the next number to be printed
•
the stock limit
•
the upper limit
Displaying counter (next receipt no.)
1. Select Counter (next receipt no.) within the Display receipt counter, by
clicking on the corresponding OK button.
All receipt types, for which at least one receipt has been printed, are displayed
with the next available number which can be assigned.
Displaying turnover groups
Here you can display the turnover groups and the corresponding group's sales
codes.
Displaying turnover group's overview
1. Select Turnover groups within the Display turnover counter of branch
options, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is
displayed).
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The branch turnover counter (BST-Umsatzzaehler) provides an overview of all
turnover groups arranged by their respective number.
3. If you wish to display a specific turnover group, enter an X into the
corresponding box.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
A transition to the UMSG mask is performed.
Displaying turnover group's sales codes
You can retrieve an overview of service codes, which are assigned to the
respective turnover group.
1. Select Turnover groups within the Display turnover counter of branch
options, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is
displayed).
2. Enter the desired turnover group code into the UMSG field (for example 1 for
German Rail or 4 for deposits).
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The individual sales codes, which are assigned to the input turnover group, are
displayed.
392
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Branch turnover statistics
By requesting the turnover statistics you always have an overview of the
turnovers of a branch at hand. You can thereby allocate the sales to a particular
division (for example, claiming a higher commission).
Displaying overview of the branch's total turnover
You can display the current month's turnover.
1. Select Branch within the Display turnover counter of branch options, by
clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
All groups having a turnover are displayed. Within the right-hand column, the
system created services' portion of the total turnover is displayed.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Displaying overview of the branch's total turnover
•
Displaying sales code's turnover below
•
Displaying overview of the organisation's total turnover on page 394
Displaying turnover group's turnover
You can display the turnover for a certain turnover group, e.g. deposits.
1. Select Turnover groups within the Display turnover counter of branch
options, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is
displayed).
2. Enter the code of the turnover group into the UMSG field (for example 1 for
German Rail, 4 deposits, etc.).
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Sales and refunds/voids will be displayed for the input turnover group in the
UMSG mask. Automatically and manually created services are differentiated.
Displaying sales code's turnover
Displaying the turnover for a certain sale's code, for example 9900 (domestic
tickets).
1. Select Separate turnover within the Display turnover counter of branch
options, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is
displayed).
2. Enter a 4 digit service code or UG + the 2 digit turnover group's number into
the UMSZ field (for example 9981 or UG04)
Note:
The UG identifier (Turnover group) must always be entered in front of
the turnover group's number.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Sales and refunds/voids will be displayed for the input sales code in the UMSZ
mask. Automatically and manually created services are differentiated.
Below this, the next sale's code is displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
393
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Via the forward and backward keys
code groups.
, you can scroll through additional sale's
Displaying overview of the organisation's total turnover
You can display the current month's turnover for all branches belonging to the
same organisation.
1. Select Organisation within the Display turnover counter of branch
options, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is
displayed).
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Cash sales turnover
You can display the turnover from cash sales. Included are sales for which a cash
sales or a prepayment or deposit receipt has been issued within the travel
confirmation.
Displaying cash counter per agent
The sum of cash sales since printing the latest agent protocol is displayed.
1. Select Travel agent within the Display cash counter options, by clicking on
the corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note:
Optionally, you can enter a currency into the Turnover currency field.
The cash turnover of the respective agent is displayed. The output is divided into
•
cash sales
•
credit-card sales, for which a cash-ledger receipt has been created
•
sales, which have been executed via Amadeus Cash
Displaying the branch''s cash counter
The sum of cash sales since printing the last agent protocol is displayed.
1. Select Branch within the Display cash counter options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
Note:
Optionally, you can enter a currency into the Turnover currency
field.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The cash turnover of the branch is displayed. The summary is divided into
394
•
cash sales
•
credit-card sales, for which a cash-ledger receipt has been created
•
sales, which have been executed via Amadeus Cash
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Setup document number ranges
You can allocate customized number ranges to the different document types.
This applies to receipts, travel notifications and protocols. You must enter the
inventory on delivery of NT and ATB airline tickets.
Setting number range for cash receipts
You can determine the number ranges for cash receipts: both accounts payable
and receivable.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the Document number 00000001,
if you do not set a different number sequence.
1. Select K/A within the Set receipt counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any cash
receipt, into the Next no. field.
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note:
If the next document printed should be assigned a different number
other than the number placed into the Lower limit field, enter the desired
document number into the Next number field.
Note:
This counter is employed by all sales slips that are printed on document
type '10'(sales slips, refund vouchers, internal documents and receipts).
The next cash receipt is printed with the number you have indicated.
Setting number range for credit card documents:
You can determine the number ranges for credit card documents, including
invoice, credit note, proof of delivery and cancellation delivery receipt, as desired.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the document number 00000001,
if you do not set a different number sequence.
1. Select R/G/L/S within the Set receipt counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any credit card
document, into the Next no. field.
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note:
If the next document printed should be assigned a different number
other than the number placed into the Lower limit field, enter the desired
document number into the Next number field.
Note:
The next number counter is employed by all credit card documents
(invoices, refunds, delivery notes and delivery cancellation notes).
The next credit card document is printed with the number you indicate.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
395
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Setting number range for advance payment receipts
You can determine the number range for advance payment receipts as desired.
This number range is also valid for deposit receipts upon a travel confirmation.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the document number 00000001,
if you do not set your own number sequence.
1. Select V within the Set receipt counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any cash
advance payment receipt, into the Next no. field.
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note:
If the next document printed should be assigned a different number
other than the number placed into the Lower limit field, enter the desired
document number into the Next number field.
Note:
This counter is employed for advance payments and deposits made on
travel booking forms and travel confirmations.
The next advance payment or deposit receipt is printed with the number you
indicate.
Setting number range for proof of delivery documents
You can determine the number range for proof of delivery documents.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the document number 00000001,
if you do not set your own number sequence.
1. Select N within the Set receipt counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any proof of
delivery, into the Next no. field.
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The next proof of delivery document is printed with the number you indicate.
Setting number range for travel confirmation
You can determine the number range for the travel confirmation as desired.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the document number 00000001,
if you do not set your own number sequence.
1. Select RAN within the Set receipt counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any travel
confirmation, into the Next no. field.
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
396
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Note:
The receipt number for a travel confirmation may not be longer than six
digits.
Note:
Document primarily used in the German market. Document represents
commitment of customer to purchase for the listed travel services, upon
confirmation from the service provider.
The next travel confirmation is printed with the number you indicate.
Setting number ranges for ledger-data protocols
You can determine the number range for the accounting ledger (Receipt ID 00),
as desired.
Note:
The system automatically begins with the Document number 001, if you
do not set your own number sequence.
1. Select SISO within the Set protocol counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any ledger,
into the Next no. field
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The next accounting ledger is printed with the number you indicate.
Setting number ranges for sign-out protocols
You can determine the number range for the sign-out protocol (Receipt ID 00).
Note: The system automatically begins with the Document number 001, if you
do not set your own number sequence.
1. Select SISO within the Set protocol counter for options, by clicking on the
corresponding checkbox (a check-mark is displayed).
2. Enter the number, which should be printed as the next one on any sign-out
protocol, into the Next no. field
3. Enter lowest number of the desired range into the Lower limit field.
4. Enter highest number of the desired range into the Upper limit field.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note:
This counter is employed by all consultant and business unit reports.
The next sign-out protocol is printed with the number you indicate.
DFRS - Restart Printer for Service Voucher
You can continue a failed service voucherprint job .
1. Enter the processing number into the Processing no. field
2. Select Print service voucher for processing number, by clicking on the
corresponding OK button.
If you print via a laser or matrix printer, it might be necessary to confirm the print
job on the screen before printing out.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
397
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
DRST - Print Control Functions
In the DRST mask, you allocate the different printers of your branch to specific
terminals.
Requirement:
A system or document printer that is logged into Amadeus must be connected to
the respective terminal.
Only applicable for Selling Platform Classic:
You activate or deactivate the ATB printer, laser or dot matrix printer (ECO) and
POS devices (e.g. Amadeus cash) of your branch.
Allocating document printer
In a new branch, a printer is automatically allocated to each terminal. This is also
the case, if there are more terminals than printers. In so far as receipts should be
printed from all terminals, each terminal without printer must have one allocated
to it. You can also allocate Amadeus Cash devices (POS), in so far as you use
this procedure.
Displaying allocation of printer
1. Select Display printer / POS-allocation of RBTs, by clicking on the
corresponding OK button.
The system displays a summary:
PRINTER/POS ALLOCATION
PAGING
RBT NO:01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10*
11
ECO-NO:12
02
03
04
05
02
07
08
09
10
10
DOK NO:12
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
10
ATB NO:01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
All terminals of the branch are displayed. The number of the allocated document
printer and the allocated ATB printer are displayed under the terminal number. If
you also use Amadeus CASH (POS), this allocation is also displayed. The
terminal with which the request was made is marked with * (asterisk).
Changing allocation laser or dot matrix printer
You can define the printer with which you print the documents, which are sent to
your terminal for printing.
Requirement:
A laser or dot matrix printer must be installed at your terminal.
1. Enter the printer number of the laser or dot matrix printer into the Change
allocation of ECO-printer onto printer no. field.
2. Click on the OK button.
Note: Enter the number of the separate terminal if the document printout has
been configured in the Amadeus service menu ( Active in the Status submask).
The newly allocated printer prints the documents.
398
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Changing allocation of printer
Requirements:
Prior to changing the allocation of the printer, check whether the printer memory
is empty.
1. Enter the number of the desired printer into the Change allocation of
document printer onto printer no. field.
2. Click on the corresponding OK button.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
The newly allocated printer prints the documents.
Note:
Please only make changes if there is not a separate printer for each
terminal or a printer is temporarily malfunctioning.
Print stop
1. Select Stop printing, by clicking on the corresponding OK button.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
Returning vouchers
You can cancel one or several receipts from the printer memory.
Requirements
•
It must be a service voucher or sales receipt (for example, it is assigned a
processing no.).
•
The document must not be at the 1st item in the printer memory.
Note:
Documents, which do not belong to the service vouchers or sales
receipts (e.g. protocols), can be rerouted and printed on another printer.
The following actions are required:
1. Stop printing
2. Select Return receipt upon print-stop, by clicking on the corresponding OK
button.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
To continue:
The document is now saved under the original processing number and can be
sent at a later time or resent to another printer for printing.
Reprinting protocol
Reprinting a protocol on the day after a print-out was cancelled.
This applies to:
•
Branch and travel agent protocols
•
Protocols for several prints or misprints
•
Return protocol
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
399
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Requirements:
A print-out must have been cancelled and could no longer be activated.
1. Select Reprint protocol, by clicking on the corresponding OK button.
The protocol is present for printing. Receipt 00 (protocol paper) is requested at
your printer.
Note:
If the receipt is printed with a document printer using Amadeus ProPrinter Software, it is important to insert the receipt within five minutes.
Otherwise, the following message appears: Please activate “Continue
Print-out”.
Rerouting printer memory
If your printer is malfunctioning, you can reroute all but the first document in the
printer memory to another printer.
1. Enter the number of the printer on which the documents are to be printed in
the Reroute printer memory onto printer no. field.
2. Click on the corresponding OK button.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
The documents are now in the newly allocated printer memory.
Document administration via ZAEH
NT (neutral tickets) or LH airline tickets (only for Lufthansa City Center), as well
as ATB coupons must be numerically recorded, before they can be printed at the
respective printer.
Entering air-ticket block inventory
You can allocate the inventory of either NT or LH air tickets or else ATB coupons
per printer.
1. Select NT, LH or ATB in Set individual tickets for within the Printer ticket
block section, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox.
2. Enter the number range into from and to field
Note:
Please check before entering the inventory, if the receipt numbers are
sequential and that no damaged documents are located underneath.
You can enter a maximum of 550 receipts.
Field
Entry
from
the first complete ticket number of your inventory including the check digit
entered separately.
Note: The first, three-digit portion of this field is only used for LH air tickets.
You enter the airline identifier 220. If you input either NT or ATB coupons,
skip this field.
to
the last complete ticket number of your inventory, including the check digit
entered separately.
Note: The first, three-digit portion of this field is only used for LH air tickets.
You enter the airline identifier 220. If you input either NT or ATB coupons,
400
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
skip this field.
3. Click on Continue and press Enter.
The message bar displays a confirmation.
Displaying air ticket blocks
You can check how many NT, LH air tickets or ATB coupons are still stored and
which number is the next one to be assigned.
1. Select Display all ticket blocks, by clicking on the corresponding OK button.
The current status of the individual receipts is displayed. Behind the Next no., the
next assignable air-ticket number is displayed. Behind Upper limit, the last ticket
number of the entire inventory will be displayed for you.
Deleting air-ticket block
You can delete the inventory of either NT or LH air tickets from the respective
printer.
Note:
You only delete the inventory, if this receipt type should no longer be
printed.
1. Select NT, LH or ATB in Cancel ticket blocks for within the Printer ticket
block section, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox.
2. Click on Continue and press Enter.
Note:
An erroneously entered inventory is overwritten by simply entering a
new inventory.
The respective inventory is deleted and is not longer available for printing
receipts.
To continue:
You can enclose Air tickets or ATB coupons, which cannot be used anymore (for
example, for printing conjunction tickets) to the BSP sales protocol.
VERK - Issuing sales receipts
Sales receipts (e.g. sales slips, invoices) can be printed directly when issuing the
service voucher in one of the front-office modes.
Note: To learn how to print a sales receipt together with the service voucher,
please refer to the description of the mask you used to book the
service.
However, if you wish to add additional data or create a sales receipt for manually
created services you work with the VERK mask. The front-office procedures
Amadeus Bahn and RAN transfer the data automatically into the VERK mode.
The VERK mask can be used to:
1.
send sales receipts for printing
2.
record data for manually created services
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
401
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
3.
complete sales items, which were created by printing a service voucher
4.
authorize the printing of a service voucher, for which you forgot to enter D
in the Service voucher field when you sold a service in one of the frontoffice modes.
You can create sales receipts for all services. You can also print out sales
receipts that are only intended for internal use.
Every time a service voucher (airline/train/event tickets, hotel voucher etc.) is
issued via the system a processing number is automatically generated. The
corresponding data for the sales receipt is saved under this processing number.
You need this number for displaying, editing or printing the sales receipt.
In order to report the service date for each service on a sales receipt, you can
record this by the help the comment lines functionality of the TEXT mask. Use the
corresponding service code in the VERK mask.
The VERK mask lists up to 10 individual services, the total amount and the
respective customer data. If you wish to list each service separately with its
corresponding detailed data you use the VERL mask.
When a sales receipt is printed, the data is automatically deleted.
Mask description
The VERK mask comprises the following parts:
•
System line
•
Message bar (display of system messages)
•
Accounting item section
•
Customer data section
The System line
Description of the system line
Field name
Explanation / entry
Travel agent
your 2 character personal authorization code (travel
agent code)
Note: Your personal authorization code is obtained
when you sign in as a user in the SISO
mask. By entering your code, you identify
yourself to the system. Your code is
encrypted on the screen.
402
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field name
Explanation / entry
Processing number
When issuing a service voucher via the system, a
processing number is automatically generated. Enter
the processing number to retrieve, edit and print the
sales receipt for the service.
It is also possible to assign a processing number
manually.
001 - 100 assigned manually
101 - 250 automatically assigned
500 - 998 document preparation (Back Screen)
A processing number is only closed after printing the
sales receipt. Until then accounting items can be
added.
Service voucher
no entry
Note: In case the printout of the service voucher was
not successful because entry "D" in the field service
voucher in the respective front-office mode was
forgotten, you can reactivate the printout by entering
"D" in the service voucher field of the VERK mask. The
last processing number associated to your travel agent
code is displayed and printed.
Sales receipt
Enter the type of receipt you wish to create:
A = Payment receipt
G = Credit receipt
I = Internal receipt
K = Sales slip
L = Delivery note
N = Proof of delivery
P = Verify data
Note: If you would like to temporary save data in VERK
(e.g. manually added items), enter P.
Q = Receipt
R = Invoice
S = Cancelled delivery note
V = Prepayment
Y = Suppress receipt (cash sales)
Z = Suppress receipt (sale on credit)
From the VERK mask you can easily change to other masks used in the payment
and sales process. Use the buttons VERL, CC, KD and TEXT to switch to these
procedures if necessary.
The accounting item section
Every single sales position in the VERK mask corresponds to an accounting item
(BHP). Accounting items are active until a sales receipt was printed. The
corresponding processing number becomes available again, once printing was
authorized.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
403
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Description of the accounting item section
Field
Explanation
Action
action code
possible entries:
A = Change
D = Display active BHPs (accounting items)
DA = Display all BHPs (accounting items)
DEX = Display all active BHPs per travel agent
E = Record
KET = Print labels
KUS = Search for customer/s
S = Search for sales item/s
SC = Search for service codes/definition
STX = Search for text
Number
number of the first accounting item of a
processing number to be displayed
default is 001
Form of payment
desired form of payment for the sales receipt
Button VERL
click to change to the VERL mask
Button CC
click to change to CC mask (Credit Card
payments)
Button KD
click to change to KD mask (customer profiles)
Button TEXT
click to change to TEXT mask
Remainder of labels
labels which should be printed (default 8 if field is
left blank)
Use Document type 20 with 8 available labels,
count the labels backward.
404
Labels per customer
quantity of labels to be printed per customer
(default 1 if field is left blank)
Currency of sales receipt
currency saved and printed on the sales receipt
No
Number of accounting item
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Service code
If the service was booked via the system: display
of the service code (sales code) number.
In case of manually created services: please
enter a valid code number.
Note: Sales codes 8000-9389 on page 494 or Sales
codes 9400-9998 on page 505
Note: Please keep in mind that depending of your
service data center further/other sales codes may be
applicable for your office.
Description of service
description of the service related to the service
code number
Document no.
display of the document number for services
booked via the system
for manually created services enter the
document/invoice number
If you record several documents with identical
price and consecutive numbering, please enter
the lowest number.
Unit price
price per service in the lowest unit of the branch's
currency (e.g. Cent)
Enter unit price without period or comma. The
field must be filled in all rows. For services
without a unit price (e.g. conjunction tickets) enter
a "0"(zero).
+/-
positive/negative amount
"+" is default, only if negative amounts have to be
recorded (e.g. refunds) a "-" sign need to be
entered
VAT code
for system-generated sales items: display of the
code for the VAT rate. Cannot be changed
for manually created sales items:
entry of the code for the VAT rate:
0 = no VAT rate
1 = full VAT applies (19%)
2 = reduced VAT applies (7%)
3 = other VAT rate
Default is "0"
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
405
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation
No of
number of services (1 to 99, default 1)
Several documents with the same price and
consecutive sales document numbers may be
entered on one line. Enter the quantity in this
field.
Manually entered sales data lines can be deleted
prior to print. Overwrite the field with "0".
I
record of Inclusive Tour services
possible entries:
"I" = Inclusive tour services
"T" = Travel money
Dest code
Enter the destination code agreed upon with your
service data center. In the OPT mode this field
can be defined as required and/or numeric only
field.
Cost center
Enter the cost center code agreed upon with your
service data center. In the OPT mode this field
can be defined as required and/or numeric only
field.
Order no
Enter the order number agreed upon with your
service data center.
ED
Enter a code for exchange documents, possible
entries:
See List and codes
C
commission code
code indicating the rate of commission, when
sales documents are to be delivered to a third
party (e.g. subagent) for which a commission will
be granted
Instead of the commission code, enter the
percentage rate in the "Payable commissions in
%" field in the VERL mask.
406
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Comm.type
entering of the commission type is mandatory if
you use a commission code
9992 = external commission with VAT
9994 = external commission without VAT
9995 Internal commission without VAT
9996 Commission flight with VAT
9997 Commission DB/DER with VAT
9998 Commission touristy with VAT
Total
The total price of all sales items of the processing
number is displayed.
The customer data section
Description of the customer data section
Field
Explanation/entry
Customer no
entry of a customer number from the customer
profile mode
The corresponding customer data will be
displayed. The additional entry of a traveller
number will retrieve the address of the specific
individual from the traveller profiles.
Date of trip
date of travel in the form DDMMYY
Trav no
KDP number of the traveller belonging to the
entered KD number
The name and potential default settings in the
fields Pers. no, Cust.cost center, Project no,
Remark 1 and 2 are transferred into the footer
Trav name
traveller name
Purchaser number
Enter the KDP-number for the purchaser.
Order date
date in the format DDMMYY
Pers. no
personnel number
Cust.cost center
customer cost center
Purchaser name
name of the purchaser
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
407
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation/entry
Project no
Enter the project number; it is valid for all sales
items of a processing number, unless otherwise
defined in the VERL mask
Remark 1
Enter any text; it is valid for all sales items of a
processing number, unless otherwise defined in
the VERL mask
Clearing no.
Enter the invoice number when issuing refunds.
Should you participate in customer payment
reminders at a service data center, this entry
serves as balancing criteria on the open amount.
Contra-Account
Enter the contra account number (Hapag-Lloyd
agencies only).
Agency/branch
third-party agency and branch number, (if you
create sales receipts for other agencies)
Remark 2
Enter any text; it is valid for all sales items of a
processing number, unless otherwise defined in
the VERL mask
Name 1
customer name
If a KD-number has been entered, the
corresponding data will be displayed
Name 2
customer name
If a KD-number has been entered, the
corresponding data will be displayed
Consolidation
code, which has been agreed upon with a service
data center
Type of address
By default the street address will be printed, enter
P for P.O. Box -address or L for delivery address.
Street
If a KD-number has been entered, the
corresponding data will be displayed.
Postal code
If a KD-number has been entered, the
corresponding data will be displayed.
City
If a KD-number has been entered, the
corresponding data will be displayed.
Create sales receipts in VERK
Sales data from RAN and Amadeus Bahn is automatically transferred to VERK
and can, at a later point, be retrieved, manually added and then be printed.
408
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
You can also manually create sales receipts for services sold in other front-office
procedures in the VERK mask. You switch to VERK by entering "VERK" into one
of the available five tabs of the German Local component. Sales data must be
entered using the applicable sales code plan.
Furthermore, you have the option of creating and printing out a sales receipt for
non-system services alone.
Enter or edit sales data
You can record data for manually provided services, or change already recorded
sales data for later printout on a sales receipt. Services created by the system
cannot be changed.
1. Display the sales receipt.
2. Enter new items in the first free row in the VERK mask.
Note:
Manually entered services can be changed at any time by
overwriting. You have ten rows available for entering sales data. If
you need more rows, press enter and move to the next page by
clicking on the forward arrow in the toolbar.
3. Enter the sales code.
Note:
If you work with Amadeus sales codes: You find the valid sales
code in the sales code plan (Sales codes 8000-9389 on page 494).
You can also search in the VERK mask for the Amadeus sales
code. See also Search for an Amadeus sales code in the VERK
mask) If you work with a service data centre: refer to the sales
codes provided by them.
4. Enter the document number (depending on your accounting system).
5. Enter the unit price in cent (e.g. 27550 for 275.50 EUROS).
6. Enter the VAT code.
Note:
0 = no VAT
1 = full VAT rate
2 = reduced VAT rate
For VAT-applicable services with the VAT code 1, it is necessary to enter
all of the service provider's VAT data with the code 9990 beneath the
service. The VAT data includes the service provider's name, address and
VAT number.
7. Enter the number of services of the same type
Note:
By entering 0 you can delete manually entered services.
8. Enter the destination code/cost center code/order number agreed upon with
your service data center.
9. If applicable: enter the code for exchange documents.
Note:
This entry is only necessary for conjunction tickets, an airline ticket
transfer and for airline tickets with credit card payments. See also
Exchange document code on page 511
10. Press Enter.
The data is saved. The amount in the field Total is entered or updated, as
applicable.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
409
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Search for an Amadeus sales code in the VERK mask
If you don't have the sales code plan at hand, you can search for a specific
Amadeus sales code.
1. Enter Action SC.
2. Enter the search criteria in Description of Service:
1. at least on letter, followed by a full stop (e.g.: flight.)
-
or
only a full stop, in which case all existing sales codes are displayed
3. Press Enter.
A list of the codes and services, which match the search criteria, is displayed. A
double-click in the field of the desired service transfers the sales code
automatically into the VERK mask.
Note:
If you work with a service data centre, obtain the sales code plan
applicable for you from there.
Record own text for the sales receipt
You can add your own text to a service in the VERK mask.
1. Enter the service code. *
2. Enter your desired text in the fields Description of service and Document
no.
or
3. Enter a service code 9800 to 9879 (texts recorded in the TEXT mask are
automatically entered).
4. Press Enter.
The desired text is displayed in the VERK mask and printed on the sales receipt.
Search for an Amadeus sales code in the VERK mask
If you don't have the sales code plan at hand, you can search for a specific
Amadeus sales code.
1. Enter Action SC.
2. Enter the search criteria in Description of Service:
-
at least on letter, followed by a full stop (e.g.: flight.)
or
-
only a full stop, in which case all existing sales codes are displayed
3. Press Enter.
A list of the codes and services, which match the search criteria, is displayed. A
double-click in the field of the desired service transfers the sales code
automatically into the VERK mask.
Note:
If you work with a service data centre, obtain the sales code plan
applicable for you from there.
Search for recorded text in the VERK mask
You can search for comment text recorded in the TEXT mask, in order to print it
on a sales receipt.
1. Enter Action code STX (Search for text).
410
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Enter the search criteria: at least the first letter, followed by a full stop.
3. Press Enter.
A double-click in front of the desired text transfers it automatically into the
Description of Service and Document no fields.
Display sales data
You can display sales data that was previously entered, but for which a sales
receipt hasn't yet been printed. You need to know the processing number under
which this sales data was saved.
1. Enter the processing number in the field Processing number.
2. Enter P (Verify) in the field Sales receipt
or
3. Enter an Action code:
-
D (Display)
or
-
DEX (Display for travel agent - only services entered with your travel
agent number are displayed)
or
-
DA (Display all services - all services, incl. the deleted rows, are
displayed. Deleted rows have 0 entered in the field FOP.
4. Press Enter.
The sales data is displayed.
Print sales receipts in VERK
To print sales receipts for already recorded sales data proceed as follows:
1. Display the sales data (processing no., Action D).
2. Select the appropriate sales receipt type from the drop down menu.
3. Press Enter.
In the message bar the creation of the sales receipt is confirmed. The document
printer requests the corresponding document ID (17 or 18). The cash and
turnover counter is updated.
Print invoice with bank transfer slip
You can print invoices together with bank transfer slips:
1. Display the data in the VERK mask.
2. Enter the sales receipt code: R (Invoice).
3. Enter the customer number.
Note: You find the customer number in your customer list. Your customer's
bank data is also printed on the bank transfer slip if it is saved
under the customer number.
4. Enter the code for the bank transfer slip Form of payment: UE, U0 to U9
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
411
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Note: The codes correspond to the bank accounts, which you entered with
the branch master data.
5. Press Enter
A confirmation message appears in the message bar, that the sales receipt is
being printed. After that the document printer calls for document ID 25 (bank
transfer slip).
Create a collective invoice
You can collect a customer's services under a processing number over a period
of time and issue a collective invoice for this customer on an agreed date.
1. Assign a processing number under which all services for the customer are
saved:
You assign a permanent processing number from 1 to 100.
or
You create the first service for the customer and use the processing
number assigned by the system for all further services.
2. Enter the set processing number for every service you create for the
customer. No sales receipt ID is entered into the Sales receipt field.
3. Print the invoice at a desired date:
•
-
Enter the processing number and R (invoice) in the Sales receipt field
-
Enter the customer number in the customer no field
The sales receipt with all services listed is being created. The printer requests the
documents.
Print collective invoice with additional customer data
You can print a collective invoice with additional customer data for the individual
sales items.
1. Display the sales items saved under a processing number (processing no.,
Action D).
2. Change to the VERL mask by clicking the button VERL.
3. Select the sales item by scrolling to desired item with the forward or
backward arrow in the toolbar.
4. Enter the customer's additional data in the lower left part of the mask:
Field
Field explanation
Traveller no
traveller's KDP number
Traveller name
traveller's name
This entry is not necessary if the KDP number has
been entered
412
Personal no
personnel number
Customer's cost center
customer's cost center
Project no
customer's project number
Remark 1
remarks
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Field explanation
Remark 2
remarks
5. Press Enter.
Print sales receipts with payable commission
You can print sales receipts, in which you pass on the appropriate portion of the
received commission to the customer.
1. Display the sales data (processing no., Action D).
2. Enter the appropriate sales receipt type.
3. Enter the commission ID, e.g. entry 1 for 2%
Note:
See also Commission codes on page 513.If the commission rate
you want isn't included, you can enter it in the VERL mask.
4. Select the appropriate sales code for commissions in the commission type
field (drop-down menu).
5. Press Enter.
The sales receipt is being created and printed.
Further topics: Pay commission fees to sub-agents on page 415
Send sales receipts by e-mail or fax
There are two options for sending electronic sales receipts directly out of the
VERK mask to your customer:
•
e-mail an invoice with a digital signature (original sales receipt),
-
•
or
e-mail / fax an informational sales receipt without a signature (informational
sales document)
Prerequisite is that your office has a licence for working with Amadeus Fax and
Email Plus.
The following sales receipt types are supported by Amadeus Fax and Email Plus:
A - Payment receipt
G - Credit note
K - Sales slip
R - Invoice
V - Prepayment
L - Delivery note
S - Cancelled delivery note
The sales receipts can be created with your own agency templates or the legally
necessary data can be directly derived from the BSTG/BSTV masks.
Sending info sales receipts and original sales receipts is only possible in separate
processes. You receive a daily protocol of all the receipts you have sent. Positive
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
413
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
or negative system messages after sending the documents can be send to the
Amadeus message queue 97.
Additionally to sending the receipt electronically, a copy of the receipt will be
printed out in the travel agency. Printing out the copy can be suppressed by using
the sales receipt types Y - Suppress receipt (cash sales) or Z - Suppress receipt
(sales on credit). This function is available to travel agency chains and must be
activated separately.
Send an original sales receipt with a digital signature
You can send sales receipts via e-mail with a digital signature directly to your
customer. The digital signature secures, that the receipts cannot be manipulated
and the sender can be identified unambiguously. Digital sales receipts with
signature follow the requirements of input tax deduction. The receipts must be
archived both by the sender and the receiver, who also has to verify the signature
with a special software program.
1. Display the sales receipt you wish to send.
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
You enter the address/number into the first available row of the VERK mask.
3. Enter Service code 8295 in all rows used.
4. Enter all relevant e-mail addresses consecutively in the fields Description of
Service and Document No:
Service Code
Description of Service
Document no
8295
EMAIL:BUC
[email protected]
.DE
8295
CEMAIL:LSC
[email protected]
Note: Original sales receipts with signature can only be send to one e-mail
address. Use CEMAIL in Description of Service to send copies of
the sales receipt to further e-mail addresses.
5. Press Enter.
A *.pdf-file is created and signed with a qualified digital signature. In general the
sales receipt is send the next day.
Alternatively the address data can be transferred from the RM element of an
Amadeus PNR:
Possible entry:
RM*BHPK+:LCODE:8295&LEISTUNG:EMAIL:[email protected]
RM*BHPK+:LCODE:8295&LEISTUNG:CEMAIL:[email protected]
E-mail or fax an informational sales receipt without a signature
You can fax or e-mail sales receipt without a signature for information purposes
directly to your customer. Info sales receipts don't replace original sales receipts
and are not valid for income tax deduction.
1. Display the sales data you wish to send/print.
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
414
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
You enter the address/number into the first available row of the VERK mask.
3. Enter Service code 8539 in all rows used.
4. Enter all relevant e-mail addresses/fax numbers consecutively in the fields
Description of Service and Document No:
Service Code
Description of Service
Document no
8539
EMAIL:BUC
[email protected]
.DE;FR
8539
ITZ.MAIER
@T-ONLINE.DE
8539
FAX:06001
/7700999
5. Press Enter.
The sales receipt is send to your customer and printed at the same time.
Alternatively the data can also be transferred from the remark elements of an
Amadeus PNR.
Possible entry:
RM*BHPK+:LCODE:8539&LEISTUNG:EMAIL:[email protected]
RM*BHPK+:LCODE:8539&LEISTUNG:FAX:06172/919999
Pay commission fees to sub-agents
If you want to pay a commission fee to a sub-agent and you can create a sales
receipt, which lists the net amount, as well as the input VAT and the sub-agent's
VAT number.
Before you can print the sales receipt the following activities have to be
accomplished.
•
The sub-agent was entered under a customer data number.
•
The person type U was entered under the KDP no 99991
•
The sub-agent's tax number was entered under the KDP no 99991 in the field
Remark 1 and activated for printing.
In the VERK mask:
1. Display the relevant sales data saved under a certain processing number
2. Enter the commission rate
See also:
Commission codes on page 513
3. Select the type of commission (drop-down list)
4. Enter the customer number
5. Press Enter
A sales receipt is printed, on which the net amount, input VAT and VAT data is
listed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]m
415
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Print IT sales receipt
You can create a sales receipt for a package tour, which comprises several
components and only the total amount is to be visible to the customer.
Attention: The service provider's VAT related information are not listed on the
customer receipt for sales items marked as IT trip.
1. Record all services and display the processing number in the VERK mask
(no travel money order services on this processing number)
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
Note: You cannot print a proof of delivery for an IT trip.
3. Select IT trip in the I field for every sales item which is an IT service.
4. Enter the service code 9991 in the last row of the listed sales items: the IT
subtotal is listed.
Note: Once this code has been entered, no further IT services can be added.
5. Press Enter.
Two sales receipt are printed. The first receipt lists all services individually. This
receipt is for internal use. The second receipt prints the total amount of the
services in one row. This receipt is intended for the customer.
Print a proof of delivery
You can print a proof of delivery and send it together with the travel documents to
your customer. The corresponding sales data are saved and can be later printed
on a collective invoice.
Note: Once the proof of delivery is printed, it is not possible to edit the sales data
when creating the collective invoice.
1. Display the sales data you wish to print a proof of delivery for (processing
no., Action D).
2. Enter N (Proof of delivery) in the field Sales receipt.
3. Enter the customer number in the field Customer no.
4. Press Enter.
The sales receipt is being created. Under the customer's address, the note NO
INVOICE is printed on the receipt.
Attention: The VAT data (name, address and VAT number are not printed on the
proof of delivery for services, which are subject to VAT. The data is
listed on the collective invoice, which is printed at a later time.
Calculate service fees (TAF)
The Amadeus Transaction Fee Manager is a software program for automatically
processing and settling service fees in the travel agency. Requirement for using
the Amadeus Transaction Fee Manager is a TAF license.
416
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Fees for all services saved under a processing number are automatically
calculated in the VERK procedure on the basis of the fee schedules. The latter
are defined by your travel agency's administrator in the Amadeus Transaction
Fee Administrator in Portevo (www.portevo.de). Different fee schedules may
apply for customers, customer groups, branches, travel agencies, chains or cooperations, which may be included in the automatic fee calculation in the sales
procedure in the VERK mask.
Requirement for correctly calculating the fees, is therefore, that the customer data
(e.g. the customer number) is entered in the VERK procedure. If no customer
data is entered, the standard schedule is used.
The TAF Manager's automatic calculation is based on the sales code and the
travel price. The service fee to be charged is recognized and entered with a
service code in the VERK mask.
Calculate service fees (TAF)
1. Print or manually record a service voucher and display it.
2. Enter Action code TAF.
3. Press Enter.
A service fee is calculated and listed on your sales receipt. You can now print the
sales receipt.
Print sales document with service fee
You can print the sales receipt for an open processing number after the service
fee has been automatically added.
1. Display the open processing number in the VERK mask.
2. Enter the appropriate sales receipt type.
3. Enter Action code TAF for calculating the service fee.
4. Press Enter.
A service fee is applied to all services which are subject to a fee. The printer
requests the document. The cash and turnover counter is updated.
Perform a service fee applicable cancellation
If you have refunded a service (e.g. airline ticket, train ticket etc.) you can also
apply a fee to it.
1. Display the open processing number of the refund.
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
3. Enter Action code TAF for calculating the service fee.
4. Press Enter.
A service fee is applied to all billable services. The printer requests the document.
The cash and turnover counter is updated.
TAF offset with credit card
You can charge service fees to a credit card, if your office has closed individual
contracts regarding the credit card fee with the credit card company.
1. Display the processing number for the service paid by credit card.
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
3. Enter TAF in the Action field.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
417
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. Press Enter.
Note: In case of different credit card payments in one processing number, the fee
offsetting is undertaken against the last credit card number.
All billable services have a service fee added and are offset with the last credit
card of the displayed processing number. The cash and turnover counter are
updated.
For debiting service fees to credit cards the following conditions apply:
To ensure the clear assigning of the main service (e.g. air ticket) and the
secondary service (e.g. fee for the air ticket) by the credit card company, you
must first verify, that the calculated fee is always activated in relation to a main
service in a processing number.
If Action TAF is carried out for several main services in one step, it may not be
possible to duplicate the additional data correctly.
Clearly assigning main services and secondary services is conditional on all
debiting of credit cards being carried out on the same day. Following this process
is imperative, to avoid the main and secondary service being assigned in different
protocol periods of the credit card company.
For travel department credit cards, assigning main and secondary services on the
credit card invoice is guaranteed.
In case of different credit card payments in a processing number, the final billing
of the fees, as well as die duplicating of the additional data, is carried out against
the last credit card of this processing number's main service.
Refund service fees
You can refund an already charged service fee.
1. Display the processing number which includes the service fee.
2. Enter the sales receipt type.
3. Enter the service fee's sales code in the Code column.
4. Enter the billable service's document number in the Document no. column.
5. Enter the service fee in cent (e.g. 1520 = EUR 15.20) in the Unit price
column.
6. Enter a - (minus) in the + column.
7. Enter the VAT code (1 for the full VAT rate) in the VAT code field.
Note: service fees are generally subject to VAT.
8. Press Enter.
The service fee is refunded and recorded on the sales receipt with a minus sign.
VERL - Detailed Sales Document Data
A service is displayed in detail with all data in the VERL mask. You can also enter
additional customer data here.
418
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Printing bulk invoice with additional customer data
You can print a bulk invoice with additional customer data for the individual sales
items.
1. Change from the VERK mask into the VERL mask.
2. Select the sales item.
3. Enter the customer additional data into the following fields:
Field
Explanation
Traveller number
Travellers KDP number
Travellers name
This entry is not necessary if the KDP number
has been entered.
Personal no
Personal number
Customers cost center
Project no.
project number
Remarks1
Remarks
Remarks 2
Remarks
4. Press Enter.
Printing sales receipt for manually created airline ticket
1. Change from the VERK mask into the VERL mask.
2. Enter the tax.
3. Enter the commission.
4. Press Enter.
Further procedures
Further actions are possible:
Action
Procedure
Displaying active BHPs
Enter action code D
Press Enter
Changing BHPs
Display BHP
Modify the desired facts
Press Enter
Displaying al active BHPs
Enter action code DA
Press Enter
Displaying all active BHPs
per agent
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Enter action code DEX
Press Enter
[email protected]
419
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Action
Procedure
Recording
Enter action code E
Add the information into the fields
Press Enter
Recording a text
Enter action code ETX
Enter the Text in the Description of service field
Press Enter
Searching for a sale item
Enter action code S
Enter search criteria
Press Enter
Mask description
Field
Explanation
Action
Available action code:
A - Change
D - Display active (non-deleted) accounting
segments
DA - Display all accounting segments incl.
deleted accounting segments
DEX - Display active accounting segments for
consultant
E - Data Entry
ETX - Text Entry
S - Search for sale item
Number
Input of the number of the accounting segment to be
displayed.
Default is '001'.
Currency of sales receipt
420
It is shown in which currency the reference number is
saved and which currency will be printed on the sales
document possible = Euro or denomination currency)
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Form of payment
Input the desired Form of payment to be used for the
sales slip. Customer data retrieved from the customer
profile will be displayed showing the form of payment
on file.
To print money transfer forms, enter:
UE,U0-U9 - Money transfer forms for the total amount
to the desired account of the business unit.
NO - Cancel the form of payment on file in the
customer profile
AB - The note 'AMOUNT TO BE DEBITED FROM
ACCOUNT - DO NOT PAY' will appear on sales
document.
Amadeus Cash and credit card payments:
Note: In the field DC, a 'C' (= change to CC screen)
must be input.
SC - Amadeus Cash Payment
EC - Payment with Eurocard
AX - Payment with American Express
DC - Payment with Diners Club
VI - Payment with Visa Card
BA - Payment of rail services with American-ExpressCard
BD - Payment of rail services with Diners Club
BE - Payment of rail services with Eurocard
BT - Payment of rail services with LH AirPlus Company
Card
BV - Payment of rail services with Visa Card
Note: If a customer number/traveller number
(CR_NO/TVL_NO) has been entered in the
CUSTOMER field, the card numbers of the
respective credit card companies will be searched
for in the corresponding customer profile and
displayed on the CC screen.
Buttons VERK, CC, KD,
TEXT
Change to the respective masks
Service code
Display of the Amadeus sales code number when
entering Amadeus provided services. Input a valid
code number when creating manually input sales data.
Description of service
Description of the service relating to the entered
service code number. In some instances, the
standard text may be overwritten. For some
codes, however, this is not permitted (please
refer to the code guide
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
421
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation
Document no
Display of the document number when entering
Amadeus system services. When entering manually
input sales, enter the document or Invoice/ Reservation
number. Create multiple documents having the same
price and consecutively numbered in one sales line by
entering the beginning document number in this field,
and by specifying how many documents are to be
produced in the NO field. With code 9990 or an ‘*’, you
can enter whatever comments you wish in the
SERVICE and DOCUMENT fields.
Currency
ISO currency code for accounting segments
denominated in foreign currency.
Unit price
Amount in the smallest unit of the business unit
currency (i.e. Euro would be Cent). Enter unit price for
each service without period or comma. The field must
be filled in on all rows. For sales rows with no unit price
(i.e. conjunction tickets), enter a '0' (zero). For
accounting segments denominated in a foreign
currency, the converted amount will be shown in the
business unit currency in this field. A '+' will be
automatically displayed as a positive/negative sign.
Only when negative amounts are entered (e.g. refunds)
must one enter a '-' sign.
+/-
Sign of Positive/Negative Amount A default of '+' will be
displayed. Only when negative amounts (e.g. refunds)
are to be entered must a '-' sign be input.
No of
Number (quantity) of services (1 to 99, default of 1).
Tax
Airline Ticket Taxes:
When manually issuing airline tickets which include
taxes within the price, enter the amount of the taxes in
the smallest unit of currency (e.g. Euro = Cent). Entry
with period and comma is allowed.
Conversion unit
Foreign currency conversion unit denomination (1, 10,
100, 1000).
Conversion rate
Exchange Rate Enter exchange rate in the
EXCHANGE RATE field with the denomination of units
in the UNIT field.
VAT code
Value added tax code
VAT in %
Percentage of value added tax
VAT INCL
Value added tax - relevant amount in the original
currency
VAT includes in
VAT amount in
422
Traveller no
Entry of the TVL_NO (individual profile number) of the
traveller relating to the number entered in CUST.
(company profile number). The stored name and other
information on file for the fields CCP, PROJ, REM1,
REM2, and STAFF NO will be retrieved into to the
accounting information footer.
I
Enter the code 'I' for IT services. Additionally when
entering an IT service, the code 9991 must be input
under the last IT service (IT subtotal).
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Destination code
Input the destination code agreed upon with your
computer service center. In the OPT mode, this field
can be made a required and/or numeric only field.
Cost Center
Entry of the costing point number agreed upon with
your computer service center. In the OPT mode, this
field can be made a required and/or numeric only field.
A default value may also be assigned.
Order no
Order number
ED
Enter the appropriate code when processing exchange
documents:
01 New Document
10 Trade-in Document
11 UATP/AirPlus
12 American Express
13 Bank of America
14 Visa
15 Carte Blanche
16 Diners Club
17 Eurocard
18 Standard Bank
19 Master Card
20 Access
21 Warrent GR
22 Warrent UN
23 Pay Later Plan
24 Lufthansa
25 Single GTR-Program
26 En Route (Air Canada)
27 Lufthansa large volume cust.
30 Miscellaneous Document
40 Conjunction Ticket
41 Conjunction with exchange ticket
55 Prepaid Ticket 70 Special Ticket No.(i.e. 6 digit)
90 Tour Code (IT or Group Code) When manually
issuing flight tickets, enter the appropriate codes
corresponding to the following situations:
01 in the sales data row for the new ticket
10 in the following row for the ticket taken in exchange
Conjunction tickets:
40 in each row of a conjunction series ticket Credit card
payment:
01 in the sales data row of the ticket xx where 'xx' is
the code for the credit card company pertaining to the
credit card account number appearing on the following
row.
Traveller name
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Name of the person travelling. If a you have entered
the number of a traveller in the TRVL POS NO field,
the corresponding name will be displayed.
[email protected]
423
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation
Payable commision in %
Percent rate of commission to be paid in the form of
following one of the following examples: '5' or '5,0' or
'5,00' are equivalents to a 5% rate of commission.
Additionally, for payment of the commission, the
COMM. field on the VERK screen must be filled in.
or C
Commission Code Code indicating the rate of
commission, when service documents are to be
delivered to a third party (e.g. subagent) for which a
commission will be granted. Instead of the commission
code, one can enter the percentage rate in the
COMMISSION PAYABLE field. Additionally, for
commission payments the field COMM must be filled in
on the VERK screen.
Display: When the field COMM CODE in the
accounting footer is filled in. Note: A modification or
deletion in the 'C' field is no longer possible once a
proof of delivery document (SD=N) with this
commission code has already been printed.
Received commission in %
Commission on Air Tickets An input is required only
when manually issuing non-BSP air tickets. Enter the
percentage rate of commission for non-BSP air tickets
in the form of one of the following examples: '9' or '9,0'
or '9,00' are all equivalents to a 9% rate of commission.
For payment of conjunction tickets and ticket sales
using credit cards enter the commission in the first
sales line. In all other lines enter a '0'.
Personal no
Input the staff number of the individual travelling,
existing information from KD/KDP will be retrieved if
field left blank.
Customer cost center
Manual input of the customer's costing point or
automatically retrieved from existing information
maintained in the customer profile mode (KD/KDP
screens).
Code
Comment Code
Should you wish to use a system or pre-assigned
comment from the TEXT mode, please enter the
appropriate code number in this field. The
corresponding text will be automatically displayed in
the TEXT field.
424
Text
Input desired comments. Should a comment code have
been entered in the CODE field, the corresponding text
will be retrieved and displayed. Should an accounting
segment be deleted, this text will be automatically
deleted as well.
Project no
Project Number Input of the customer project number
or automatic retrieval of data maintained in the
customer profile mode (KD/KDP screen).
Remark 1
Input desired comments. Any default comments set-up
in the Customer Profile KD/KDP screens will be
retrieved and displayed.
Remark 2
Input desired comments. Any default comments set-up
in the Customer Profile KD/KDP screens will be
retrieved and displayed.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
TEXT - Comment lines
You can record up to 40 individual text modules in the TEXT mask, in order to
print these as comment lines on sales receipts. Additionally, Amadeus provides
several standard text modules.
You can:
•
Record text
•
Display text
•
Delete and change text
Recording comment lines
Via the TEXT mask you can enter comment lines for printing on sales receipts.
1. Enter the desired text in the lines with the code numbers 9800 to 9839
Note: The action code A (change) is automatically entered into the Action
field.
2. Press Enter.
Note: Only "Own text" can be changed. You can use the new comment lines
immediately.
Displaying comment lines
Enter your travel agent code.
The action code D (Display) is automatically entered into the Action field.
1. Click on OK for displaying own text.
The message bar displays the own texts.
or
2. Click on OK for displaying standard text.
The message bar displays the standard texts. The entry rows are numbered with
the code numbers 9840 to 9879. The comment lines provided by Amadeus are
displayed behind these.
Caution: These texts cannot be changed!
Changing or deleting comment lines
You can change or delete your own text.
1. Display your own comment line.
2. Overwrite the displayed text or delete the text.
3. Press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
425
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Note:
User Guide
You can use the modified comment lines immediately.
CC - Credit cards
Via the CC mask you can process either credit-card or Amadeus Cash payments.
If you wish to debit services to credit-cards for which the credit fee is not carried
by the supplier (e.g. tour operator), you need your own contract with the
respective credit card company.
Mask description
With Amadeus Cash payments the CC mask is automatically displayed after
entering Form of Payment (FOP): SC in the respective front-office procedure or in
the VERK mask. With credit-card payments an automatic change is possible in
TOMA and VERK.
You can also call up the CC mask directly by entering CC into one of the five tabs
available in the German Local content component.
The automatic change to CC is recommended since data can be transferred and
don't need to be entered again.
In the CC mask the following field are available:
Field name
Action
possible entries
Credit card procedure
A - Automatic processing
E - End
G - Request for approval
M - Display contractual relationship
S - Cancellation
Amadeus Cash procedure
BLZ = Bank code
DAT = Request for Amadeus Cash
ELV = Electronic direct debit
GUT = Credit advice
KA? = Recall last cash intersection
KAS = Cash intersection
OLV - Online direct debit
OMR - On merchants risks
STO - Cancellation
TST - Testing network connection
426
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field name
possible entries
Company
code of the credit card company
Number
credit card number, is displayed, if data from
KD/KDP is transferred; not used with Amadeus
Cash
Expiration date
validation date of the credit card, is displayed, if
data from KD/KDP is transferred; not used with
Amadeus Cash
Currency
display of the currency
Amount
amount in cent
Approved/BNO
approval code of the credit card company for
manual processing, in case of cancellations the
original document number must be entered
CC Security Code
Card Verification Code (CVV/CVC ) which can be
three or four digits; input is optional and can be
used only with the Entry A = Automatic
processing
Date of trip
date of travel (TTMMJJ)
Traveller
name of Traveller, not mandatory
Procedure
Document no
document number of service voucher, not used
for Amadeus Cash
Service code of organizer
Reason for cancellation
not used for Amadeus Cash
Text
free text, not used for Amadeus Cash
Noncash payments with Amadeus Cash
Amadeus Cash handles the payments with Eurocheque card (EC card) and
signature of the customer on the direct debit authorization. It includes the MultiCard Board, a chip card and magnetic stripe reader with keyboard, which reads
the customer and payment related data stored on the card. You need a licence to
use Amadeus Cash.
You can process your customer' s payments via direct debit by two different
methods:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
427
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
•
Online direct debit (OLV®) - verifying various criteria (e.g. card validity and
plausibility)
•
Electronic direct debit (ELV) - the card details are not verified
Attention: The travel agency bears the risk of direct debiting: it can be debited
back either due to overdrawing an account or disputing on the
customer's behalf.
Processing payments with EC card online via direct debit (OLV)
The online direct debit procedure verifies the validity and plausibility of the card.
The payments are checked against black-list file.
In the VERK mask:
1. Display the processing number.
2. Prepare the mask switch: Service voucher C (Change to CC).
3. Enter FOP ID for Amadeus Cash: SC
4. Press Enter.
In the CC mask:
1. Initiate printing of the Service voucher: D (Print).
2. Enter the Action code: OLV (online direct debit procedure).
3. Read Eurocheque card (EC).
Note: Insert the card facing downwards to the right into the Multi-Card Board.
The document no 24/0810 is requested by the printer. The respective offset
posting is entered with the sales code 9641 in the VERK mask. Your Amadeus
Cash counter increases appropriately.
Print out the Amadeus Cash slip, have the customer sign it and give the her/his
copy back.
Attention: A customer's signature is absolutely necessary for this procedure.
By creating an Amadeus Cash slip, debiting your clients accounts does not occur
automatically. Therefore, perform the cash intersection daily. Crediting your
account generally takes 2-3 days.
Processing payments with EC card via electronic direct debit (ELV)
The electronic direct debit does not guarantee you any payment. You should
therefore use the procedure only for small amounts up to € 30,-. There is no
validity check of the card. Payments are not checked against a black list.
Attention: A risk of loss exists, since the bank debit can either be returned due to
overdrawing an account or disputing on the customer's behalf.
Moreover, stolen, counterfeit and outdated EC cards could be used.
In the VERK mask:
1. Display the processing number.
2. Prepare the mask switch: Service voucher C (Change to CC).
3. Enter FOP ID for Amadeus Cash: SC
4. Press Enter.
In the CC mask:
1. Initiate printing of the Service voucher: D (Print).
428
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Enter the Action code: ELV (online direct debit procedure).
3. Read Eurocheque card (EC) by inserting the card facing downwards to the
right into the Multi-Card Board.
The document no 24/0810 is requested by the printer. The respective offset
posting is entered with the sales code 9642 in the VERK mask. Your Amadeus
Cash counter increases appropriately.
Print out the Amadeus Cash slip, have the customer sign it and give the her/his
copy back.
Attention: A customer's signature is absolutely necessary for this procedure.
By creating an Amadeus Cash slip, debiting your clients accounts does not occur
automatically. Therefore, close out credit-card tabulation daily. Crediting your
account generally takes 2-3 days.
Cancelling payments by EC card
To cancel payments by EC card the following conditions must be met:
•
The cash intersection has not been performed yet
•
The entire amount is to be cancelled
•
The Multi-Card Board used for cancellation is the original one
Proceed as follows:
Return the services in the procedure you sold them in (TOMA, RAIL etc.) Please
refer to the description in the Online Help. For services where returns are not
allowed via the Amadeus Selling Platform, enter the data manually in the VERK
mask.
1. Prepare the mask switch: Service voucher C (Change to CC).
2. Enter FOP ID for Amadeus Cash: SC
3. Press Enter.
In the CC mask:
4. Initiate printing of the Service voucher: D (Print).
5. Enter Action code: STO.
6. Enter the slip number of the original debit slip in the Approved field.
7. Read Eurocheque card (EC) by inserting the card facing downwards to the
right into the Multi-Card Board.
The document no 24/0810 is requested by the printer. The respective offset
posting is entered with the sales code 9643 in the VERK mask. Your Amadeus
Cash counter decreases appropriately.
Amadeus Cash back-office functions
Perform a cash intersection
Amadeus Cash turnovers are only debited from your customer's accounts after
you manually performed a cash intersection. You should perform this transaction
daily. All data allocated over the day are then transferred to easycash GmbH for
clearing.
In the CC mask
1. Enter Action KAS for cash intersection.
2. Press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
429
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
All turnovers since you last performed a cash intersection are transferred and can
be credited to your account.
Print sales protocols for Amadeus Cash
To enable your accounting department to assign the Amadeus Cash turnovers to
the individual sales, your are sent a protocol which lists all items sold via
Amadeus Cash. You receive the protocol via Amadeus Local Info System one
day after turnover. You should print the protocol on a daily basis.
1. Open the INFO mask.
2. Enter Action code B (Display mailbox).
3. Press Enter.
Your travel agency's mailbox is displayed.
4. Enter Action code PL.
5. Enter the row number of the title CASH.
6. Press Enter.
The protocol is printed and at the same time deleted from the INFO system.
Note: Each protocol is available in the INFO system for a maximum of 10 days.
Allocate the Amadeus Cash device to several terminals
Within your branch several terminals can access a terminal with Multi card board
and Amadeus Cash software. Allocation of the designated terminals is done in
the DRST mask. For it you need to know the RBT number of the terminal to
which the Cash device is directly connected.
In the DRST mask:
1. Enter the RBT number in the field Change POS allocation onto POS number.
2. Press Enter.
Handle payments above the monthly MAESTRO limit
In general only payments up to € 2500,- (total amount per month/card) can be
processed via Amadeus Cash. Any exceeding amounts are not covered with the
service of easycash GmbH to guarantee payments (separate contract
necessary). To still handle this amount you can use the Action code On
Merchants Risk (OMR).
Note:
With amounts exceeding €2500,- the travel agency alone takes the risk
of default!
Credit card payments for non-airline services
You can process payments by credit card for non-airline services. For this you
change from VERK mask to CC.
For processing payments with credit card your travel agency needs a contract
with the respective credit card company. The credit card fee is debited to you.
Some tour operators and the Deutsche Bahn bear the credit-card fee.
Note:
430
You can find an overview of these tour operators in the Amadeus Local
Info System, under the keyword "CC-TEILNEHMER". Only if the
corresponding service code is transferred from VERK to CC it is
guaranteed that the tour operator bears the credit card fee. If the
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
deposit payment with the code 9981 is manually recorded in VERK and
transferred to CC, the fee is debited to the travel agency.
Printing out an invoice with a credit card payment
Import the data from VERK:
1. Display the sales data that was previously entered (processing number).
2. Select the adequate Form of payment from the drop down menu.
Note: If a customer number has been entered, the card numbers of the
respective credit card company will be searched for in the customer
profile and displayed in the CC mask.
3. Switch mask (Click on CC button).
Upon changing to the CC mask, all relevant travel and accounting data is
imported and displayed.
In CC:
1. Initiate the printing of the Service voucher (D).
2. Initiate the printing of the sales receipt (R).
Note: You can also display the sales receipt prior to printing by entering P.
3. Enter Action code A (Automatic processing).
4. Enter the credit card number.
5. Enter the expiration date in the MMYY format.
6. Press Enter.
The data is send to the respective credit card company and processed there. The
printer requests the documents for the sales receipt and the credit card slip.
Request approval code
With the approval code the credit card company agrees on the requested
amount.
You can create a credit card slip manually and only request the approval code via
the CC procedure.
1. Import all data from the VERK mask.
2. Enter Action code G (Request for approval).
3. Enter the credit card number.
4. Enter the validity date in the format MMYY.
5. Press Enter.
The data is transmitted to the credit card company. The approval code is
automatically displayed. You can now issue the credit-card slip manually via
Action M (manual processing).
Create credit card slip without approval code
You can create a credit card slip without simultaneously requesting an approval
code.
Attention: If you have not searched for the approval code elsewhere, the debit is
performed at your own risk!
1. Import the data from VERK.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
431
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Initiate the printing of the credit card slip: Service voucher D.
3. Display the data in the VERK mask: Sales receipt P.
4. Enter Action code M (Manual processing).
5. Enter company code if necessary.
6. Enter the credit card number.
7. Enter the validity date in the format MMYY.
8. Enter the approval code.
9. Press Enter.
The entered service is automatically displayed in the VERK mask. The credit card
slip is requested by the printer.
Cancel credit card slip
You can issue a cancellation slip for a credit-card payment. Take care of the
following requirements:
•
The slip to be cancelled has been created via the CC procedure
•
The refund is processed via the same credit card as the payment
•
The data have been imported into the CC from the VERK mask
To cancel a credit card slip:
1. Initiate the printing of the credit card slip: (Service voucher D [Print]).
2. Display the data in the VERK mask (Sales receipt: P [Verify]).
3. Enter Action code: S (Cancel).
4. Enter the credit card number.
5. Enter the validity date in the format MMYY.
6. Enter the original debit's slip number.
7. Enter date of travel in the DDMMYY format.
8. Enter reason for cancellation.
9. Press Enter.
The service is displayed in the VERK mask and the sales receipt can be issued.
Create manual credit card slip
You can create a credit card slip for an amount, for which you have received an
approval code via telephone or requested one via Action G.
1. Import the data from VERK.
2. Initiate the printing of the service voucher (D [Print]).
3. Enter Action code M.
4. Enter the credit card number.
5. Enter the validity date in the format MMYY.
6. Enter the approval code.
7. Press Enter.
The credit card slip is printed. The data is automatically transmitted to the credit
card company. The sales receipt can be issued in the VERK mask.
432
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Display credit card partners
You can display a partner, with whom a credit card contract has been made.
1. Enter Action I (Display contractual relationships).
2. Press Enter.
The data is displayed.
Note:
If you have made a licensing contract with a partner and nothing is
displayed yet, you cannot process any payments yet via the CC mask.
UMSZ - Turnover counter
Within the UMSZ mask you can display the turnovers of your branch. You can
either display turnovers for certain service codes or for turnover groups. This is
possible for both the current and previous month.
By requesting the turnover statistics you always have an overview of the
turnovers of a branch at hand. You can thereby allocate the sales to particular
division, to, for example, claim a higher commission.
You have several possibilities:
•
Print out turnover statistics
•
Display a sales code's turnover
•
Display the turnover of a sales code in comparison to the previous month
•
Display turnover group's turnover
•
Display a turnover group in comparison to the previous month
Printing out current month turnover statistics
1. Enter action code ID.
2. Click on Service code or turnover group.
3. Enter either a service code or turnover group.
Note: If you wish to print out the turnover for multiple service codes in
addition , either enter the service code into the TO field, e.g. until
which point the turnovers should be printed out. Otherwise only the
turnover for one service code is printed out.
4. Press Enter.
Printing last month turnover statistics
Enter action code VD.
1. Click on the field Service code and enter the desired service code.
or
2. Click on the field Turnover and enter the desired turnover code.
3. Press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
433
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Displaying sales code turnover
1. Enter action code V.
2. Click on the field Service code.
3. Enter the desired service code.
4. Press Enter.
Displaying a sales code turnover compared to previous month
1. Enter action code VG.
2. Click on the field Service code.
3. Enter the desired service code.
4. Press Enter.
Displaying turnover groups turnover
1. Enter action code V.
2. Click on the field Turnover group and enter the desired group number or
name.
3. Press Enter.
Displaying turnover group compared to previous month
1. Enter the Action code VG.
2. Click on the field Turnover group and enter the desired group number or
name.
3. Press Enter.
KURS - Currency converter
You can record the purchase and sale rates for up to 15 currencies in the KURS
mask. This allows you to:
Convert amounts on sales receipts
434
•
Bill foreign currency tickets in EUR
•
Perform simple currency conversions
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Recording exchange rates for the first time
1. Enter the action code E.
Note:
This action is only applicable in an empty mask. Otherwise use
action A.
2. Enter the conversion unit: 1, 10, 100 or 1000.
Note:
If the field Convertion unit is empty, the system automatically
enters 1!
3. Enter the currency code (ISO code).
Note:
You can find a list of the ISO currency codes in the German Local
Content Online Help under Lists and Codes.
4. Enter the Purchase rate (lower rate).
5. Enter the Sale rate (higher rate).
Note:
The preceding and following decimal places of the amounts must
be left aligned!
6. Press Enter.
Note:
Non-Euro currencies must be entered with your exchange rate in
relation to Euro, for example: 1USD = 0,87034 EURO
The exchange rates are recorded. The country and currency description are
added. The bottom line displays the travel agent number, date and time, as well
as the running number of the saved version.
Displaying exchange rates
1. Enter action code D for Display.
2. Press Enter.
The saved exchange rates are displayed.
Changing/recording exchange rates
You can update the saved exchange rates, add, or delete individual rates.
1. Display the exchange rates.
2. Enter action code A for Change.
3. Overwrite the saved rate with the new values.
or
Enter an additional rate in the first free line in the mask.
4. Press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
435
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Deleting exchange rates
1. Display the exchange rates.
2. Enter the action code L for Delete exchange rates.
3. Press Enter.
Note:
Deleted exchange rates can be recorded again on the same day.
Display the rates again and then enter Action E.
Converting rates in another currency
You can convert:
•
from the country currency into a foreign currency (purchase rate)
•
from a foreign currency into the country currency (sale rate)
•
from one foreign currency into another foreign currency
If you have not done it yet, record exchange rate for the first time.
1. Enter the action code R for Conversion.
2. Enter the currency code of the amount to be converted.
3. Enter the amount be converted.
Note:
Round amounts are entered without following decimal places.
Otherwise enter a following decimal place.
4. Enter currency code of the currency, into which the amount is to be
converted.
Note:
If you are converting from or into the country currency, no entry is
required in the respective field. The system always automatically enters
the country currency.
5. Press Enter.
The calculated amount is displayed behind = (equal sign). The saved exchange
rates are simultaneously displayed.
UMSG - Turnover group
Within the UMSG mask you can summarize service codes into turnover groups.
These turnover groups are valid for a branch. Amadeus has preset them in 21
turnover groups. In addition, you have the possibility of setting up additional
turnover groups according to your individual needs.
Creating turnover group
1. Enter code E.
436
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Enter group name.
3. Assigning service groups.
Within the four-digit fields enter the sales codes, which you wish to assign to this
new turnover group. If you are dealing with entire number ranges, then enter the
first and last number, separated by a hyphen. If you are dealing with individual
numbers, then these are separated by a comma.
Note:
The number for the new turnover group is automatically assigned by the
system. Therefore, no entry is made in the first part of the Turnover
group field
4. Press Enter.
5. Confirm with action code OK.
Attention: Please note that upon creating new turnover groups, only you are
responsible for maintaining all groups.
Modifying turnover group
You can modify both/either the name and/or the assigned service code for an
already created turnover group.
Note:
This also applies for turnover groups, which have been automatically
provided by Amadeus.
1. Display the desired group.
2. Enter action A for changing.
3. Enter the new name in the second part of the Turnover group field.
4. Modify the service codes by overwriting, deleting or adding new codes.
5. Press Enter.
Deleting turnover group
You can delete already-created turnover groups, if these are no longer needed.
This also applies for turnover groups, which have been automatically supplied by
Amadeus.
1. Enter action code L.
2. Press Enter.
Printing out turnover group
1. You can print a list of your turnover groups.
Enter action code DRU.
2. Press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
437
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Recreating standard/default turnover group
You can reset the original system's preset/standard/default status. Thus you are
no longer responsible for maintaining the turnover groups.
1. Enter action code L.
2. Press Enter.
A submask with all turnover groups is displayed.
3. Make a doubleclick on the desired group.
The turnover group is displayed.
Searching for turnover group
1. Enter action code S.
2. Press Enter.
Displaying turnover groups
1. Enter action code D.
2. Enter the desired turnover group.
3. Press Enter.
KD - Customer Data
A total of two masks are available for customer-data administration:
5.
KD mask customer data (single customer numbers, bulk customer
numbers)
6.
KDP mask for personal data, which belongs to a customer number
Via the KD mask, you can administer your customer data with customer
numbers. The following data can be recorded:
7.
The customer's name and address
8.
Bank data
9.
Customer data for sales processing
Customer lists and labels can also be printed from the KD mask, which requires a
laser or dot matrix printer or a document printer.
438
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Via the KDP you can administer the personal data (e.g. travellers, orderers)
belonging to a customer number, which you have recorded in the KD mask,
personal data of a customer can be recorded.
Customer lists and labels can also be printed from the KDP mask, which requires
a laser or dot matrix printer or a document printer.
Mask description KD
general customer data
Field
Explanation
Action
Enter one of the possible action codes
Customer no
Enter the customer number in two parts
Rest of labels
number of reminding labels
Labels per customer
label print per customer
From
label print from
To
label print to
Department
when using transactions KUS, KES, KEP, KLI and
GEB, an entry in this field serves as a search criterion.
Imprint
Input:
For transactions KES or KEP:
K = customer number
A = contact name
KA or AK = 1st customer number 2nd contact name
blank = customer address only
For transaction KLI:
T = telephone list
blank = address list
PL = list of CR numbers with non-automatically system
generated postal codes.
discount-notice
printing of a discount and bonus notice on sales
receipts
Button: Display additional
Data
display a mask with further data
Button: Close additional
data
close the submask
Customer data
Field
Explanation
Name 1
form of address and title (if applicable)
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
439
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Field
Name 2
User Guide
Explanation
when using transactions KUE for the creation of:
1.
2.
Individual Customer Number: NAME field =
Customer Name
Collective Customer Number: NAME field =
DIVERSE
when using transaction KUS:
•
customer name:
•
a part of the customer name and '.' only
Address data
customer address data in desired form.
Cust type
select P for private customers or O for fiscal unit or F
for corporate customers
P is set as default
VAT Reg. No
You can store the corresponding VAT Registration
Number for each corporate customer or the two-letter
ISO country code.
Note:
No entry for private customers (P)!
Germany
VAT Reg No or DE for German corporate customers
EU countries
VAT Reg No for corporate customers
Two-letter ISO country code for non-EU countries
(e.g. CH for Switzerland)
Contact
name of the contact person at the customer.
Sorting-name
customer name that will be used as a search criterion
when using transactions KUS and KLI
Account owner
Bank code / BIC
bank code or BIC number
Account no. / IBAN
bank account or IBAN number
Bank
name of the customer's bank.
Closing
date from which invoices should no longer be issued to
the customer in the form: DDMMJJ (D = Day, M =
Month, Y = Year).
Credit limit
customers credit limit (no decimals). information is for
your own use only.
Advance
maximum 2 digit number of countdown days to the
delivery of travel documents before commencement of
travel.
Delivery type
P = Postal Delivery.
desired delivery method or leave blank.
440
Processing office
code of the individual travel agency that handles
(services)the customer's account. Alphanumeric
characters are allowed.
Corporate group
pre-assigned code for corporate group consolidation.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Company ID
numerical code, required only when cooperating with a
computer service center (may be used for
consolidation purposes, for example).
CI ID
collective invoice code.
OPL ID
pre-assigned code (only necessary if processed
through a computer service center).
FOP
code for the form of payment agreed upon with your
customer.
REF
Amadeus reference number
1 - 100 for the processing of collective customer
invoices for a given Amadeus Reference Number.
Note
any desired customer information you wish to enter
Recording customer data
You can:
•
record customer numbers for single customers (e.g. company or private
customers)
•
record bulk customer numbers ( for example DIVERSE)
•
enter additional customer data
Recording customer number for individual customer
Requirement:
The customer is a regular customer, for whom you issue sales receipts.
1. Enter the action code KUE.
2. Enter the Customer no.:
Note:
The customer number has 6 digits and must be entered freely
defined in the first part of the Customer no. field. If you are working
together with a service data center, the customer numbers are
grouped. Please contact your accounting department.
3. Enter the form of Address: the corresponding title or part of the customer
and the name respectively into the name 1 and 2 field.
4. Enter the Name.
5. Enter the Sorting-name, which is to be used in the sorting and selection
function.
Caution: To transfer the surname and first name into the TOMA mask
correctly, the Name/First name (e.g. Meier/Hans) must be recorded.
This ensures the surname and first name are successfully
separated for the allocated fields in the Amadeus Tour Market
accounting information.
Note:
If this field is left empty, the entry in the name field is used by
default for the sorting and selecting function. In the case of several
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
441
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
entered names, the name to be used can be identified with an
(asterisk) at the end of the name.
6. Enter optional additional entries.
Note:
You can input additional entries. See Mask description, if you need
more information.
7. Press Enter.
Recording bulk customer number in KD
Requirement:
You want to create credit sale receipts for customers, for whom you haven't
recorded an individual customer number.
1. Enter action code E for recording customer data.
2. Enter the Customer no.
Note:
The customer number has 6 digits and must be entered freely
defined in the first part of the Customer no. field. If you are working
together with a service data center, the customer numbers are
grouped. Please contact your accounting department.
3. Enter the Name: DIVERSE.
4. Press Enter.
Entering additional customer data in KDP
You can record additional data for a specific customer, e.g. company credit card.
1. Record customer data.
2. Enter the action code E.
3. Enter the customer number.
Note:
Input the customer number under which the customer is entered, in
the first part of Customer no.. In the second part of Customer no.
the KDP number. Additional customer data are saved under the
KDP numbers 99991-99993.
4. Enter the additional data.
5. Press Enter.
Displaying number ranges KD
You can display the customer number ranges.
1. Enter action code NKD.
2. Press Enter.
Changing number ranges KD
You can change the number ranges. The system then automatically allocates the
customer numbers.
1. Enter action code: NKA.
The number ranges can now be overwritten/changed, as desired.
442
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
2. Press Enter.
Editing customer data
You can:
•
display data
•
search data
•
change data
•
deactivate data
•
reactivate data
•
delete data
Displaying customer data
1. Enter the action code D for displaying customer data.
2. Enter in the Customer no field the customer data as 6 digits.
3. Press Enter.
The customer data are displayed.
Searching for customer data
You can display a customer profile, whose customer number you no longer know.
1. Enter the action code S for searching for customer data.
2. Enter the search criteria.
Criteria
complete list according to
customer numbers
overview of a particular
number range
Entry
Display
Customer no. .(Full stop)
list sorted according to
Customer no., Sortingname, Telephone,
Street, City
Customer no. First portion
of a customer number
(max. of 5 digits), incl. lead
zeros, followed by a .(full
stop)
list sorted according to
the number range
entered by you, here
from 140000 to 149999
Example:
14.
complete alphabetic list of
names
SURNAME . (Full stop)
list sorted according to
Sorting-name, Customer
no., Telephone, Street,
City
list according the first letters
of the customer's name
NAME First letter/s of a
customer's name, followed
by a.(Full stop)
list sorted according to
Sorting-name, Customer
no., Telephone, Street,
City, which meet the
criteria
Example:
Muel.
3. Enter in the field Processing office the travel agency's department which is
responsible for the customer. (optional).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
443
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. Press Enter.
A list which accords with the search criteria entered by you is displayed. The
action D is set with by default. You can display the customer data.
Changing customer data
1. Display the customer data.
2. Make the changes.
3. Enter action code KUA.
4. Press Enter.
Caution: Upon changing the customer name, the Sorting-name and Account
owner field must also be changed.
Changing customer number
1. Enter action code KUL to delete the customer number.
2. Press Enter.
3. Enter the action code KUE for recording customer data.
4. Enter the new customer number in the field Customer no.
Note:
The customer number has 6 digits and must be entered freely
defined in the first part of the Customer no. field. If you are working
together with a service data center, the customer numbers are
grouped. Please contact your accounting department.
5. Press Enter .
The customer number is changed. Any possible entered personal data is also
saved under the new customer number.
Deactivate customer data
You can temporarily deactivating a certain customer, as the customer is not able
to pay at this time.
1. Enter the action code KUA.
2. Enter the deactivation date from which the customer is to be deactivated.
3. Press the Enter
Note:
You cannot display any credit sales receipts for this customer, after
the entered deactivation date.
Reactivating customer number
Requirement:
The customer number was deleted on the same day as the reactivation is to be
carried out.
1. Enter the action code KUA.
2. Delete the deactivation date.
3. Press the Enter.
444
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Deleting customer data
1. Display customer data.
2. Enter the action code L.
3. Press Enter.
The personal data entered for this customer number in the KDP mask are also
automatically deleted.
Note:
The data is only on the next day deleted for good. Upon displaying
search lists on the same day, deleted customer data is marked with an *
(asterisk).
Print functions
You can:
•
Print customer labels
•
Print customer list
Printing customer labels
1. Record your customer data.
2. Enter action code KES.
3. Set printing area.
You have the following input options in the From and To fields:
From and To.(full stop)
Customers labels are printed for all customers.
FROM and TO full customer number
Customer labels for the selected area are printed:
FROM and TO Portion of the customer number (max. 5-digits), followed
by a.(FULL STOP)
Customer labels for the selected area are printed.
From and To First letters of the sorting name (max. 5 letters), followed
by a . (full stop)
Customer labels for the selected area are printed.
4. Optional additional entries.
You can input additional entries in the following fields:
•
Rest of labels Number of labels on the label sheet, if less than 8.
•
Labels per customer Number of labels to be printed per customer, if more
than 2
•
Department Travel agency's department, which is responsible for the
customer
Imprint several options:
-
A - Contact is also printed
-
A - Customer number is also printed
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
445
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
-
User Guide
AK - Contact and customer number are also printed
5. Press Enter.
The printer requests Document 20.
Note:
If the receipt is printed with a document printer using Amadeus ProPrinter Software, it is important to insert the receipt within five minutes.
Otherwise, the following message appears: Please activate “Continue
Print-out”.
Printing customer list
1. Enter Action code KLI for printing customer lists.
2. Set printing area:
You have the following input options in the From and To fields:
From and To.(full stop)
A customer list with all customers is printed.
FROM and TO full customer number
A customer list for the selected area is printed.
FROM and TO Portion of the customer number (max. 5-digits), followed by a
full stop.
A customer list for the selected area is printed.
From and To First letters of the sorting name (max. 5 letters), followed by a
full stop.
A customer list for the selected area is printed.
Note:
A maximum of 450 customer data records are printed. If there are
more customer data records, reset the printing area.
3. You can input additional entries in the following fields Imprint T.
The telephone number is printed, instead of the address.
The Processing office department of the travel agency, which is responsible for
the customer.
Only a customer list for this department is printed.
4. Press Enter.
The printer requests blank paper. The customer list is sorted according to
customer numbers or alphabetically, depending on what is entered.
Note:
If the receipt is printed with a document printer using Amadeus ProPrinter Software, it is important to insert the receipt within five minutes.
Otherwise, the following message appears: Please activate “Continue
Print-out”.
KDP - Persons Customer Data
Via the KDP mask you can administer the personal data (e.g. travellers, orderers)
belonging to a customer number, which you have recorded in the KD mask
446
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
You can also:
•
process personal data
•
print personal labels
•
print lists of persons
Mask description KDP
General customer data
Field
Explanation
Action
enter the action code
Customer no
enter the customer number
Type of person
Input: user-defined code for the person
B = Purchaser
T = Traveller
P = Private cutsomer
etc.
Address as
Input:
•
blank (the default value for the ADDRESS LIKE
field is 000).
•
traveller number (001-990)
Number of references
is displayed by the system
Rest of labels
count of remaining labels
Labels per customer
label per customer
From
label print from
To
label print to
Department
Input: Max. 4 character code of the department within
your travel agency serving this customer.
Data from KD
Check Box Field
Imprint
label printout
Input: When using transactions KES or KEP:
blank = traveller's name will be printed under the
company name.
F = As above, but additionally ‘z. H.’ is printed before
the name.
P = travellers name will be printed before the company
name.
Button: Display additional
Data
a submask is displayed
Button: Close additional
data
the submask is closed
Currency
displayed by the system
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
447
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Field
Explanation
Secured
Input:
blank = the currency is not protected and can be
changed in the TV with action X .
checkmark = currency is protected in VERK and TV
against being overwritten/converted
EUR from
Customer data
Field
Explanation
Name 1
prefix, company name if necessary
Name 2
name of the company
Traveller-department
Input: Name of the department in the company in which
the customer contact is employed.
Traveller
name of the Person Travelling
Sorting-name
sort Name for the Traveller (Person)
Street
Land
ISO country code
PC (Street)
postal code when entering a street
P.O. Box
postal office box
PC (P.O. Box)
postal code of the P.O. Box
City
Telephone
E-Mail
E-mail address field allows up to 60 letters
Fax
Mobile
Date of birth
date of birth in the form DDMMYY (D = Day, M Month, Y - Year)
Smoker
checkmark, if the customer wishes a smoker seat
Nationality
citizenship of the customer.
Type
service (Complimentary)
Number
1 to a maximum of 9999
quantity of flight or other transportation time-tables to
ship.
448
Processing office
code of the individual travel agency that handles the
customer's account. Alphanumeric characters are
allowed.
Data from KD
check box field.
Service provider
service provider code
Class
desired class of service with service provider.
Seat
seating Preference
Status
status of person with service provider
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
Exclusive
Credit card
credit Card Company (2 character abbreviation)
Credit card no.
maximum 16 digit credit card number.
Expiration date
expiration date of the credit card
Exclusive
BahnCard no.
Bahncard number (German Rail discount card) of the
traveller, entry is for your information only.
GKR-no.
entering DB major-customer discount number
Note
desired remarks relating to the customer information.
Processing personal data
You can:
•
display, search, change and delete the recorded personal data
•
display birthday list
Displaying personal data
1. Enter action code D for displaying personal data.
2. Enter the customer number under which the customer is entered, in the first
part of Customer no. In the second portion of Customer no., enter the KDP
number, under which the person is recorded, for example 00001.
3. Press Enter.
The personal data is displayed and the Action field is preset with KUA = Change
personal data.
Search for personal data
You can search for persons, whose KDP numbers you no longer know.
1. Enter action code S for searching for personal data.
2. Enter the customer number under which the customer is entered, in the first
part of Customer no.
3. Enter the search criteria.
Criteria
Entry
Display
complete list, according to
KDP numbers
second portion of
Customer no. (Full stop)
list sorted according to
KDP no., Sorting-name,
Telephone, Street, City
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
449
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Criteria
Entry
Display
overview of a particular
number range
second portion of the
Customer no. part of the
KDP number (max. 4
digits), followed by a.(full
stop)
list, sorted according to
the number range
entered by you
Example:
14.
complete alphabetic list of
names
Name 1: .(Full stop)
list sorted according to
Sorting-name, Customer
no., Telephone, Street,
City
list according the first letters
of the customer's name
Name 1 First letter/s of a
customer's name, followed
by a. (Full stop)
list sorted according to
Sorting-name, KDP no.,
Telephone, Street, City,
which meet the criteria
Example:
Muel.
4. Enter possible additional data:
The Department for the travel agency's department, which is responsible for the
customer and/or Type of person for type of person as an additional limiting
criterion.
5. Press Enter.
A list which accords with the search criteria entered by you is displayed. The
Action field is set with KUD by default. You can display the customer data.
Note:
If you have the wrong customer displayed, you can return to the search
list with Action SF for continuing searching.
Change personal data
1. Display the data.
2. Enter your changes into the desired fields.
3. Press Enter.
Note:
Upon entering the person's name, the Sorting-name must also be
changed.
Change KDP number
1. Display the data.
2. Enter action code L for deleting customer number.
3. Press Enter.
4. Enter Action code D and the old KDP number.
5. Press Enter.
6. Enter the action code E for recording customer data.
7. Enter the KDP number, under which the person is to be recorded, in the
second portion of the Customer no. field.
8. Press Enter.
450
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Delete personal data
1. Display data.
2. Enter action code L for deleting customer number.
3. Press Enter.
Note:
The data is not permanently deleted until the following day. Upon
displaying search lists on the same day, deleted customer profiles are
marked with an * (asterisk).
Display date of birth list
You can display a birthday list.
Requirement:
Your have recorded personal data with date of birth.
1. Enter the action code GEB for display birthday list.
2. Optional additional entries:
You can enter additional entries in the following fields: GEB for the date with
which the birthday list should begin.
Note:
If this field is left empty, the list begins with the current date.
3. Press Enter.
The birthday list is displayed.
Display CC details unencryted
1. Display the data.
2. Enter action code KDC for an unencrypted display of the personal and cc
data.
3. Press Enter.
Change CC details
1. Display the data.
2. Enter action code KDC for an unencrypted display of the personal and cc
data.
3. Press Enter.
4. Modify the cc details.
5. Enter action code KAC for an changing the personal and cc data.
6. Press Enter.
Note:
The action codes KDC and KAC can only performed by travel agents
having the authorization classes 1, 4 and 8.
Recording personal data
You can record the personal dataa which belongs to a customer number (e.g.
traveller, orderer).
Requirements:
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
451
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The following actions are required:
•
Recording customer number for individual customer on page 441
•
Recording bulk customer number in KD on page 442
1. Enter action code E for record customer data.
2. Enter the customer number under which the customer is entered, in the first
part of Customer no. In the second portion of Customer no., enter the KDP
number, under which the person is to be recorded.
Note: If the second portion is left empty, the system automatically allocates
the smallest, free KDP number.
3. Enter the customer's name into the Name 1 field.
4. Enter the Sorting-name, which is to be used in the sorting and selection
function.
Note:
If this field is left empty, the entry in the name field is used by
default for the sorting and selecting function. In the case of several
entered names, the name to be used can be identified with an *
(asterisk) at the end of the name.
5. You can enter additional entries in the following fields:
Field
Explanation
Type of person
Type of person (e.g. R = Traveller, G = Managing
director, U = Sub-agent, B = Purchaser )
Note: The Type of person: U = Sub-agent and V =
Suppress LTR info can be set up under the
KDP no. 99991.
Name 1
company's name, if different from that belonging to the
customer number
Traveller-department
travel agency's responsible department
sorting name
company's contact, if different from the customer
number
Street
street address
PC (P.O. Box)
postal code of post-office box
PC (Street)
postal code of the street address
P.O. Box
post-office box
City
city
Telephone
person's telephone number
Telex
person's telex number
Fax
fax number
Mobile
mobile telephone number
Date of birth
date of birth
S/N
S = Smoker / N = Non-smoker
Note:
452
This field is called Smoker? within Amadeus
Vista. A check mark is set by clicking the
field. You therewith indicate within Vista, that
the customer is a smoker.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Explanation
VERJ
Nationality
nationality (e.g. D for German)
Type
type of services
Number
number of services
LTR
service providers Entry of the service provider
abbreviation
Class
class (e.g. C for Business, 1 for 1st Class)
Seat
seat (e.g. A for Aisle, W for Window)
Status
customer's status with the service provider
Exclusive
The following options are possible:
FLUG = The data is displayed in the first item when
processing an order in Amadeus German Local
Content
BAHN = The data is only displayed when processing
orders in DB procedures
Credit card
credit card company
Credit card no.
credit-card number
Expiration date
the credit card's expiration date in MMYY format
BahnCard no.
16-digit BahnCard number
Expiration date
the credit card's expiration date in MMYY format
GKR-no.
entry of the GKR number
Note
remarks
6. Press Enter.
Recording additional personal data
You can add additional datato a personal profile, which is then transferred into
the sales receipt creation.
1. Click on Display additional data.
2. Press Enter.
The Action field is preallocated by default with KZA for change additional
customer data.
3. Enter the customer's additional data in the following fields:
•
KKS - Customers cost center
•
PROJ - Project no.
•
BEM 1/2 - Remark 1 + 2
•
PERS-NR - Personnel no
4. Press Enter.
5. Exit Additional data: Click on Close additional data.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
453
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
6. Press Enter.
The personal additional data are saved and can be transferred into the sales
receipt creation.
Print functions
You can:
•
Print customer labels
•
Print lists of persons
Printing customer labels
1. Enter the action code KES for printing customer labels/street and P.O. Box.
2. Enter the customer number (Six digits customer number in the first portion).
3. Set the printing area.
You have the following entry options:
-
From and To (full stop)
-
From and To full KDP number
-
From and To Portion of the KDP number (max. 5 digits), followed by a .
(full stop).
-
From and To First letters of the sorting name (max. 5 letters), followed by
a. (full stop).
4. You can enter additional entries in the following fields:
•
Type of person for additional selection
•
Rest of labels number of labels on the label sheet, if less than 8
•
Labels per customer number of labels to be printed per customer, if more
than 2
•
Department Travel agency's department, which is responsible for the
customer
5. Press Enter.
The printer requests document 20. Customer labels for the selected area are
printed.
Printing list of persons
You can print the persons belonging to a customer number as a list.
1. Enter action code KLI for Print customer lists.
2. Enter the customer number (Six digits customer number in the first portion).
3. Set printing area.
You have the following input options in the From and To fields:
454
-
From and To full KDP number
-
From and To Portion of the KDP number (max. 5 digits), followed by a
.(full stop)
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
-
From and To First letters of the sorting name (max. 5 letters), followed by
a. (full stop)
4. Press Enter.
The printer requests a white, blank sheet. The list of persons is printed for the
selected area.
TV - Tour file administration
You can conveniently process and organize all your tour files from the TOMA,
IRIS.plus, RAN masks, including the entire payment processing, in the tour file
administration procedure. Additionally, customized turn-over and booking
statistics provide information about important planning data and profitability
indicators.
The following actions can be performed from within the TV mask:
•
Administration of all tour files in your travel agency
•
Day-to-day deadline administration
•
Selecting from selection lists (files, deadlines) for individual travel agents or
for the whole branch
•
Convenient switching from TV to the corresponding tour booking mask
(TOMA, IRIS.plus) while at the same time transferring the relevant file data
•
Overview of all incoming and outstanding payments
•
Selecting various file index cards for printing
•
Turnover and booking statistics, which can be combined
•
Various evaluation and comparison timeframes for your statistics: monthly,
quarterly, 4-monthly and per calendar year
Requirements for using the procedure
File cards, various lists and customer labels can be printed from the TV mask,
which requires a laser or dot matrix printer or a document printer.
Importing tour files into TV
Find out information about how to automatically import tour files into TV upon
booking and how existing TV files are updated upon rebooking or cancellation.
You can perform the following actions:
•
Importing TOMA file upon booking on page 456
•
Retrospectively importing TOMA file into TV on page 456
•
Importing RAN data into TV on page 457
•
Upgrade existing TV file with a tour booking on page 457
•
Rebook tour booking and import change into TV on page 458
•
Cancel tour booking and import the change into TV on page 459
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
455
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Importing TOMA file upon booking
Aim
Booking a tour file and importing it into TV at the same time.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
•
Performing a booking in TOMA ( )
Proceed as follows
1. Enter Y in the TV field.
2. Complete the booking as usual.
Result
Upon completion of the booking, the file is automatically transferred into TV and
is displayed there.
Note:
The file currency is determined by the first partial performance, i.e.
EUR.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Manually record deposit on page 463
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Retrospectively importing TOMA file into TV
Aim
Transferring an already booked file into TV.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
The following actions are required:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter D into the Action field to redisplay the file.
2. Enter Y in the TV field.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The booking is displayed again and the booking file is automatically transferred
into TV.
Note:
The booking currency is determined by the first partial performance, i.e.
EUR.
To continue
456
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
You have the following options:
•
Manually record deposit on page 463
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Importing RAN data into TV
Aim
Creating a travel registration (RAN) and automatically transferring the data into
TV.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
The following actions are required:
•
Creating travel registration via RAN on page 373
Proceed as follows
1. Enter a T in the Service voucher field to directly change into the TV mask.
2. Enter Y in the TV field.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The TV mask is opened and the data of the created travel registration is
displayed.
Note:
The booking currency is determined by the first partial performance, i.e.
EUR.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Manually record deposit on page 463
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Upgrade existing TV file with a tour booking
Aim
Upgrading an existing file with a further booking from the tour booking masks
(TOMA, IRIS.plus, RAN).
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
Attention:
You have to first display the TV file you wish to upgrade in the TV
mask.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
457
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Proceed as follows
1. Change into the corresponding booking mask and record the new service.
2. Select the Service voucher code T for Print Service voucher and transition
to TV.
3. Enter an E for upgrade in the TV field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U209 File displayed!
The TV file is displayed with the upgraded partial performance in TV.
Note:
The file currency is determined by the first partial performance, i.e.
EUR.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Manually record deposit on page 463
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Rebook tour booking and import change into TV
Aim
Rebooking an existing booking and making sure that the TV booking file is
updated.
Attention:
Rebookings in the IRIS.plus procedure are only updated upon
printing out a travel confirmation in the TV procedure.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
•
The original booking has been transferred into TV.
•
The TV file has not yet been netted, i.e. the partial performance has the
status SE/SA for system-generated.
Proceed as follows
Perform rebooking
1. Change to the respective booking mask with Action code WS and perform
the rebooking.
Pre-set the transfer into TV
2. Select the Service voucher code T for Print Service voucher and transition to
TV.
3. Enter Y in the TV field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
458
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
The following confirmation message appears: U 209 File displayed!
The rebooked TV file is displayed. The respective partial performance is
automatically listed with the new amount, including the rebooking fee.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Manually record deposit on page 463
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Cancel tour booking and import the change into TV
Aim
Cancelling an existing booking and verifying that the TV booking file is updated
and the cancellation fee is included.
Attention:
Rebookings in the IRIS.plus procedure are only updated upon
printing out a travel confirmation in the TV procedure.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
The original booking has been transferred into TV.
Proceed as follows
1. Change to the respective booking mask with the action WS and perform the
cancellation.
2. Select the Service voucher code T for Print Service voucher and transition to
TV.
3. Enter Y in the TV field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U 209 File displayed!
•
The cancelled TV file is displayed.
•
The respective original partial performance is offset posted with a new partial
performance.
•
The new partial performance for entering the cancellation fee is automatically
completed.
Attention:
The cancellation fee applied by the tour operator is not registered
here and has to be manually entered at this point.
To continue
If a deposit was made, this is not automatically offset posted. For the confirmed
deposit, you have to:
correct it and pay the amount to the customer
or
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
459
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
net it against the cancellation fee.
You have the following options:
•
Correct confirmed deposit on page 476
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Process TV file
Typical action procedures that are used in processing TV files are described
here:
•
Change from TV into tour booking procedure below
•
Print TV card below
Change from TV into tour booking procedure
Aim
Changing from the TV procedure into the tour booking mask and transferring the
file number at the same time.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
The partial service must have been transferred into TV via the system (systemgenerated).
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code WS for change to booking mask.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
•
The system changes into the tour booking mask.
•
The necessary booking file data for display is also transferred.
•
The Action code is pre-set for displaying.
To continue
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Print TV card
Aim
Printing file index cards for your file or as customer profile for your customer
index card.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter one of the following into the Action field, depending on what is to be
included on the file index card and its size:
460
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
File index card content
File index card size
Action code
The personal and form of
payment data for the
displayed customer, divided
into two pages
DIN A4
PR4
The personal and form of
payment data for the
displayed customer on one
page
DIN A5
PR5
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
You receive one of the following confirmation messages, depending of the
entered action code:
TV file index card DIN A4 is being printed
TV file index card DIN A5 is being printed
Record TV file
Find out how to manually record a TV file and record travel vouchers for a trip
that has not been booked yet.
•
Manually enter TV file below
•
Enter travel voucher in TV on page 462
Manually enter TV file
Aim
Manually recording a TV file.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
You have the booking data at hand.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code E for record.
2. Enter the currency in EUR.
3. Enter the customer's name and address.
Hint:
If a customer number already exists for the customer, you can enter it in
the Customer no. field. The name and address data are transferred.
4. Enter the trip price in cent.
Example: 150000 for 1500.- EUROS
5. Enter the form of payment (if necessary).
Form of payment:
For payments by credit card, bank transfer or direct debit, enter the desired form
of payment.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
461
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
Note:
User Guide
An overview can be obtained via the field help. To retrieve the help
field, place the cursor in the respective field and press F1.
6. Enter the departure date in the first field and the return date in the second
field (Date of part. perf.).
7. Enter the valid Amadeus code for the organizer or your service data centre's
service code.
8. Enter the file number in to Component no. field.
9. Enter the marketing data.
If you evaluate the marketing data, enter the respective marketing data in the
TRA, Type of travel, Persons, Dest. code and Duration fields.
Note:
Contact your marketing data centre for the relevant entry options.
10. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The message bar displays: Record OK
•
A TV number is entered into the TV booking file's TV no. field.
•
The trip price is listed as a total price and remaining amount.
Enter travel voucher in TV
Aim
Creating a voucher for a trip that hasn't been booked yet, e.g. for weddings, as a
present or a prize for a lucky draw.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code E for record.
2. Fill in the address data section.
Enter the address data of the customer for whom the voucher is to be created,
e.g. the wedding couple's address. Fill in the fields according to the field
descriptions.
Note:
You can enter a maximum of 2 addresses per customer.
3. Fill in the form of payment data section.
Data component
Entry/significance
Amount and form of payment
Enter the amount in cent, e.g. 3200, - EUR and enter
the form of payment ID for non-cash payment.
Sales code
Code: 9981 for Deposit
Note:
Remarks line
You can leave the code empty, as the
default is Code 9981.
You can enter remarks about the booking here.
4. Fill in the target date section.
5. Activate the pre-set target dates, which you want to transfer into your target
date administration, by deleting the * (asterisk) following the target date.
462
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
6. Enter the description and the target date for additional target dates, e.g. the
wedding.
Note:
You can set up to 50 target dates per TV file.
7. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: Record OK
•
A TV number is entered into the TV booking file's TV no. field.
•
The recorded deposit is allocated a partial performance (partial service)
number.
•
The deposit is displayed in the Payment data section as recorded but not yet
receipted.
•
The activated target dates are transferred into the target date administration.
To continue
1. Receipt the deposit as described under "Receipting manual deposit via the
system". However, enter a P for verify in the Sales receipt field instead of
sales receipt!
2. Then overwrite the customer address (e.g. wedding couple), transferred from
TV with the customer data of the paying customer.
3. Create the sales receipt.
Payment transactions
The payment transactions between TV and VERK is described here, so that your
Amadeus accounting is always accurate.
•
Manually record deposit below
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV on page 464
•
Manually confirming a deposit on page 465
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
•
Manually return a partial service without cancellation fee on page 466
•
Manually return a partial performance with cancellation fee on page 467
•
Enter cancellation fee after return on page 468
Manually record deposit
Aim
Recording a deposit in a TV file.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
463
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
2. Enter the partial performance number of the partial performance to which the
deposit applies in the Partial perf. field.
Tip:
You can only leave the Partial perf. field empty in a TV booking file.
3. Enter the Service code 9981 for deposit.
Tip:
Default is deposit-code 9981 and can therefore remain empty.
Attention:
Only Code 9981 is valid for deposits, independent of which general sales code
plan you are using. All other deposit codes are registered as services and
increase the total price.
4. Enter the deposit amount in cent, e.g. 10000 for 100.- EUR.
5. If your customer is not paying cash, enter the code for the form of payment in
the Form of payment field.
6. Complete the Order no. and Cost center fields, according to your inhouse
travel agency details (only relevant if you evaluate marketing data.).
7. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U018 Change OK
•
The deposit is recorded and is automatically allocated the next unassigned
partial perf. number.
•
The deposit is given the status ME for Manually recorded.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV below
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Confirm manual deposit via the system in TV
Aim
You have manually entered a deposit in a TV file and wish to issue a sales
receipt for it.
Attention:
If a sales receipt was already created in the VERK mask, the
deposit should not be receipted via the system, as the amount would
otherwise be entered twice in the accounts. The deposit must be
manually confirmed.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the sales receipt type, e.g. K for sales slip.
2. Enter the Action code Q for confirm deposit.
3. Highlight Partial perf. with an X adjacent to the deposit to be confirmed
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
464
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
The following confirmation message appears:
U021 TV OK/R430 Sales receipt is being created
•
The sales receipt is requested at the printer.
•
The deposit's new status is MQ.
•
The printed sales receipt type is displayed in the Receipt field.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) below
Manually confirming a deposit
Aim
You have already created a sales receipt for a deposit in the VERK mask and
now want to subsequently confirm the deposit manually in the TV mask.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
•
You have the sales receipt number at hand.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code QM for manual receipt.
2. Highlight Partial perf. with an X adjacent to the deposit to be confirmed.
3. Enter the Sales receipt number (ID).
Note:
Please refer to the printed sales receipt for the sales receipt number.
4. Enter the date upon which the sales receipt was created in the Partial perf.
field (if on a different day)
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
•
The deposit is given the status MQ for Manually receipted.
•
The remaining amount is reduced by the deposit amount.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) below
Net TV file (remaining payment)
Aim
Your customer pays the remaining amount for a booked trip. You net the
transaction and confirm the remaining amount with a sales receipt.
Note:
If you do not want to net the complete file, you can select several partial
packages by check marking them with an x in the corresponding check
box.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
465
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Pre-set the Sales receipt type, e.g. R for invoice.
2. Enter the Action code V for netting.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U021 TV OK/R430 Sales receipt is being created
•
The sales receipt is requested at the printer.
•
The remainder payment is displayed as a separate partial performance in the
file.
•
The deposit's new status is MV.
•
The printed Sales receipt type is displayed in the Receipt field.
•
The remaining amount is set to zero.
Note:
The remaining amount to be paid is listed in detail on the sales receipt.
This means that the booked travel services (partial services) and the
already paid deposits (if applicable) are netted out.
To continue
The TV file is ended.
Manually return a partial service without cancellation fee
Aim
Returning a partial performance in a TV file without charging a cancellation fee.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
The following actions are required:
•
Display TV file with TV no. on page 469
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code R for return (without cancellation fee).
2. Check-mark the Partial perf. with an X in front of the partial performance to
be returned.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U018 Change OK
•
466
The booked partial performance is returned in the TV file (Status MR).
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
•
The offset posting was been carried out with a new partial performance
(status MX).
•
The total and remaining amount are reduced by the amount of the partial
perf.
To continue
If a deposit was made, this is not automatically offset posted. You must correct
the confirmed deposit and pay the outstanding amount to the customer.
You have the following options:
•
Correct confirmed deposit on page 476
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
See also
Further topics:
•
Manually return a partial performance with cancellation fee below
Manually return a partial performance with cancellation fee
Aim
Returning a partial performance in a TV file and charging a cancellation fee.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
The following actions are required:
•
Display TV file with TV no. on page 469
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code RS for return with cancellation fee.
2. Check-mark the Partial perf. with an X in front of the partial performance to
be returned
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
•
The booked partial performance is returned in the TV file (status MR).
•
The offset posting was been carried out with a new partial performance
(status MX).
•
The cancellation fee is listed as an additional partial performance with the
amount 0+ (zero EURO).
•
The total and remaining amount are reduced by the amount of the partial
performance.
4. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
5. Enter the cancellation fee in cents, e.g. 15000 for 150.- EUR.
Attention:
The cancellation fee applied by the tour operator is not registered
here and has to be manually entered at this point.
6. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
467
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The following confirmation message appears: U018 Change OK
•
The booked partial performance is returned.
•
The cancellation fee is registered.
To continue
If a deposit was made, this is not automatically offset posted. For the confirmed
deposit, you have to:
correct it and pay the amount to the customer
or
net it against the cancellation fee.
You have the following options:
•
Enter cancellation fee after return below
•
Correct confirmed deposit on page 476
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Enter cancellation fee after return
Aim
You have returned a partial performance in a TV file without cancellation and now
wish to retrospectively add a cancellation fee.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
•
The partial performance has been returned (status SX or MX)
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
2. Enter the same four-digit sales code as the returned partial performance in
the Code field.
3. Enter the performance description: CANCELLATION FEE.
4. Enter the cancellation fee amount fee in cents, e.g. 15000 for 150.- EUR.
5. Enter the original departure date of the returned partial performance in the
Date field.
6. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U018 Change OK/ U139 Verify travel/mktg. for new PP (TV)
The cancellation fee is recorded and receives the status ME.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
468
Correct confirmed deposit on page 476
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
Administer TV file
You can perform the following administrative actions:
•
Display TV file with TV no. below
•
Display last file processed in TV below
•
Search for and display TV file on page 470
Display TV file with TV no.
Aim
Displaying a TV file with the TV number.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
You require the TV number.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code D for display.
2. Complete the TV number, e.g. 1020, in the TV no. field.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U 209 File displayed!
The TV file is displayed.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
See also
Further topics:
•
Status codes on page 490
Display last file processed in TV
Aim
You have imported a tour booking into TV and wish to directly display it in TV.
or
You wish to display the last file you worked on in TV.
Note:
The "Quick display" function is activated via the travel agent code (see
, which you enter in the Travel agent field, in the system line.
Related mask
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
469
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code D for display.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears : U 209 File displayed!
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
See also
Further topics:
•
Status codes on page 490
Search for and display TV file
Aim
Displaying a TV file, whose number you don't have at hand.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code S for search.
2. Limit the TV file search according to specific criteria by a:
•
TV file search on the same day
Without a further entry, all TV files you have entered on this day are displayed.
•
TV file search with various optional search functions:
Field
Entry
Significance
Travel agent
empty
The TV files you have
recorded yourself are
displayed. (Travel agent
entry in the system line)
e.g. 0052 (travel agent
number).
. (Full stop)
The TV files of the travel
agent with the number
0052 are displayed (e.g.
in the case of vacation
replacement).
The entire branch's TV
files are displayed.
470
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Field
Entry
Significance
Customer
Customer name in the
following formats:
The TV files which
match the entered name
criteria are displayed.
Schmitt
Schm. (Part of name
followed by full stop or star)
S. (First letter followed by
full stop or star *)
Label code
Label code (can also be
partially entered with a full
stop - see explanation of
name)
The TV files which
match the entered label
code are displayed.
Date of partial perf.
1. Date of partial perf.
(Departure)
The TV files which
match the entered
departure date are
displayed.
Organizer
Organizer code
The TV files that contain
a partial performance
with the entered
organizer code are
displayed.
Type of travel
Type of travel (only if the
Organizer field has been
entered)
The TV files that contain
a partial performance
with the entered
organizer code and the
travel type are displayed
File no
File number of the package.
The TV files that contain
a partial performance
with the entered file no
are displayed.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
•
If there is only one match, the file is directly displayed in TV.
•
If numerous entries match the entered search criteria, a file overview is
displayed.
4. Enter the Action code D for display.
5. Enter an X in the line of the desired TV file.
6. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U 209 File displayed!
The TV file is displayed.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Net TV file (remaining payment) on page 465
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
471
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Travel agent control for TV files
The actions for display, search, deadline administration are controlled by the
travel agent, i.e. the TV file is assigned to the travel agent, who adds the TV or
who has last processed it.
In order to process files, in the case of e.g. holiday replacement, you have to
input the relevant entries.
Travel agent control applies to the following actions:
Action code
Significance
D
Display
S
Search
T
Deadline administration
1. Enter the relevant input into the Travel agent control field (second row):
Action code
Significance
empty
Files and deadline administration are limited to your
personal files. (Travel agent entry in the system line)
e.g. 0052 (travel agent
number).
The files and deadline administration of the travel
agent with the number 0052 are displayed (e.g. in the
case of vacation replacement).
. (Full stop)
The entire branch's files and deadlines are displayed.
Deadline administration
You can note and administer personal deadlines:
•
Retrieve deadline administration on page 473
•
Set deadline below
•
Deactivate deadline on page 474
Set deadline
Aim
Noting a deadline in a TV file and importing it into your personal deadline
administration.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
2. Enter the deadline description in the next empty line of the deadline section,
e.g. send birthday card.
3. Enter the deadline after the deadline description, e.g. 210415.
472
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
4. In order to activate the deadline, the field adjacent to the date must be empty
(no asterisk). If necessary, delete the asterisk with the LZF (delete character
string) key.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Note: You can set up to 50 deadlines per TV file.
Result
The following confirmation message appears U018 Change OK
The deadline is activated and is automatically registered in your personal
deadline administration.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Retrieve deadline administration below
•
Deactivate deadline on page 474
Retrieve deadline administration
Aim
Retrieving your personal deadline administration and processing a deadline.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code T for deadlines
2. Specify the deadline administration by entering a Travel agent number into
corresponding control field if required (second row):
Action code
Significance
empty
Files and deadline administration are limited to your
personal files. (Travel agent entry in the system line)
e.g. 0052 (travel agent
number).
The files and deadline administration of the travel
agent with the number 0052 are displayed (e.g. in the
case of vacation replacement).
. (Full stop)
The entire branch's files and deadlines are displayed.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The deadline administration starting from the current date is displayed. Scroll
through the deadline administration with FORWARD/BACKWARD keys.
4. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
5. Check-mark the deadline by entering an X in the check-box in front of the
deadline.
6. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U 209 File displayed!
The corresponding TV file is displayed.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
473
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Deactivate deadline
Aim
Deactivating a processed deadline and thereby deleting it from the file
administration.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for change(if not pre-set).
2. Deactivate the deadline by entering an * (asterisk) in the check-box after the
deadline.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Tip:
If you would like to deactivate a deadline directly from the deadline
administration, in the Action field, enter: L and check-mark the
respective deadline. The deadline is thereby deleted from the
administration and is automatically deleted in the file.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: U 018 Change OK
The deadline is deactivated and thereby deleted from the deadline administration.
Copy function
Find out here, how to copy partial services within a TV file and how to remove
partial services from a TV file and insert them into another one.
•
Copy partial performance within a TV booking file below
•
Copy partial performance into another TV file on page 475
Copy partial performance within a TV booking file
Aim
Copying a partial performance (partial performance) for a further paying person.
The marketing and travel data is to be imported upon copying.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
•
The new paying person must be recorded.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code ET for copy partial performance.
2. Select the partial performance you would like to copy by check-marking with
an X in the TL/RT field.
The selected partial performance data is copied with the amount 0.- EUR.
3.
474
Record or modify the deposit amount in cent, e.g. 250000 for 2500.- EUR.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Tip:
You can leave this field empty if the amount is the same as that of the
copied partial performance.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U018 Change OK/ U139 Verify travel/mktg. for new PS (TV)
The original partial performance is copied, along with the marketing and travel
data, for the additional paying person.
The deposit's new status is ME.
Copy partial performance into another TV file
Aim
You have upgraded the wrong TV file with a new partial performance, and now
wish to allocate the latter to the correct TV file and import all booking, personal
and marketing data.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
Display the TV file, to which the partial performance was incorrectly allocated.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code KBM for select partial performance to be rebooked.
2. Select the partial performance that was incorrectly allocated to the TV file by
check-marking with an X in the TL/RT field.
3. Press Continue or Enter.
The following confirmation message appears: U255 Package selected
•
The partial performance is saved.
•
The status hasn't yet changed.
•
The total amount hasn't yet been corrected.
4. Display the TV file, to which the saved partial performance is to be added.
5. Enter the Action code KBI for insert partial performance to be rebooked
6. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U256 KBI OK/ U 137 Fill in travel/marketing data (TV)!
The partial performance has been imported into the new TV file with all booking,
personal and marketing data.
The original upgraded TV file displays the following entries:
•
The removed partial performance has the status UB for rebooked.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
475
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
•
The removed partial performance has an * (asterisk) entered in the Partial
perf. field.
•
The removed partial performance is not included when the TV file is netted.
Corrections
Overview
You can easily correct deposits confirmed by mistake, or partial services that
were netted too early or incorrectly upgraded TV files.
•
Correct confirmed deposit below
•
Correct incorrect TV file upgrade on page 477
•
Correct netted TV file on page 477
•
Delete TV file on page 478
Correct confirmed deposit
Aim
Correcting a confirmed deposit.
Note:
Confirmed deposits are corrected in the same way, regardless of
whether the deposit was entered in the booking mask or manually
recorded in the TV file.
Attention:
Upon correcting a confirmed deposit, a sales receipt is always
created. Manual correction is not possible.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
TVZ on page 487
Proceed as follows
1. Pre-set the Sales receipt type, e.g. A for payment receipt.
2. Enter the Action code KQ for correct confirm receipt.
3. Check-mark the partial performance (deposit) that was erroneously confirmed
with an X in the TL/RT field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U021 TV OK/R430 Sales receipt is being created
476
•
The sales receipt is requested at the printer.
•
A separate partial performance is created for the correction of the confirmed
deposit.
•
Both partial performance have the new status MK.
•
The remaining sum is increased by the amount of the corrected deposit.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Correct incorrect TV file upgrade
Aim
You have upgraded the wrong TV file with a new partial performance, and now
wish to allocate the latter to the correct TV file and import all booking, personal
and marketing data.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
Correcting the wrong TV file upgrade by copying the partial performance from the
"wrong" TV file into the "right" TV file. See the action description: Copy partial
performance into another TV file on page 475
Result
The new partial performance is allocated to the correct TV file.
Correct netted TV file
Aim
Correcting a netted TV file and your accounts at the same time.
Attention:
Upon correcting a netted file a sales receipt is always created.
Manual netting is not possible.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
TVZ on page 487
Proceed as follows
1. Pre-set the Sales receipt type, e.g. G for voucher.
2. Enter the Action code KV for correct netting.
3. Check-mark the partial performance that contains the remaining payment
(code 8100) with an X in the TL/RT field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U021 TV OK/R430 Sales receipt is being created
•
The sales receipt is requested at the printer.
•
A separate partial performance is created for the correction of the netting.
•
The remaining-payment and offset-posting partial performances have the
status MK.
•
The remaining sum is increased by the amount of the netting.
•
The posted partial service has the status SA or MA.
To continue
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
477
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
If a deposit was made, this is not automatically offset posted. The deposit has to
be either
corrected and paid to the customer
or
be netted with a new partial performance.
Delete TV file
Aim
Deleting a TV file.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
Attention:
A file can only be deleted if the total price and remaining value is
0.- EUR.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code L for delete TV file.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The TV file is deleted and cannot be displayed anymore.
Statistics
The TV procedure provides a customized statistics overview for your tour files.
For a clear display of the statistics, first define your tour operators as individual
tour operator groups (01-99).
Attention:
To obtain useful statistics, all tour files must be recorded in TV.
The statistical data for the time period of two years, in the past, as well as for the
future (planning) is made available. The system distinguishes between the
following statistical overviews:
•
Booking statistics (Month of booking)
•
Turn-over statistics (Month of departure)
Here you find out how to:
•
Display turnover amount statistics below
•
Display booking number statistics on page 480
•
Print statistics on page 481
•
Processing optional bookings for correct statistics on page 482
•
Display TV file/statistics of an external branch on page 482
Display turnover amount statistics
Aim
Displaying your turnover statistics:
478
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
for a specific time period
or
as total annual overview
or
with the underlying booking figures
Note:
The turnovers are allocated to the travel month (according to the
departure date).
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
All tour files have been imported into TV or manually recorded in TV.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code corresponding to the type of statistic display you
require.
2. Enter the Currency in EUR.
3. Enter the desired time period in the From/To fields, as follows:
Action
code
From
(example)
To
(example)
Significance
U
empty
empty
The current month's turnover statistics
with the comparison figures from the
previous year in decimals and percent
U
0614
1014
The turnover statistics for a time period of
5 months with the comparison figures
from the previous year in decimals and
percent
UJ
14
empty
Annual turnover statistics displayed in full
thousands
UB
0314
empty
The turnover statistics with the underlying
booking figures for the entered month
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U 802 Turnover statistics from xx.xx.xx
Note:
00:00
The message bar always displays the current date and time.
•
The turnover statistics according to your input is displayed in a table:
•
The organizer (tour operator) groups are listed numerically (from 00-99) in
the UG column.
•
The other columns display the turnovers of the requested time period.
•
All turnovers of organizer codes that are not allocated to an organizer group
are displayed together under the turnover group 00.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
479
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
•
User Guide
The turnovers are displayed as rounded-off thousands in the annual
overview.
Attention:
The amounts may deviate because they have been rounded off.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Print statistics on page 481
See also
Further topics:
•
Display booking number statistics below
Display booking number statistics
Aim
Displaying the booking statistics:
for a specific time period
or
as total annual overview
or
with the expected turnovers
Note:
The booking rates are based on the booking month (travel
confirmation).
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
•
All tour files have been imported into TV or manually recorded in TV.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code corresponding to the type of statistic display you
require.
2. Enter the desired time period in the From/To fields, as follows:
480
Action
code
From
(example)
To
(example)
Significance
B
empty
empty
The current month's booking statistics
based on person numbers with the
comparison figures from the previous
year in decimals and percent
B
0614
1014
The booking statistics based on person
numbers for four months with the
comparison figures from the previous
year in decimals and percent
BJ
14
empty
Annual booking statistics, based on
person numbers
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Action
code
From
(example)
To
(example)
Significance
BU
0314
empty
Booking statistics, based on person
numbers, with the expected turnovers for
the entered month
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears.
U 801 Turnover statistics from xx.xx.xx
Note:
00:00
The message bar always displays the current date and time.
•
The booking statistics, based on person numbers, according to your input is
displayed in a table:
•
The organizer (tour operator) groups are listed numerically (from 00-99) in
the UG column.
•
The other columns display the person numbers of the requested time period.
•
All booked person numbers of organizer codes that are not allocated to an
organizer group are displayed together under the turnover group 00.
•
The monthly total person numbers are displayed in the annual overview.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Print statistics below
See also
Further topics:
•
Display turnover amount statistics on page 478
Print statistics
Aim
Printing statistics with date and time details.
Note:
If you work together with a data centre, the statistics are prepared and
provided by the data centre.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Proceed as follows
1. Overwrite the Action code PRU for print turnover stats.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U064 Stats are being printed
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
481
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Processing optional bookings for correct statistics
Find out here, how the TV procedure evaluates optional bookings when they are
converted into fixed bookings or are cancelled.
Description
Data transfer/ Situation
Significance for statistics
Optional booking was NOT
transferred to TV
Bookings (Persons) and turn-over data are registered
once in the statistics.
Fixed booking was
transferred to TV
Optional booking was
transferred to TV
The optional booking was
converted to a fixed booking
in the booking mask
In TV, the files status was automatically adapted.
Bookings (Persons) and turn-over data are registered
once in the statistics.
Optional booking was
transferred to TV
The file is automatically set to the amount 0 (nil) in TV.
No booking or turn-over is registered in the statistics.
The optional booking was
cancelled in the booking
mask
Note:
The file does not have to be deleted.
Display TV file/statistics of an external branch
Aim
Displaying an external branch's TV file or statistics.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
Requirement
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code D for display.
2. Complete the TV number, e.g. 1020.
3. Enter the external branch number, to which the file belongs.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
5. Enter the Action code and the time period in the From/To fields according to
the statistics data you require.
Action description under: Statistics on page 478
6. Enter the branch to which the statistics belong in the Agency/branch field.
7. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The external agency/branch's TV data is displayed.
Validity of TV files
The TV files and TV statistics can only be retrieved within a fixed period of
validity.
482
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Description
Data
Duration
TV file
3 months after travel completion
TV statistics
•
2 years in the past
•
2 years in the future
Thereafter, the data can no longer be displayed.
Tip:
You should print out the personal data from TVP before the validity has
expired. Further information under: Print out file index cards.
TVP
The following can be performed from within the TVP mask:
•
Administration of the recorded personal data
•
Comprehensive information about categorizing your customers
•
Information about recording marketing data for several persons, with a
second address, bank account and credit card information
Requirements for using the procedure
Customer labels can be printed from the TVP mask, which requires a laser or dot
matrix printer or a document printer.
Proceed as follows
Describing the corresponding action procedures:
•
Add personal data in TVP below
Add personal data in TVP
Aim
Adding a personal customer profile to your TV file.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
TVP above
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for change (if not pre-set).
2. Fill in the fields in TVP according to the field descriptions.
Note:
You can record 2 addresses and 4 credit card numbers per customer,
by scrolling in the respective field.
3. Select an address for the sales receipt.
If you have entered 2 addresses for a paying customer, enter the serial number of
the address that is to be printed on the sales receipt in the Billing address (e.g.
02-2 for the 2nd of 2 addresses).
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
483
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
U018 Change OK / U123 Personal data changed
The personal data are recorded in your TV file.
To continue
Attention:
The personal data cannot be requested after expiry . Therefore,
print the personal data as a file index card.
You have the following options:
•
Print TV card on page 460
TVV - Tour operator groups
The following can be performed from within the TVV mask:
•
Customized organization of tour operator groups (up to 99 tour operator
groups)
•
Quick methods to change defined tour operator groups
•
Documentation of all changes with travel agent number, date and time
Proceed as follows
Describing the corresponding action procedures:
•
Record tour operator group below
•
Display tour operator group on page 485
•
Change tour operator group on page 486
•
Delete tour operator group on page 486
Allocate single or several tour operator codes to an individual tour operator group
respectively for your statistical overview. You can change or delete the tour
operator groups at any time.
Record tour operator group
Aim
For clear statistics, define specific tour operator codes in a tour operator group
(turnover group).
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Requirement
You require a sales code plan for your tour operator and service provider.
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code E for record.
2. Enter the in-house description of the tour operator-turnover group in the Tour
operator group field in the name field (2nd field section).
484
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
3. Enter the Tour operator group number.
4. Enter the Tour operator codes in the code table as follows:
•
singly, e.g. 7123
•
as range, e.g. 7123-7130
•
singly, separated by commas, e.g. 7123,7126
Note: The entry options can be combined.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: V250 Record OK
•
The recorded tour operator group is automatically allocated the next
unassigned serial number.
•
All turnovers, registered via the tour operator code in TV, can be retrieved
under the recorded tour operator group and are up-to-date.
•
If you have defined a tour operator code from the tour operator group 00
(zero, zero), it's values are immediately removed from the tour operator group
00 (zero, zero) and allocated to the newly recorded tour operator group.
Note:
You can individually define up to 99 tour operator groups. All turnovers
via tour operator groups that cannot be allocated to a turnover group
but are registered in TV are automatically allocated to the turnover
group 00 (zero, zero).
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Display turnover amount statistics on page 478
•
Display booking number statistics on page 480
Display tour operator group
Aim
Displaying an overview of your defined tour operator groups and displaying the
defined service codes for a tour operator group.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code D for display an overview of all tour operator groups.
2. Enter a . (full stop) in the Tour operator group field (name field).
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
The following confirmation message appears:
V248 Tour operator list displayed
All defined tour operator groups are displayed in a list from 1 to 99, with their
name in full.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
485
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
4. Display a specific tour operator group from the overview by entering an X in
the selection field in front of the desired tour operator group.
5. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears:
V247 Tour operator group displayed
The tour operator group is displayed, along with its defined service codes.
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Display turnover amount statistics on page 478
•
Display booking number statistics on page 480
•
Change tour operator group below
•
Delete tour operator group below
Change tour operator group
Aim
Changing one of the defined tour operator groups.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code A for Change.
2. Change tour operator group by overwriting, deleting or adding to the service
codes and/or the name of this tour operator group.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: V252 Change OK
•
The tour operator group is changed.
•
You can immediately retrieve the statistics for this changed tour operator
group.
•
If you have deleted service codes from the tour operator group, the service
codes' statistics are now included in the tour operator group 00 (zero, zero).
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Display turnover amount statistics on page 478
•
Display booking number statistics on page 480
Delete tour operator group
Aim
486
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Deleting one of the defined tour operator groups.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
Proceed as follows
1. Enter the Action code L for delete exchange rates.
2. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The following confirmation message appears: V253 Delete ok
•
The tour operator group is deleted.
•
The deleted tour operator group's tour operator codes are immediately
allocated to tour operator group 00 (zero, zero).
•
The deleted tour operator group's statistics are immediately included in tour
operator group 00 (zero, zero).
To continue
You have the following options:
•
Display turnover amount statistics on page 478
•
Display booking number statistics on page 480
TVZ
What's this mask for?
The following can be performed from within the TVZ mask:
•
Customized payment processing for every partial performance and every
paying customer (up to 50 items possible)
•
Customized form of payment for every payment procedure
•
Overview of all incoming and outstanding payments for the total procedure,
as well as the individual partial performance packages
•
Simple correction of erroneous transactions
Requirements for using the procedure
Customer labels can be printed from the TVZ mask, which requires a laser or dot
matrix printer or a document printer.
Transactions lists
See:
•
Status codes on page 490
Proceed as follows
Describing the corresponding action procedures:
•
Net several partial performances (remainder payment) on page 488
•
Correct confirmed deposit on page 476
•
Correct netted TV file on page 477
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
487
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Net several partial performances (remainder payment)
Aim
Netting several partial performances.
Related mask
Mask/Dialog window's description:
•
TVZ on page 487
Requirement
The TV file is displayed.
Proceed as follows
1. Pre-set the Sales receipt type, e.g. R for invoice.
2. Enter the Action code V for netting defined partial performance package.
3. Check-mark the desired partial performances with an X in the TL/RT field.
4. Click on Continue or press Enter.
Result
The desired partial performances are netted.
Troubleshooting
There are troubleshooting procedures available for the following system
messages:
U203 Entering a new partial service not possible! Max. reached below
U221 Please check a partial service that has not been deleted and can be
cancelled on page 489
U231 Define destination code in OPT as mandatory field. Please retrospectively
enter in TV. on page 489
U237 KQ only permitted for returning a receipt created with Q (ANZ) on page 489
U241 Correcting the partial performance not possible on page 489
U958 Partial performance start must precede end on page 490
U203 Entering a new partial service not possible! Max. reached
Symptoms
The following message is displayed:
U203 Entering a new partial service not possible! Max. reached.
Possible cause
A partial service is to be entered, even though more than 49 partial services
already exist.
Troubleshooting
A maximum of 50 services can be recorded. Record a new TV file for the new
partial service.
488
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
U221 Please check a partial service that has not been deleted and
can be cancelled
Symptoms
The following message is displayed:
U221 Please check a partial service that has not been deleted and
can be cancelled!
Possible cause
A partial service is to be receipted, corrected or cancelled.
Troubleshooting
Enter an X in front of the partial service that is to be processed.
U231 Define destination code in OPT as mandatory field. Please
retrospectively enter in TV.
Symptoms
The following message appears in the message bar: Define destination code in
OPT as mandatory field. Please retrospectively enter in TV.
Possible cause
The destination code is not recorded in all partial performances.
Troubleshooting
2. Enter Action code D for display.
3. Enter TV-file number into TV No. field.
1. Scroll through Partial performance.
2. Retrospectively enter the destination code if it is missing in Dest. field.
3. Click on Continue or press Enter.
U237 KQ only permitted for returning a receipt created with Q (ANZ)
Symptoms
The following message appears:
U237 KQ only permitted for returning a receipt created with Q
(ANZ)
Possible cause
You are attempting to correct a netted service with Action code KQ.
Troubleshooting
Netted services have to be corrected with Action code KV.
U241 Correcting the partial performance not possible
Symptoms
The following message appears:
U241 Correcting the partial performance not possible
Possible cause
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
489
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
The deposit for an already netted file/partial performance package is to be
corrected.
Troubleshooting
First the netting must be reversed with Action code KV. Only then can the
deposit be corrected.
U958 Partial performance start must precede end
Symptoms
The following message appears:
U958 Partial performance start must precede end
Possible cause
A partial performance is recorded in which the Partial performance end precedes
the Partial performance start.
Troubleshooting
The entries for the partial performance start and partial performance end must be
modified.
Status codes
Overview
490
Status code in the Status
field
EXPLANATION
ME
Manually recorded
MA
Manually changed
MQ
Manually confirmed
MR
Manually returned
MO
Manual open
MX
Manually cancelled
MV
Manually netted
MK
Manually corrected
RV
Manually returned and netted
SE
Recorded in system
SA
Changed in system
SM
Manually changed in system
SX
Cancelled in system
SQ
Confirmed in system
TX
Partially cancelled
TV
Partially netted
TQ
Partially confirmed
XX
Completely cancelled
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Status code in the Status
field
EXPLANATION
XV
Completely cancelled and netted
Lists and Codes
Here you find an overview over codes and lists, useful when working with the
procedures of the German Local Content component:
•
authorization classes
•
Amadeus sales codes
•
sales receipt types
•
exchange document codes
•
commission codes
•
document numbers
•
ISO code
Authorization classes
Access to individual system functions of the German Local Content component
and Amadeus Bahn is controlled via authorization classes.
Class 1:
access to all functions and transactions
Class 2-4:
limited access
Class 8:
allows the administrator to set up and administrate the consultant
numbers
Table: administrative functions
Function
Classes
BELG Document functions
Display saved service vouchers -EXP
1,2,3,4
Display saved service vouchers - Customer
1,2,3,4
Display saved service vouchers - BST
1,2,4
Display open processing numbers EXP -
1,2,3,4
Display printer memory
1,2,3,4
Display prepared documents
1,2,3,4
BSTG/BSTV - Branch master data
Record master data
1
Display branch master data
1,2,3,4
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
491
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Function
Classes
Change branch master data
1
CC - Credit card procedures
1,2,3
DRFO -Continue print-out
Continue print-out
1,2,3,4
Continue print-out without reprint
1,2,3,4
DRST Print controls
Display printer/POS allocation
1,2,3,4
Change ECO printer allocation
1,2
Change document printer allocation
1,2
Change ATB printer allocation
1,2
Activate/Deactivate ATB printer
1,2
Change POS allocation
1,2
Stop printing
1,2,3,4
Return vouchers
1,2,3,4
Reprint protocol
1,2,3,4
Reroute printer memory
1,2
Activate document administration for
ATB/NT
1,2,3,4,8
Electronic TKT on blank paper
1,2,3,4,8
Activate CC receipt printing
8
Deactivate CC receipt printing
8
EXP - Travel agent functions
Record travel agent data
8
Display travel agent data
1,2,3,4,8
Search travel agent data
1,2,3,4,8
Change travel agent name (own)
1,2,3,4
Change travel agent name (others)
8
Delete travel agent data
8
Assign new authorization classes
1,8
Set new password
1,2,3,4,8
Delete password
1,8
OPT -options
Display settings
1,2,3,4,
Change settings
8
SISO -Sign In/Sign Out
492
Sign in new branch
8
Sign in branch
1,2,4
Print branch protocol
1,2,4
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Function
Classes
Sign out branch
1,2,4
Sign in travel agent
1,2,3,4,8
Print travel agent protocol
1,2,3,4
Sign out travel agent
1,2,3,4
Allocate new travel agent code
1,2,3,4,8
Event Tickets
Ticket pre-sale
1,2,3,4
KD/KDP -customer file
Record customer data
1,2,4
Display customer data
1,2,3,4
Search for customer data
1,2,3,4
Change customer data
1,2,4
Delete customer data
1,4
Change customer number
1,4
Print customer labels
1,2,3,4
KURS Currency conversion
Display exchange rates
1,2,3,4
Record exchange rates
1
Change exchange rates
1
Delete exchange rates
1
Conversion function
1,2,3,4
UMS/UMSZ -Turnover functions
Create turnover group
1
Modify turnover group
1
Delete turnover group
1
Display the branch's cash counter
1,4
VERK Creating sales
1,2,3
Document preparation - Back screen
1,2,3,4
ZAEH Counter functions
Display cash counter per agent
1,2,3,4
Display the branch's cash counter
1,4
Display branch's document counter
1,2,3,4
Display ticket counter
1,2,3,4
Set document counter
1,2,3,4
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
493
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Table: touristic functions
Function
Classes
DER Hotel voucher
1,2,3
DER cruise ticket
1,2,3
Neutral travel confirmation
1,2,3
travel registration
1,2,3
TOMA tour operator (organizer)
1,2,3
TUI bookings
1,2,3,4
TUI travel conformation
1,2,3
Table: rail functions
Function
Classes
RAIL mask
1,2,3,6,8
Print final protocol
1
Sales codes 8000-9389
Table: Amadeus sales codes 8000 - 9389
494
Sales code
Service
8000
TOMA test
8002
CEBU Reisecenter
8008
Start Columbus
8009
Sunny Cars
8011
Orbis Reisen
8012
Cuendet
8015
Reiseladen
8016
Unirop Reisen
8017
Intour Reisen
8018
Gruber Reisen
8019
Pegasus Austria
8020
1-2 Fly
8022
Holiday Autos
8025
Taurus
8027
Esco Reisen
8028
Christophorus
8029
Plaerrer Reisen
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
8030
Deutsche Touring
8031
INFOX
8035
Amadeus TVP
8036
Posarelli
8037
Orbis Tour
8039
GTI Tours
8040
Job Tours
8043
ID Riva Tours GmbH
8044
Visit France
8045
Mondial
8046
Werner Tours
8047
Norden Tours
8048
Bentour
8050
Tour operator voucher
8051
Travel voucher
8052
Tour operater credit note
8105
Kipferls Touristik
8106
Big X-Tra
8107
Springer Helios GmbH
8108
Last Minute Fly
8109
1-2 Fly Austria
8110
Thomas Cook Flug
8111
Thomas Cook Reisen
8112
ABC Holiday Serv.
8113
Sultan Reisen
8114
Thomas Cook Indiv.
8115
Misir Sonnenland
8116
DER (SPOK)
8117
DER SPOK HOGU
8118
Blaguss Reisen
8119
Meditour Reisen
8120
Thomas Cook Airline
8121
Ischia Tourist
8122
Keith Prowse GMBH
8123
Steinberger
8124
IFB
8125
Lauda Luftfahrt
8126
Interflug
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
495
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
496
User Guide
Sales code
Service
8128
Discount Travel
8129
TOP Reisen
8130
TUI Austria
8131
1,2 Fly TUI Austria
8132
TUI car rental
8133
TUI Mali MA
8134
TUI Shop SP
8135
TUI Vers VE
8136
HOPO
8137
TFPT
8138
TTSH
8165
Woerlitz Touristik
8166
Germania Express
8167
Easy Way PEP
8168
Bonvia Touristik
8169
Jassu Reisen
8170
Van Der Zee
8171
A-Rosa
8172
Bentour Austria
8173
Sunny Travel Serv.
8174
Royal Holiday
8175
Billigweg.de
8176
Rail Tours Touristik Ges.m.b.H
8177
Gratis Tours
8178
Vetter Touristik
8179
Top Travel International
8180
TUI Nordamerika
8193
AMM Reisen
8194
Aero Flight GmbH & Co Luftverkehrs-KG
8195
Budapest Flug
8196
Touristika
8197
Dig-Tours
8198
Sued
8199
Ontour Touristik
8200
Sunnymar Touristik
8201
Soleil Tours GmbH
8202
Touristik Travel Team
8203
Reisewelt GMBH
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
8204
Costa Crociere
8205
TUI.
Center Parcs.
8206
Tourista
8207
Corendon Touristik
8208
Landal Greenparks
8209
Flycent
8210
Fly Consult
8211
IXEO
8212
MSC
8213
Holiday Jack
8214
Tours N Trips
8215
OTUR
8216
ABC Holding
8217
Richard Eberhardt
8218
Travel Design
8219
MEDIPLUS Reisen
8220
Ferien.de Tourist
8221
Paneuropa Reisen
8222
TUI Mietwagen
8223
Internet Teletour
8224
5 vor Flug
8225
EF-EDUCATION
8226
SUPERSTAR HOLIDAYS
8227
CLUB MEDITERRANEE
8228
KNEISSL TOURISTIK
8230
VASCO TOURISTIK
8231
EURO INTERNATIONAL
8232
TLRT
8233
DGL
8234
DBA
8235
AER TICKET AG
8236
DURAK&REINHARDT
8237
KUMARA REISEN
8238
VTOURS GMBH
8239
TUI 4U GMBH
8240
7TUR
8241
F.T.G. GMBH
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
497
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
498
User Guide
Sales code
Service
8242
NICKOTOURS GMBH
8243
ITSC
8244
HHT
8245
BENTOUR TUERKEI
8246
GES.F.BUSTOURIST
8247
TUI TICKET SHOP
8248
BERLIN LINIEN BUS
8249
PRIMA REISEN
8250
SUN
8251
BUY
8252
ECC
8253
TTIA
8254
TRAV
8255
LMX
8256
CAR DEL MAR
8257
TICKET ONLINE
8258
HOLIDAY UND CO
8259
DER SFS
8260
MISR
8261
NCL
8262
RCL
8263
CEL
8264
CCL
8265
TTW
8266
TCAM
8267
FTI REISEART MIXX
8300
Wikinger Reisen
8302
Phoenix
8305
Meiers Weltreisen
8309
Medina Reisen
8310
Marco Polo
8311
Marco Polo
8312
Studiosus Gruppen
8313
Klingenstein
8314
SGR Tours
8315
ACS Touristik
8316
ETS
8317
Transocean Tours
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
8350
Mastercard (Flug)
8353
Visacard (Flug)
8354
AM. Express (Flug)
8355
Airplus (Flug)
8380
AX TC
8381
AX Sort
8382
AX Range WK
8383
AX Fee
8388
AX Travel Money
8402
LMS Reisen
8404
MC Flight
8405
Gimmler
8407
Takis Haus
8409
Cormoran
8411
Hermes Tour
8413
Sunmed
8414
NEES Reisen
8415
Sachsen Anh. Tours
8452
Islandtours
8454
Reisewege Tourist.
8455
Schumann Reisen
8456
G. Schoener
8457
Wolters Bus
8458
AIR CONS.
8460
KD DEUTSCHE FLUSS
8465
DIRECT TRAVEL LINE
8466
Glauch Reisen
8467
Dr.Tigges
8468
DEMED
8469
DELPHIN TOURISTIK
8470
Vacances
8471
Ibero Tours
8472
Sun Promotion
8473
LUXAIR
8474
LUXAIR METRO
8475
Falk Autoreisen
8476
Gebeco
8477
TEAMBUS
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
499
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
500
User Guide
Sales code
Service
8478
MALTA DIREKT REISEN
8479
Beach Bus Touristik
8480
Öger Türk Tur
8482
ATT FLUGDIENST
8483
FOXTOURS Reisen GmbH
8485
FREIZEIT Reisen
8486
WEICHERT Reisen
8488
JAHN REISEN
8489
TJAEREBORG REISEN
8500
Mastercard
8503
Visacard
8504
American Express
8520
Mastercard (DB)
8523
Visacard (DB)
8524
AM. Express (DB)
8560
MK Customer
8561
MK employee
8850
SNCM
8851
SCANDLINES
8852
HELLENIC ED.
8856
EUROTUNNEL
8857
VIKING INE
8858
FINNLINES
8859
JADROLINIJA
8860
COMPANIE TUNISIENNE NAV.
8861
ANEK LINES
8898
FERRY VOUCHER
8899
STORNO FERRY VOUCHER
8900
ALAMO CAR VOUCHER
8901
AVIS CAR VOUCHER
8902
BUDGET CAR VOUCHER
8905
EUROPCAR CAR VOUCHER
8906
HERTZ CAR VOUCHER
8908
SIXT CAR VOUCHER
8909
National Car VOUCHER
8930
ALAMO AUTOVERM. VOUCHER
8931
AVIS AUTOVERM.
8932
EUROPCAR AUTOVERM.
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
8933
HERTZ AUTOVERM.
8934
BUDGET
8940
CRS HOTEL BOOKING
8941
CRS CAR BOOKING
8942
LH-PAY-AS-YOU-FLY
8943
LOW COST CARRIER
8964
ETKT RETURN.DOM.
8965
ETKT VOID DOM
8966
ETKT RETURN.INT.
8967
ETKT VOID INT
8976
EMCO RET. DOM.
8977
EMCO VOID DOM
8980
EMCO RET. INT.
8981
EMCO VOID INT
8992
FLUG VOID. no VAT
8997
REGIEERTRAG CC
8998
REGIEERTRAG w/o VAT
8999
REGIEERTRAG
9000
TUI
9001
TUI BALEAREN
9002
TUI CANAR
9003
HIT FLUG
9004
TUI SPAIN/PORTUG
9005
TUI CITIES
9006
TUI GREECE/CYP.
9007
TUI NORTH AMERICA
9008
TUI FREEWORLD
9009
TUI ITALY/MALTA
9010
TUI TAKE OFF
9011
TUI TUN./MAUR./TUER
9012
TUI RENTAL CAR
9013
TUI
9014
TUI EAST. EUROPE
9015
TUI CENTRAL EUROPE
9016
TUI SWISS
9017
TUI ROBINSON
9018
TUI FAR
9019
TUI HIT Rail
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
501
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
502
User Guide
Sales code
Service
9020
TUI HIT Hotel
9021
I.A.V.REISE QUELLE
9022
TUI KUREN/VITAL
9023
TUI STUDY TRIPS
9024
TUI STUDY TRIPS
9025
TUI GROUP TRIPS
9026
TUI
9027
TUI
9028
TUI
9029
TUI GERMANY
9031
TUI TRAINING
9032
TUI
9033
TUI
9034
TUI
9035
TUI
9036
TUI
9037
TUI
9040
AIRTOURS INTERN.
9041
Take Off
9042
Selfmade Tours
9044
TSG TOBIAS BUS
9046
Eberhardt Travel
9047
HAFERMANN
9048
TOUR.ZENTR.HAMBURG
9051
DER (TOUR)
9054
DER (HRS)
9055
DER (Parc)
9056
DER (Trend)
9057
CLUB MEDITERRANEE
9058
DER (ATS)
9059
DER (ADAC)
9060
ABR (Stae)
9061
ABR (Stae)
9062
ABRES
9063
ABR (Tour)
9064
ABR (Baed)
9065
ABR (Info)
9066
ABR (True)
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
9067
ABR (Perl)
9068
ABR (ITAF)
9069
ABR (ItaH)
9085
REISEFORUM TOUR.
9087
PANORAMICA TOUR.
9089
SCHMETTERLING
9090
Best Vertrieb
9091
Seeadler (SAIL)
9092
SEEADLER (AIR)
9100
WOLTERS
9105
INTERHOME
9107
SOLEMAR
9110
CONDOR FLUGDIENST
9117
Der Reisespezialist
9121
LTU Plus
9125
SONNENREISEN
9127
TVS ZARTMANN
9129
LTU Plus
9130
ITS Bahn
9131
ITS Auto
9132
ITS Flug
9133
ITS PKW
9134
ITS Fewo.
9135
ITS
9136
ITS BILLA
9143
Jahn Reisen
9145
JAHN REISEN
9147
SCHAUINSLAND BUSR.
9148
FROSCH TOURISTIK
9149
MWR WELT HOGU
9150
BETTENB. AUSTRIA
9160
BERLINER FLUGRING
9161
AIR BERLIN
9170
JET Reisen Air
9171
JET Reisen Automobile
9173
Air Marin/NUR
9175
NUR Touristik
9176
NUR Touristik
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
503
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
504
User Guide
Sales code
Service
9177
NUR Touristik
9178
NUR Touristik
9179
NUR Touristik
9180
NUR Touristik
9181
NUR Touristik
9182
Aldiana
9184
NUR Touristik
9185
NUR Touristik
9186
NUR Touristik
9187
NUR Touristik
9188
NUR Touristik
9189
NUR Touristik
9190
TERRA REISEN AUST.
9210
Air Marin
9212
AIR CHARTER MARKET
9215
African Safari Club
9216
HOTLINE FERIEN
9218
FIT REISEN
9219
S. AFRICAN AIRWAYS
9220
AIR CONTI
9221
UFO AUST
9240
AMEROPA
9250
ALLTOURS
9261
ADAC / NUR
9266
VIKING KREUZFAHR
9270
AIDA
9271
Festival Kreuzfahrt
9272
DFDS SEAWAYS
9273
SILJA LINE
9274
TRASMEDITERRANEA
9275
COLOR LINE
9276
IRISH CONTINENTAL
9278
SUPERFAST FERRIES
9280
ATT TOURISTIK
9282
STUDIOSUS
9285
HELLAS ORIENT
9288
OLIMAR FLUGREISEN
9291
OFT REISEN
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
9292
YUGOTOURS
9293
INA TOURS
9294
PLUSPUNKT REISEN
9295
CLUB MALTA
9297
BG TOURS
9302
TOUROPA AUSTR STAE
9310
PEGASUS
9320
MERIDIAN
9330
KUONI
9350
FLUGTOURISTIK
9360
ASTROPA
9370
NECKERMANN AUSTRIA
9380
ITAS
9381
PACO
9382
Belmondo
9383
TOPICS
9382
TOPICS
9385
GULET REISEN
9386
SERVICE ENTGELT
9387
STORNO SERVICEENT.
9388
STORNO SER.ENT.BAR
9389
SERVICE ENTG.BAR
Sales codes 9400-9998
Table: Amadeus sales codes 9400-9998
Sales code
Service
9403
MCO incl. VAT
9405
MCO INTERNATIONAL
9407
AIR VOID Domestic
9408
AIR VOID Inter
9411
EMCO DOMESTIC
9413
EMCO INTERNAT.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
505
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
506
User Guide
Sales code
Service
9415
E TICKET Domestic
9416
E TICKET Internat.
9420
VOID PREVERK.FEE
9421
CANCELLATION FEE KART
9450
THUERINGER LV
9500
ALLKAUF
9505
METRO FINANZ+SERV.
9510
CARRERA
9520
BUCHER REISEN
9550
ABR (Stae)
9551
ABR (Info)
9560
Aero Lloyd
9561
Aero Lloyd
9570
HAPAG LLOYD Kreuzf.
9571
HAPAG LLOYD Flug
9572
HAPAG LLOYD Kreuzf.
9582
DR. WULFS FERIENH.
9583
HANSA TOURIST
9584
INTER CHALET
9586
NOVASOL FERIENH.
9590
JUGENDTOURIST
9600
EUROCARD
9602
Diners Club
9603
Visacard
9604
American Express
9605
AIR PLUS
9606
JCB CARD
9620
EUROCARD (DB)
9622
DINERS CLUB(DB)
9623
VISA CARD (DB)
9624
AM.EXPRESS (DB)
9625
AIR PLUS (DB)
9626
JCB CARD (DB)
9640
ELECTRONIC CASH
9641
OLV
9642
ELV
9643
VOID AMADEUS CASH
9644
Paybox
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
9645
BANK COLLECTION
9646
MLV
9650
DER (Fern-HOGU)
9651
DER (TOUR-HOGU)
9652
DER (SPO-HOGU)
9653
DER (STAE-HOGU)
9654
DER (FEWO-HOGU)
9655
DER (ABC-HOGU)
9656
DER (ATS-HOGU)
9657
DER (CMED-HOGU
9658
DER (SONN-HOGU)
9659
DER (EXPO-HOGU)
9660
DER (ADAC-HOGU)
9670
ERV JAHRESVERS.
9671
INGOSSTRAKH VERS.
9672
Polizei Versicherung
9673
ELVIA AUSTRIA VERS.
9675
ERV POLEN VERS.
9676
REISEVERSICHERUNG
9677
ERV POLEN VERS.
9678
Union Reiseversicherung
9679
ELVIA AUSTRIA AMA
9680
DELTA REISEN
9681
EUROP.VERSICHERUNG
9682
KREDIT AMA INSUR
9683
KREDIT AMA INSUR
9684
ERV ÖSTERREICH
9685
ELVIA VERSICHERUNG
9700
RETURN TOURING
9703
RETURN BLB
9707
RETURN CONNEX
9708
RETURN CIPOLLA
9715
RETUR.CONX o.RES.
9716
RETURN.RES.CONX
9723
VOID BLB
9727
CANC. FEE CONNEX
9728
VOID FEE CIPOLLA
9735
CONX Ticket w/o Res
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]amadeus.com
507
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
508
User Guide
Sales code
Service
9736
CONX Reservation
9737
CONX Ticket
9738
Cipolla Ticket
9740
NAZAR REISEN
9741
MEDITOUR
9744
NOVASOL A/S
9745
CLUB BLAUES MEER
9747
OEGER TOURS
9753
ATTIKA REISEN
9758
UNIVERS BUSREISEN
9763
TRD REISEN
9764
REISEPARTNER INT.
9767
CHERDO ARMORIC
9771
SCHAUINSLAND
9772
DANSOMMER
9773
DANCENTER
9777
HELIOS REISEN
9784
TISCHLER REISEN
9789
SACHSEN IDEALTOURS
9790
TROLL TOURS REISEN
9791
RAINBOW TOURS
9792
SUN TOURISTIK
9795
RUF REISEN
9797
GTI TRAVEL
9798
STELLA EVENTREISEN
9799
SIXT TRAVEL
9900
DOMESTIC RAIL TICKET
9901
RAIL TICKET Intern. (TCV)
9902
RAIL RESERVATION
9903
RAIL TICKET RIT
9904
FEE EXCHANGE/REFUND
9905
VOID ZU/ABSETZ.
9906
ZU/ABSETZUNG
9907
REFUND DOMESTIC
9908
REFUND INTERNAT
9909
REFUND RIT
9911
CREDIT C. LH CITY C
9913
CREDIT CARD
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Sales code
Service
9914
EXCHANGE DOCUMENT
9920
BAHN-TIX DOMESTIC
9921
BAHN-TIX INTERNATIONAL
9922
BAHN-TIX RESERV.
9923
REFUND FEE
9924
BAHN-TIX RIT
9925
BAHN REGIONAL OP. TICKET
9926
REFUND RAIL DOM.
9927
REFUND RAIL INT.
9928
DER SFS VOID FEE
9929
DER SFS FOR. CURR.
9930
DER CRUISE TICKET
9931
DER HOTEL DOMESTIC
9932
DER HOLIDAY FLAT
9933
DER ABC PROGRAM
9934
ABR HOLIDAY FLAT
9936
DER HOTEL INT.
9937
EVENT TICKET
9938
PREPAYMENT FEE
9939
VOID EVENT
9940
AIR TICKET DOMESTIC
9941
AIR TICKET INTERN.
9944
FLIGHT RET. Domestic
9947
AIR TICKET CANCELLATION FEE
9948
FLIGHT REF. INT.
9950
EUROP.VERSICHERUNG
9951
HANSE MERKUR
9952
PATRIA VERSICHER.
9953
ELVIA VERSICHERUNG
9954
ERV AUSTRIA
9955
OWN EVENT
9956
COMM. OWN EVENT
9957
REF.OWN EVENT
9958
SYSTEM FEE
9959
SYS.FEE.REFUND
9963
BERLIN LINIENBUS
9970
AVIS AUTOVERM.
9971
HERTZ AUTOVERM.
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
509
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Sales code
Service
9972
EUROPCAR AUTOVERM.
9973
SIXT AUTOVERMIET.
9974
RENTAL VEHICLE
9975
CAR RENTAL
9976
CAR RENTAL
9977
CAR RENTAL
9978
CAR RENTAL
9979
CAR RENTAL
9980
Touristics
9981
DEPOSIT
9982
DEPOSIT (NON-CASH)
9983
COM.REF.OWN EVENT
9986
COMM W/O VAT
9991
IT REISE
9992
COMMISSION
9993
VAT ON COMMISSION
9994
COMMISSION
9995
COMMISSION
9996
COMMISSION Flight
9997
COMMISSION DB/DER
9998
COMMISSION TOUR
Sales receipts types
The following types of sales receipts are available:
510
sales receipt code (entry in
the field Sales receipt
explanation
document ID
K
Sales slip - cash sales
receipt
17 / 18
A
Payment receipt - refund
receipt for cash
payments
17 / 18
R
Invoice
17 / 18
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
sales receipt code (entry in
the field Sales receipt
explanation
document ID
G
Credit note - Return
voucher for sales on
credit
17 / 18
L
Delivery slip
17 / 18
S
Void delivery slip - return
voucher for delivery slip
17 / 18
N
Proof of delivery - the
actual sales receipt is
created at a later point
17 / 18
V
Prepayment - used for
deposits
17 / 18
Q
Receipt - cash sales
receipt
17 / 18
Only the total amount for
all the items of a
processing number is
printed on the receipt.
I
Internal receipt - cash
sales receipt
Exchange document code
When manually recording air tickets for
•
a changed air ticket
•
an air ticket charged to a credit card
•
a conjunction ticket
a code must be entered into the UD field of the VERK mask.
Table: Overview of exchange codes
code
explanation
01
newly issued airline ticket
10
airline ticket accepted as payment
11
UATP/Airplus
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
511
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
512
User Guide
code
explanation
12
American Express
13
Bank of America
14
Visa
15
Carte Blanche
16
Diner's Club
17
Eurocard
18
Standard Bank
19
Master Card
20
Access
21
Warrant GR
22
Warrant UN
23
Pay Later Plan
24
Lufthansa
25
Single GTR program
26
En Route (Air Canada)
27
Lufthansa major customer subscription
30
miscellaneous documents
40
Conjunction ticket
41
Conjunction - with exchange ticket
55
prepaid ticket
70
Special ticket no (e.g. only 6 characters)
90
Tour code (IT or group code)
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Commission codes
Services, for which you pay a commission to other parties, have to be tagged with
a commission code in the C field.
Instead of the code you can also define the commission in the Payable
commission in % field of the VERL mask.
A modification or deletion in the C field is no longer possible once a proof of
delivery (Sales receipt type: N) with this commission code has already been
printed.
Table: payable commissions: 0,5% - 27%
payable commission
entry in Commission field
0,5
+
1
*
1,5
0
2
1
2,5
2
3
3
3,5
4
4
5
4,5
6
5
7
5,5
8
6
9
6,5
A
7
B
7,5
C
8
D
8,5
E
9
F
9,5
G
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
513
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
514
User Guide
payable commission
entry in Commission field
10
H
10,5
J
11
K
11,5
L
12
M
12,5
N
13
O
13,5
P
14
Q
14,5
R
15
S
15,5
T
16
U
16,5
V
17
W
17,5
X
18
Y
18,5
Z
19
!
19,5
"
20
§
20,5
$
21
%
21,5
&
22
/
22,5
(
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
payable commission
entry in Commission field
23
)
23,5
=
24
`
24,5
,
25
;
25,5
.
26
:
26,5
-
27
#
Document numbers overview
Table: Document numbers overview
Document number
Description/ mask
None
Amadeus laser receipt/ service voucher for printing
travel documents on a laser printer
None
Amadeus envelopes for Amadeus laser receipt/
Service voucher
0
Protocol sheet used in SISO, DBR, REF
17
Multiple sales receipt in VERK
18
Multiple sales receipt in VERK
20
Self adhesive labels in KD/ TOMA
24/0010
Credit card receipts in CC
24/0810
Amadeus cash receipt for handling electronic payment.
Caution: Can only be printed with an accessory
device!
42
RCT2 (Rail Combined Ticket)
51
Travel connections in EVA
60
TUI Travel confirmation in TUI (Iris)/TOMA
70
Travel registration in RAN
750051
Travel confirmation in TOMA
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
515
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Document number
Description/ mask
750060
Security certificate for a travel confirmation 750051 in
TOMA
76
Amadeus air ticket in TOMA
81/001
Travel itinerary (PRI/PRH)
87
Refund notice in REF
88
Universal Credit Card Charge Form (UCCCF) in NT ,
MCO
89
Amadeus car voucher in AVOU
950000
DER ferry ticket in SFS
950010
DER Eurotunnel ticket in SFS
96
DER voucher in TOMA, HOT
Table: Public transportation systems (DB Associates/Verkehrsverbünde)
Note:
516
All tickets for DB associates are to be issued through VERB.
Public transportation systems
document number
Aachener Verkehrsverbund (AV)
6045
Anhalt-Bitterfeld-Wittenberg (ABW)
6045
Augsburger VerkehrsVerbund (AVV)
6049
Biberacher Nahverkehrsverbund (BNV)
60,456,048
Bodenseeverkehr (BSB)
6042
Bodensee-Oberschwaben-Verkehrsverbund
(BODO)
6045
City Bahn Hamburg-Stade (USH)
6042
Donau-Iller-Nahverkehrsgesellschaft (DING)
6045
Gemeinschaftstarif Vorpommern (GTV)
6042
Hegau-Bodensee (VHB)
6045
Heilbronner Verkehrsverbund (HNV)
6048
Hochstift-Tarif (HST)
60,496,050
Ilmtaltarif (ITT)
6042
Karlsruher Verkehrsverbund (KVV)
604,560,466,071
Ludwigsluster Tarifverbund (LTV)
6042
Mitteldeutscher Verkehrsverbund (MDV)
604,560,466,049
Münchner Verkehrs- und Tarifverbund (MVV)
603,660,376,344
Nordhessischer Verkehrsverbund (NVV)
6,043,605,460,566,050
Oberweißbacher Bergbahn (OWB)
6042
Regio Verkehrsverbund Freiburg (RVF)
604,260,456,046
Regio Verkehrsverbund Lörrach (RVL)
604,260,456,046
Regionale Tarifkooperation -Der 3erSchwarzwald/Baar/Heuberg (RTK)
6045
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Public transportation systems
document number
Rhein-Main-Verkehrsverbund (RMV)
60,586,059
Rheinhessen Nahe VG (RNN)
604,560,466,047
S-Bahn Leipzig (SBL)
60,456,049
S-Bahn Magdeburg (SBM)
604,560,476,050
Schleswig-Holstein Tarif (SHT)
6045
Schmalspurbahn Sachsen (SPS)
60,426,049
Tarifgemeinschaft Ortenau (TGO)
6045
Tarifverbund Heidenheim(HTV)
6045
Tarifverbund Tuttlingen (TUTicket)
6045
Übergangsverkehr Lübeck (UHL)
6042
Übergangstarif DING/HTV (ÜT DING/HTV)
60,456,048
Verbund Neckar-Donau (VND)
6045
Verbund Schwäbisch Hall (VSH)
6045
Verbund Tarif Vogtlauf (VTV)
60,476,050
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Bayrischer Untermain
(VAB)
6045
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Freudenstadt (VGF)
6045
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Landkreis Cham (VLC)
6045
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Münsterland (VGM)
6,046,604,860,496,050
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Niederrhein (VGN)
60,486,053
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Stauferkreis (VGS)
6042
Verkehrsgemeinschaft Westfalen Süd (VGW)
60,486,050
Verkehrsverbund Berlin-Brandenburg (VBB)
60,396,040
Verkehrsverbund Bremen/Niedersachsen (VBN)
6304/6305/6306
Verkehrsverbund Großraum Nürnberg (VGN)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Landkreis Passau (VLP)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Magdeburger Umland (MUM)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Mittelsachsen (VMS)
604,260,466,049
Verkehrsverbund Neckar-Alb-Donau (NALDO)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Oberelbe (VVO)
604,260,496,326
Verkehrsverbund Oberlausitz-Niederschlesien
(VON)
604,260,466,049
Verkehrsverbund Ostwestfalen-Lippe (OWL)
60,486,049
Verkehrsverbund Pforzheim Enzkreis (VPE)
604,260,456,046
Verkehrsverbund Region Braunschweig (VRB)
603,860,456,047
Verkehrsverbund Region Kiel (VRK)
60,456,047
Verkehrsverbund Region Trier (VRT)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Rhein-Mosel(VRM)
6045
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
517
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
User Guide
Public transportation systems
document number
Verkehrsverbund Rhein-Neckar (VRN)
60,476,050
Verkehrsverbund Rhein-Ruhr (VRR)
60,356,041,604,860,500,0
00
Verkehrsverbund Rhein-Sieg (VRS)
6090
Verkehrsverbund Rottweil (VVR)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Ruhr-Lippe (VRL)
604,860,496,050
Verkehrsverbund Schwarzwald-Baar (VSB)
6045
Verkehrsverbund Stuttgart (VVS)
630,763,086,309
Verkehrsverbund Süd-Niedersachsen (VSN)
60,456,047
Verkehrsverbund Warnow (VVW)
60,456,050
Verkehrsverbund Westpfalz (WVV)
60,456,047
Waldshuter Tarifverbund (WTV)
6045
Usage:
On these documents you can issue tickets for public transportation systems.
To be purchased from:
Druckerei Loewe Druck und Verlag GmbH
First order for Amadeus Bahn documents:
German rail arranges the distribution of documents (tickets) to travel agencies in
the regions (public transportation systems or networks) or the documents have to
be ordered manually through Amadeus Bahn Document administration (BEVE).
Repeat order:
A repeat order is to be set off through Amadeus Bahn Document administration
(BEVE).
ISO code lists
Here you find an overview about all ISO Codes.
ISO Code List A - K
518
Country
Currency
ISO
code
Afghanistan
Afghan
AFA
Egypt
Egyptian Pound
EGP
Albania
Lek
ALL
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Algeria
Algerian Dinar
DZD
American Samoa
US Dollar
USD
American Virgin Islands
US Dollar
USD
Andorra
EURO
EUR
Angola
Readjusted Kwanza
AOR
Anguilla
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
Antigua and Barbuda
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
Equatorial Guinea
CFA Franc
XAF
Argentina
Argentinian Peso
ARS
Armenia
Dram
AMD
Aruba
Aruba Florin
AWG
Azerbaijan
Azerbaijan Manat
AZM
Ethiopea
Birr
ETB
Australia
Australian Dollar
AUD
Bahamas
Bahama Dollar
BSD
Bahrain
Bahraini Dinar
BHD
Bangladesh
Taka
BDT
Barbados
Barbados Dollar
BBD
Belarus
Belarus Ruble
BYB
Belgium
Euro
EUR
Belize
Belize Dollar
BZD
Benin
CFA Franc
XOF
Bhutan
Ngultrum
BTN
Bolivia
Boliviano
BOB
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
Convertible Mark
BAM
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
519
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
520
User Guide
Botswana
Pula
BWP
Brasil
Real
BRL
British Virgin Islands
US Dollar
USD
Brunei Darussalam
Brunei Dollar
BND
Bulgaria
Lew
BGL
Burkina Faso
CFA Franc
XOF
Burundi
Burundi Franc
BIF
Chile
Chilean Peso
CLP
China
Renminbi Yuan
CNY
Cook Islands
Cook Islands Dollar;
New Zealand Dollar
NZD
Costa Rica
Costa-Rica Colón
CRC
Côte d'Ivoire
CFA Franc
XOF
Denmark
Danish Krone
DKK
Democratic People's Republic of Korea
North Korean Won
KPW
Germany
EURO
EUR
Bermudas
Bermudian Dollar
BMD
Dominica
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
Dominican Republic
Dominican Peso
DOP
Djibouti
Djibouti Franc
DJF
Ecuador
Sucre
ECS
El Salvador
El Salvador Colón
SVC
Eritrea
Nakfa
ERN
Estonia
Estonian Krone
EEK
European Monetary Union Germany, France,
Luxemburg, Italy, Austria, Belgium, Ireland,
Netherlands, Finland, Portugal, Spain
EURO
EUR
Falkland Islands
Falkland Pound
FKP
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Faroe Islands
Danish Krone
DKK
Fiji
Fiji Dollar
FJD
Finland
EURO
EUR
France
EURO
EUR
French Guiana
EURO
EUR
French Polynesia
CFP Franc
XPF
Gabon
CFA Franc
XAF
Gambia
Dalasi
GMD
Georgia
Lari
GEL
Ghana
Cedi
GHC
Gibraltar
Gibraltar Pound
GIP
Grenada
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
Greece
EURO
EUR
Greenland
Danish Krone
DKK
Great Britain
Pound Sterling
GBP
Guadeloupe
EURO
EUR
Guam
US Dollar
USD
Guatemala
Quetzal
GTQ
Guinea
Guinea Franc
GNF
Guinea Bissau
CFA Franc
XOF
Guyana
Guyana Dollar
GYD
Haiti
Gourde
HTG
Herzegovina and Bosnia
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
Convertible Mark
BAM
Honduras
Lempira
HNL
Hong Kong
Hong Kong Dollar
HKD
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
521
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
522
User Guide
India
Indian Rupee
INR
Indonesia
Indonesian Rupiah
IDR
Iraq
Iraq Dinar
IQD
Iran
Rial
IRR
Ireland
EURO
EUR
Iceland
Island Krona
ISK
Israel
New Shekel
ILS
Italy
EURO
EUR
Jamaica
Jamaican-Dollar
JMD
Japan
Yen
JPY
Yemen
Yemen Rial
YER
Jordan
Jordanian Dinar
JOD
Yugoslavia
Yugoslavian Dinar
YUM
Cayman Islands
Cayman Dollar
KYD
Cambodia
Riel
KHR
Cameroon
CFA Franc
XAF
Canada
Canadian Dollar
CAD
Cape Verde
Cape Verdean escudo
CVE
Kazakhstan
Tenge
KZT
Qatar
Qatari Rial
QAR
Kenya
Kenyan Shilling
KES
Krygyzstan
Kyrgyztan Som
KGS
Kiribati
Australian Dollar
AUD
Cocos Islands
Australian Dollar
AUD
Colombia
Colombian Peso
COP
Comoros
Comoran Franc
KMF
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Democratic Republic of Congo
Congolese Franc
CDF
Congo
CFA Franc
XAF
Croatia
Kuna
HRK
Cuba
Cuban Peso
CUP
Kuwait
Kuwaiti Dinar
ISO Code List L - Z
Country
Currency
ISO code
Laos
Kip
LAK
Lesotho
Loti
LSL
Latvia
Lats
LVL
Lebanon
Lebanese Pound
LBP
Liberia
Liberian Dollar
LRD
Libya
Libyan Dinar
LYD
Lichtenstein
Swiss Franc
CHF
Lithuania
Litas
LTL
Luxembourg
EURO
EUR
Macau
Pataca
MOP
Madagascar
Madagascan Franc
MGF
Malawi
Malawi Kwacha
MWK
Malaysia
Malaysian Ringgit
MYR
Maldives
Rufiyaa
MVR
Mali
CFA Franc
XOF
Malta
Maltese Lira
MTL
2008: EUR
Morocco
Morrocan Dirham
MAD
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
523
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
524
User Guide
Marshall Islands
US Dollar
USD
Martinique
EURO
EUR
Mauretania
Ouguiya
MRO
Mauritius
Mauritius Rupee
MUR
Mayotte
EURO
EUR
Macedonia
Denar
MKD
Mexico
Mexican Peso
MXN
Micronesia
US Dollar
USD
Moldova
Moldovan Leu
MDL
Monaco
French Franc
FRF
Mongolia
Tugrik
MNT
Montserrat
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
Mozambique
Metical
MZM
Myanmar
Kyat
MMK
Namibia
South African Rand; Namibian Dollar
ZAR; NAD
Nauru
Australian Dollar
AUD
Nepal
Nepalese Rupee
NPR
New Caledonia
CFP Franc
XPF
New Zealand
New Zealand Dollar
NZD
Nicaragua
Córdoba
NIO
Netherlands
EURO
EUR
Netherlands Antilles
Netherlands Antilles Guilders
ANG
Niger
CFA Franc
XOF
Nigeria
Naira
NGN
Niue
New Zealand Dollar
NZD
Northern Mariana
US Dollar
USD
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Norfolk Island
Australian Dollar
AUD
Norway
Norwegian Krone
NOK
Oman
Rial Omani
OMR
Austria
EURO
EUR
East Timor
Indonesian Rupiah
IDR
Pakistan
Pakistani Rupee
PKR
Palau
US Dollar
USD
Panama
Balboa
PAB
Papua New Guinea
Kina
PGK
Paraguay
Guarani
PYG
Peru
New Sol
PEN
Philippines
Philippine Peso
PHP
Pitcairn Islands
New Zealand Dollar
NZD
Poland
Zloty
PLN
Portugal
EURO
EUR
Puerto Rico
US Dollar
USD
Republic of Korea
South Korean Won
KRW
Reunion
EURO
EUR
Rwanda
Rwandan Franc
RWF
Romania
Romanian Leu
ROL
Russian Federation
new Ruble
Russian Ruble
RUR
Solomon Islands
Solomon Dollar
SBD
Zambia
Zambian Kwacha
ZMK
Samoa
Tala
WST
San Marino
EURO
EUR
São Tomé and Príncipe
Dobra
STD
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
525
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
526
User Guide
Saudi Arabia
Saudi Riyal
SAR
Sweden
Swedish Krone
SEK
Switzerland
Swiss Franc
CHF
Senegal
CFA Franc
XOF
Seychelles
Seychellean Rupee
SCR
Sierra Leone
Leone
SLL
Zimbabwe
Zimbabwean Dollar
ZWD
Singapore
Singapore Dollar
SGD
Slovakia
Slovakian Krone
SKK
Slovenia
Tolar
SIT
2007: EUR
Somalia
Somalian Shilling
SOS
Spain
EURO
EUR
Sri Lanka
Sri Lankan Rupee
LKR
St. Helena
St. Helena Pound
SHP
St. Kitts and Nevis
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
St. Lucia
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
St. Pierre and Miquelon
EURO
EUR
St. Vincent and the Grenadines
East Caribbean Dollar
XCD
South Africa
Rand
ZAR
Sudan
Sudanese Pound
SDD
Suriname
Surinamese Guilder
SRG
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Norwegian Krone
NOK
Swaziland
Lilangeni
SZL
Syria
Syrian Pound
SYP
Tajikistan
Tajikistan Ruble
TJR
Edition 13.0
Chapter 17 Local Content
Taiwan
new Taiwanese Dollar
TWD
Tanzania
Tanzanian Shilling
TZS
Thailand
Baht
THB
Togo
CFA Franc
XOF
Tokelau
New Zealand Dollar
NZD
Tonga
Pa'anga
TOP
Trinidad and Tobago
Trinidad-and-Tobago Dollar
TTD
Chad
CFA Franc
XAF
Czech Republic
Czech Krone
CZK
Tunesia
Tunesian Dinar
TND
Turkey
Turkish Pound; Turkish Lira
TRL
Turkmenistan
Turkmenistan Manat
TMM
Turks and Caicos Islands
US Dollar
USD
Tuvalu
Australian Dollar
AUD
Uganda
Ugandan Shilling
UGX
Ukraine
Hryvnia
UAH
Hungary
Forint
HUF
Uruguay
Uruguayian Peso
UYU
Uzbekistan
Uzbekistan Sum
UZS
Vanuatu
Vatu
VUV
Vatican City
EURO
EUR
Venezuela
Bolívar
VEB
United Arab Emirates
Dirham
AED
United States
US Dollar
USD
Vietnam
Dong
VND
Wallis and Futuna
CFP Franc
XPF
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
[email protected]
527
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
528
User Guide
Christmas Island
Australian Dollar
AUD
West Sahara
Morrocan Dirham
MAD
Central African Republic
CFA Franc
XAF
Cyprus
Cyprus Pound
CYP
2008: EUR
Edition 13.0
Index
3
3270 Command page, 222
displaying history, 227
inline mode, 225
keyboard options, 223
mouse options, 224
panel mode, 226
screen explanation, 223
screen modes, 225
switching to classic Command page, 222
user key buffer, 227
user key buffer input keys, 228
A
Accounting item section
VERK, 400
ACRISS code, 156
Advanced Language Editor
autocomplete, 272, 297
Agency profile, 11
Air
availability search, 37
booking flights using direct access, 39
booking flights using direct sell, 58
direct access, 38
direct sell, 58
displaying Fare Family information, 36
displaying Travel Preference Manager policy
information, 36
fare display, 53
informative pricing, 55
introduction, 35
itinerary pricing, 55
pricing an itinerary, 57
schedule search, 39
timetable search, 41
Travel Preference Manager, 36
Travel Preference Manager policies, 36
upgrade offers, 57
Air fare types
Amadeus, 42
website, 43
Air itinerary
rebooking an upgrade, 58
Air itinerary pricing
pricing modes, 56
All Fares
code-share flights, 45
collapsing a recommendation, 45
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
comparing fare upgrade options, 50
creating offers, 50
displaying details of a Fare Family
recommendation, 45
displaying flight information for a
recommendation, 45
entering traveller and payment information, 53
excluding a website from a search, 51
expanding a recommendation, 45
Fare Families, 44
fare types, 42
filtering recommendations, 48
finding flights, 42
making a booking, 52
offers, 50
one-way fares display, 49
proposing a Fare Family upgrade, 46
recommendations display, 44
recommendations in calendar view, 48
searching for a fare, 43
searching for non-GDS carriers, 51
All Fares modifying your air search options, 47
Amadeus air fare types
searching for, 43
Amadeus Car workflow, 151
Amadeus Cash
back-office functions, 425
noncash payments in the CC mask, 423
Amadeus fare types, 42
Amadeus German Local Content
document preparation, 372
lists and codes, 487
Printing/Documents, 383, 387, 393
Amadeus Ticket Changer. See ATC
Amadeus Tour Market
menu bar, 336
Ancillary services
adding, 74
deleting, 74
Approval code
in the CC mask, 427
Associated profiles, 15
ATC
itinerary changes, 93
overview, 92
reissuing an e-ticket, 93
Australian Visa
accessing, 322
applying for, 322
enquiring about status, 322
overview, 321
[email protected]
529
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
viewing history, 322
Autocomplete
displaying, 273, 298
exiting, 275, 299
selecting a statement, 273, 298
Availability and Fare display
icon explanations, 174
Availability search
finding flights, 37
Available air fares
displaying, 54
B
BELG Document Functions in German Local
Content
displaying service voucher for a processing
number, 384
displaying service voucher for branch, 384
displaying service voucher for travel agent,
384
open processing number for branch with
external services, 386
open processing number for travel agent, 385
open processing number for travel agent with
external services, 386
open processing numbers for branch, 385
printer memory, 383
processing no., 384
receipts, 385
Booking a car, 157
Booking a hotel
overview of booking steps, 130
Booking File
adding a rail trip, 181
cancelling a rail segment, 181, 182, 188
Booking File
adding a ghost segment, 59
adding a passive segment, 59
adding an information segment, 59
closing and saving, 64
creating, 63
opening the Seats and Services Catalogue, 72
overview, 61
retrieving, 64, 169
saving and confirming, 64
Seats and Services Catalogue, 71
sections, 61
switching between a graphical and cryptic
Seats and Services Catalogue, 72
Booking File
adding a rail trip, 183
Booking File
cancelling a rail segment, 183
Booking File
placing in a queue, 241
Booking File
delaying in a queue, 241
Booking inquiry in TOMA, 345
Booking on request in TOMA, 357
C
Calculating service fee via VERK, 412
Campaign code, 173
Cancellation procedures in TOMA, 352
530
User Guide
cancellation after travel documents creation,
350
Cancellation slip
credit-card payment in the CC mask, 428
Cancelling hotel voucher via the HOT mask, 366
Car
adding and removing discount codes, 154
Booking Source, 155
cancelling a confirmed booking, 163
cancelling an unconfirmed booking, 163
confirming a booking, 162
discount types, 155
displaying rate information for Leisure Cars,
152
filtering search results, 158
inclusive rates for Leisure Cars, 152
Leisure Cars Super CDW, 152
making a booking, 157
modifying a booking, 162
registering for Leisure Cars, 152
search filter options, 158
search filters, 157
searching, 153
using the map view, 159
view options, 157
Car Checkout page
entering traveller and payment details, 160
Car e-voucher
issuing, 161
Car e-vouchers
issuing, 96
Catalogue order in TOMA, 341
CC mask, 422
mask description, 422
Changing comment lines via the TEXT mask, 421
Changing data for sales receipt in the BSTV
mask, 380
Changing exchange rates in KURS, 431
Changing travel agent codes in the SISO mask,
377
Command history
displaying, 230, 269
Command page
accessing graphical displays, 217
changing settings, 216
opening, 215
options for switching from, 217
resizing a split screen, 217
reversing a split screen, 217
screen split options, 216
settings, 215
shortcuts, 215
splitting the screen, 216
switching to 3270 Command page, 222
switching to graphic mode, 217
Commission codes in VERK, 509
Company profile, 11
Converting rates in KURS, 432
Corporate programme, 173
Creating a travel registration via the RAN mask,
369, 370
Creating collective invoice in VERK, 408
Creating deposit voucher via the HOT mask, 365
Creating hotel voucher via the HOT mask, 362
Creating hotel voucher with commission via the
HOT mask, 365
Creating IT hotel voucher via the HOT mask, 364
Edition 13.0
Index
Creating sales receipts in VERK, 404
Creating turnover group in the UMSG mask, 433
Credit card
displaying partners in the CC mask, 429
payments for non-airline services in the CC
mask, 426
Credit card approval code, 112
Cross-reference Report, 317
Cryptic Magic
accessing, 203
CUI code, 173
Customer data section
VERK, 403
Customer Request submask in TOMA, 359
Customer-data in the KD mask, 434
D
Daily Report, 313
Deducting deposit payment in the HOT mask,
367
Defining mandatory fields in the OPT mask, 381
Deleting comment lines via the TEXT mask, 421
Deleting exchange rates in KURS, 432
Deleting turnover group in the UMSG mask, 433
Determing data for sales receipt in the BSTV
mask, 379
DFRS - Restart Printer for Service Voucherin
German Local Content
continue print-out function, 393
Direct debit collection submask in TOMA, 360
Display travel agents in SISO mask, 376
Displaying comment lines via the TEXT mask,
421
Displaying current exchange of hotel voucher via
the HOT mask, 366
Displaying data for sales receipt in the BSTV
mask, 380
Displaying exchange rates in KURS, 431
Displaying hotel master data via the HOT mask,
362
Displaying hotel voucher via the HOT mask, 366
Displaying sales data in VERK, 407
Displaying turnover group in the UMSG mask,
434
Displaying turnovers via the UMSZ mask, 429
Document administration via ZAEH in German
Local Content
air ticket block, 396
air ticket block deletion, 397
air ticket block display, 397
airline tickets, 396
ATB coupons, 396
Document preparation in German Local Content
Back Screen, 372
deleting mask content, 373
loading mask content, 373
loading mask content via toolbar, 373
loading specific mask content, 373
saving mask content, 372
saving mask content via toolbar, 373
DRST Print Control Functions in German Local
Content
changing laser or dot matrix printer allocation,
394
changing printer allocation, 394
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
document printer allocation, 394
print stop, 395
printer, 394
printer allocation, 394
printer memory rerouting, 396
protocol reprint, 395
returning vouchers, 395
Duplicate invoice
issuing, 111
Duty code
changing, 8
E
Earlier trains
displaying, 174
EC card
CC mask, 424
Editing customer-data in the KD mask, 439
ELV
CC mask, 424
EMDs
emailing, 94
faxing, 94
manually associating to a booking file, 91
multiple issuance, 86
multiple refunding, 88
printing, 94
refund types, 88
refunding from the Query Report, 318
retrieving, 92
single issuance, 86
single refunding, 88
voiding, 87
voiding from the Query Report, 319
Entering sales data in VERK, 405
E-tickets
emailing, 94
faxing, 94
issuing, 88, 89
manually associating to a booking file, 91
multiple issuance, 89
multiple refunding, 90
multiple voiding, 89
printing, 94
refund types, 89
refunding from the Query Report, 318
retrieving, 92
revalidating, 91
single issuance, 88
single refunding, 90
single voiding, 89
voiding from the Query Report, 319
ETRs, 97
Eurocheque card
CC mask, 423
F
Failed printing in the German Local Content
solutions, 374
Fare display
explanation, 173
Fare Families
displaying information, 36
understanding, 35, 43
File Finishing, 248
[email protected]
531
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
accessing, 249
accessing, 249
activating rules, 255
adding conditions to a rule, 254
creating rules, 253
creating rules from an existing rule, 255
deactivating rules, 256
deleting rules, 256
editing rules, 255
opening rules, 255
rule logic, 249, 250
Force sign-in, 5
Form of payment
adding to a booking, 113
deleting, 113
reissuing, 113
G
General contact
adding to a Booking File, 66
Group bookings
adding a passenger name, 65
adding contact details, 65
creating, 65
modifying the name, 65
Group profile, 11
H
Hotel chains
Best Available Rate (BAR) program, 139
negotiated rates, 139
Hotel reservation
entering traveller details, 130
Hotel search results
displaying, 130
Hotel Vacancies in TOMA, 343
Hotels
aggregator registration actions, 130
aggregators, 128
booking flow, 130
cancelling a booking, 146
cancelling a confirmed booking, 150
cancelling an aggregator booking, 146
cancelling an unconfirmed booking, 150
changing search criteria, 136
collapsing the map, 141
completing the booking in the Booking File,
147
completing the booking in the Command
Page, 148
confirming a booking, 146
confirming an aggregator booking, 146
customer mode display, 128
defining a price range, 134
defining a search radius, 135
displaying user settings, 127
entering room occupancy details, 135
excluding rates from different sources, 135
expanding the map, 141
finding using search filters, 136
geocoded location, 131
guaranteeing a booking, 144
hotel chain content, 128
IATA code, 131
including rates from different sources, 135
532
User Guide
introduction, 127
landmark, 131
map types, 141
merged display, 132
modifying a booking, 146
modifying an aggregator booking, 146
payment requirements for aggregator
bookings, 145
property code, 132
registering for aggregator content, 129
requesting only aggregator content, 135
requesting only hotel chain content, 135
requesting only hotel chain content, 135
search filter options, 136
search options, 133
searching for, 133
searching for published rates, 135
searching with an active Booking File, 133
star rating system, 132
updating aggregator credentials, 129
viewing location, 141
Housing Request submask in TOMA, 359, 360
I
IATA code, 156
IATA credentials, 323
requesting, 323
Informative Pricing
pricing an air itinerary, 55
Integrated Partners
accessing, 237
exiting, 237
Invoices
issuing, 110
previewing before issuing, 110
Issuing documents
prerequisites, 109
Issuing invoices
prerequisites, 109
Issuing sales receipts in VERK, 397
Issuing travel documents in TOMA, 349
Item Sales Period Report, 316
Itinerary pricing
rebooking an upgrade, 58
upgrade offers, 57
L
Language
changing, 8
Later trains
displaying, 174
Leisure Cars
displaying rate information, 152
inclusive rate, 152
introduction, 152
registering, 152
standard rate, 152
Super CDW, 152
Lists and codes in German Local Content
authorization classes, 487
document numbers, 511
exchanging codes, 507
ISO codes, 514
sales codes, 490, 501
sales receipts types, 506
Edition 13.0
Index
Local Content
Action Bar, 331
Amadeus Tour Market, 335
Bookes, 338
booking file, 336
Hardcopy, 333
Input Field, 331
Keyboard Navigation, 331
Launch TOMA through desktop menu, 336
Launch TOMA via file menu, 336
Launch TOMA via memory button, 336
Launch via toolbar button, 336
Main Page, 329
Main Page Accordion, 329
Mask Content, 332
Menu Bar, 330
Navigation, 329
Paging, 332
Reload Mask Content, 333
Rename Mask Content, 332
Save and send offers, 337
Save Mask Content, 332
SEND Mask, 337
Sort Mask Content, 332
TOMA, 329
Tour Market, 333
M
Manual bookings
adding price, 100
adding to a Booking File, 97
associating passengers, 99
booking states, 99
changing the booking status, 99
modifying, 98
modifying passenger association, 99
modifying price, 101
removing from a Booking File, 99
types, 97
Manual Bookings, 97
Modifying turnover group in the UMSG mask, 433
More service information
displaying, 174
N
Net Remit Report (TJN), 310
O
Office profile fields
CRF, 317
OLV
CC mask, 424
One-way air fares, 44
Option booking in TOMA, 355
Option inquiry in TOMA, 355
Other Service Information
adding to a Booking File, 76
deleting from a Booking File, 77
modifying in a Booking File, 77
P
Passenger associations
adding, 70
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
displaying, 70
editing, 71
removing, 71
Passenger contact details
adding to a Booking File, 66
Passenger information
exporting to a file, 69
importing from a file, 68
importing from a profile, 21, 69
modifying, 66
Passenger itinerary
emailing, 70
faxing, 70
printing, 70
Passengers
adding to a Booking File, 65
associating an infant to, 71
deleting from a Booking File, 66
Password
changing, 6
resetting, 6
Paying commission fee to sub agents via the
VERK mask, 411
Prebooking in TOMA, 358
Print functions in the KD mask, 441
Printing a bulk invoice in the VERL mask, 415
Printing a proof of delivery in VERK, 412
Printing branch and travel agents protocols in the
SISO mask, 377
Printing collective invoice with additional
customer data in VERK, 408
Printing hotel address via the HOT mask, 366
Printing invoice bank transfer slip in VERK, 407
Printing IT sales receipt in VERK, 412
Printing labels in Tour Market, 342
Printing sales receipts in VERK, 407
Printing sales receipts with payable commission
in VERK, 409
Printing turnover group in the UMSG mask, 433
Printing/Documents in German Local Content
BELG Document Functions, 383
DFRS Restart Printer, 393
document administration via ZAEH, 396
DRST Print Control Functions, 393
ZAEH Business Unit Counter, 387
Processing personal data in the KDP mask, 445
Productivity Suite
Main List page, 246
office administrator role, 246
sharing items, 247
stop sharing items, 247
user role, 245
Profile history, 18
Profile Manager
accessing, 26
counting all active profiles, 32
deleting profiles, 33
exporting profile data, 32
importing profiles, 32
input file types, 26
mandatory input file elements, 28
recommendations for opening and saving the
input file, 29
refreshing the request history, 33
technical requirements for input file, 26
Profile types
[email protected]
533
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
agency profile, 11
company profile, 11
traveller profile, 11
Profiles
accessing, 11
activating SSR explosion, 18
associating profiles to a company, 15
associating profiles to a group, 15
cancelling an association, 16
copying, 13
creating, 12, 168
deactivating, 22
defining follow-up actions, 17
defining preferences, 16
displaying history, 19
editing, 13
elements that are transferred to a Booking
File, 19
entering credit card details, 14
entering payment details, 14
follow-up actions, 16
merged display, 17
merging a display, 17
reactivating, 23
retrieving, 14
searching for, 14
storing travel document information, 17
storing travel document information via special
needs, 18
transferring multiple profiles to a Booking File,
20
transferring to a Booking File, 19, 168
viewing follow-up actions, 17
Pseudo code, 156
Q
Quality Monitor
accessing, 297
activating rules, 302
adding checks to a new rule, 307
adding checks to an existing rule, 308
autocomplete, 272, 297
autocomplete for insert variables, 298
checks, 303
correcting checks, 306
creating rules, 300
creating rules from an existing rule, 300
deactivating rules, 302
deleting checks from a rule, 308
deleting rules, 302
displaying autocomplete for insert variables,
298
editing a cryptic command, 307
editing rules, 302
Editor, 290
introduction, 289
language, 290
language statements, 290
opening rules, 302
operators used in the language conditions,
291
rule examples, 300, 301
statements supported by autocomplete, 298
statuses of a check, 306
trigger commands, 303
trigger commands in cryptic and graphic, 304
534
User Guide
Quality Monitor checks
launching corrective actions, 307
Query Report, 310
refunding EMDs, 318
refunding e-tickets, 318
voiding EMDs, 319
voiding e-tickets, 319
Queue
End of Transaction, 242
starting, 241
Queue administration
accessing, 244
Queue count
displaying, 243
Queue list
definition, 239
displaying, 240
Queue messages
displaying, 240
Queue planner
displaying, 243
Queues
accessing, 240
R
Rail
accessing, 165
adding passenger information, 178
adding passengers directly to a search, 172
booking a trip, 167, 177
booking your trip, 178
comparing multiple trips, 176
corporate programme, 173
information display in Profiles, 169
keyboard navigation, 168
refunding tickets, 186
refunding tickets due to a strike, 187
saving your booking, 180
searching for a fare, 170
selecting a fare, 177
viewing news items, 168
Rail segments
cancelling, 183
cancelling before issuing tickets, 183
Rail tickets
refunding, 186
reissuing voided tickets, 189
resending, 185
voiding, 188, 189, 191
Rail trip
modifying, 183
Rebooking procedures in TOMA
modification with printing confirmation, 352
modifying, 352
rebooking inquiry, 351
Recording additional personal data in the KDP
mask, 449
Recording comment lines via the TEXT mask,
421
Recording customer-data in the KD mask, 437
Recording exchange rates in KURS, 431
Recording own text for the sales receipt in VERK,
406
Recording personal data in the KDP mask, 447
Recreating turnover group in the UMSG mask,
434
Edition 13.0
Index
Refunds, 186
Regular expression syntax, 286, 296
Remarks
adding to a Booking File, 75
deleting from a Booking File, 76
modifying in a Booking File, 76
Room types in TOMA, 344
S
Sales documents
displaying details, 109
issuing, 109
previewing before issuing, 109
Sales information
displaying, 107
Sales items
adding to a trip package, 116
adding travel agency fees, 111
changing customer associations, 120
creating a trip package, 116
defining the default customer, 119
deleting travel agency fees, 111
modifying price details, 108
modifying sales details, 108
price details, 107
price details explanation, 107
removing from a trip package, 117
replacing invoiced items, 117
sales details, 108
searching for profiles, 121
states, 105
types, 104
voiding travel agency fees, 111
Sales Report
accessing, 309
displaying a refund, 318
items that can be refunded, 317
items that can be voided, 319
updating a refund, 318
Sales Reports
Cross-reference Report, 317
Daily Report, 313
displaying, 309
Item Sales Period Report, 316
Net Remit Report, 310
Query Report, 310
summary sales period report, 314
Transaction Report, 312
Sales Reports display
modifying, 310
Sample booking in TOMA, 340
SC
VERK, 406
Schedule search
finding flights, 40
Search results
displaying, 130
Searching for a car, 153
Searching for hotels
overview of booking steps, 130
results display, 130
Searching for sales code in VERK, 406
Searching for text in the VERK mask recorded in
the TEXT mask, 406
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
Searching for turnover group in the UMSG mask,
434
Seat map
displaying price per passenger, 73
displaying price per seat, 73
modifying a seat selection, 74
reserving seats, 73
SECO
Action Bar in TOMA, 336
Selecting a hotel, 130
Selecting and booking a car
comparing car offers, 159
Sending confirmation via email or fax in TOMA,
348
Sending sales receipts via email or fax in VERK,
409
Sending sales receipts via e-mail with a digital
signature in VERK, 410
Service booking section in TOMA, 335
Service functions in TOMA, 339
Service Functions in Tour Market, 334
Sign in the branch in the SISO mask, 376
Sign in the supervisor in the SISO mask, 376
Sign in the travel agent in the SISO mask, 376
Sign out travel agents and branch in the SISO
mask, 379
SISO mask in madeus Selling Platform, 375
Smart Content
accessing, 237
exiting, 237
Smart Flow advanced language, 257
Smart Flow Editor, 257
Smart Flow Editors
switching between, 257
Smart Flows
accessing, 258
Advanced Language Editor, 257
autocomplete, 272, 297
creating from an existing one, 269
creating in the Advanced Language Editor,
259
creating in the Smart Flow Editor, 258
creating questions, 276
creating questions in command-based mode,
276
creating using command history, 231, 270,
271
deleting, 272
deleting questions, 277
editing, 272
editing questions, 277
getting started, 256
hiding in Your Smart Flows, 276
opening, 272
running, 277, 278
showing in Your Smart Flows, 276
stopping, 278
testing, 268
Smart Key Translator, 279
accessing, 279
Smart Keys
translating to Smart Flows, 280
Smart Trigger Editor, 282
explanation, 283
Smart Triggers
accessing, 287, 288
[email protected]
535
Amadeus Selling Platform Connect
activating, 288
copying, 289
creating, 288
deactivating, 288
deleting, 289
editing, 289
introduction, 281
types of, 282
SNCF tickets
exchanging requirements, 190
identifying exchangeable tickets, 191
Special car rates, 154
Specify your travellers, 143
Speedmode
cursor highlighting, 220
introduction, 218, 242
multiple cursors, 220
navigation options, 220
permanent cursors, 220
SSR explosion
activating, 18
Statistic section in TOMA, 335
Submasks in TOMA, 358
Summary sales period report, 314
Swedish Rail tickets
exchanging, 190
exchanging requirements, 189
identifying exchangeable tickets, 189
Switching between classic and 3270 Command
page, 222
System line in TOMA, 335
T
TASFs
creating, 84
deleting, 85
modifying, 85
multiple issuance, 85
single issuance, 85
viewing, 85
viewing taxes, 85
voiding, 85, 86
Ticketing arrangement
setting, 95
Ticketing hotkeys, 217
Ticketing options, 197
Timatic
prerequisites to accessing, 323
Timatic travel information, 323
adding remarks, 328
clearing the search results, 326
downloading, 327
explanation, 326
Follow-up actions, 327
printing, 327
searching, 324, 325
Timetable search
finding flights, 41
TJN, 310
TJQ, 310
TJT, 312
TOMA mask, 334, 335
Train tickets
issuing, 184
refunding, 186
resending, 185
536
User Guide
voiding, 188
Transaction codes
TJI, 316
TJS, 314
TJX, 317
Transaction Report (TJT), 312
Transport availability in TOMA, 342
Transportation times in TOMA, 340
Travel confirmation in TOMA
booking without printing, 347
Travel confirmation in Tour Market, 346
printing, 347
Travel documents in TOMA
deadlines, 349
printing, 349
Travel Preference Manager policies
Air searches supporting, 36
Traveller details, 143
Traveller profile, 11
TSM coupons
modifying, 83
TSM history
displaying, 82
TSM information
modifying, 83
TSM taxes
adding, 84
modifying, 84
TSMs
adding a form of payment, 83
creating, 81
creating an original issued document (FO), 95
deleting, 82
managing form of payment, 84
manual reissuing, 84
preparing for manual reissue, 84
removing a form of payment, 83
TST fees
adding, 80
modifying, 80
TST history
displaying, 78
TST taxes
adding, 80
modifying, 80
TSTs
adding a form of payment, 79
adding a passenger, 80
adding a segment, 80
adding commission, 78
creating, 77
deleting, 78
managing form of payment, 79
manual reissuing, 79
modifying, 78
preparing for manual reissue, 79
removing a form of payment, 79
removing a passenger, 80
removing a segment, 80
removing commission, 78
splitting, 81
TV - Tour file administration, 451
administer TV file, 465
copy function, 470
corrections, 472
deadline administration, 468
importing tour files, 451
Edition 13.0
Index
payment, 459
process file, 456
record tour file, 457
statistics, 474
status codes, 486
tour operator groups, 480
travel agent control, 468
troubleshooting, 484
TVP, 479
TVV - tour operator groups, 480
TVZ - payment processing, 483
validity of TV files, 478
U
User access
changing your password, 8
managing, 5
multiple office support, 5
signing in, 6
signing out, 9
switching between offices, 7
two-factor authentication, 6
V
VERK mask, 398
W
Wait list booking in TOMA, 357
Website air fare types
searching for, 44
Website business air fares
© 2017 Amadeus s.a.s. - All Rights Reserved
adding credentials, 51
Website fare types, 43
Z
ZAEH Business Unit Counter in German Local
Content
branch turnover, 388
branch's total turnover, 388
cash counter branch, 390
cash counter per agent, 390
cash sales turnover, 390
displaying number ranges, 387
document number range, 390
number range cash receipts, 390
number range credit card documents, 391
number range for accounting ledger, 392
number range for advance payment receipts,
391, 392
number range for sign-out protocol, 393
number range for travel confirmation, 392
organisation's total turnover, 389
receipt no., 388
receipt number, 387
sales codes, 388
sales code's turnover, 389
statistics, 388
turnover group, 388
turnover groups, 388
turnover group's turnover, 389
[email protected]
537
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement